Other formats and languagesFor a large print, Braille, disc, sign language video or audio-tapeversion of this document or its summary, please contact us at theaddress below:Public Liaison UnitGreater London AuthorityTelephone 020 7983 4100City Hall Queen’s WalkLondon SE1 2AAYou will need to supply your name, your postal address and state theThe London Planformat and title of the publication you Development Strategy for Greater LondonIf you would like a copy of the summary of this document in your language, please phone the number or contact us at the address 2004City Queen’s Walk Enquiries020 7983 4100MoL/Feb 04/CJ D&P/MT/448ALondon SE1 2AAMinicom 020 7983 4458The London Plan Spatial Development Strategy for Greater London
The London PlanSpatial Development Strategy for Greater LondonFebruary 2004
copyrightGreater London AuthorityFebruary 2004Published byGreater London AuthorityCity HallThe Queen’s WalkLondon SE1 7983 4100minicom020 7983 4458ISBN1 85261 544 3Cover photograph Adam Hinton This document is printed on 50 per cent post consumer recycled paper, 50 per cent totally chlorine free pulp, and printed with vegetable oil based Mayor would like to thank everyone who contributed to this planincluding the Independent Panel, all participants at the Examination inPublic and everyone else who responded to the public consultation. Mostof all the Mayor thanks all the staff at City Hall who helped put this plantogether over the past three years, especially Drew Stevenson, RobinThompson, Debbie McMullen and Eleanor Young. He would also like tothank Nicky Gavron for chairing the SDS Steering Group.
The London PlanMayor of London iiicontentspreamblevii‘My vision for London’xiintroduction1The Mayor’s objectives6chapter 1positioning London151London’s place in the world152London – past and present203Forces driving change in London24chapter 2the broad development strategy372AThe overall strategy371Sustainable development382Overarching spatial policies for London393Transport and spatial development474London’s sub-regions482BThe Key Diagram49chapter 3thematic policies533ALiving in London531Housing policies542London’s diverse population693Providing for Community Services734Communities, neighbourhoods and the development process803BWorking in London871The economic context872Demand and supply of office accommodation883Manufacturing and wholesale distribution924Emerging growth sectors935Improving the skills and employment opportunities for Londoners993CConnecting London – improving travel in London1031Closer integration of transport and spatial development1032Enhancing international, national and regional transport links1093Better public transport in London1124Reducing congestion and making better use of London’s streets1205Improving freight movements and the distribution of goods and services127
ivMayor of LondonThe London Plan3DEnjoying London1311Consumers in London1322Culture and Sport in London1363Visitors’ London1394Improving London’s open environment142chapter 4the crosscutting policies1554ALondon’s metabolism: using and managing natural resources1551Planning for waste1562Planning for minerals1603Improving air quality1624Improving the use of energy1645Efficient use of water1666Reducing noise1697Tackling climate change1708Contaminated land1719Hazardous substances1714BDesigns on London1731Principles of design for a compact city1732The specifics of design for a compact city1814CThe Blue Ribbon Network1931The Blue Ribbon Network Principles1932Defining the Blue Ribbon Network1943Natural resources, forces and human heritage1974Sustainable growth priorities2025Enjoying the Blue Ribbon Network2066Design2097London’s water spaces212chapter 5the sub-regions2211London’s sub-regions and their strategic importance2215AOverall approach to sub-regional development2225BCentral London2275CEast London and the Thames Gateway2415DWest London sub-region2575ENorth London sub-region2655FSouth London sub-region273chapter 6implementing the London Plan2816ADelivering the vision2811The plan’s sphere of influence2812The main implementation processes2833The main stakeholders and their contribution2954Strategies that will contribute to implementation301
The London PlanMayor of London v6BMonitoring and review 3071London Plan Performance Indicators3082Draftframework of Annual Monitoring Report3126CLooking to the future3151London after 20203152First review of or alteration to the London Plan316annex 1London’s strategic town centre networkA1annex 2Strategic Employment LocationsA7annex 3reconciliation tablesA11annex 4parking standardsA19annex 5implementation of the Blue Ribbon NetworkA31annex 6list of Supplementary Planning GuidanceA35annex 7main requirements for additional assessments as a result of the London PlanA37annex 8partnerships that can help to deliver the London PlanA39annex 9implementation toolsA45glossaryA59index of policiesA79contributor’s creditsA85photography creditsA86
viMayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London viipreambleWhere does the London Plan fit in?The GLAThe Greater London Authority (GLA) was established in 2000. It coversthe 32 London boroughs and the Corporation of London. It is made up of a directly elected Mayor (the Executive) and a separately electedAssembly (to scrutinise the Mayor). The GLA is a new kind of publicauthority, designed to provide citywide, strategic government for principal purposes are to promote the economic and socialdevelopment and the environmental improvement of Greater London Plan – what is it for?The Mayor is responsible for strategic planning in London. He has a widerange of duties and powers. The government has set out guidance and1advice on the Mayor’s planning duties and powers. His duties includeproducing a Spatial Development Strategy for London – called theLondon Plan – and keeping it under review. The London Plan replaces2existing strategic guidance, and boroughs’ development plans must be in‘general conformity’ with Greater London Authority (GLA) Act 1999 requires that the London Plan deals only with matters that are of strategic importance toGreater London. The required content of the London Plan is set out in a government guidance note (Circular 1/2000). The GLA Act alsorequires that the London Plan takes account of three crosscutting themes:•the health of Londoners•equality of opportunity•its contribution to sustainable development in the London Plan:•is the strategic plan setting out an integrated social, economic andenvironmental framework for the future development of London,looking forward 15–20 years•integrates the physical and geographic dimensions of the Mayor’sother strategies, including broad locations for change and providing a framework for land use management and development, which isstrongly linked to improvements in infrastructure, especially transport•provides the Londonwide context within which individual boroughsmust set their local planning policies•sets the policy framework for the Mayor’s involvement in majorplanning decisions in London•sets out proposals for implementation and funding •is London’s response to European guidance on spatial planning and a link to European Structural Funds.
viiiMayor of LondonThe London PlanThe London Plan enables a strategic approach to be taken to the keyissues facing London. It:•provides a clear framework within which all of the stakeholders inLondon’s future can plan their own activities to best effect•enables Londoners to participate in shaping the future of their city –mostly at the sub-regional level•ensures that policies are coherent and integrated, across issues andbetween places•sends a strong message to the world that London has a vibrant andconfident view of its future. The role of the London PlanThe Mayor is required by law to produce other strategies for must be consistent with the others and the London Plan acts as theintegrating framework for all. Each must take on board national policiesand international obligations. These strategies are:TransportPublished July 2001Economic DevelopmentPublished July 2001BiodiversityPublished July 2002 Air Quality Published September 2002Municipal Waste ManagementPublished September 2003Ambient NoiseForthcoming March 2004CultureConsultation draft May 2003The Mayor has also produced a strategy on energy, with publicationexpected in 2004. In addition, a Children and Young People’s Strategy has been produced (January 2004).The London Plan is required to take account of the European Spatial3Development Perspective (ESDP) and other EU directives. The ESDP setsa framework for the planning system to operate in the wider Europeancontext and supports the principle of sustainable development and thecreation of balanced urban systems. It is a statutory requirement that the draft London Plan undergoes a4‘sustainability appraisal’, which was published in Mayor also has a statutory duty to promote equality of opportunity in London and will ensure that the proposals and policies in the LondonPlan are implemented with due regard to the Race Relations AmendmentAct 2000, the Disability Discrimination Act 1995 and other relevantgovernment policy advice.
The London PlanMayor of London ixThe London Plan has accordingly been formulated having had regard tothe matters specified in sections 41 and 342 (1)(a) of the GreaterLondon Authority Act 1999 and Regulation 6(1) of the Town and CountryPlanning (London Spatial Development Strategy) Regulations 2000, to allrelevant EU directives and UK legislation, and to Government advice andregional planning guidance. References in this plan to UnitaryDevelopment Plans (UDPs) should be construed as including anystatutory development plan documents which supercede process for agreeing the planThe Mayor has produced the new strategic London Plan in three stages:Stage 1 – Towards the London Plan: This document, published in May2001, set out for consultation a vision for London and the broad policydirections which would guide the preparation of the draft London results of that consultation, and the Mayor’s response to it, were setout in Responses to Towards the London Plan (June 2002).Stage 2 – draft London Plan: This stage began with the publication of the draft in June 2002, accompanied by a sustainability appraisal. It wassubject to a statutory three-month consultation period. The responses(and the Mayor's views concerning these responses) were considered by a government-appointed panel reporting to the Mayor. The panel held an Examination in Public (.) on the draft London Plan in March/April2003. It tested the strategy for robustness, effectiveness and consistencywith other strategies and government policy, and presented its report to5the Mayor in July 3 – the published London Plan. This plan is the first statutory,strategic plan prepared for London for two decades. The Mayor believes it is crucial to London’s development that a plan be put in place as earlyas possible to fill the gap in long-term direction for London. Inevitablythis means balancing the overall strategic direction with the level of detailthat can be included. The strategic policy framework and data sources,within which the plan is situated, are constantly changing. In preparingthe plan all advice and guidance current at the time of going to print havebeen taken into account. The London Plan will be subject to an ongoingprocess of monitoring and managing change. An annual report will bepublished and the Mayor will move to an early review of or alteration tothe plan to update certain areas and to reflect major external changes(see Chapter 6).The plan takes the year 2020 as its formal end date because the Mayorbelieves a long-term view of London’s future is needed. Many of the
xMayor of LondonThe London Plantargets and statistics relate to earlier years (especially 2016) becauseinformation is more readily available and/or reliable for those : Delivering a fundamental change, December 2001, Department of Transport,Local Government and the Regions2Regional Planning Guidance: RPG3: Strategic Planning Guidance for London Planning Authorities (GOL, 1996)RPG3a: Supplementary Guidance for London on the protection of strategic views (DoE, 1991)RPG3b: Strategic Planning Guidance for the River Thames (GOL, 1997)3Circular 1/2000, Para , GOL, 20004Sustainability Appraisal of the London Plan, GLA 20025DraftLondon Plan Examination in Public Panel Report, GLA, 2003.
The London PlanMayor of London xi‘my vision for London’ by Ken Livingstone,Mayor of LondonI would like to thank all of you who took part in the process andconsultation leading up to this plan. As a result of literally thousands of comments, and the excellent work done by Alan Richardson and histeam on the Examination in Public, this plan has moved on from theversion that I published in June was very pleased that the panel supported the main policy directions of the draft, as well as the essential statistics and analysis on which thedraft was based. During the Examination in Public, I made severalcommitments to meet points that respondents had made. I have alsomade a number of further changes in response to the panel’s report, other responses and more up-to-date to the draft, this published plan is now even more people-centred, and it focuses more on London’s town centres and suburbs. The timetabling of some of the major public transport schemes hasbecome somewhat clearer and this is reflected in the proposals forphasing development. The Sub-Regional Development Frameworks havebeen confirmed as the key vehicles for resolving strategic cross-boroughissues and the themes of equality and sustainability have been morethoroughly integrated into the document. Over the past 18 months,several of my other strategies have been published and this plan reflectsthe spatial implications of them. The chapters in the plan have also beenreordered and some material previously in annexes has been included in the body of the the main policy directions remain the same and the same factors areseen as driving change in London – particularly the phenomenal pressuresfor growth. This rapid expansion, of population and jobs is withoutparallel in any other UK city, and stems from London’s exceptionaldynamism, attractiveness and advantages in the new era of economicglobalisation. It poses unique opportunities – but also challenges – if thepotential benefits are to be maximised and the city’s environment, qualityof life and historic character are to be preserved and already absorbed the equivalent of the population of Sheffield in the last 15 years, London is expected to grow by the equivalent of thepopulation of Leeds in the next decade and a half. To sustain and improveLondon’s environment, this increase must be absorbed without expansioninto the existing green belt or encroaching on London’s internal greenspaces. To sustain the quality of life and character of London, rapideconomic growth, which in some cases will involve upgrading and
xiiMayor of LondonThe London Planreshaping entire industries, must be achieved without destroying thehistoric heritage of the this process, an already overstrained infrastructure must bemodernised in a little over ten years to compensate for the past threedecades of under-investment. In parallel, the opportunity must be seizedtoresolve some of London’s existing problems – in particular, social andeconomic exclusion. To achieve this, London needs vision and a strengthin delivery equal to the opportunities and challenges that it faces. Thisplan sets out my vision for the future of London and my proposals as tohow, working in partnership, we can achieve thus faces a radical challenge, which requires a radical policyresponse. This should ensure that its rapid expansion of population andjobs within a constrained area maintains and enhances its economic andbusiness efficiency, is accompanied by strong improvements in the qualityof life and environment and greater social and economic inclusion. Allpolicies must be inter-related, incorporating sustainable economic andsocial development, environmental protection and enhancement, highquality design and the development of London’s vision, which guides all my strategies, is to develop London as anexemplary, sustainable world city, based on three interwoven themes:•strong, diverse long term economic growth•social inclusivity to give all Londoners the opportunity to share in London’s future success•fundamental improvements in London’s environment and use of vision seeks to achieve the maximum possible from the forces towhich the city is subject and which it can influence. It is a challengingvision involving clear choices, priorities, resources, determination and the resolution of London Plan provides the unified, spatial framework for all mystrategies and is designed to ensure that Londoners benefit fromsustainable improvements to their quality of life. These strategiescollectively show how that can be done – based on a shared vision, robust policies, a commitment to partnership between the public, private, voluntary and community sectors and additional resources being returned to commend this plan to Londoners and I look forward to your commitmenttohelping bring about the strategic changes and improvements that
The London PlanMayor of London xiiiLondon so desperately needs. With the basic strategy now in place,implementation through partnership becomes the LivingstoneMayor of London
xivMayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 1introductionLondon - our unique inheritanceiLondon has undergone rapid change many times in its history. Over thelast 2000 years, it has created an outstanding cultural, social, economic,environmental and built heritage. Its strengths are unique. It is:•one of the three world financial centres, Europe’s financial capital, and the world’s most economically internationalised city•the most culturally diverse city in the world•the largest city in the European Union•the UK’s centre of government, culture and tourism as well as business•acity with a vast heritage of historic buildings, townscape, waterwaysand an environment that attracts visitors from all over the world•acity with an unsurpassed range of arts and cultural activity •aUK and international centre for the creative industries and the newknowledge economy •asafe and green city•aworld centre of academic excellence, providing research and consulting services internationally•ahub of unsurpassed international transport connections•acity where there is the important advantage that its main language,English, is as close to an international language as exists in the world , throughout its history, has succeeded in maintaining its uniquecharacter as a city and its distinctive network of neighbourhoods andtown centres. This gives Londoners a wide choice as to the type oflifestyle they can support, enjoy and pursue. This distinctive character of diversity is not only one of London’s greatest strengths but deeplyappreciated by its population – a key factor contributing to its quality of life, and one which this plan seeks to for changeiiiOver the past 20 years London has changed dramatically. Some of thesechanges are being driven by international forces, including:•the globalisation of many economic sectors, and the dominance of the finance and business sectors, frequently interlinked with dramaticadvances in technology•an increased inter-relationship between major economies, whereinternationalisation of investment and trade accompanies developmentsin telecommunications and rapid transport effectively shrinks distancesbetween people, markets, and business decision takers•movement of people across borders, bringing with them fresh ideas,new cultures, enhanced skills and access to new markets•growth of incomes and wealth with particularly strong rising demandfor leisure and tourism activities
2Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•an increase in social and economic polarisation•anew and increasing environmental imperative to use energy and resources more efficiently, value the environment and reduceenvironmental stress•changes in opinion and values making people welcome diversity and be less tolerant of discrimination, misuse of resources and pressures have grown at a time when there has been no strategicplan for London. Earlier policies led to the decentralisation of many keyeconomic activities together with population dispersal to new andexpanded towns in the shires. London’s population declined from a peak1of over eight million in 1939 to million in 1983. Just as this processreversed and London started to grow again, the strategic resources torethink the implications of that growth were its own strategic authority, London’s economy developed and itspopulation grew, without a clear vision of their place in the UK economy,without effective strategic planning, and without a clear assessment ofthe resources and policies required to deal with renewed phenomenal growth in London’s finance and business services sector,which has concentrated in central London, and in population, which hasincreased almost throughout the city, was not matched by sufficientinvestment. Housing, transport, office stock, skills and the public realmhave all experienced under-investment. The benefits of economicbuoyancy have not been shared between all Londoners. Most strikingly,2unemployed Londoners account for 17 per cent of all UK result has been:•increased difficulties in travelling around London, with heavy trafficand slow and unreliable journey times•upward pressure on business costs, made worse by a shortage ofappropriate office space, leading to some of the highest office rents in the world•acute housing shortages resulting in rapidly rising house prices,reducing real living standards, disadvantaging people on modest and low incomes, and creating a destabilising factor in the UK macro-economy•skills gaps in some sectors, alongside social deprivation in many areasand increased economic and social polarisation•continued social exclusion and discrimination, particularly affectingminority ethnic communities•increasing pollution, damaged environments and chronic under-investment generally and in particular, in the public realm.
The London PlanMayor of London 3viiiThese problems have been paralleled by a lack of investment in schoolsand health facilities, by a general growing shortage of skilled workers andrising fears about crime and is the context – a mixture of strengths, opportunities and concerns – inwhich the Mayor is presenting to Londoners their first strategic plan in 20years. This plan addresses current problems, but also looks to the Mayor believes that London’s future will be significantly shaped by a number of factors driving change, which are described in Chapter 1. The most significant of these, at least for a spatial development strategy,is the projected rapid growth of people and jobs, driven by powerfulmarket and demographic London Plan cannot realistically reverse these strong, deep-rootedfactors driving change, nor does the Mayor wish it to do so. This plan setsout policies to accommodate that growth in a sustainable way, withinLondon’s own boundaries and without encroaching on London’s ownprecious green Mayor believes that accommodating London’s growth has four keyimplications for future policy , growth can only be accommodated without encroaching on openspaces if development takes place more intensively, leading to higherdensities and plot ratios on existing brownfield sites. In short – Londonmust become a more compact , the future scale and phasing of development should beintegrated with the capacity of the public transport system andaccessibility of different , this level of growth will be inhibited unless a range of supply sideissues is dealt with to match the demand. These include the supply ofcommercial floorspace, housing, relevant skills, adequate transport and a high quality , clear spatial priorities are needed. Areas of London that havenot benefited from recent development – notably in parts of the east –should be prioritised for future development. Other areas, includingcentral London and suburban town centres, will also accommodateconsiderable growth.
4Mayor of LondonThe London Plan3xviiRegional Planning Guidancesupports the central message of this plan:that London must fulfil its potential as a world city in the national interestas well as that of Londoners. Accommodating the anticipated growth inLondon would be beneficial both to London and the rest of the UK. Thisplan seeks to work with the market and to address the potential supply-side constraints in terms of space, transport, environmental quality andeducation to ensure London is capable of accommodating today’s competitive world, London needs a competitive strategy. Ifproperly supported by adequate public investment, economic growth will help to pay for the many improvements in services, transport and the environment that are needed. It will improve the quality of life for allacross London – from the suburbs, where most people live, to the will provide the opportunities for Londoners to benefit from more andbetter jobs and from the improved standards of living that flow fromthem. It will also allow London to continue to make a substantial annual4net contribution to the rest of the UK benefits will not flow automatically. In particular, tackling socialexclusion has proved to be the most difficult challenge that has facedpast regeneration initiatives. However, this plan is one part of anintegrated approach by the Mayor and the GLA group, including theLondon Development Agency (LDA), in which tackling social andeconomic exclusion is a unifying theme running through all the is also now a broad understanding of the issue across all sectors -social inclusion is central to the concept of sustainability and it is ofincreasing concern to the private sector. For the voluntary and communitysectors, it is the core of their aspirations. In the spirit of partnership (seeChapter 6) and with the full involvement of all sectors, growth cansuccessfully be focused on tackling plan does so by directing growth to where it is most needed,providing more affordable housing and promoting policies for education, health, safety, skills development and community services, as well as tackling discrimination and promoting equal access to allLondon’s developmentxxiAll policies, as will be seen from Chapter 2, are set within an overarchingpolicy of sustainable development, which is a powerful strand runningthroughout the plan. A more compact city will enable the more effectiveuse of scarce resources, including land, energy, transport infrastructure,water and construction materials. It means in turn that open spaces, rivers
The London PlanMayor of London 5and other water features should be protected and enhanced so thatgrowth can benefit the city’s breathing spaces. Equally the quality of theexisting and new-built environment will need to be enhanced, so that amore dynamic and active city can also enjoy more attractive plan supports a determined effort to manage London’s waste moresustainably and to minimise London’s effect on, and manage its responsesto, climate Mayor’s visionxxiiThe three themes set out above, of growth, equity and sustainabledevelopment, are consistent themes throughout all the Mayor’s strategies. The Economic Development Strategy sets out the frameworkfor sustainable economic growth, including the promotion of businessactivity, management of sectoral change to maintain a strong and broad-based economy, enhancing the role of knowledge and learning and improving access to employment. The Transport Strategy sets outpolicies and proposals to improve transport in London, which is aparticular ‘supply side’ constraint to economic growth and quality of Biodiversity, Air Quality, Municipal Waste Management, AmbientNoise, Energy and Culture Strategies seek to safeguard the environmentand enhance the quality of life. By pulling these approaches together, the London Plan provides the framework that resolves the physicaldemands of integrating substantial growth within the structure of Londontoachieve both social and environmental benefit. It is this integration of policies that creates a strategy for truly sustainable takes us back to the Mayor’s vision – to develop London as anexemplary, sustainable world city, based on the three balanced andinterwoven themes of strong, long-term and diverse economic growth,social inclusivity and fundamental improvements in the environment anduse of resources. The vision is set out in full in the Mayor’s vision to objectives xxivSo that his vision can be fully implemented and integrated across all hisstrategies, the Mayor has set out five common themes for each strategytoensure that London can become: a city for people, a prosperous city, a fair city, an accessible city and a green city. In this plan, each of thesethemes has been developed into a specific objective. Given the nature of the plan – which is the Mayor’s spatial development strategy – anadditional objective about the future spatial structure of London has beenadded as a forerunner to the six objectives are set out below with an indication of the mainelements they cover. Each objective is addressed, in order, by a chapter
6Mayor of LondonThe London Planor section in the London Plan. Given the integrated nature of the plan,some of the elements within each objective are also addressed in othersections. They are purposely not mutually exclusive, but are designed toachieve integration. Nor are they hierarchical – they should be read as a achievement of these objectives will need co-ordination at the sub-regional level through the preparation of Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks (see Chapter 5) and through a wide range of stakeholders, as set out in Chapter 6. Performance measures have also been identifiedfor each objective in Chapter 6 so that their achievement can be Mayor’s objectivesPolicy The Mayor’s objectivesIn working with strategic partners, setting priorities for the GLA group,and in exercising his planning functions, the Mayor will seek to implement the following policies should take these objectives fully into 1: To accommodate London’s growth within itsboundaries without encroaching on open spaces (see Chapter 2).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Make the most sustainable and efficient use of space in London andencourage intensification and growth in areas of need and opportunity.•Achieve an urban renaissance through higher density andintensification in line with public transport capacity, leading to a high quality, compact city, building upon London’s existing urbanquality and sense of place (see also Chapter 4, Part B).•Enable the centre of London and the main Opportunity Areas fordevelopment to intensify and to accommodate much of the growth in jobs (see also Chapter 3, Part B).•Make east London the priority area for new development, regenerationand investment, introducing a new scale and quality of development(see also Chapter 5, Part C).•Promote London’s polycentric development and a stronger and widerrole for town centres, to meet the full range of local needs (including
The London PlanMayor of London 7shopping, leisure, housing, local services and jobs) and to strengthentheir sense of identity (see also Chapter 3, Part D).•Foster sustainable and mutually beneficial relationships withneighbouring regions (see also Chapter 1).•Prioritise Areas for Regeneration, in which spatial, economic and social services should be better co-ordinated and the objectives of the neighbourhood renewal programme promoted (see also Chapter 3, Part A).•Improve suburban areas through better access, more co-ordinatedservices and measures to enhance sustainability (see also Chapter 3,PartD).•Protect and improve the green belt, Metropolitan Open Land, otherdesignated open spaces and the Blue Ribbon Network (see alsoChapter 3, Part D and Chapter 4, Part C).Objective 2: To make London a better city for people to live in(see Chapter 3, Part A).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Improve the quality of Londoners’ lives and the environment throughbetter designed buildings and public spaces (see also Chapter 4, PartB).•Achieve targets for new housing, including affordable housing, that will cater for the needs of London’s existing and future population and give more people who need it access to homes they can afford.•Address the differing needs of London’s diverse population.•Promote public safety, including design measures that improve safetyin buildings and the public realm (see also Chapter 4, Part B).•Create a cleaner, healthier and more attractive environment in all partsof London from the suburbs to the centre (see also Chapter 4, Part A).•Improve, by working with partners, including the community andvoluntary sectors, the availability of quality local services particularlyeducation and health.
8Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•Provide the spatial framework for the Mayor’s Culture Strategy andenhance the cultural assets of London, encourage development of newfacilities in new areas, building upon racial and cultural differences thatreinforce London’s diversity (see also Chapter 3, Part D).Objective 3: To make London a more prosperous city with strongand diverse economic growth (see Chapter 3, Part B).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Provide the spatial framework for London’s economic growth andregeneration to realise the Mayor’s Economic Development Strategy.•Create and maintain an adequate infrastructural base for London’sfinancial and business services sector, as its chief engine of economicgrowth and jobs creation.•Enhance London’s world, European and national role throughattracting industries and tourism, improving strategic transport links,collaborating with other world cities, European and regionalneighbours (see also Chapter 1 and Chapter 3, Parts C and D).•Create incentives and opportunities to stimulate the supply of suitablefloorspace in the right locations to accommodate economic growth.•Strengthen the diversity of London’s economy, provide for small andethnic minority businesses and encourage local enterprise, includingsocial enterprise, throughout London.•Release employment land that is no longer needed in its current usefor new uses.•Support emerging dynamic sectors of growth and innovation, such asgreen and creative industries, and encourage information technologyand research, and the development of business intelligence in London(see also Chapter 4, Part A).•Provide the relevant training, transport accessibility and support toallow Londoners to compete successfully for jobs in London (see alsoChapter 3, Part C).•Sustain and promote the rapid expansion of leisure and culturalindustries that are both key to London’s economy and are the mostrapidly expanding sectors of its population’s expenditure.
The London PlanMayor of London 9Objective 4: To promote social inclusion and tackle deprivationand discrimination (see Chapter 3, Parts A and B).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Tackle unemployment by increasing access to high quality jobs throughtraining, advice and other support, particularly for those women andyoung people and minority ethnic groups most in need.•Tackle concentrations of deprivation with the aim of ensuring that noone is seriously disadvantaged by where they live within 10-20 years(see also Chapter 2).•Tackle homelessness.•Tackle discrimination, building on the economic and cultural strengthsof London’s diversity and building a London that is more accessible todisabled people (see also Chapter 4, Part B).•Provide a framework for the spatial policies and decisions of learning,health, safety and other key social and community services.•Ensure that local communities benefit from economic growth and areengaged in the development 5: To improve London’s accessibility (see Chapter 3, PartC).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Provide the spatial framework for the development of London’stransport system to ensure that development supports the Mayor’sTransport Strategy.•Improve and expand London’s public transport through increased and phased investment in services and infrastructure.•Minimise the need to travel and the growth of journey lengths.•Improve international, national and regional transport access toLondon, including airports and ports.•Integrate development with public transport to ensure that there is a proper fit between development and the capacity of the publictransport network to service it over the period on the plan, taking
10Mayor of LondonThe London Planappropriate opportunities to intensify the use of land where current or future transport capacity allows and to connect Londoners toemployment opportunities (see also Chapter 2).•Tackle congestion through levels of restraint of car use appropriate todifferent parts of London and the provision of alternatives, includingthe improvement of access on foot and cycling and better and saferfacilities for pedestrians and cyclists.•Improve the sustainable movement of freight within and aroundLondon, making more use of water and 6: To make London a more attractive, well-designed and green city (see Chapter 4).The key policy directions for achieving this objective are:•Provide the spatial framework to achieve better use of resources andimprovements to the environment in support of the Mayor’senvironmental strategies.•Promote a range of actions to achieve the wider environmentalsustainability of a growing London, including radical improvements in theuse of energy, the treatment of waste, the reduction of noise pollution,the improvement of air quality and the promotion of biodiversity.•Address issues of climate change and ensure that the environmentalimpact of a growing London does not contribute to global warming.•Deal with flood risk and water resource issues at an early stage,especially in the Thames Gateway region.•Encourage and support the development of green industries (see alsoChapter 3, Part B).•Make the fullest and most sustainable use of resources including land,water, energy and construction materials.•Protect and enhance the quality of the townscape, through historicconservation and enhancing the public realm, open spaces andwaterways, and create new resources, recognising their increasedimportance in a compact city (see also Chapter 2, Part A and Chapter 3, Part D).
The London PlanMayor of London 11•Enhance world class heritage assets, including World Heritage Sites and Royal Parks.•Achieve the highest quality of urban design, including for highbuildings and the management of strategic views in London.•Re-use buildings and brownfield sites, rather than developing on green space. •Enhance the use and environment of the Thames and the Blue Ribbon Network.•Protect, enhance and create green open objectives are underpinned by the detailed policies throughoutthe Plan. The policies, or elements of policies, are of four types. First,those that commit the Mayor to certain actions. Second strategicdevelopment control policies. Third, policies which are to beimplemented through UDPs (see also the Preamble, page ix and ) and fourth, other spatial policies to be delivered by a variety ofmeans and structure of this planxxviiThe London Plan, as required by legislation, is strategic – it concentrateson what matters most, with details included in supporting technicalreports and annexes. It is set out in six chapters. Chapter 1 – ‘Positioning London’ sets out London’s place in the world,some of the key influences that have shaped London today, and, critically,the forces that are driving future 2 – ‘The broad development strategy’, sets out the keycomponents of the spatial strategy, the over-arching sustainabledevelopment policy and more detailed policies for the main spatialelements of the plan, including the Key 3 – ‘Thematic policies’ – contains the four parts that address the key policy themes. •Part A, Living in London, concentrates on accommodating population growth. •Part B, Working in London, concentrates on supporting economic growth.
12Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•Part C, Connecting London, focuses on the critical inter-relationshipbetween transport accessibility and development opportunity.•Part D, Enjoying London, expands on the theme of improving thequality of life in 4 – ‘Crosscutting policies’ – looks at the generic policies that pullthe themes together, reflecting in particular the environmental theme ofthe Mayor’s vision:•Part A, London’s metabolism, addresses environmental policies and issues.•Part B, Designs on London, addresses quality of life, heritage, and design.•Part C, the Blue Ribbon Network, looks at the river and water 5 – ‘The sub-regions’ looks in more detail at London’s five sub-regions and commits the Mayor, in partnership, to developing Sub-Regional Development 6 – ‘Delivering the vision’ – sets out the framework for deliveringthe London Plan, key performance indicators and the arrangements formonitoring progress against the plan’s six objectives. References1Planning for London’s growth, GLA, 2002 2Labour Market Statistics for London and UK, National Statistics Office, February 2002 3 Regional Planning Guidance for the South East RPG9, GOL, GOEE, GOSE, March 2001 4Investing in London: the case for the Capital, GLA, 2001.
The London PlanMayor of London 13
14Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 151positioning LondonThis chapter sets the context for all the policies in this plan. It is in threesections. The first looks at London in its wider context, the second at thehistorical development of London’s spatial structure and the third at theforces driving change in ’s place in the worldA world ’s life and economy will continue to be strongly shaped by trans-national forces, particularly economic globalisation, improvedinternational communications and migration. Many forces that have a worldwide impact will be especially significant for London. Theseinclude, for example, global warming and international threats to is a world city and acts as one of a very small number ofcommand and control centres in the increasingly interactive network oftransactions across the world economy. World cities have very distinctivestrategic needs. Although separated by thousands of miles, they areintimately linked as a virtual global entity by the transactions of marketsand communications systems. To reflect these links, the Mayor has beguntodevelop a collaborative relationship with New York and plan will facilitate the continuing attractiveness of London to worldbusiness with a phased supply of appropriate floor space for internationalbusiness activities, and the specialist services that supply them, especiallyin the Central Activity Zone where many will need and wish to that would benefit from new international scale activities and whichhave the potential to be attractive to them include the rest of centralLondon, parts of the City fringe and the Thames Gateway. Other‘gateways’, such as Heathrow, the London-Stansted-Cambridge corridor,London City Airport, the Stratford International Railway Station and theirsurrounds, will also be attractive to international investment. Several ofthis plan’s spatial development priority areas should benefit from theirpotential for access to external gateways such as Gatwick, Heathrow andStansted Airports and the Channel a world gateway city, London will be dependent upon excellent globalcommunications extending well beyond the plan period. London is aworld transport hub and one that needs substantial improvement. This will require significant additional airport and port capacity, located toserve spatial and economic priorities, and stronger public transportlinkages to them (see Chapter 3, Part C). plan will also support London’s unique strengths as a diverse worldcity, including culture, tourism, learning, government and finance. It is
16Mayor of LondonThe London Planalso built upon London’s ever increasing diversity of population, which is, in many ways, London’s key European plan reflects the aspirations of the European Union and memberstates that Europe should become the world’s most competitive, mostdynamic knowledge economy by 2010. As a world gateway London has a key role to play in delivering this policies of the European Spatial Development Perspective (ESDP)set a framework for economic and social cohesion, sustainabledevelopment and balanced competitiveness of the European sits within the North West Europe area along with theRhine/Ruhr cities such as Dortmund and Essen, the Randstad cities of the Netherlands such as Amsterdam and Rotterdam, and Paris and the Ilede France. Their economies have high levels of interdependence at a scaleimmediately below that of world cities and the high-speed rail network is accelerating that interdependence. These European cities share withLondon strong but changing economies, problems of social cohesion,heavy pressure on elderly infrastructure and threats to their is a need for collaborative strategies to tackle these commonproblems, based on the ESDP’s is particularly identified in the Spatial Vision for North West2Europe(which elaborates upon the European Spatial DevelopmentPerspective) as a part of its Central Zone, ‘a world powerhouse’. Althoughidentified as the most important gateway city in the Central Zone, Londonis seen as creating a ‘bottleneck’ to the long distance through movementsessential to sustain the competitiveness of the whole of North WestEurope. This reinforces the necessity of achieving infrastructureimprovements around and within London, in the economic interest notonly of London and the UK, but also the wider European economy. TheMayor will look towards national and European governments (for examplethrough the Trans-European Networks Programme) for assistance inimproving strategic transport infrastructure, including the development of routes that relieve London of international through traffic. Theidentification of the English Channel as a ‘bottleneck’ raises thepossibility that a second Channel crossing may need to be consideredwithin the lifetime of this plan. In principle this would be a valuablemeans of reinforcing the eastward thrust of London’s spatial developmentand of further strengthening London’s relationship to mainland plan commits London to work with other metropolitan areas in theCentral Zone on policies to improve international movement and to
The London PlanMayor of London 17investigate forms of economic collaboration and exchange of policy andexperience. This plan supports the concept of trans-national corridors of development and the Mayor has identified the London-Paris-Berlin-Moscow corridor as one that London should focus on, together with theChannel Tunnel Rail Link corridor to Paris, Brussels and Randstad. Londonwill participate in European programmes designed to improve trans-national planning (see Chapter 6).A capital future of London has enormous importance for the UK as a partly reflects its capacity to attract economic activities, including the higher levels of global business, which it is simply not possible toattract elsewhere in the UK. It is also true of significant elements ofLondon’s roles in government, tourism, culture and learning. London actsas a gateway to the rest of the UK for business and visitors. For example,it accounts for 75 per cent of all international arrivals to the Mayor sees London as part of a network of UK regions. He supportspolycentric development at a national level and economic advancement of the UK’s major provincial cities. This plan accommodates a rate ofgrowth in London that is in the national interest and within the city’scapacity. However, London cannot absorb infinite levels of growth and it will be important that other cities also seek to accommodate growth in the plan period and beyond. The economic future of these cities willdepend to some extent on the benefits that economic growth in Londonwill generate for them – especially those global businesses that are onlylikely to locate in the capital. Regional Planning Guidance for the South3Eastsupports the view that London must continue to play a unique roleof capital city and world financial centre, in the interests of other Britishcities as well as itself. The Mayor will continue to work with the CoreCities group to examine ways that London and other cities can pursuemutually beneficial economic strategies that can achieve benefits for the UK as a the national economy is to prosper, strong measures are needed,including diverting freight, improving both orbital and cross Londonmovement, constructing the metro services proposed in this plan,developing direct international rail services from the regions outsideLondon to the continent and by-passing long distance and internationalthrough traffic. The Mayor will do everything possible to ensure thatLondon receives appropriate levels of national funding in recognition of its national significance (see Chapter 6).
18Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThe centre of a metropolitan region – inter-regional collaborative is part of a metropolitan region of over 18 million people. Thisforms a ‘mega-city region’ in which there are a vast number of linkagesand networks between all the urban settlements. Within this wider region,London performs the functions characteristic of the central city. It is themain generator and source of jobs as well as of culture, leisure andhigher-level shopping activities. The interactions within the mega-cityregion are increasing. The Mayor supports polycentric development acrossthe mega-city region in which Central London, London’s town centres andthe towns in the other two regions develop in a complementary also supports the government’s proposed growth areasin MiltonKeynes, Thames Gateway, London-Stansted-Cambridge and Ashford as important contributions to dealing with the pressures on land anddevelopment in the mega-city region and sees these as complementary tothe growth strategy for London set out in this strategy for this wider region is set out in Regional PlanningGuidance for the South East (RPG9). The focus of RPG9 is uponsustainable development, achieved through the objectives of socialprogress, effective protection of the environment, prudent use of naturalresources and maintenance of high and stable levels of economic growthand employment. This plan accepts the principles of RPG9 and takesforward its vision. For example, it promotes London’s role in the globaleconomy and encourages development in east and inner London (andespecially the Thames Gateway). It also supports sustainable growth inthe suburbs and the creation of public transport policies in this plan will be co-ordinated with the policies for theSouth East and East regions through the Inter-Regional Planning Mayor will work, in particular, with the neighbouring regionalauthorities, the South East England Regional Assembly and the East ofEngland Regional Assembly. This joint work will include collaboration onjourneys to work, labour markets, skills, housing and environmental issuesand will particularly focus on the co-ordination of the strategies in thisplan with those emerging in the Regional Spatial Strategies (RSSs) for theSouth East and East of England. The first review of this plan will providean opportunity to make any appropriate adjustments in the context ofthese new will contribute to the objective of sustainable development byseeking to absorb the growth pressures that it generates. This planaccepts, as a minimum, the RPG provision guideline for 23,000 newhomes in London every year up to 2006 and the responsibility to meetthe city’s housing needs beyond that time. The Mayor will seek to raise
The London PlanMayor of London 19provision to meet the need for 30,000 homes every year (see Policy )through policies aiming to increase density and identify additional sitesthrough a new housing capacity study. London will accept its share of thehousing pressures in the metropolitan region. The increase in the supplyof affordable housing will help to defuse some of the pressures for movement out of London of those currently unable to afford Londonhousing of commuting need to be contained in the interests of sustainableplanning and avoidance of strain on the public transport network. It isdesirable to achieve as much local and regional self-sufficiency aspossible. However, it is unrealistic to seek a complete balance of jobs and workforce in each of the three Mayor will work with the neighbouring regions to minimise the needfor London’s employment to be supported by increased commuting and toreduce the rate of increase in in-commuting experienced in the past. Inparticular he will work to increase the capacity of London resident workerstotake up the growing number of jobs in London, through vigoroustraining and skill raising programmes and improvement in access toworkplaces (see Chapter 3, Parts A, B and C). The Mayor will supportefforts to increase public transport capacity across the whole mega-cityregion, especially in the heavy rail Mayor and the regional planning authorities in the South East andEast regions share the complementary transport policies of encouragingmajor developments at nodes of best access, shifting freight from road torail, promoting better orbital routes around London, providing better andwell-integrated public transport and improved alternatives to car use andstrengthening access to ports and airports, especially by public of investment pay little regard to administrative boundaries sotrans-regional policy should be Mayor acknowledges the importance of containing London’senvironmental ‘footprint’ and the policies in this plan place heavyemphasis upon self-sufficiency, recycling and the proximity principle. In particular, the Mayor will work to reduce London’s dependency uponneighbouring regions for waste disposal (see Chapter 4, Part A). is a need for general conformity of policy across boundaries on matters such as shopping, parking, protection of green belt andagricultural land, waste, biodiversity, water and energy demand andsupply, and the use of the Thames and other waterways.
20Mayor of LondonThe London are especially strong interactions between communities across the London boundaries. A key feature of the Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks will be the achievement of the most effective and sustainablerelationships across these boundaries. The regional and local governmentauthorities in the South East and East regions will be appropriatelyinvolved in this ‘corridors’ of development across regional boundaries willnecessitate joint strategies:•The Thames Gateway, where a Strategic Partnership is co-ordinatingdevelopment. Complementary strategies are needed for the ‘zones ofchange’ across the Thames Gateway, including the Opportunity Areasin east London. There should also be close collaboration on strategictransport planning for the whole Thames Gateway area.•The London-Stansted-Cambridge development corridor, along whichthe Mayor accepts the importance of a coherent set of developmentnodes, including the Opportunity Areas in the Lee Valley in London,Harlow and the Stansted growth area.•The Western Wedge and Thames Valley areas in which the two regionalplanning and economic development bodies are promoting co-ordinated forms of sustainable development.•The corridor through South London towards Gatwick Airport in which the Wandle Valley provides a particularly important set ofdevelopment – past and ’s distinctive history has given it a unique set of spatialcharacteristics:•It has grown as a relatively low-density, open city compared to other5world cities and to most European capitals. Two-thirds of its land areaand the majority of its population and workforce are in the suburbs. It has an attractive network of open and water spaces.•London has a well-established pattern of centres varying in size andfunction from the central area to local centres. Many of these centreshave a long history as the focus of their community’s activities, oftendating back to the original settlements, such as Hampstead orRichmond. The centre (the City, Westminster and surrounds) hasalways been an immensely powerful place of government, trade
The London PlanMayor of London 21and culture and has been strongly influenced by international pattern of centres can be described as ‘polycentric’.•London’s patterns of growth have helped to create significantdifferences between the sub-regions of the city. For example, eastLondon has been more industrial in character and, owing to 20thcentury industrial decline, has suffered greater problems of low incomeand social disadvantage than most areas in west London. London northof the river has historically accommodated the main centres ofgovernment, business and culture, compared to the morepredominantly residential nature of south of the historical spatial strengths of London have recently beenundermined. For example, the rapid growth of out-of-centre shoppingand leisure developments has weakened its town of investment has failed to offer the quality of public transportneeded to connect up its different areas, and especially to support theflows of workers from the residential areas to workplaces. This hasresulted in increasing congestion, especially in the centre, and hasinhibited sustainable growth. Many other elements of our Victorianinfrastructure are wearing out and are inadequate to meet future the past decade or so, London has started to experience a rapidbuild up in population and jobs – although they both remain belowhistoric high points. All boroughs (with the exception of Barking &Dagenham and Havering) have seen their populations increase in the past ten years. The most acute build up of population has been in thecentre and the boroughs to the south west, reinforcing the historic trendtowards residential development in South London (see Map ). geography of job creation in London has followed a consistentpattern for the last decade (see Map ) with growth in financial andbusiness service being concentrated in the centre and north west new jobs, particularly those in people-oriented services, have beencreated throughout pattern of growth based on those services, including sectors such asretail, creative industries, computer-related activities and tourism, hasemerged in the suburbs over the last decade.
22Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap growth since 1989sourceONS mid-year population estimates since 1989-1999noteAllowances have been made for population change due to boundary changes between1991 and 1996
The London PlanMayor of London 23map Jobs growth since 1989sourceMaking sense of the ABI, Business Strategies Limited
24Mayor of LondonThe London , more recently a dramatic shift to the east has occurred, withrapid growth in Tower Hamlets. This shift reflects two other changes oflong-term strategic importance that point to a new spatial emphasis inLondon. First, the bulk of recent investment in transport infrastructurehas been in the east – the new A12, Channel Tunnel Rail link, Limehouselink, Jubilee Line Extension, Docklands Light Railway extension, A13improvements etc. In addition, the impact of a unified Europe has alteredthe geography of trade. In the past London’s main markets lay to the westand north where the bulk of the UK’s 56 million people live. Now there ismajor market potential to the east and south across the European Union,covering a population over six times as driving change in to the future, this section examines six forces driving change in London. They are population growth, economic growth, environmentalissues, lifestyle and technological changes and social justice. All of themhave their roots in global changes, each with a particular Londondimension, and they require a new and imaginative response from policymakers. The Mayor is committed to accommodating growth that issustainable in the widest sense. This approach to sustainable growth willbe kept under review by the Long Term Strategy Group (see Chapter 6).Population show that there will be large changes both in the scale andnature of London’s population. The attraction of London as a place towork, study, live and visit is likely to continue – and in turn to placepressure on the supply of homes, workplaces, hotels, services, theenvironment and the transport ’s population reached its peak of million in 1939 – but in avery different world. Few Londoners had cars and people lived in fewer,much larger, households. Driven by policies of decentralisation, London’spopulation fell significantly to million people by 1983. It has beengrowing steadily since 2003, London’s population is estimated to be more than millionpeople. This figure is based on the government’s recent 2001 revised mid-year estimate, which provides the most up-to-date and authoritativebaseline for total population and household figures in this plan. At thetime of going to print, only the headline figures were available, all otherdemographic figures in the plan have been based on the 2001 range of interim projections for London’s population in 2016 has been prepared, based on the 2001 mid year estimates. These show that
The London PlanMayor of London 25under different migration scenarios London’s population could increase by between 690,000 to 964,000. The most plausible ‘central’ scenariosuggests an increase of 810,000 to million by 2016. This will berefined as part of the Mayor’s commitment to the ‘plan, monitor andmanage’ approach. In the meantime the plan uses a rounded workingassumption of 800,000 population growth to 2016 (see Figure ). Thelocal implications will be addressed through work on the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks (see also Chapter 3, Part A and Chapter 5). there are some detailed differences between these figures andthose used in the draft London Plan, the strategic parameters are broadlysimilar. The new population figures, in this plan, the draft London Planand Towards the London Plan all anticipate London’s population rising million by 2016 – although this was revised downwards to millionduring the Examination in Public, based on the best information availableat that ’s population change: actual and projected (1971-2016)’s population is not only growing but its composition, particularly7in terms of age structure and ethnicity, is changing markedly. A moredetailed analysis of the different groups which make up London’spopulation is included in Chapter 3, Part impact of migration has had a rejuvenating effect on London's agestructure; people moving to London tend to be young adults, such asstudents or first time employees, while those moving out are mostly olderworkers, retired people and young families. This impact is projected toincrease as these trends continue over the next 15 years. Certain policies
26Mayor of LondonThe London Planin this plan, particularly for affordable housing, are designed to improvethe ability of young families to compete in the housing market. ’s diversity is one of its great historical social, economic andcultural strengths. New arrivals moving to London from overseas willcontribute further to it. London is already a highly diverse city, one of themost multi-racial in the world. Nearly one third of Londoners are fromblack and minority ethnic communities, including some mainly whiteminority groups such as Irish, Cypriot and Turkish communities. Asignificant growth in black and minority ethnic communities is projectedover the next 15 years. International in-and out-migration has been highand is projected to remain , these changes in the ethnic composition and age structure of the population by 2016 will have a major impact on the working-agepopulation. Based on the 2001 census London’s working age populationwill grow by 516,000 – and of these 411,000 (80 per cent) will be fromblack and ethnic minority fundamental factor driving change in London’s employment structurein the last 30 years has been the gain of 600,000 jobs in business services8and the loss of 600,000 jobs in manufacturing. After business services,the second main driver of jobs creation has been other services, primarilydominated by the leisure and people-orientated services sector, andhotels and restaurants that are closely linked to the growth of retail sector expanded significantly in the 1990s, following earlierlosses, as did employment in health and education. Most other sectorsdeclined in employment (see Figure ).
The London PlanMayor of London 27figure Change in employment by category, London 1973-2001sourcePlanning for London’s Growth, GLA 2002Future economic and employment rooted changes in international and UK economies and societyhave led to the persistence of strong structural trends over a period ofthree decades; the central forecast for the purposes of this plan is thecontinuation of these trends. The gross growth in jobs in London 2001-2016 is projected as 854,000 alongside a loss of 218,000 jobs, leading toa net growth of 636,000. Figure sets out the various forecastsavailable from different econometrists. The central projection used in thisplan is shown and marked ‘Volterra’. The key sectoral projections that9determine the total are set out in an accompanying technical projections are the most authoritative currently available. Howeverthey are still only indicative and may over or underestimate theemployment growth which could take place in some parts of London. It is not the intention to constrain growth and it should be fostered and provided for in accordance with the policies set out in this Plan: they, and the variables which inform them, will be monitored closely.
28Mayor of LondonThe London Planfigure Total employment, London 1973-2016sourceSensitivity tests on forecasting for employment in London. GLA Economics, GLA 2003figure Financial and business services employment, London 1973-2016sourcePlanning for London’s growth, GLA 2002
The London PlanMayor of London finance and business services sector stands out in the structure of theLondon economy owing to its exposure to increased global openness andtechnological change, its contribution to GDP and its ongoing is particularly true of the international business part of the sectorand its role in making markets and providing financial services in foreigncurrencies. The sector has accounted for 65 per cent of the gross jobgrowth in London in the last 30 years and is the key economic sector inthe structural reasons, the sector is projected to make the most significantcontribution to economic growth in London over the next 15 years witharound 440,000 further jobs, just over 50 per cent of the gross totalgrowth of 854,000 (see Figure above). other major driver for jobs growth in London is people-orientedservices, particularly concentrated in the entertainment, leisure and retail10industries. Unlike financial and business services, job growth in thesesectors is not concentrated in the centre but is spread widely throughoutLondon (see Chapter 2). Between 1973 and 2001 these industries created180,000 jobs in London. Projections indicate that these services willcreate an additional 178,000 jobs by 2016. A further significant sector ofgrowth is in hotels and catering – industries that are also strongly linkedtotourism. High value-added activities such as design, creative and greenindustries are projected to be important in those areas of London wheremanufacturing has been restructured and remains , the public administration, primary/utilities and manufacturingsectors are expected to spatial implications of these issues are explored in Chapter 2. The implications for additional floor space requirements are set out inChapter 3, Part environmental environmental imperative is encapsulated by the Rio Summit, theKyoto Agreement and a raft of EU and UK directives, standards andtargets. In essence it means that London, which lags behind many othercities, needs to consume fewer resources and to recycle Mayor’s vision for an exemplary, sustainable world city means thatLondoners must be more responsible about how much they consume anddiscard (see Chapter 4, Part A). The London Plan gives an opportunity toplan growth in ways that make better use of key resources such as land,buildings and construction materials, water, energy and waste. For
30Mayor of LondonThe London Planexample, integration of planning for development and transport willencourage use of public transport, rather than car-based travel. This plancloses off easy but unsustainable options such as greenfield developmentand rigorously protects open spaces and environmental assets. It containspolicies to ensure that buildings are designed to use energy and otherresources more efficiently, both during and after their construction. Tohelp achieve this, investment will be steered towards re-using the wastedresource of previously used or underdeveloped sites in east London andelsewhere. Similarly the spatial implications of the Mayor’s strategies forbiodiversity, waste, air quality, ambient noise and energy are critical to thesustainable accommodation of growth in London. Sustainabledevelopment runs as a thread through every part of this also needs to respond to climate change in two ways – first, in terms of reducing emissions that contribute to global warming andsecondly, by managing the impacts and risks that climate change willbring. This means tackling the causes of global warming at source throughmore sustainable practices, for example, the promotion of alternatives tocar use will help to overcome the polluting effects of road is expected to increase by ten per cent and the weather tobecome stormier; changes are also expected in wind conditions, sunshineand temperature. This plan sets out how London will cope with thesechanges (see Chapter 4, Parts B and C). The Mayor and the LondonClimate Change Partnership have identified further work on assessingimpacts and adaptations and this will be kept under and increasingly youthful and diverse population is likely to wish to live in places with higher levels of social and working activity. The move to a higher density, more urban, intensive, continental lifestyle is alreadyevident. People are less likely to be content with a sharp separation ofwork and home and many may want more mixed environments – bothwhere they live and where they a broader level, society has experienced a shift from a model ofdependence (based on the post-war welfare state) to independence(based on the free-for-all of the 1980s) to an emergent model of11interdependence. For example, the concepts of stakeholding andpartnership working are not a product of coincidence or fashion, but reflect deep-rooted change running through society towardsinterdependence. These partnerships will be critical in implementing this plan.
The London PlanMayor of London changes are mirrored at the individual level by dramatic changes in12personal values. Longitudinal studies on the UKhave shown that therehas been a long-term shift away from values associated with the post-warneed for shelter, stability and survival and the consequent need forauthority and control. Instead values today are based more on integration,diversity, social and environmental concerns. There is a reluctance toaccept arbitrary authority and a wish for greater control over one’s life. Thistoo has major implications for consensus building around this plan and forits implementation. It means that the plan should provide a framework ofstrategic policies that safeguard and promote the public interest, butshould not aspire to dictate lifestyles. It also suggests that there is a desirefor people to take responsibility for their own affairs through increasedlocal involvement of the community and voluntary of new using increasingly sophisticated communication technologieshave grown enormously, affecting every aspect of every day. E-tailing, e-commerce and e-government are all likely to have an impact on Londonwith particular force, given the high level of connectivity in London and12its place at the core of global networks. This plan addresses issues of thedigital divide between those who have and do not have access to the newtechnologies, distinguishing between the needs of commerce andresidents. Economic and population growth in higher density, intensivedevelopments will make it more economic to ensure the provision ofbroadband and new the emerging information society London will need to becomeincreasingly a learning city in which skills and the ability to useinformation will be essential. This will place heavy demands on educationand training , information technology will add to the flexibility of home andwork environments, but will not replace the need for regular face-to-facemeetings. It may lead to work journeys being spread over a longer part ofthe day, and to more local journeys being made, for example to servicesand cafes. These issues are explored further in Chapter 3, Part is accustomed to accommodating growth and change, but to doso in a way that tackles polarisation is a tremendous challenge. The Mayorhas made it clear, in his vision, that he is determined to tackle it. Whilstthe poor are, in absolute terms, generally becoming less poor, have betterhomes on average and live longer than in past decades, the disparity in
32Mayor of LondonThe London Planwealth and other quality of life measures between the poorest sections 14of society and the wealthiest is solely in terms of GDP per capita, London is the wealthiestregion in the UK. However, London has higher concentrations ofindividuals in both high and low income bands than the rest of Great15Britainas can be seen from Figure . While London showed strongeconomic growth during the 1990s, this occurred in the context of aworsening of London’s position relative to the national average for a16number of measures of social Equivalised income distribution (after housing costs) 1999-2000sourceBased on data from Department of Work and Pensions, Household Below AverageIncome (HBAI) division is made worse by job growth being concentrated in higherpaid and in lower paid occupations. In 1980, the top 10 per cent of full-time male earners in London had weekly earnings just over twice as highas those in the bottom 10 per cent. In 2000, the ratio had grown tonearly four has the second highest unemployment rate in England, after theNorth East of England. While the unemployment rate for white Londonersis in line with the rate for white people in the rest of the UK at percent, the rate for ethnic minorities is per cent. This differentialwidened over the 1990s.
The London PlanMayor of London -nine per cent of working age adults in London are non-employed,17compared to 24 per cent in the rest of Great Britain. Again, the rate ismuch higher for London’s ethnic minorities, at 42 per cent. All theevidence on employment indicates that there is a strong ethniccomponent to the polarisation of incomes in those disadvantaged in London’s labour market are lone parents,64 per cent of whom are dependent on income support. This is thehighest percentage in the UK. This gives rise to the need to consider theavailability of affordable childcare so that more women can access also has some of the highest rates of poverty in the to the official child poverty measure, 43 per cent of London’schildren are living in costs in London are both a cause and a consequence of thepolarisation of incomes. Before housing costs are taken into account, theratio between disposable incomes at the top and bottom of the income18distribution is 5:1 in London. After housing costs, the ratio rises to 7:’ potential skills will critically affect their opportunities tocompete successfully for London’s jobs and to avoid a major increase incommuting. A key intention of the Mayor is to ensure that employmentgrowth is absorbed as far as possible by Londoners. This requiresintegrated policy intervention to address three aims:•overcoming barriers to accessing the labour market•improving the competitive labour market position of London’s resident population•encouraging more of London’s employed to become residents in to address these economic, housing and social issues runthroughout this plan. The critical policies relate to tackling areas of deprivation (Chapter 2), affordable housing and communityempowerment (Chapter 3, Part A) and skills (Chapter 3, Part B). Issuesaffecting specific groups such as women and minority ethnic communitiesrun throughout the plan, but are considered specifically in Chapter 3,Parts A and B and Annex rest of this plan develops the issues and ideas set out in this chapterand the strategic policies that flow from them, starting with the broaddevelopment strategy and the key spatial implications.
34Mayor of LondonThe London PlanReferences1European Spatial Development Perspective, European Commission, 19992ASpatial Vision for North West Europe, European Commission, 20003Regional Planning Guidance for the South East (RPG9), GOL, GOEE, GOSE, 20014Sustainable Communities, Building for the Future, ODPM 2003, 5Four World Cities, Llewelyn-Davis et al, 19966Planning for London’s Growth, GLA 20027GLA Population and Household Forecasts 2001-2016 SDS Technical Report 5, GLA 20028Planning for London’s Growth, GLA 20029The Future of Employment in Greater London, SDS Technical Report 8, GLA 200210Spreading Sucess: How London is Changing, GLA 2003, Spreading Time: London’sLeisure economy, GLA 2003, London’s Economy Today 15, GLA 200311The London Study, Local Futures, 199912Values Added, Demos, 199913E-London and the London Plan, Local Futures, 200214Based on information provided by the Department of Working Pensions, 200215London Income Distribution and Regional Price Difference, GLA 200216Tackling Poverty in London, GLA 200217Labour Force Survey (GLA commissioned tables on economic activity by ethnicity and gender), 200018GLA analysis of Department of Working Pensions data on London income distribution, 2001
The London PlanMayor of London 35
36Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 372the broad development chapter sets out the broad development strategy of the London Plan, focusing on the key spatial elements and concluding with the Key addresses all the objectives of the London Plan and particularly the first– to accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries withoutencroaching on open overall greatest challenge faced in this spatial plan is to accommodatesignificant growth in ways that respect and improve London’s diverseheritage while delivering the Mayor’s vision for an exemplary, sustainableworld city. This will involve the sensitive intensification of development inlocations that are, or will be, well served by public transport. The Mayorhas concluded that this will best be achieved through the following overallspatial strategy for development:•support for and co-ordination of sub-regional initiatives, bridging thegap between Londonwide and more local actions (Policy ).•recognition of the government’s and the wider regional priority forregeneration of East London, especially the Thames Gateway andLondon–Stansted–Cambridge growth areas (Chapter 5).•further development in the Central Activities Zone and associatedOpportunity Areas to intensify and accommodate substantial growth,especially in economic activity (Policy and Chapter 5)•major development in other Opportunity Areas, with an overall prioritytothe east of London along the Thames Gateway, and an expansion of some central London activities into parts of the City fringe, Isle ofDogs and Stratford (Policy and Chapter 5)•enhancing and diversifying the role of town centres across London in places with good public transport access (Policy )•appropriate intensification and mix of uses, with a special focus on the Areas for Intensification that are well served by public transport(Policy )•integrating spatial policies with policies for neighbourhood renewal,better health, improved learning and skills, greater safety and betteremployment and housing opportunities in the Areas for Regeneration(Policy and Chapter 3, Part A)•significant improvements in access, services and sustainability insuburban areas (Policy )•managing and promoting the Strategic Employment Locations asLondon’s strategic reservoir of industrial capacity (Policy ).
38Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•improving London’s accessibility through the co-ordination of transportand development and emphasis on improvement to public transportand reducing traffic congestion (Chapter 3, Part C). are also two thematic policies which have a particular spatial impactand are addressed in other specific parts of this plan:•Open spaces – see Chapter 3, Part D.•The Blue Ribbon Network – see Chapter 4, Part are strategic policy directions that will shape London’s future. Theyare not set out in a priority order and they inter-relate, indeed some towncentres are also Opportunity Areas. Together they constitute a polycentricdevelopment strategy in which each part of London fulfils its mosteffective role in a way that is complementary to the roles of other inter-relationships are brought together in Chapter 5 – London’s sub-regions – which also links them to the thematic and crosscutting policiesin Chapters 3 and 4 and identifies specific locations in which the spatialpolicies of this chapter will policies in this plan promote sustainable Sustainability criteriaThe Mayor will use the following criteria in developing Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks (see Chapter 5) and when considering UDPsand planning applications referred to him:•optimising the use of previously developed land and vacant or under-used buildings (see Chapter 3, Parts A and B and Chapter 4, Part B)•using a design-led approach to optimise the potential of sites (seeChapter 4, Part B)•ensuring that development occurs in locations that are currently, or are planned to be, accessible by public transport, walking and cycling(see Chapter 3, Part C)•ensuring that development occurs in locations that are accessible totown centres, employment, housing, shops and services (seeChapter 3, Part D)•ensuring that development takes account of the capacity of existing or planned infrastructure including public transport, utilities andcommunity infrastructure, such as schools and hospitals (see Chapter 3, Part A and C)
The London PlanMayor of London 39•taking account of the physical constraints on the development of land, including, for example, flood risk, ensuring that no significantharmful impacts occur, or that such impacts are acceptably mitigated(see Chapter 4, Part A)•taking account of the impact that development will have on London’snatural resources, environmental and cultural assets and the health oflocal people (see Chapter 3 Parts A and D and Chapter 4, Parts A and B)•taking account of the objectives of preventing major accidents andlimiting their consequences (see Chapter 4, Parts A and B)•taking account of the suitability of sites for mixed use development and the contribution that development might make to strengtheninglocal communities (see Chapter 3, Parts A and B, and Chapter 4, PartB).UDP policies should clarify that, when assessing the suitability of land for development, the nature of the development and its locationalrequirements should be taken into account, along with the above concept of sustainable development runs throughout the LondonPlan and all its policies, starting from the Mayor’s vision and objectivesset out in the Preamble and Introduction. This overarching policy bringstogether a number of other policies within this plan to demonstrate theintegrated nature of sustainability policies. It sets out the criteria that willguide the approach to development in spatial policies for LondonOpportunity AreasPolicy Opportunity AreasAs part of the process of producing Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks, the Mayor will work with strategic partners to prepareplanning frameworks for Opportunity Areas as shown on Map , or to build on frameworks already developed. These frameworks will set out a sustainable development programme for each Opportunity Area, tobe reflected in UDPs, so as to contribute to the overall strategy of the London Plan to:•seek to exceed the minimum guidelines for housing and to have regard to indicative estimates for employment set out in the sub-regional tables•maximise access by public transport•promote social inclusion and relate development to any nearby Areas for Regeneration
40Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•take account of the community, environmental and other distinctivelocal characteristics of each Opportunity Areas and Areas for IntensificationsourceGLA 2000
The London PlanMayor of London Areas have been identified on the basis that they are capableof accommodating substantial new jobs or homes and their potentialshould be maximised. Typically, each can accommodate at least 5,000 jobsor 2,500 homes or a mix of the two, together with appropriate provisionof other uses such as local shops, leisure facilities and schools. Theseareas generally include major brownfield sites with capacity for newdevelopment and places with potential for significant increases in development should be geared to the use of public transport andthey are either located at areas of good access or would require publictransport improvements to support development. Their broad locationsare indicated on Map . Their detailed boundaries, capacity andpolicies will be identified in Sub-Regional Development Frameworks andin UDPs (see also Chapter 5).Areas for IntensificationPolicy Areas for IntensificationUDP policies should identify Areas for Intensification including thoseshown on Map . Policies for development should exploit their public transport accessibility and potential for increases in residential,employment and other uses, through higher densities and more mixed and intensive use. areas have significant potential for increases in residential,employment and other uses through development or redevelopment of available sites and exploitation of potential for regeneration, throughhigher densities and more mixed and intensive use. An initialidentification of these Areas for Intensification is given in Map . Their detailed boundaries, capacity and policies will be developed,
42Mayor of LondonThe London Planin participation with local communities, in Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks and in UDPs, along with any further suitable Areas forIntensification identified by boroughs. The Mayor will also work withboroughs in preparing planning frameworks for these for each sub-region (see Chapter 5) set out the identifiedOpportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification and suggest indicativeestimates of housing and employment growth for the plan period. Thesedevelopment capacity guidelines are indicative and will be tested andrefined with sub-regional partners. Development or redevelopment of these areas will contribute significantly to meeting the indicative sub-regional growth for RegenerationPolicy Areas for RegenerationWithin the Areas for Regeneration shown on Map the Mayor willwork with strategic partners to achieve their sustained renewal byprioritising them for action and their UDPs, Community Strategies, and Neighbourhood RenewalStrategies, boroughs should identify Areas for Regeneration and set out integrated spatial policies that bring together regeneration,development and transport proposals with improvements in learning and skills, health, safety, access, employment, environment and policies and actions should state how they seek to achieve thegovernment’s objective, which the Mayor supports, that no-one should be seriously disadvantaged by where they live within 10–20 policies should identify any local regeneration areas and highlight any suitable additional strategic areas for inclusion in the first review of the London Plan.
The London PlanMayor of London 43map for RegenerationsourceThe London Index of Deprivation, GLA key element of the Mayor’s vision is tackling social exclusion and astrong focus on Areas for Regeneration is a major part of his policy. Areasin need of regeneration - where there is substantial deprivation - existacross London. It is the responsibility of boroughs to identify these andset policies for tackling them through UDPs and Neighbourhood RenewalStrategies. Map shows the 20 per cent most deprived areas inLondon at ward level as defined by the London Index of have been identified as the strategic Areas for Regeneration. Thismap should be used to assist boroughs in prioritising Areas forRegeneration while recognising that smaller pockets of deprivation existoutside them. There are larger areas where deprivation is lie in a single borough, others cross borough boundaries. In theseareas, there is a role for the Mayor and the Greater London Authoritygroup to assist in tackling the problems and the Mayor will work withboroughs and other partners to do this. The aim will be to ensure that noone is seriously disadvantaged by where they live within 10–20 strategies will need to spell out precisely how this will be London Development Agency and Learning and Skills Councils areactively involved in supporting the need for improved skills and for betteraccess to work and target these areas in particular. Areas for Regeneration
44Mayor of LondonThe London Planare often found close to Opportunity Areas and boroughs should makelinks between the two to assist those living in the former to takeadvantage of the employment and other opportunities created in thelatter. Some areas may need improvements in public transport to helptheir residents to access job and other opportunities. However, theprovision of jobs in the areas themselves is also important. This couldencourage social enterprise and the active involvement of the voluntaryand community sectors. Policies to support local small and medium sizeenterprises (SMEs) can be of particular importance to the black andminority ethnic business sector (see also Chapter 3, Part B). provision of high quality services is also critical, as is the involvementof the local community, both in the planning of the area and inspecifying, and in some cases running, services themselves. These mattersare considered further in Chapter 3, Part – through UDPs and community strategies – can encourage theintegrated provision of facilities such as schools, hospitals, health centresand housing in areas of greatest need. They can also encouragedevelopers to contribute to meeting the government’s floor targets fordeprived areas by, for example, setting up local training programmes andproviding affordable housing, contributions to local education oraffordable childcare (see also Chapter 3, Parts A and B and Chapter 6).Town centresPolicy Town centresThe Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to implement apolycentric strategy for London’s development by promoting the strategicimportance of London’s town centres in accommodating economicgrowth, meeting the needs of Londoners and improving the sustainabilityof London’s development. A robust strategy for town centres in each sub-region will be developed through the Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks, taking into account the relationship with town centres inadjoining sub-regions and in the regions adjoining London, to providestrategic direction for the development of the network of policies should:•have regard to the network of International, Metropolitan, Major and District centres as shown on Map •identify local centres •seek to exploit and enhance the accessibility of town centres from the areas which they serve, particularly by public transport, walkingand cycling
The London PlanMayor of London 45•provide for a full range of town centre functions including retail,leisure, employment services and community facilities, in line with the other policies of this plan•seek to sustain and enhance the vitality and viability of town centresincluding maximising housing provision through high density, mixed-use development and environmental ’s town centres are a key spatial priority of the London Plan, so as to ensure an accessible range of services as well as extend consumerchoice. London’s town centres are the most accessible locations on thepublic transport system outside central London and are inherentlysustainable locations to meet a range of needs, depending on their sizeand function. This makes them central to the achievement of objectivesfor land use and transport integration and key locations for a diverserange of activities, including office space, housing, community facilitiesand regeneration initiatives as well as retail and leisure. Town centres alsoprovide the sense of place and community which can help in fosteringlocal identity. Increasing their attractiveness and capacity to perform thesefunctions and especially to share in London’s growth, is crucial to supporturban and suburban renewal. More detailed policies for town centres arefound in Chapter 3, Part -Regional Development Frameworks will reflect a robust strategictown centre network to help co-ordinate the development of the networkin line with this plan’s policies to:•promote the complementary offer of different centres in the network•sustain and enhance the viability and vitality of town centres andmanage changes in their functions•encourage their contribution to sustainable development and apolycentric pattern of development•help assess future need and capacity for different types of town centrerelated uses and provide strategic guidance on accommodating them interms of this plan’s policies, if necessary, reconciling need and capacitywithin the network as a suburbsPolicy Spatial strategy for suburbsUDP policies should contain spatial strategies for promoting changewithin, and enhancing the quality of life of, suburban London. Suchstrategies should:
46Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•focus retail, leisure, key commercial activity and services in suburbanmetropolitan, major, district and local town centres. Where suchcentres do not already have good levels of public transport accessibility and capacity, improvements should be promoted•promote areas around suburban town centres that have good access by public transport and on foot to the town centre as appropriate for higher-density and mixed-use development including housing•improve the sustainability of suburban residential heartlands bypromoting better access to centres, employment and communityfacilities, improving the public realm, making efficient use of space,and where appropriate, modernising or redeveloping the housing strategies should be developed with particular attention to thepolicies in this plan for town centres, employment, housing provision and design for a compact London has an important part to play in achieving the urbanrenaissance agenda and securing London’s role as an exemplary,sustainable world ’s suburbs cover over two-thirds of London’s total land researchshows that suburban areas are hugely varied in character with a diverse population and have been, and can be, subject tosignificant change. Some suburban areas have low-densitydevelopment and predominant car use. While the attractive image ofsuburban London as offering good schools, green space and quiet awayfrom central London holds true for some areas, pockets of deprivation and obsolescence can be found in others. suburb is unique and requires a tailored policy response inaccordance with local circumstances to be set out in UDPs. However,there are some strategic opportunities for change common to all suburban Mayor has identified a four-tier approach to guiding change insuburban areas, focusing on the following types of suburban area: towncentres, employment locations, neighbourhoods and residential , local and neighbourhood town centres are essential features of suburban living, providing easy access to local services. They are an important source of jobs in suburban areas and need to be supportedand enhanced.
The London PlanMayor of London suburbs provide a range of employment opportunities, particularly in services, manufacturing, distribution and other uses requiring largefloor areas. The public sector also provides a substantial element ofemployment within suburban London, for example hospitals and and enhancing a range of employment uses in suburbanareas is important to support sustainable communities. As employmentuses become increasingly compatible with residential environments, theremay be growing opportunities for local activities, including homeworkingand live/work around town centres will be most appropriate for higher densitydevelopment and a greater mix of uses in accordance with their greaterlevels of accessibility relative to other suburban areas. Development ofthese areas should be tailored to the level of public transport residential heartlands, as the predominantly residential element ofLondon’s suburban fabric, require attention on local improvements to thepublic realm, maintenance, management and access, as well as somesensitive redevelopment, while having regard to biodiversity collaboration with boroughs, the Mayor will prepare good practiceguidance and a ‘sustainable suburbs’ toolkit to guide developmentpolicies in suburban centres, employment areas, neighbourhoods and Employment LocationsPolicy Strategic Employment LocationsIn the context of Policy , Annex 2 and Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks, boroughs should identify Strategic Employment Locations in the highly competitive London land market, manufacturing, wholesaledistribution and a number of other activities of an industrial nature rely onthe planning system to sustain adequate development capacity to meettheir needs. The main strategic concentrations of this capacity areindicated in Annex 2. They are an important part of London’s spatialstructure. Taking account of Policy , including the reconciliation ofdemand and supply of industrial land, the extent of these locations shouldbe refined through Sub-Regional Development Frameworks and specifiedin UDPs. These locations will be kept under review to ensure that the rightlocations are being safeguarded in relation to need and and spatial policies cannot be considered in isolation from their links to
48Mayor of LondonThe London Planexisting and proposed transport accessibility and capacity. Londonbenefits from a well developed public transport network, which includesthe Underground, National Rail services and an extensive bus network,which provide a high level of transport accessibility. Map shows theexisting existing public transport accessibility levels across London, basedon the PTAL method, which provides a consistent framework for assessingpublic transport accessibility. (Annex 4 provides more detail) The centralarea is particularly well served and town centres also have good levels ofpublic transport accessibility. The current network is well used and insome places it operates at or close to capacity. A programme of publictransport improvements has been developed (see Chapter 3, Part C) toaddress current problems of movement and support the expected Access to public transportsourceTransport for transport policies in Chapter 3, PartCseek to assist in achieving spatialdevelopment priorities by integrating development with existing and futurepublic transport infrastructure and services as well as exploiting existingareas of good public transport accessibility. Future public transportimprovements include those that support the development of East London,growth in Central London, Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensificationand better access to town centres and Areas for ’s broad development strategy is developed in the chapters that follow- the thematic policies in Chapter 3 and the crosscutting policies in
The London PlanMayor of London 49Chapter 4. Chapter 5 returns to spatial issues and shows how the plan’spolicies interact at the sub-regional level. It commits the Mayor todeveloping Sub-Regional Development Frameworks in partnership with a range of strategic partners. Chapter 5 defines the boundaries of the fivesub-regions – Central, East, West, North and South - and sets out thestrategic priorities for each of them. Each of the sub-regions willaccommodate significant growth in the context of Policy and set out in Chapter 5, which includes indicative estimates of growth for eachof them and for the Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification withinthem. Chapter 5 also develops the over-arching spatial policies of thischapter by refining these policies at the sub-regional level and giving a flavour of how they will be developed further in the Sub-RegionalDevelopment 5 provides the key link between Londonwide policies and Chapter 6, which focuses on implementation, since a critical componentof the delivery of this plan will be the partnerships operating at the sub-regional the Key Key Diagram represents the spatial strategy of this plan as outlinedabove. It shows the emphasis upon growth within the existing Londonboundary, but with policy and transport linkages in the main developmentcorridors into the surrounding regions proposed in paragraph . TheThames Gateway and Central London are shown, with concentration alsoupon the revitalisation of town centres and on the suburbs. The mainspatial categories – Opportunity Areas, Areas for Regeneration and Areasfor Intensification – are shown diagrammatically. The Key Diagram alsoincludes the two largest new infrastructure projects (CTRL and Crossrail 1)and key nodes such as international stations and airports. The KeyDiagram should be read in conjunction with Map (Town Centres),Map London’s strategic open space network and Map (TheBlue Ribbon Network).References1City of Villages SDS Technical Report II, GLA, 2002
50Mayor of LondonThe London PlansourceGLA
The London PlanMayor of London 51
52Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 533thematic policiesChapter 2 addressed the first objective of this plan. This chapter addressesthe next four objectives set out in the Introduction:•Objective 2 – to make London a better city for people to live in – is addressed in Part A (Living in London).•Objective 3 – to make London a more prosperous city with strong anddiverse economic growth – is addressed in Part B (Working in London).•Objective 4 – to promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation anddiscrimination – cuts across both Living and Working in London and is therefore addressed in Parts A and B. •Objective 5 – to improve London’s accessibility – is addressed in Part C(Connecting London).3Aliving in part is addressed to and is predominantly about London’s concentrates on housing and on the key public services that are criticaltoquality of life. It picks up the themes of social polarisation and equality,addresses the needs of London’s very diverse population and examineshow individuals and groups can become more involved in community part is in four , it examines the need for additional housing. This is partly to addressthe demand for housing coming from population growth, but it is also toaddress the historical shortage of affordable housing and the high cost of housing in second section takes a more detailed look at London’s population –made up of a host of communities of identity and interest each of whichhas its own particular needs over and above the needs it shares with , it looks at the major public services – education and health – aswell as safety. It seeks to ensure that the spatial and planning needs ofthe services – the new schools, health and other facilities needed for agrowing population - are met over the coming , it examines how people can become more effectively engaged in,and empowered by, shaping the future of their local areas.
54Mayor of LondonThe London Plan1Housing line with the concept of a sustainable and compact city, futureresidential development needs to be located so as to maximise the use of scarce land, to conserve energy and to be within easy access of jobs,schools, shops, and public transport. The provision of new housing shouldalso help support economic growth and offer a range of choices for newhouseholds, including affordable the need for additional were million households in London in 2001. Based on thelatest available projections and estimates, London’s population increase of 800,000 to 2016 could lead to an increase of 336,000 households overthe next 15 years – a total of around million. This assumes constanthousehold size and it is equivalent to 22,400 additional households ayear. The approach to be taken in interpreting these figures is set out inparagraphs to figure deals only with growth, not the existing shortage of Housing Commissionestimated that 112,200 existing householdswould need a new home. This would mean 11,200 additional dwellings ayear in order to achieve the Mayor’s objective of meeting this need within10 years. On this basis, the total forecast demand for new homes is33,600 per annum, made up of household growth of 22,400 and 11,200tomeet existing need. A proportion of the former and all of the latterneed to be affordable homes. This is addressed in paragraphs to . These figures will be revised in light of new demographic data andthe figures from the study on housing requirements. These will feed intothe London Housing Board consultation for the next London HousingStrategy and contribute to the deveopment of sub-regional frameworks(see Para ). It is anticipated that this exercise will lead to some fine-tuning of the figures, but that the housing provision recommended by thepanel after the Examination in Public for some 30,000 extra homes perannum is broadly the overall supply of housingPolicy Increasing London’s supply of housingThe Mayor will seek the maximum provision of additional housing in London towards achieving an output of 30,000 additional homes per year from all provision up to 2006 will be monitored against a minimum target of 23,000 additional homes per year, and the borough targets
The London PlanMayor of London 55set out in Table . This figure will be reviewed by 2006 and periodically Mayor will promote policies that seek to achieve and to exceed this Borough housing targetsUDP policies should:•seek to exceed the figures in Table and to address the suitability of housing development in terms of location, type of development and impact on the locality (see policies, , , , and )•identify new sources of supply having regard to:- major development in Opportunity Areas and in the London parts of the Thames Gateway and London-Stansted-Cambridge growthareas and redevelopment of low density commercial sites to securemixed use residential development- change of use of unneeded industrial/employment land to residentialor mixed use development- redevelopment in town centres, suburban heartlands and small scaleresidential infill - intensification of housing provision through development at higherdensities particularly where there is good access to public transport •review existing identified housing sites and include existing andproposed housing sites on Proposals Maps. The capacity of housingsites should be determined in accordance with the urban design anddensity policies of this plan (see policies , and as well as affordable housing policies and ).•monitor housing approvals and completions against the annualmonitoring targets in Table and against any higher targetsadopted in their UDPs.
56Mayor of LondonThe London Plantable Provision for additional ‘homes’ targets, 1997-2016AreasTotalAnnualAreasTotalAnnualtargetmonitoring targetmonitoring targettargetCentral sub-regionWest sub-regionCamden16940850Brent13510680Islington18070900Ealing12930650Kensington and Chelsea10800540Hammersmithand Fulham8040400Lambeth289101450Harrow6620330Southwark295301480Hillingdon8890440Wandsworth16470820Hounslow9450470Westminster19480970Sub-total594402970Sub-total1402007010North sub-regionEast sub-regionBarnet17780890Barking and Dagenham10110510Enfield13180660Bexley5520280Haringey19370970City2100110Waltham Forest9140460Greenwich16090800Sub-total594702980Hackney14310720South sub-regionHavering6900350Bromley11450570Lewisham17350870Croydon17020850Newham17770890Kingston6710340Redbridge10860540Merton8610430Tower Hamlets412802070Richmond5360270Sub-total1422907140Sutton7400370Sub-total565502830London45795023000sourceLondon’s Housing Capacity, GLA, plan sets the policy framework for distributing housing capacityamong the boroughs and for realising and monitoring that GLA’s Housing Capacity Studyremains the most comprehensivestudy of London’s housing capacity and the targets derived from it, setout in Table , remain the best available basis for monitoring housingprovision in the short term. Any methodological or data issues will betaken into account through the next housing capacity is considerable housing capacity in London to respond to bothexisting and future housing demand but more capacity can be achievedthrough redevelopment and applying higher densities. Boroughs shouldinvestigate additional sources of housing capacity and identify furthersites, applying higher densities where appropriate (see Table ). As the
The London PlanMayor of London 57more obvious sources of additional housing dry up, new options will havetobe followed through more Mayor will carry out a new housing capacity study in 2004 in order toupdate the borough figures set out in Table to inform a newLondonwide target. The study will identify capacity based on the fullestpossible implementation of London Plan policies concerning density,mixed-use development, policies for town centres and the suburbs, thereuse of employment land and buildings, as well as the residentialcapacity of the Opportunity Areas. The intention is to seek to identifyadditional capacity towards achieving the 30,000 additional homes perannum set out in Policy targets will be for net additional homes, and include additionaldwellings provided through development and redevelopment, andconversions from residential and non-residential properties, together withlong-term vacant properties brought back into use and household spacesin new non-self-contained accommodation. They will be net of lossesthrough redevelopment and conversion, through change of use anddemolition of residential property and any properties falling into long-term revised figures will be incorporated in the London Plan by 2006. TheMayor will seek to involve fully boroughs, housing providers and otherkey stakeholders in the process. The Mayor will prepare and publishSupplementary Planning Guidance on planning for housing provision,including guidance on how UDP policies should promote future housing4provision in line with the London Housing Capacity Methodology the housing provision figures is an essential part of the ‘plan,monitor and manage’ approach to ensure that the London Plan delivers asmany additional homes each year as is reasonably possible. Table out annual monitoring targets for each borough. The GLA willcontinue to monitor provision setting the monitoring target to 2006, the Mayor has taken account ofthe relationship between London and the rest of the southeast, includingthe housing provision figure in RPG 9, as recommended in Circular1/2000, of 23,000 homes a year. He will continue to work in closecollaboration with the Regional Planning Bodies for the South East andEast of England to ensure a consistent approach to addressing the needsof inter-regional migration and household growth.
58Mayor of LondonThe London PlanMaking better use of existing housingPolicy Efficient use of stockBoroughs should promote the efficient use of the existing stock byreducing the number of vacant, unfit and unsatisfactory dwellings. Theyshould produce and implement comprehensive empty property strategiesincluding targets for bringing properties back into use. These strategiesshould be monitored on an annual basis and be subject to regular are still many vacant properties, particularly in the private sectorthat could be brought back into active use. Across London, data from theHousing Capacity Study 2000 showed that almost 25,000 dwellings couldbe brought back into use between 1997 and 2016. The majority of thisprovision is in inner London, where vacancy rates are generally is also a need to invest in maintaining and refurbishing the existinghousing stock so it does not become vacant. The Mayor will includeannual figures on the achievement of targets for bringing properties backinto use in his annual report, as part of the ‘plan, monitor and manage’approach set out in this plan (see Chapter 6).Improving housing choicePolicy Housing choiceBoroughs should take steps to identify the full range of housing needs5within their area. UDP policies should seek to ensure that:•new developments offer a range of housing choices, in terms of themix of housing sizes and types, taking account of the housingrequirements of different groups, such as students, older people,families with children and people willing to share accommodation•all new housing is built to ‘Lifetime Homes’ standards•ten per cent of new housing is designed to be wheelchair accessible, or easily adaptable for residents who are wheelchair Mayor will investigate the feasibility of establishing a London registerof accessible housing in both the public and private undertaking an assessment of housing needs, a borough should consult fully and ensure that the assessment includes the full range of different communities within the borough, such as black and minorityethnic communities, disabled people and older people and householdswith specialist or different requirements, and that such communities areconsulted on how policy is derived from the needs assessment.
The London PlanMayor of London lifestyles are making new demands upon the way residents usetheir homes with greater demands for internal space, including workingfrom home and leisure activities. Although the number of people livingalone has increased, this does not necessarily translate into a demand forsmall, one-bedroom flats or bedsits, as many people want a sparebedroom for visitors and family. Relevant design, construction and densitypolicies are set out in Chapter 4, Part housing development, including additional provision arising fromconversions, should reflect these changes and help to promote mixed and balanced communities by taking account of changes in householdcharacteristics and lifestyles and by offering a range of housing types and sizes. Boroughs should also promote new concepts of urban living,such as co-housing built for general mainstream use but designed to meet the‘Lifetime Homes’ standards will contribute towards redressing the severe6shortage of accessible housing in London. Meeting ‘Lifetime Homes’standards is a cost-effective way of providing homes that are adaptable,flexible, convenient and appropriate to changing needs. They enhancechoice, enable independent living and help to create more balanced andinclusive the overall shortage of wheelchair accessible housing, ten per centof all future housing provision should be suitable or easily adapted forwheelchair users. If a borough wishes to vary this percentage, it shoulddemonstrate to the Mayor that it has carried out a comprehensive recentassessment of need which demonstrates that a different proportion wouldbe appropriate. Further research will establish the feasibility of aLondonwide register of homes designed or adapted to be accessible toassist disabled people looking for suitable residential developmentsPolicy Large residential developmentsBoroughs should encourage proposals for large residential developmentsin areas of high public transport accessibility, including the provision ofsuitable non-residential uses within such should prepare planning frameworks for all large residential sites of 10 hectares or more, or that will accommodate more than 500 dwellings.
60Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThe planning frameworks should be prepared in consultation with localcommunities and other key -scale residential developments present the potential to provide not only additional housing and related uses, but to create a new sense of place with its own character and identity where people will want to liveand work. They will be capable of generating a mix of uses and a varietyof activities, including commercial development, such as offices,workspaces, restaurants, leisure facilities and local shops and pattern and scale of development should be designed to integrateland use with movement. The land uses with the highest levels of activityshould be located close to the existing or proposed areas of highestpublic transport accessibility and should have the highest densities andgreatest mix of uses (see Policy ). considering development proposals for large residential sites, boroughsshould assess the need for community and ancillary services such as localhealth facilities, schools and public open space (see policies , ). frameworks for these large residential developments shouldidentify the potential impacts on the surrounding areas and how thesewill be dealt with. These should be carried out in consultation with keystakeholders. In addition to the developer and landowner, the localauthority should consult with TfL, the LDA, the strategic health authorityand primary care trust, housing associations and local communities. Where large residential sites are near to Areas for Regeneration, theappraisal should take account of social and economic impact assessments(see policy ). consideration should be given to the compatibility of uses,permeability and layout, sustainable design and construction (see ), phasing, delivery mechanisms, management and of affordable housingPolicy Definition of affordable housingUDP policies should define affordable housing as housing designed tomeet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allowthem to access decent and appropriate housing in their housing comprises social housing, intermediate housing and in some cases, low-cost market housing.
The London PlanMayor of London 61UDP policies should ensure that new affordable housing provision seekstomeet the full spectrum of housing the purposes of the London Plan, housing is divided into threesegments:•Social Housing – Housing provided by a landlord where access is on the basis of housing need, and rents are no higher than target rents set by the government for housing association and local authority rents.•Intermediate Housing – Sub-market housing which is above targetrents, but is substantially below open market levels and is affordableby households on incomes of less than £40,000 (as at 2003/4 to bereviewed annually to refect changes in income: house-price ratios).This pan-London figure will be kept under review through the SPGboth in terms of its quantum and distribution across boroughs. Thiscategory can include shared ownership, sub-market rent provision and key worker housing which meets this criterion. It may also includesome low-cost market housing where its price is equivalent to otherforms of intermediate housing. •Market Housing – Owner-occupied and private rented housing, whichdoes not meet the affordability and access criteria for social housing or intermediate housing. definitions will be further detailed in Supplementary of purpose-built student housing adds to the overall supply of housing and may reduce pressure on the existing supply of market and affordable housing. Provision of purpose-built student housingshould be monitored separately from provision in relation to targets for social housing and intermediate provision, as these are targeted at different may also be appropriate for a borough to set sub-targets for prioritygroups, such as key workers, within the intermediate provision the need for affordable of the Mayor’s strategic objectives is to increase substantiallyLondon’s supply of affordable housing. This is strategically important toLondon in order to promote mixed and balanced communities and
62Mayor of LondonThe London Plantoredress the affordability issue that underlines the trend towards socialpolarisation in terms of housing choices and on house prices has intensified with growth in the number ofhouseholds and the incomes of prospective purchasers. Supply in market,intermediate and social housing sectors has failed to keep up with demand– a key factor in explaining the growing recruitment and retention8difficulties being faced by both public and private shortage of affordable housing has led to increasing numbers ofhouseholds in priority need being forced to live for longer periods intemporary housing, overcrowded conditions and in bed and breakfast8accommodation. Many others are being squeezed out of living in Londonand are either travelling longer distances to work or are leaving the capitalaltogether. These are strategic issues, which must be addressed by astrategic of the future household growth and overall need for additionalhousing in London are set out in paragraph , at 33,600 homes a that figure there is a very significant need for affordable Housing Commission estimated that almost a quarter of futurehouseholds would need social rented housing and that 112,000 existinghouseholds are in need of a new home. These estimates and furtherrefinements of existing and future housing need have been the subject of a study into housing requirements. However at the time of publicationof this plan the figure of 25,700 additional affordable homes per annumfrom all sources remains the best available results of the mid year estimates and the study into housingrequirements are being analysed and will be published early in 2004. Paragraph explains how these results will be tested at the sub-regional level and incorporated into the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks. Increasing the provision of affordable housing view of the magnitude of the gap between current provision of affordable housing (6-7,000 a year) and estimated need, and theserious potential consequences for London’s sustainable development and economic competitiveness, the Mayor has concluded that theplanning system should make the maximum reasonable contribution tothe provision of affordable housing. A portfolio of other policies will also be essential to help meet London’s affordable housingrequirements, including:
The London PlanMayor of London 63•tackling empty properties•stemming losses from the existing stock of affordable homes•aprogramme of open market acquisitions by housing associations tomeet housing needs•modernising the private rented sector so it can make as large a contribution as possible to London’s needs•providing mobility opportunities for tenants to move outside of these elements are already incorporated in the 2003 LondonHousing Strategy. Other elements can be considered in the developmentof the next London Housing Circular 1/2000states ‘the SDS should set out, where appropriate,priorities and strategic objectives for meeting particular types of housingprovision need accross the capital as a whole’. In response the Mayor hasadopted a strategic target that 50 per cent of all additional housing shouldbe affordable. This target includes affordable housing from all sources andnot just that secured through planning obligations. It comprises all typesand tenures of housing within the definition included in Policy andincludes 100 per cent affordable schemes by housing associations,intermediate housing, non-self-contained accommodation, gains fromconversions and from bringing long-term vacant properties back into use,as well as new housing. The achievement of affordable housing will beclosely monitored against the total output of additional housing as set outin Policy and the strategic target will be kept under review in relationtoa range of considerations, including: output acheived, availability ofpublic subsidy and updated assessments of housing need and output is contingent upon identifying and bringing forward additionalsources of capacity, to be investigated by the new housing capacity studyfor London (see paragraph ). strategic target supports the Mayor’s case to government for anincrease in the overall level of housing investment in London. In addition,the Mayor will work with the the London Housing Board, the GovernmentOffice for London, Housing Corporation, boroughs, housing associations andprivate house builders to find ways to make more effective use of privateand public investment. Within the overall 50 per cent he seeks to achieve 70per cent social housing and 30 per cent intermediate housing and this will bekept under review. On individual private residential and mixed-use sites, theMayor will expect boroughs to use development appraisals in orderreasonably to maximise the amount of affordable housing provision. It isrecognised that some small sites may be developed entirely for socialhousing and intermediate housing, funded mainly from Housing Corporationor local authority grant, without contributions being required from Section106 in relation to private residential or other development.
64Mayor of LondonThe London PlanBorough affordable housing targets Policy Affordable housing targetsUDP policies should set an overall target for the amount of affordablehousing provision over the plan period in their area, based on anassessment of all housing needs and a realistic assessment of supply. In setting targets boroughs should take account of regional and localassessments of need, the Mayor’s strategic target for affordable housingprovision that 50 per cent of provision should be affordable and, withinthat, the Londonwide objective of 70 per cent social housing and 30 per cent intermediate provision, and the promotion of mixed and balancedcommunities. They should take account of the most robust availableassessment of housing capacity, and of potential sources of supply, such as:•local authority developments, including estate renewals•Registered Social Landlords’ developments•low-cost market housing, where it can be shown to be affordable•private residential development negotiations secured through planning agreements or conditions•vacant properties brought back into use•provision from non-self-contained need is a strategic issue, in that some boroughs cannot meetneed within their own boundaries. Each borough does not represent adistinct housing market nor is London made up of a homogenous housingmarket. Affordable housing targets should be sensitive to the economicand social circumstances of different parts of London. The Mayor has setthe overall strategic framework for establishing borough-level targets toprovide a consistent basis for seeking affordable housing and forestimating future levels of provision. Boroughs should set an overalltarget for the amount of affordable housing provision over the planperiod in their area, based on a comprehensive assessment of need and a realistic and comprehensive estimate of supply. They should takeinto account up-to-date assessments of regional need as well as localneed and the objective of achieving mixed and balanced it can be demonstrated that an element of low cost housing cancontribute to meeting the need for affordable housing within the criteriaset in paragraph , this can be incorporated in the borough guidance on the basis for setting borough affordable housingtargets consistent with the Londonwide target, and which recognise sub-regional and regional demand/capacity mismatches, will be set out in Supplementary Planning Guidance on Affordable Housing.
The London PlanMayor of London should seek to achieve a range of types of affordable housingand an appropriate balance between social and intermediate housing,having regard to the circumstances of their area, and to the Mayor’sLondonwide assessment of the need for a 70:30 Negotiating affordable housing in individual private residential and mixed-use schemesBoroughs should seek the maximum reasonable amount of affordablehousing when negotiating on individual private residential and mixed-useschemes, having regard to their affordable housing targets adopted in line with policy , the need to encourage rather than restrainresidential development and the individual circumstances of the site. Targets should be applied flexibly, taking account of individual site costs,the availability of public subsidy and other scheme estimating provision from private residential or mixed-usedevelopments, boroughs should take into account economic viability and the most effective use of private and public investment, including use of financial contributions. The development control toolkit developedby the Three Dragons and Nottingham Trent University is one mechanismthat will help. Boroughs should take account of the individualcircumstances of the site, the part of the borough in which the site lies, the availability of public subsidy and other scheme requirements. The determination of the affordable housing requirements for a specificsite needs to have regard to the borough targets set within the framework of policy on the basis of maximising the potential foraffordable will be some sites that are capable of achieving more towardsmeeting the overall 50 per cent Londonwide affordable housing targetand some less. It is recognised that in most cases, some level of subsidywill be necessary to achieve the maximum outturn, the exception beingthe highest value sites, where the desired level of affordable housing canbe funded entirely from development value. Where a proposal fordevelopment relates solely to student housing, it will not normally beappropriate to apply a planning obligation for an element of social rent or intermediate housing (see paragraph ). The Mayor wishes toencourage, not restrain residential development and boroughs should takea reasonable and flexible approach on a site-by-site basis. Furtherguidance on the role of site appraisals and the toolkit is set out in theSupplementary Planning Guidance on Affordable housing should be integrated with the rest of the developmentand have the same external appearance as the rest of the housing.
66Mayor of LondonThe London should explore the development of sites in their own ownershiptomaximise their contribution to affordable housing provision, includingthe possible provision of land to housing associations on a nil cost or10discounted housing plan does not set a Londonwide threshold of numbers of dwellingsbelow which the affordable housing requirement would not apply. that context and taking into account recent draft guidance, boroughsshould set thresholds above which affordable housing requirements willapply at no greater than 15 units, and are encouraged to seek a lowerthreshold through the UDP process where this can be justified. Boroughsare encouraged to ensure that the affordable housing requirement appliestoany site which has the capacity taking into account other policies ofthe plan to provide the minimum number of dwellings set in theirthreshold. certain exceptional cases a borough and a developer may consider thatthe required affordable housing should be provided off-site, or that afinancial contribution instead of on-site provision, is acceptable. Examplesmay include sites where there are existing concentrations of particulartypes of social housing and there are demonstrable benefits to be gainedby providing the new units in a different location, such as to create moresocially balanced communities, or to provide a particular type of housing,such as family housing. It may be more reasonable to consider a financialcontribution from a small site rather than seeking on-site Mayor will monitor affordable housing provision across London andwork closely with the Housing Corporation and individual boroughs onmonitoring delivery in the light of the availability of public subsidy andprevailing economic approachPolicy Partnership approach and sub-regional developmentframeworksThe Mayor will will work with the London Housing Board to ensure that asub-regional approach is embedded in the London Housing Strategy andthat the Board’s funding recommendations to Government seek resourcesfor cross-borough and sub-regional Mayor strongly supports a partnership approach to the provision of affordable housing. He looks to borough housing and planning
The London PlanMayor of London 67departments to work more closely and for house builders, boroughs and registered social landlords to take a more pro-active approach in pre-application discussions, public consultation and negotiations over12planning agreements. In addition the Mayor wishes to work with sub-regional partnerships to address the delivery of affordable housingand other sub-regional policies (see Chapter 5). Mayor will be discussing with government ways in which moreflexible arrangements could be introduced at the sub-regional level, while ensuring that the provision is reasonably related to meeting need in the local -use developments and affordable detailed in Chapter 3, Part B, UDPs should seek mixed uses whereverappropriate and practical in order to create more successful, sustainableand balanced predominance of single-use commercial buildings can detract fromthe liveability and vitality of central London and major town -use development creates greater use of buildings and areasthroughout the day and night, promotes more sustainable forms ofdevelopment and reduces the need to it can be demonstrated that provision of housing, includingaffordable housing, is necessary to ensure an acceptable balance of usesin a mixed use development. Such an affordable housing requirementshould be secured through a Section 106 agreement consistent withguidance in Paragraph B11 (ii) in Circular 1/ needs and specialist housing Policy Special needs and specialist housingUDP policies should provide for special needs housing, including sheltered housing with care support, staffed hostels and residential care homes, based on up-to-date estimates of vulnerable and disadvantaged groups have special housing types of housing include sheltered housing with care support, staffedhostels, refuges, foyers and care homes. Many people in housing needhave other needs that require care and support. Their needs should beidentified and assessed as part of borough Supporting People groups will live in hostels in connection with their occupation, suchas nurses, police or students. Shared accommodation or houses inmultiple occupation often provide housing for people unable to gain
68Mayor of LondonThe London Planaccess to social rented housing or to afford market home ownership orrents. Where such accommodation is of a reasonable standard, itsprovision helps contribute to meeting housing demand and should beencouraged. It should however be recognised that for many people withspecial housing needs, self-contained permanent housing is moreappropriate than shared promotion and protection of all such housing provision will involveclose liaison among borough planning, housing and social services, healthauthorities and hospitals, the voluntary sector and private care London's travellers and gypsies Boroughs should, in co-ordination with neighbouring boroughs anddistricts, assess the accommodation needs of gypsies and travellers and review the pitch capacity of each policies should •protect existing sites•set out criteria for identifying the suitability of new sites•identify them where shortfalls Mayor recognises the needs of gypsies’ nomadic lifestyles and theneed to protect existing sites and review pitches. Despite repeal of thestatutory requirement to make adequate provision for gypsies residing inlocal authority areas, boroughs should still continue to have regard to theaccommodation needs of gypsies and travellers and formulate policies toassess the suitability of new of residential accommodation, including affordable housing andspecial needs housing Policy Loss of housing and affordable housingUDP policies should prevent the loss of housing, including affordablehousing, without its planned replacement at existing or higher Loss of hostels, staff accommodation and sharedaccommodationUDP policies should resist the loss of hostels, staff accommodation and shared accommodation that meet an identified housing need, unlessthe existing floorspace is satisfactorily re-provided to an equivalent orgreater standard. Policies should resist the loss of housing to short-termprovision (lettings less than 90 days).
The London PlanMayor of London the level of need, existing housing must be retained where possible and appropriate, except where there are acceptable plans for its replacement. Short term lettings especially for holiday lets, canresult in a serious loss of housing, and should be resisted. Such lettingsrequire specific planning consent under the GLC (General Powers) Acts1973 and Mayor’s approach to estate renewals is to take into account theregeneration benefits to the local community, the proportion of affordablehousing in the surrounding area, and the amount of affordable housingbeing, or planned to be, provided elsewhere in the borough. Whereredevelopment of affordable housing is proposed, it should not bepermitted unless it is replaced by better quality accommodation, providingat least an equivalent sites and premises providing either an element of care, ordedicated homes for key public sector employees such as nurses andpolice officers, are a finite resource and are often threatened by highervalue uses. Where shortfalls of special needs housing have beenidentified, the possibility of other providers of special needs housingusing the premises should be ’s diverse the provision of additional housing addresses the central issue ofpopulation growth, it needs to be accompanied by the necessary facilitiestoensure a good quality of life, together with the social infrastructurenecessary to enable communities to operate. In London, this is made amore challenging task by the size and diversity of London’s differentcommunities of neighbourhood, identity and interest, as well as theimpact of extent of poverty and its impact on different parts of, and14communities in, London is analysed in London Divided. Like all forms of deprivation, poverty disproportionately affects black and minorityethnic communities and other disadvantaged groups. This part of the plan examines some of those issues in more detail and sets out broadpolicies to address them, cross-referencing to other parts of this the needs of a diverse populationPolicy Addressing the needs of London’s diverse populationUDP policies should identify the needs of the diverse groups in their area. They should address the spatial needs of these groups, and ensurethat they are not disadvantaged both through general policies for
70Mayor of LondonThe London Plandevelopment and specific policies relating to the provision of socialinfrastructure (policy ), the public realm, inclusive design and local distinctiveness (policies , and ). Existing facilities that meet the needs of particular groups should be protected and whereshortfalls have been identified, policies should seek measures to addressthem 3 draws attention to those policies in this plan that are particularlyrelevant to addressing the needs of each of the groups outlined in thesupporting paragraphs languages and cultures are represented in London than in any othercity in the world. This diversity is one of London's greatest strengths,accounting for its world city status in the truest sense, and must besupported and built upon. London’s children speak over 300 languages, 13a third of the population is of black and minority ethnic origin, one in 14eight Londoners is aged over 65and 20 per cent of households in16London include a disabled only are some communities and individuals disadvantaged by wherethey live, some also experience other forms of disadvantage anddiscrimination. The paragraphs below outline some of the key spatial andland use issues faced by different communities. Building on these issues,the Mayor will prepare Supplementary Planning Guidance to helpboroughs implement policy people continue to be excluded from many mainstream activitiesthat other Londoners take for granted. Many lose out when it comes towork, housing, leisure, health and social care and are frequently deniedthe opportunity to participate fully as equal citizens. All too often, thedesign of the built environment and transport either ignores the needs of disabled people and creates barriers to inclusion or provides access in a segregated and separate way, making disabled people unnecessarilydependent on others. These issues are addressed in Chapter 4, Part B ofthis plan and the Mayor has prepared draft Supplementary PlanningGuidance on them. Inability to access many of London’s opportunities andattractions, including the opportunity to work, restricts the independenceof disabled people and means that instances of poverty, social exclusionand isolation among disabled people is higher than average, with manydisabled people restricted to certain local areas. Disabled people are twiceas likely to be unemployed as non-disabled people, are more likely to livein unsuitable or inaccessible housing without essential amenities, and
The London PlanMayor of London 71have difficulty using many public transport facilities with ease as a resultof poor design and management practices. London’s older per cent of London’s population is aged 65 or over and three 17per cent of London’s total population is over the age of 80. Older peoplecontribute to the wealth of London’s society through sharing theirexperience and skills, through work, volunteering and their role inextended families and, often, their disposable income contributes toLondon’s growing leisure economy. While many people will naturally seektoleave the city when they no longer need to live there for work reasons,research suggests that many pensioners would prefer to stay but feel they18cannot do so. One of the reasons cited is that older people aredisproportionately affected by housing of low quality and often feel thatsocial and health care does not meet their needs. Many pensioners inLondon live in households without a car. Convenient, cheap, safe andreliable public transport is therefore a priority for them. Many olderpeople would be more predisposed to remain in London after retirement if London’s environmental quality was higher, and the provision of basicfacilities such as accessible places to meet, public toilets and streetfurniture were ’s children and young people young people value the range of things to do in London and likethe excitement of living in a world-famous place, many are excluded fromenjoying it. Paradoxically, London, one of the world’s richest cities, hasone of the biggest populations of deprived children in the developedworld, many of them from ethnic minorities. The most important cause of child poverty is lack of employment among households with dependentchildren. Nearly a quarter of households with children in London, andnearly a third in inner London, have no adult in employment. Thiscompares to 16 per cent affects children and young people in many ways. It may meanovercrowded and poor quality housing conditions, poor health andnutrition, lower levels of education attainment and restricted recreationalchoices and mobility. London has the highest rates of teenage drugdependency, homelessness and pregnancy in the UK as well as a highproportion of other groups with key needs, such as care leavers, refugees,young carers, disabled children, often doubly disadvantaged by povertyand discrimination. Children, young people and their parents are veryconcerned about crime and safety. The provision of high quality childcare,play, leisure, cultural and educational facilities across London isundoubtedly a determinant of children’s future life chances. These,
72Mayor of LondonThe London Plancombined with inadequate provision of safe play spaces, restrict children’sactivities and affect their physical and mental development. Children needtobe provided with opportunities to be independently mobile. Reliable,safe and cheap public transport has a vital role to play. The Mayor’s draftChildren and Young People’s Strategy sets out priorities for creating agenuinely child-friendly city, recognising that children and young peoplehave the right to participate in decisions affecting their in women’s experiences of London are affected by concerns about the gender pay-gap, childcare, health facilities and personal safety,particularly in the public realm but also on public transport. Women aresignificant contributors to London’s economy. They represent 46 per centof all taxpayers in London. However, on average in London, women earnonly 77 per cent of men’s earnings per hour. This means less ability to buya home, less savings for retirement and personal investment. The lives ofwomen living in London depend crucially on public policy and the futureof London’s public services. Women make up over 67 per cent of theworkforce in the public services sector and are the greatest users of publicservices. Therefore low pay rates and poor services affect women the domestic arena, women still have the main responsibility ofsupporting children, elderly people and those with limiting illness. Theyare more likely to do the shopping and transport children alongsideworking, mainly part-time. Because of the inadequacy of public transportand because women often make a range of complex local journeys, theyfeel obliged to acquire cars. Those that cannot afford to are furtherrestricted in job opportunities. Women need convenient, affordable andsafe public transport and access to affordable childcare ’s black and minority ethnic a third of all Londoners are from black and minority ethnic13groups. While they share many of the generic needs of all Londoners, or have additional needs concomitant with their gender, age, sexuality or disability, at the same time, many black and minority ethnic groupshave distinct spatial needs. The government’s Social Exclusion Unitrecently reported that: ‘While there is much variation within and betweendifferent ethnic groups, overall, people from minority ethnic communitiesare more likely than others to live in deprived areas and in unpopular andovercrowded housing. They are more likely to be poor and to be19unemployed, regardless of their age, gender and qualifications’. The costof housing in London often prohibits families from being able to accessthe type or size of accommodation required and hence overcrowding andpoor housing conditions can be a problem for these communities. Manyblack and minority ethnic groups are prevented from enjoying life to the
The London PlanMayor of London 73full because of fear of crime and racial abuse. Discrimination in London’slabour market is a recurrent problem for many black and minority ethnicgroups, particularly young black ’s gay men, lesbians, bisexuals and trans ’s lesbians, gay men and bisexuals experience discrimination basedon society’s attitude to homosexuality. Trans people experience genderidentity discrimination. For the lesbians, gay men, bisexuals and transpeople, this manifests itself in hate crimes and harassment. A lack ofawareness of the way discrimination impacts on these communities,particularly with regard to housing, employment, counselling, adviceservices, and their individual safety in public spaces and on publictransport often means that mainstream services may not meet their20particular needs. London has the largest lesbians, gay men, bisexuals andtrans people population in the country. Some estimates state that lesbians,gay men, bisexuals and trans people make up 10 per cent of the capital’s21populationand that almost a half of lesbians, gay men, bisexuals andtrans people experience discrimination at work because of the sexuality or22gender identity. These issues are compounded further for black andminority ethnic lesbians, gay men, bisexuals and trans people, who mayalso experience racial discrimination. Further research and supporting dataon the experiences and needs of lesbians, gay men, bisexuals and transpeople is ’s refugees and asylum large majority of refugees and asylum seekers coming to the UK live inLondon, and the numbers have grown significantly in recent years. Theyare some of the most insecure, vulnerable and socially excluded barriers facing refugees and asylum seekers coincide with those facedby non-refugee black and minority ethnic Londoners, but they also havedistinct needs that present specific challenges. The need for access toboth temporary and permanent affordable accommodation, in both thesocial and private rented sector, is an overwhelming concern for have health needs particular to their circumstances and reportdifficulty in accessing basic primary health care. Again, further research is needed to help address these for Community policies in this plan aim to ensure an inclusive London that buildsupon its diversity, and is sensitive to the needs and preferences of itsconstituent groups. The Mayor places particular priority on ensuring thatas London develops and changes, it does so explicitly taking into account,and where possible addressing, the needs of communities and othergroups posing particular strategic planning issues as outlined above.
74Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThis will benefit all Londoners, as it helps foster an inclusive, open and considerate theory, the sheer scale and variety of London should mean that there areunparalleled opportunities for all to thrive. In practice, many face difficultiesthrough the competition for space and transport (which paradoxically can act as a barrier rather than a connection) and find that facilities that areprovided for ‘everyone’ fail to recognise their particular solutions are too specific and detailed to be included in a strategicplan and their delivery is not the responsibility of the Mayor. Howeverthere is a clear strategic need for an approach which ensures that,throughout London, issues of equity, and catering for the needs of all insociety, including, for example, faith groups, are addressed at every leveland that UDPs and other more local actions include appropriate extent and nature of the needs of these groups will vary according toeach neighbourhood. It is for the boroughs, working with the localstrategic partnership and other relevant locally based organisations, toidentify the communities of identity and interest most at need within a particular area and the mechanisms by which the development plan,development process and other strategies, can contribute towardsaddressing policies of this plan relate to meeting the needs of London'scommunities of interest and identity, and a summary of them is includedin Annex 3. The Mayor will also prepare Supplementary PlanningGuidance on using the planning system to meet the needs of equalitytarget groups. This will make use of the existing experience of theboroughs and involve extensive consultation and community relating to policing and community safety and crime reductionare also important in improving the quality of life of many include sensitive design and lighting, joint action to tackle crime on estates and measures taken through regeneration initiatives. Initiativesrelating to designing out crime are further discussed in Chapter 4, Part , safe and efficient public transport particularly helps groups such as women, children and disabled people. Vulnerable groups such aschildren should be protected by initiatives such as ‘safe routes to schools’.
The London PlanMayor of London 75Policy Protection and enhancement of social infrastructure andcommunity facilitiesUDP policies should assess the need for social infrastructure andcommunity facilities in their area, including children’s play and recreationfacilities, services for young people, older people and disabled people, as well as libraries, community halls, meeting rooms, places of worship and public toilets. Adequate provision for these facilities is particularlyimportant in major areas of new development and should seek to ensure that appropriate facilities are providedwithin easy reach by walking and public transport of the population that use them. The net loss of such facilities should be and affordable community facilities are key to enabling thecommunity to function. Local assessments of need will help to identifygaps in the provision of social infrastructure which the developmentprocess can then seek to address. This is in line with concepts ofsustainable communities. In some areas, additional community facilities tothose listed above, may be The voluntary and community sectorThe Mayor will and boroughs should assist the voluntary and communitysector in delivering the objectives of this plan. In particular, boroughsshould, when reviewing UDPs, consult voluntary and communityorganisations and include policies which address their need for accessibleand affordable and community organisations are integral to the provision of suitable social infrastructure within London. Boroughs should providefor appropriate space, including access for disabled people, to meet thenecessary operational requirements of voluntary and communityorganisations. This will only be achieved through active engagement withthe voluntary and community organisations operating within the London’s healthcare services and promoting the health ofLondoners Policy Health objectivesUDP policies should promote the objectives of the NHS Plan, LocalDelivery Plans and Modernisation Programmes and the organisation anddelivery of health care in the borough. This should be in partnership withthe strategic health authorities, primary care trusts and Local StrategicPartnerships and with voluntary and community organisations involved in delivering health services.
76Mayor of LondonThe London ’s health service is vital to maintaining London as an exemplary,sustainable world city. Its influence goes far beyond the primary role itplays in delivering health care. It is one of the capital’s major employers,employing over 140,000 people in London (excluding contract workers),23over 4,000 workers in each .81The NHS Plan, ‘A Plan for Investment. A Plan for Reform’ (2000), isintended to redesign patient care and treatment around patients’ needs,and the NHS has now embarked upon the largest building programme inits history. Over the lifetime of this plan many major developments arescheduled for London in the acute, community and mental health .82The NHS and Local Delivery Plans provide the vision and plan for how theNHS, at the local level, will modernise services, improve the health of thelocal population and narrow inequalities in health. There is a move awayfrom big district hospitals serviced by small GP practices, to a variety ofspecialist and generalist hospitals linked to a range of primary health careservices including larger practices with GPs and other professional staff,NHS walk-in centres and healthy living centres. The NHS will work withkey partners in local government, private business, voluntary andcommunity organisations as well as patients on this agenda. The NHS’investment and reform programme will lead to changes in the nature and location of service delivery and have land use implications. Theprogramme will result in heath care developments on new sites, theextension and alteration to existing health care sites and buildings andthe redevelopment and/or disposal of some existing health care and borough planning processes will need to work together tounderstand and reflect such changes in local .83The shortage of affordable housing in the capital for key workers on lowand moderate incomes is creating a serious skills shortage in many keypublic sector institutions including the NHS. The importance of affordablehousing for such workers has been addressed earlier in this section and iscritical for the recruitment and retention of NHS facilitiesPolicy Locations for health careUDP policies should support the provision of additional healthcare withinthe borough as identified by the strategic health authorities and primarycare trusts. The preferred locations for hospitals, primary healthcarecentres, GP practices and dentists should be identified in appropriatelocations accessible by public transport and with particular reference topolicies , and .
The London PlanMayor of London trends, as well as policy shifts, determine the scale ofhealthcare need in particular locations, and adequate healthcare facilitiesmay often be needed as part of large scale commercial and housingdevelopments. The needs of older Londoners particularly, in respect of residential and nursing home provision, also needs to be the same time, there are existing geographical differences in access toprimary care and the average list size of GPs across London. Planningcan contribute towards addressing such disparities by ensuring theprovision of primary care facilities as part of new residential andcommercial developments (including through Section 106 agreements),encouraging additional provision in areas identified to be in need of additional primary care facilities and recognising locations such as towncentres as appropriate areas for healthcare Medical excellenceUDP policies should promote the continued role of London as a nationaland international centre of medical excellence and specialised of pounds feed into London’s economy from money spent bynon-UK residents on health services in the capital. London forms the hubof health-related research and development in the southeast of England24and is where 25 per cent of UK doctors are trained. It is thus a centre for clinical, training and research excellence. The networks, research andfacilities that support London’s role as a centre of medical excellence andspecialist facilities should be public healthPolicy Health impactsBoroughs should have regard to the health impacts of developmentproposals as a mechanism for ensuring that major new developmentspromote public health within the is far more than the absence of illness; rather it is a state ofphysical, mental and social wellbeing. A person’s health is therefore notonly linked to age and gender, but to wider factors such as education,employment, housing, social networks, air and water quality, access toaffordable nutritious food, and access to social and public services inaddition to health care. The Mayor will, in collaboration with strategicpartners, produce additional guidance to boroughs on promoting public health.
78Mayor of LondonThe London London Health Commission’s latest review of health in London showsthat notable geographical variations in life expectancy and infantmortality continue to exist across London, and these exhibit a highcorrelation with those Areas for Regeneration outlined in Chapter 2, Part A. Meeting national targets such as those on child poverty, smokingand teenage pregnancy also need to be considered. policies included within this plan have a part to play in promotinggood health and seeking to address inequalities in health. Policies of thisplan, which are particularly important for promoting the health ofLondoners, are listed in Annex 3 and will help boroughs identify thepotential health impacts of London’s education system Primary and secondary schoolsPolicy Education facilitiesUDP policies should reflect the demands for pre–school, school andcommunity learning facilities, taking into account GLA demographicprojections, and should ensure adequate provision in partnership with the local education authority, local strategic partnership and should provide a criteria based approach to the provision of different types of educational facilities and the expansion of existingfacilities, taking into account:•the need for new facilities•the potential for expansion of existing provision•the possibility of inter-borough provision•safe and convenient access by pedestrians, cyclists and by publictransport users•the other policies in this plan, including safety, sustainable design and construction, inclusive design, enhancement of the public realmand the protection of the green belt, Metropolitan Open Land andother open spaces in Mayor will continue to work with the government and boroughs toassess and review strategic educational needs and the land useimplications of to a high quality school education is a fundamental determinant of the future opportunities and life choices of London’s children andyoung people. By 2016, London’s school age population is projected toincrease by almost eight per cent. Just over half of this total growth of25140,000 is expected to be in outer London. Boroughs should ensure
The London PlanMayor of London 79adequate school provision to cope with this increase, including theavailability of land for any potential school already in educational use should be safeguarded and new sitesidentified to meet additional demands or changes in provision. Boroughsshould identify at an early stage the need for additional schools,particularly where major new housing development is planned, and the Mayor will assist with this process. The identification of suitable sitesshould be carried out taking into account policies on the protection ofopen space in London and their accessibility by public transport as well as by appropriate, boroughs should use planning obligations to addressshortfalls in school capacity arising from planned new housingdevelopment. Developers may be required to contribute to funding one-off capital costs of providing new permanent and temporaryclassroom space in order to meet rising school to the school curriculum and concurrent targets for educationalattainment may also require the expansion and/or provision of additionalschool facilities, including facilities for children with special needs. Theuse of school buildings after hours, to support learning among the widercommunity, is one possible outcome. Demand for additional pre-schoolfacilities may also rise, not only as a result of the government’s Early YearsStrategy, but because of changing work and lifestyle and further education Policy Higher and further educationThe Mayor will and boroughs should work with the LDA and the higherand further education sectors to ensure that the needs of the educationsectors are addressed in Sub-Regional Development Frameworks and in UDPs (see also policy ). This will include:•promoting policies aimed at supporting and maintaining London’sinternational reputation as a centre of excellence in higher education•taking account of the future development needs of the sector,including the provision of new facilities and potential for expansion of existing provision•recognising the particular requirements of Higher EducationInstitutions for key locations with good public transport access, andhaving regard to their sub-regional and regional sphere of operation•recognising the distinctive locational and access needs of FurtherEducation establishments•supporting the provision of student accommodation.
80Mayor of LondonThe London PlanProvision for the education sector must take account of the other policies in this plan, including mixed use, safety, sustainable design and construction, inclusive design, enhancement of the public realm and the protection of Green Belt, Metropolitan Open Land and otheropen spaces in education in London provides an unparalleled choice ofundergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes, continuingprofessional development and advanced research. It is also a majoremployer and attracts major international companies able to benefit fromthe universities’ research reputation, such as in pharmaceuticals andbiomedicine. As many of London’s students, both undergraduate andpostgraduate, choose to stay in the capital after graduation, universitiesare also important feeders to the labour supply, particularly of people with the higher order skills necessary for London to remain a globallycompetitive government plans to expand further and higher education. Highereducation institutions (HEIs) need to work with boroughs at the earliestopportunity over planning future developments. Yet HEIs have a widersphere of operation than a single borough and Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks could be a mechanism to address these to further education is important for the large proportion ofLondoners who do not go into higher education. It plays a key role in skills development and life long learning (see Chapter 3, Part B).4Communities, neighbourhoods and the development mechanisms to ensure that development and services meet local people’s needs, and that people are empowered to take their own decisions at the neighbourhood level, is vital to creating vibrantneighbourhoods and a sense of community. This section outlines policiestoensure communities and neighbourhoods not only benefit from growthbut are also engaged in the development community strategies and the development processPolicy Community strategiesIn preparing community strategies, boroughs should take account of guidance contained in this plan on a number of issues for onwardinclusion in UDPs. The following issues are particularly important:•areas of change identified in Chapter 5 of this plan•maintaining London’s world city status and functions•employment and job creation
The London PlanMayor of London 81•relating development to improvements in public transport accessibility•provision of affordable and accessible housing•support for London’s health and education services, improving healthand reducing health inequalities•ensuring communities benefit from development including throughSection 106 agreements•maintaining and enhancing London’s environmental quality and open spaces.•ensuring efficient use of available resources and waste management. strategies, as policy statements of Local Strategic Partnerships(LSPs), provide the context in which a range of strategies and plans are prepared, including UDPs. It is important that such strategies reflectbroader strategic visions and frameworks, including the London Mayor sees the role of the London Plan as providing advice tocommunity strategies, as they are prepared and revised, on strategic,regional and sub-regional issues. Particular issues of co-ordination mayarise where priority areas for action straddle borough boundaries. He seesthe best way of taking these issues forward, involving LSPs, theCommunity Empowerment Networks (in areas receiving NeighbourhoodRenewal Funding) and other strategic partners, is through thedevelopment of the Sub-Regional Development Frameworks. Theframeworks will also provide the opportunity to set out the critical linksbetween social, economic and environmental community impact and ensuring community benefitPolicy Meeting floor targetsUDP policies should set out how development in, or adjacent to, Areas for Regeneration (see Chapter 5) could contribute towards meetingnational floor targets and locally determined targets for employment,crime, health, education, social housing and the environment, as well as26wider neighbourhood renewal initiatives. The Mayor will take account of the contribution of a development towards meeting floor targets when considering strategic planning Social and economic impact assessmentsMajor developments in, or with the potential to impact on, Areas for Regeneration should be subject to social and economic impactassessments. These should consider the direct and indirect effects of adevelopment on Areas for Regeneration, and be prepared by developers,
82Mayor of LondonThe London Planin close collaboration with local community organisations and other local partners. Arrangements for fast-tracking such assessments should be putin neighbourhood needs, identified by local community organisationsand other local partners, should be used as a basis for negotiating localcommunity benefit from development, including Section 106 that the development process supports the objectives of theneighbourhood renewal agenda requires that boroughs, in their UDPs,should spell out a strategic and transparent approach to assessing theimpact of development on areas of regeneration and the procurement ofcommunity benefit from development. The Mayor is particularly keen thatcommunities adjacent to development and likely to be affected by it havethe opportunity to work jointly with the public and private sectors toconsider the impact of development and to secure benefits that are mostappropriate to should specify the ways in which their UDP assists in meetingthe aims and objectives of area regeneration initiatives and in particularthe role of UDPs in meeting national floor targets set by Government andlocally determined targets, set by individual defined targets will vary according to the circumstances of aborough. The London Plan cannot directly influence all floor targets, butmany of its policies can contribute towards achieving them. Policies in thisplan relating to the provision of affordable housing (Chapter 3, Part A)and improving skills and employment opportunities (Chapter 3, Part B)will be particularly will be expected to consider the wider social and economicimpacts of proposals on Areas for Regeneration by carrying out localsocial and economic impact assessments for developments of a particularscale or in particular areas to be specified in UDPs. Such impactassessments should not be confined to development proposals in Areasfor Regeneration only, but should be expected for those developmentswithin a borough with the potential to impact significantly on them. UDPs should outline what will be covered by a social and economicimpact assessment having regard to:•identification of the impact of development on a locality, and action required to minimise any adverse effects such as appropriateplanning conditions
The London PlanMayor of London 83•the potential contribution of a development to the achievement of neighbourhood renewal floor targets•the process by, and extent to which, developers have engaged localstakeholders (including those who represent or work with the mostdisadvantaged communities and groups, such as women’sorganisations, disabled people’s organisations, older people’sorganisations) in considering the social and economic impacts of the proposed development on their Mayor will work with boroughs and other strategic partners to look at the proposed content of social and economic assessments and addressthe impacts by these assessments into the development of policies at thesub-regional level. The GLA will work with other strategic partners tofulfill the requirements of the Race Relations (Amendment) Act 2000which requires local authorities and other public bodies to carry out raceequality impact local social and economic impact assessments should be a participatory process that enables local communities to articulate theirown interpretations of the impact of development, in conjunction with anexpert or technical assessment. These should be undertaken as part of thepreparation of an application for submission and not at the post-submission stage. Local community organisations are important partnersin this process. Fast-track mechanisms should be put in place to ensurethat the development process is not and economic impact assessments do not take away fromEnvironmental Impact Assessment requirements, but should be considered in conjunction with identified neighbourhood needs should be used as a basis fornegotiating procurement of community benefit from development oncean application has been submitted. They should be identified inconsultation with local community organisations and other local partners,having regard to borough community and neighbourhood renewalstrategies. Boroughs may also wish to consider measures to promote landownership and long-term community involvement in the ownership andmanagement of public and other facilities, in line with the recognition of the advantages of asset-based community regeneration.
84Mayor of LondonThe London PlanSupporting neighbourhood planning and the preparation ofneighbourhood plansPolicy Supporting neighbourhood plansThe Mayor will encourage communities and neighbourhood-basedorganisations to prepare planning frameworks or neighbourhood plansbased upon identifying local economic, social, physical and environmentalneeds and opportunities to strengthen local Neighbourhood Renewal Strategies. Mayor encourages boroughs to adopt locally prepared frameworks or plans including those prepared by housing association-led estateregeneration schemes, Development Trusts and Urban RegenerationCompanies as supplementary planning guidance. Local land use policies,developed at the neighbourhood level, may be too detailed to be containedin UDPs, but may be the most effective way of relating neighbourhoodrenewal and community based regeneration to the land use planningprocess at the neighbourhood level. Boroughs may wish to support thedelivery of their objectives by adopting such frameworks asSupplementary Planning Guidance or Site Development on the scope and status of neighbourhood plans is detailed in A Strategic Planning Framework for Community Strategies and26Community Based for National Statistics2Homes for a World City. Report of the Mayor’s Housing Commission. GLA 2001 3London’s Housing Capacity, GLA, September 2000 4London Housing Capacity Methodology Study. GLA July 2003 5See also the Consultation Paper on Proposed Changes to PPG3 Housing (ODPM, July 2003)6Meeting Part M and designing Lifetime Homes. Joseph Rowntree Foundation 1999 7NATWHAG (National Wheelchair Housing Association Group) Wheelchair Housing DesignGuide. 1997 8Homes and Communities in London. London Housing Strategy 2003. London Housing Board9Circular 1/200010Circular 6/200311See also Para 3 in consultation paper on proposed changes to PPG3 Housing (ODPMJuly 2003)12Future Housing Provision: Speeding up delivery. SDS Technical Report 2. GLA and theHouse Builders Federation 200213London Divided, GLA, 200214Without Prejudice? Exploring ethnic differences in London. GLA , 2000 16Greater London Action on London Disability. London Disability Statistics. GLAD 1998 17London’s Population Projections. GLA 19Cabinet Office. National Strategy for Neighbourhood Renewal, HMSO, 2000
The London PlanMayor of London 8520GALOP, 199821DETR, Preparing Community Strategies: Government Guidance to Local Authorities, 2001 22GLA Equalities Framework 2002 23Travers, T et al. Capital Asset: London’s healthy contribution to jobs and services. LSE,NHS Executive, Imperial College, 200024NHS London, Regional Office, Response to ‘Towards the London Plan’, 200125Planning for London’s growth. GLA 200226A Strategic Planning Framework for community strategies and community basedregeneration – GLA, 2002.
86Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 873Bworking in part addresses Objective 3 – to make London a more prosperous city with strong and diverse economic growth. It looks at the nature of economic change in London to 2020, and the potential implications for in London is in five sections:•the first briefly sets out the context in which London’s economy is developing•the second compares the demand for floor-space with potential office space supply and contains policies to address potential supply-side constraints•the third sets out policies for dealing with manufacturing andwholesale distribution•the fourth examines the issues facing emerging growth sectors•the fifth examines the potential job-skills mismatch and other barrierstoemployment and sets out the implications for future economic contextPolicy Developing London’s economyThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to support and to developLondon’s economy as one of the three world cities. He will:•seek a range of premises of different types, sizes and costs to meet the needs of different sectors of the economy and firms of differenttypes and sizes and to remove supply side blockages for key sectors,including the finance and business services sector•match the spatial application of policies to the needs of differentsectors and markets within the London economy including small and medium enterprises and black and minority ethnic businesses•establish a ‘research observatory’ and ‘sector commissions’ to monitorthe implementation of this plan to ensure that it is updated asappropriate to respond to the different sectors of the Londoneconomy, and to their linkages and needs•promote London as a location for international and European agencies•ensure cohesion with regional policy to secure sustainable relationsbetween London and its wider region in terms of urban forms, flowsand processes•facilitate social enterprise and community development. basic analysis of London’s place in the global economy has been set out in Chapter 1. In total, London is estimated to generate at least £130billion each year, of which overseas exports of goods and services are1estimated to be £35 billion. Financial and business services account for53 per cent of the international exports.
88Mayor of LondonThe London because of its global position, London also has a key role inEurope. Two-fifths of London’s international exports are to the European2Union. London is developing more distinctive European functions, notleast because it is the largest city within the central zone of the NorthWest Europe Metropolitan Area – the single most powerful economiczone in Europe. the regional level, London is at the centre of a potential market ofaround 18 million people, by far the largest in the UK. In this it providesdirect employment not just for Londoners, but for over 700,0003commuters. The potential growth in jobs in London over the period ofthe plan will cover many different sectors and locations. The overall policyabove, for developing London’s economy, reflects the Mayor’s intention tosee the economy developed so that it can potentially bring benefit to will require extensive partnership working across all sectors andincluding the London boroughs and neighbouring authorities. The typesof sustainable relationships which London will seek with the widersoutheast are set out in paragraphs – Mayor’s Economic Development Strategy provides further detail on achieving London’s potential for economic growth. It providesparticular guidance on and support for non-spatial and non-land useinitiatives, especially the roles and needs of economic clusters, small andmedium sized enterprises, black and other ethnic minority entrepreneursand the voluntary and community sectors. This plan complements theMayor’s Economic Development Strategy, supporting the use of theplanning system to secure suitable and affordable premises (see and ).2Demand and supply of office 2002, London’s office stock totalled million square metres. Onlyabout a quarter of this is found outside the Central and East and Hounslow dominate the suburban London market,emphasising the pull of Heathrow. 1 outlines the basis for the employment projections used in thisplan and table in Chapter 5 sets out projected sub-regionalemployment change in London from 2001 to 2016, showing that the net overall growth in jobs would be 636,000. Given the dominance of the office-based business sector in these employment projections, theavailability of suitable office accommodation is a critical issue.
The London PlanMayor of London most robust proxy for net office demand is taken to be total4employment in the financial and business services sector. This sector is forecast to grow by 463,000 net jobs by shows the projected growth by sub-region. There is substantialpressure for further growth in the Central Activities Zone, where the mainconcentration of employment already exists and where a significant partof the market wishes to continue to locate. There is increasing pressure onthe East sub-region (which includes the City), especially on the Isle ofDogs, where the finance and business services sector is expanding as acomplementary location to the City and West End. Chapters 2 and 5identify key locations across all London’s sub-regions where jobs growthcould be for office based jobs and floorspace, 2001 – 2016 Office based Demand for office floorspace(1)(3)employment growth(million sq m)Total % of total growthFloorspace growth(2) (1) Roger Tym & Partners, Demand & Supply of Business Space in London, SDS TechnicalReport 21. GLA. 2002(2) CAZ includes parts of Central and East London.(3) derived from Roger Tym & Partners op cit an average of 16 square metres per workeris assumed and applied tothe projected increase of 463,000 jobs, this indicates a demand for anadditional million square metres of office business space. It is prudenttoplan for uncertainties over future trends in occupancy ratios andvacancy rates. On this basis, London could require between 7 million million square metres more office floorspace by 2016. These figuresset the broad parameters for monitoring, managing and planning forsubstantial growth in the office-based applies a working projection of million square metresadditional office floorspace to the spatial allocation of jobs.
90Mayor of LondonThe London series of benchmarks will be monitored to keep the relationshipsbetween demand and supply under review. Monitoring will also beinformed by the London Office Review demand and supplyPolicy Office demand and supply Working with strategic partners, the Mayor will:•seek a significant increment to current stock through changes of useand development of vacant brownfield sites. Key locations are set outin Chapters 2 and 5•seek the renovation and renewal of existing stock to increase andenhance the quality and flexibility of London’s office market offer, in line with policies for maximising the intensity of development•seek the provision of a variety of type, size and cost of office premises to meet the needs of all sectors, including small and medium sized enterprises •put in place processes to investigate and, if necessary bring forward,further potential -regional partnerships and boroughs should:•promote the provision of additional space and the rejuvenation of existing office space in line with the other policies of this plan•work with the LDA, investors, developers, land owners and potentialoccupiers to bring forward development capacity as efficiently aspossible, co-ordinating their activities and interests to avoid planningdelays and facilitating site assembly, if necessary, through thecompulsory purchase Office provisionThe Mayor will and boroughs should seek to rejuvenate office-basedactivities in the Central Activities Zone and in strategically specifiedlocations in view of their contribution to the London economy and theirrole in rejuvenating suburban town Mixed use developmentWithin the Central Activities Zone and the Opportunity Areas, whereverincreases in office floorspace are proposed they should provide for a mixof uses including housing, unless such a mix would demonstrably conflictwith other policies in this plan. Sub-Regional Development Frameworks(see Chapters 2 and 5) will give further guidance on the relevantproportions of housing and other uses to be sought.
The London PlanMayor of London is currently potential capacity to accommodate around 560,000office-based jobs by 2016. However, transport studies indicate that asubstantial part of potential development cannot be met without asignificant increase in transport capacity to certain locations. Thus thelong-term demand and supply relationship will be more difficult toreconcile than these figures suggest. Environmental improvements are alsoneeded to ensure that commercially attractive opportunities come are some significant geographic mismatches within this broadrelationship, underscored by the low rents achieved in the suburbanLondon second-hand office market, which provide little incentive for new only a few exceptions, the suburban London stock is losing itsattraction as a location for strategically important office-based rejuvenation of this market can only come about by consolidating itscurrent strengths and potential attraction. Renewal of the stock and newdevelopment should therefore focus on a few types of key locationswhere a market can be established for new and existing occupiers. All ofthese should take a more sustainable form in line with Policy . TheMayor will work with relevant partners to provide guidance to co-ordinatethis development. Typical such locations are:•strategic office centres at Croydon and Stratford and elsewhere, if justified by demand•mid-urban business parks such as the park which has been developedat Chiswick•town centre based office quarters •conventional business parks beyond the urban area, such as those at Stockley Park and Bedfont Lakes, which should become more sustainable•science parks ranging from urban incubator units to more spacious provision•existing linear office developments such as the ‘Golden Mile’ in Hounslow, which should be made more sustainable•more local, town centre based office provision, which can beconsolidated effectively to meet local needs, or where necessary,changed to other planning policy strongly supports measures to extend mixed-use6development. London’s economic growth depends heavily on an efficientlabour market and this in turn requires adequate housing provision tosustain it. Lack of housing, especially affordable housing, is already oneof the key issues facing London employers (see also Chapter 3, Part A).Thus, as a general principle, strategically important, employment-
92Mayor of LondonThe London Plangenerating development will be expected to contain other uses, whichshall include housing (see Chapter 2 and Chapter 3, Part A and Chapter 4, Part B). approach to mixed use development will be developed in the Sub-Regional Development Frameworks, although implementation ofPolicy should not await the frameworks. Exceptions to the policy will only be permitted where the requirement for such a mix woulddemonstrably undermine strategic policy for other developments,including parts of the City and the Isle of Dogs. In such areas, off-siteprovision of housing elsewhere on suitable land will be required as part of a planning ‘plan, monitor and manage’ approach will be used to reconcile officedemand and supply over the development cycles likely to be encounteredduring the term of this plan. This is likely to provide scope for changesfrom office to other uses, especially housing, providing overall capacity is sustained to meet London’s long-term office needs. It will also help toensure that provision is made for all types of office occupiers including small and medium sized enterprises and the voluntary and community sectors. 3Manufacturing and wholesale distributionPolicy Strategic Employment LocationsWith strategic partners, the Mayor will promote and manage the variedindustrial offer of the Strategic Employment Locations (SELs), set out in Annex 2 as London’s strategic reservoir of industrial should identify SELs in UDPs, and develop local policies for employment sites outside the SELs, having regard to:•the locational strategy in Chapter 2 of this plan•accessibility to the local workforce, public transport and whereappropriate, freight movement•quality and fitness for purpose of sites•the release of surplus land for other uses in order to achieve theefficient use of land in light of strategic and local assessments of industrial demand. Demand and and other services, including business services, are example, manufacturing supports many jobs in services throughoutsourcing and manufacturers can draw on London’s creative industriesusing the world class design skills of its colleges and universities.
The London PlanMayor of London wholesale distribution is forecast to grow by 14,000 jobs over the next fifteen years but manufacturing jobs are forecast to fall from320,000 in 2001 to 240,000 in 2016, a decline of 25 per , London will still have a significant and varied range ofindustrial occupiers. High value-added and design-led manufacturing will have an important role in London’s knowledge-driven may lie in engineering, biotechnology, medical devices and pharmaceutical spin-off activities from London’s universities, medicalresearch institutions and the NHS. The Mayor wishes to encourage thedevelopment and clustering of such Mayor will promote the Strategic Employment Locations framework inassociation with the LDA, boroughs and other strategic partners. This isdesigned to reconcile demand and supply and to take account ofindustry’s needs in terms of clustering, capacity, environment, accessibilityand cost requirements through two basic types of location. These areIndustrial Business Parks for companies needing a relatively good qualityenvironment and Preferred Industrial Locations to meet the needs of firmswith less demanding environmental requirements. They are listed in Annex2. Supplementary Planning Guidance has been produced to set out inmore detail how the wider policies in this plan bear on employment land,in line with national policy, including the national requirement to reviewdemand and supply of industrial land. Surplus employment land shouldhelp meet strategic and local requirements for other uses such aseducation and community activities and, in particular, growth are a number of dynamic emerging sectors, which could broadenLondon’s economic base and extend its scope for growth. They include e-business related activities and an effective Information CommunicationTechnology (ICT) infrastructure, the creative industries, and theenvironmental industries. Tourism is also a key growth industry which is discussed further in Chapter 3, Part innovationPolicy Supporting innovation Working with strategic partners, the Mayor will:•use the London Innovation and Knowledge Transfer Strategy topromote knowledge transfer and innovation, including clusters of related activities outside London
94Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•support retention and development of London’s leading edge research capabilities, for example medical research, and encourageestablishment of new foci for innovation and research should ensure an adequate supply of environmentally attractive, high quality and affordable premises, ‘incubator units’ and sites for synergy between business and research and academicinstitutions, in line with strategic office is an important factor underpinning the London parks offer potential for synergy with the capital’s 40 universities,higher education institutions and research institutions. Major science parkare located in the Lee Valley, M4 corridor, Docklands and has a concentration of the major medical research institutions in the UK. These help support major economic sectors such aspharmaceuticals and biotechnology. They, together with other keyresearch institutions, should be retained and their development needssupported. They should also develop a closer match with the regenerationneeds and potential of local areas, as set out in this Communication Technology infrastructurePolicy Improving London’s ICT infrastructureWorking with strategic partners, the Mayor will:•seek the provision of more affordable and competitive broadbandaccess for all uses, regardless of size and location, within London,taking into account the need to maintain returns on existing andfuture investment •support measures to minimise the short-term social, economic,transport and environmental costs of introducing e-infrastructure,including ducting and wireless , the private sector and other relevant agencies should:•ensure that new residential and commercial developments are e-enabled in terms of ducts to existing or proposed fibre cables,multiple duct nests for individual buildings, and internal ducting or appropriate alternative provision•co-ordinate power and development capacity to meet the needs of Internet data that will generally enhance access to broadband should besupported. The most important of these is to help co-ordinate extensions
The London PlanMayor of London 95beyond the business-based provision, running from Isle of Dogs throughcentral London to Hammersmith. The gap between strategic fibre cablesand new residential and commercial developments could be partly bridgedwith multiple duct nests and comprehensive e-enablement, if these wereprovided as a minimum requirement for new developments. Developmentand power capacity for strategically important Internet data centresshould be co-ordinated by relevant agencies in line with Policy is likely to grow further and there are already more7Londoners in the teleworkforce than in any other European impact of teleworking will be monitored closely as part of theimplementation of this -government and e-business activitiesPolicy Promotion of e-LondonWorking with strategic partners, the Mayor will:•help develop the e-government agenda for London and explore the value of producing a more comprehensive policy framework for e-related issues •identify more specifically the areas and groups currently without access to e-resources and draw up a rolling programme of mechanisms to address this•support the introduction of more effective and socially inclusive e-education for Londoners and e-support for London’s businesses,especially policies should identify and support the development of existing and new e-business clusters of economic is the centre of e-business related activities in the UK, with many world class companies from overseas establishing their Europeanheadquarters and associated activities in the capital. Clusters of e-businesses are located in west and central London (Soho, Clerkenwell,Hammersmith, Fulham and Kensington). Software businesses and largercompanies tend to locate in west London around Heathrow, Uxbridge and requirements include close proximity to public transportensuring good accessibility to the workplace for staff, open floor plans,significant flexibility in property arrangements, such as short leases, and access to high bandwidth telecoms infrastructure, with a choice of suppliers.
96Mayor of LondonThe London of the main drivers of future economic change is likely to be the linkbetween competitiveness and human capital in the knowledge-basedeconomy. High level skills (above NVQ 3) are closely correlated with useof new technology and action is needed to prevent further intensificationof the current ‘digital divide’. In particular, high level skills are requiredamong SMEs which lack the resources to develop e-capabilities (see alsoPolicy below).Creative industriesPolicy Creative industriesWorking with strategic partners, the Mayor will identify the needs of keycreative industries, especially those of micro businesses, and will seekcompetitive development capacity to retain them in London, where theybenefit from a world city policies should identify and support the development of clusters of creative industries and related activities and environments. Existingclusters should be protected. Further support should focus on developingcreative industries in identified priority areas to drive creative industries are one of the fastest growing sectors of London’seconomy and a core part of the knowledge creative industries in London include music, fashion, new media, filmand broadcasting. The sector is clustered in Soho, City fringe and parts of west London. There are also smaller or emerging clusters in Southwark,Hackney, the Lower Lea Valley and Deptford Creekside. Factors thatinfluence clusters include the availability of low cost workspace. CulturalQuarters should be encouraged within identified priority regenerationareas (see Chapter 3, Part D) and mechanisms should be established topromote sustainable property enterprises often group together in networks that provide modesof communication, knowledge exchange, business support and learning,but often lack organisational and administrative structures for sustainablegrowth. They also provide opportunities for reducing overheads throughshared resources. Appropriate support should be channelled throughthese networks by business support and training the sector does include a few large global companies, especiallyin the broadcast media, small and medium enterprises (SMEs) and soletraders are heavily represented. They can often be valuable contributors
The London PlanMayor of London 97tolocal regeneration, for example, through the involvement of artists and designers in planning and development industries and the new leisure infrastructure, including bars,restaurants and clubs, contribute to high value evening and late-night8economies in parts of town centres and central London. Chapter 3, PartD outlines a co-ordinated planning and management framework tosupport the 24-hour economy and resolve tensions with other industryPolicy Tourism industryThe Mayor, working with strategic partners, will:•develop his tourism strategy to enhance London’s existing tourismoffer and to create integrated and sustainable new products anddestinations especially outside the central London core, to dispersetourism benefits to the town centres and suburbs•lead the development of key infrastructure projects and support major events bids to enhance London’s image and economy•improve the tourist environment, visitor information and managementtoprovide a better visitor experience and manage pressures on keytourist is a world leader in attracting high value overseas visitors and isan important gateway to the UK’s regions and nations. London’s tourismalso provides employment opportunities and quality of life benefits forLondon’s communities. It helps to attract and retain talent and corporatelocation decisions that ensure economic competitiveness. As well asmaintaining the central core of activities, there are opportunities tospread tourism activity and facilities into town centres outside centralLondon, to areas such as the suburbs, in line with Policy growth in overseas visitors has not recently been maintained, and action is required to rejuvenate London’s offer and are some gaps in London’s tourism provision and its ability to bidfor major events is undermined by a lack of investment. Major investmentin the development of large-scale, high value projects such as aninternational convention centre and major new tourist attractions,particularly in east London, such as an aquarium and a national sportsstadium, should be secured where appropriate, together with an effectivestrategic events-planning framework. More detailed policies on tourismand visitor provision are included in Chapter 3, Part D, which provides the spatial framework for the Mayor’s tourism strategy.
98Mayor of LondonThe London PlanEnvironmental industriesPolicy Environmental industriesThe Mayor will and the LDA and other agencies and sub regionalpartnerships should, support the establishment of green industries andgreen practices in business through funding, training, business support,market development, promotion initiatives, demonstration projects, landuse policies and support for clusters of related policies and community strategies should identify and safeguard land and premises in appropriate locations including river- and rail-basedlocations, to secure capacity for appropriate environmental industries and facilities for recycling and reprocessing of Mayor will and boroughs should encourage demand forenvironmental goods and services by applying policies on sustainabledesign and construction in new developments and refurbishment, andthrough encouraging demand for recycled products. environmental goods and services sector is forecast to double by2010. The environmental sector spans a wide spectrum of activities fromrenewable energy generation, energy management, food chainenhancement and air pollution control to waste management andmaterials reprocessing (see also Chapter 4, Part A). London must plan totake advantage of the new growth opportunities, which will haveeconomic, social and environmental benefits, including new opportunitiesfor business start ups, development of small and medium sized enterprisesand growth and employment at a range of skills industries address issues of air and noise pollution, climate change, waste management and fuel poverty, building on policies in the Mayor's five environmental strategies covering energy,waste management, ambient noise, air quality and biodiversity (seeChapter 4, Part A). are needed to stimulate the growth of new business andemployment in energy efficiency, renewable energy generation andalternative fuels for transport. In addition to supporting theenvironmental sector specifically, the environmental performance of all London’s businesses should be improved through provision of acomprehensive framework of environmental management support andadvice. The Mayor’s Green Procurement Code can provide a starting pointfor businesses wishing to improve their environmental importance.
The London PlanMayor of London 995Improving the skills and employment opportunities for LondonersPolicy Improving the skills and employment opportunities for LondonersWorking with strategic partners, the Mayor will:•consider the spatial context in the range of policies and initiatives toimprove London's skills base through the development of theFramework for Regional Employment and Skills Action (FRESA) and the London Skills Commission •co-ordinate and provide the spatial context alongside the range of initiatives necessary to improve the employment opportunities for London and to remove barriers to employment•ensure that opportunities provided by major new development areused to assist in skills action and the targeting of job opportunities tolocal communities. London to continue to be a dynamic and competitive world city, it must incorporate and harness the opportunities that the forecastpopulation growth will bring. For London’s residents and workforce tobenefit from these opportunities, existing barriers to employment shouldbe removed and Londoners should adapt to the new skills required in thechanging business environment, technological advances and Londoners to benefit in the rise in employment opportunities inLondon, its residents, its workforce and its businesses should be offeredthe right mix of learning and training provision. The Mayor’s long-termaim is to improve the balance between people and jobs in London, tomeet social as well as wider sustainability objectives. This will involveclose partnership working with the LDA, the London Skills Commission,Social Exclusion Unit, TfL, GOL/DfES, regional bodies, sub-regionalagencies, the boroughs and partnerships and a wide range of otheragencies dealing with skills and employment, discrimination, health,housing and other relevant is the most successful region of the UK, based on thegovernment’s regional competitiveness indicators. London residentsappear highly qualified and better rewarded than their nationalcounterparts, but this masks a polarity between skilled workers and semior unskilled workers. Chapter 3, Part A discusses in more detail the role of higher and further education in skill with the Local Learning and Skills Councils, Jobcentreplus, thehigher education sector, local authorities, Government Office for London,
100Mayor of LondonThe London Planthe TUC and employer groups, the LDA will deliver the Framework forRegional Employment, Skills Action (FRESA) through the London SkillsCommission and voluntary sector and education and training FRESA will provide a single plan for maintaining and addressingLondon’s competitive skills and employment requirements. Improving thelevel and types of skills held by London residents is a major tool inincreasing equity, promoting social cohesion and improving economicefficiency, which is central to achieving the objectives set out in this barriers to to improve qualifications and increase learning will not be sufficient to ensure increased employability of those currentlydisadvantaged in the labour market. Action is also required to improvemobility, access to information, appropriate training, jobs brokers andrecruitment networks and to change the attitudes of employers to theprovision of training and the recruitment of unemployed people ingeneral, and more specifically, those disadvantaged in the labour very high rates of unemployment among certain ethnic groups inLondon is an issue of particular concern requiring concerted action toreduce labour market discrimination. Disabled people also face physicaland attitudinal barriers to employment. Equity and social cohesion inLondon is undermined by inequalities in the labour market, and unequalaccess to high quality jobs, education and learning women are restricted in accessing jobs due to the lack of affordablechildcare. This problem, while it affects other types of households, isparticularly marked for lone parent households, nearly two-thirds of whichare dependent on income support. London housing and childcare costsplay an important role in reinforcing the exclusion of many women with9children from London's labour other measures, developments could contribute to removingbarriers to the employment of women by providing adequate, affordablechildcare facilities (see also Policy ) Mayor is working with a range of partners to remove all gender,disability, racial and other barriers, which prevent groups of Londonersplaying a full and active part in the labour market (see also Policy ).
The London PlanMayor of London 101References1Centre for Economic and Business Research, London’s Contribution to the UK Economy,City Corporation, 20012Centre for Economic and Business Research, 20013Labour Force Survey, November 20014Roger Tym & Partners, Demand and Supply of Business Space in London, GLA, 2002 5London Property Research was commissioned by the GLA to review employmentdensities and investigated underlying tends. They concluded that the most up to dateand authoritative estimates are those produced by RICS/Gerald Eves, which suggest thatfor strategic planning purposes, an average of 175 sq ft (16 sqm) per worker is a robustguideline. While there appear to be some variations in density trends over time amongeconomic sub-sectors, no broad consistent pattern emerges. This plan has thereforeassumed a 175 sq ft (16 sqm) per worker figure in all calculations of floorspace Policy Guidance Notes 1 and 37E-London & The London Plan, Local Futures, GLA, 20028Mayor of London . Acting for Creativity in London, GLA, 20029Working Families Tax Credit Briefing Note, GLA, 2001
102Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 1033Cconnecting London – improving travel in part centres on Objective 5 – to improve London’s London an easier city to move around will also make a majorcontribution to achieving the other five objectives set out in theIntroduction to this achieve the Mayor’s vision of an exemplary, sustainable world city, the quality of London’s transport must be transformed. This means takingan integrated approach to transport provision and development, makingmajor improvements to public transport and tackling traffic Mayor is committed to making public transport and the pedestrianenvironment accessible to everyone, especially disabled people (seeChapter 4O in The Mayor’s Transport Strategy). Mayor’s Transport Strategy sets out policies and proposals to achievethese goals. Implementation of the programme of improvements in theTransport Strategy is vital to achieving the economic growth anddevelopment aspirations of this plan. The Transport Strategy is reflected in this plan in terms of the spatial policies that are needed to improvetravel in London over the next 20 years. The strategy will be reviewed in the light of the London Mayor will work with the boroughs, TfL, the Strategic Rail Authority(SRA), the government and a wide range of partners to implement thetravel aims and policies of this plan. Boroughs should take account of theMayor’s Transport Strategy as well as the strategic policies set out here toensure an integrated approach to their Transport Local ImplementationPlans and their section is in five parts:•the first looks at integration of transport and spatial development•the second looks at enhancing international, national and regional links•the third looks at better public transport in London•the fourth looks at reducing congestion•the last section looks at integration of transport and spatial developmentPolicy Integrating transport and developmentThe Mayor will work with TfL, the Strategic Rail Authority, thegovernment, boroughs and other partners to ensure the integration of transport and development by:
104Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•encouraging patterns and forms of development that reduce the needtotravel especially by car•seeking to improve public transport capacity and accessibility where it is needed, for areas of greatest demand and areas designated fordevelopment and regeneration, including the Thames Gateway, Central Activities Zone, Opportunity Areas, Areas for Intensificationand town centres•in general, supporting high trip generating development only at locations with both high levels of public transport accessibility and capacity, sufficient to meet the transport requirements of thedevelopment. Parking provision should reflect levels of public transport Matching development to transport capacityThe Mayor will and boroughs should consider proposals for developmentin terms of existing transport capacity, both at a corridor and local existing transport capacity is not sufficient to allow for travelgenerated by proposed developments, and no firm plans exist for asufficient increase in capacity to cater for this, boroughs should ensurethat development proposals are appropriately phased until it is knownthese requirements can be with significant transport implications should include aTransport Assessment and Travel Plan as part of planning Sustainable transport in LondonThe Mayor will and strategic partners should support:•High levels of growth in the Thames Gateway by substantial new andimproved transport infrastructure. Opportunity Areas and Areas forIntensification, particularly in east London, should be supported byimproved public transport.•Access improvements to and within town centres and their residentialhinterlands by public transport - including by improved bus services,walking and cycling - and between town centres by improved busservices, more frequent rail services and, where appropriate, new tramand bus transit schemes.•Improved, sustainable transport between suburban centres, particularlyby enhanced bus services, walking and cycling and by greaterintegration between bus, rail and underground services.
The London PlanMayor of London 105•Enhanced bus services, pedestrian facilities and local means of transport to improve accessibility to jobs for the residents of deprived also Policy Freight StrategyPolicy Land for transport functionsUDP policies should ensure the provision of sufficient land andappropriately located sites for the development of an expanded transportfunction to serve the economic, social and environmental needs ofLondon, including:•Only approving changes of use of land from transport and transportsupport functions if it is no longer required and is unlikely to berequired in the future for this purpose, or if equally good alternativesare provided.•Taking account of proposals for passenger transport (including buses, trams, trains, river transport, coaches, taxis and minicabs) and interchange and freight transport improvements which require additional land by identifying sites for these purposes within their UDPs.•Taking account of the need to protect access by transport operators tokey locations for transport land close co-ordination of transport and land use development will supportLondon’s development and growth and help to ensure that Londonershave convenient access to the services and facilities they need. Goodpublic transport access will not in itself guarantee development but is a necessary condition for sustainable means of travel, particularly walking, cycling, the use of busesand water transport (see Chapter 4, Part C), should also be supportedthrough the development of a more compact city and improved localfacilities and services. The concentration of development in areas thathave good public transport provision should encourage a reduction independence on the private for which the Mayor is responsible will be assessed according tothe policies set out in PPG13 and the Mayor’s Transport Strategy and will take into account the following priorities:
106Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•connecting areas of high unemployment with major new employment opportunities•facilitating an enhanced role for town centres in London’s economy byincreasing their accessibility, both from other centres and surroundingresidential areas; opening up employment opportunities; and improvingthe environment and functioning of town centre locations•reducing the overall need to travel by providing improved localconnections by walking, cycling and more sustainable modes ofmotorised , and especially larger developments, that will generatelarge numbers of trips should be located at places accessible by publictransport and with existing capacity or planned capacity coming on-stream in time to meet need. In determining applications for developmentand any conditions attached to implementation including those relating tothe phasing of developments, account should be taken of the availabilityof adequate public transport access and capacity, and the development’stransport impact. Matching demand to capacity is not a mechanisticexercise. The phasing of both development and transport improvementsmay be subject to some variation and this should be taken into account.
The London PlanMayor of London 107map major rail transport schemes and developmentopportunities in LondonsourceGLA and Transport for London 2003noteThe last four categories are combined where location is similar
108Mayor of LondonThe London policies and proposals should match the spatial developmentpolicies in this plan, for example:•High levels of growth in the Thames Gateway will depend uponsubstantial new and improved infrastructure to stimulate and facilitateinvestment. In addition to Crossrail 1 and other public transportimprovements, this includes new river crossings inside and outsideLondon, the completion of the Channel Tunnel Rail Link andsubstantially increased capacity at airports and ports in the eastern halfof the wider southeast metropolitan area.•Central London’s accessibility and environment should be enhanced bylocating high density developments at points of good public transportaccessibility where sufficient capacity exists, by providing substantialnew capacity and improving direct access with the new regionalmetros, by renewing the Underground and improving mainline railservices and through the congestion charging scheme.•Access to town centres by means of public transport should beimproved with better bus services, more frequent mainline rail servicesand in some locations, new tram and bus transit schemes. District andlocal centres should also benefit from improved bus services, tubeenhancements and better management of the road network.•The majority of journeys in the suburbs will continue to be by car, butbus services, including those making orbital connections aroundsuburban town centres, should be enhanced, and the integration ofthese bus services with rail and Underground services should beimproved. Boroughs should promote more effective use of road spacefor public transport, and work with TfL to develop proposals for lighttransit systems.•Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification particularly in eastLondon should be supported by improved public transport includingthe London Metro (see paragraph ) and appropriate new regionalmetros, tram and bus transit services.•There should be improved integration of freight transport betweendifferent modes, and between major freight interchanges and the maincentres they transport interchange facilities will contribute significantly tonetwork integration and efficiency. New development opportunities canbe created as part of interchange improvement projects and in turn, new
The London PlanMayor of London 109developments can help fund and deliver improvements to interchangefacilities. TfL and National Rail partners should work together to helpfacilitate an integrated has experienced problems in retaining land for transport purposesand in new land being made available for expanding transport provisions,for example, to support the large growth in bus services by provision ofterminals and garages. Transport needs to be provided where activity ismost intense, where land is scarce and competition from other uses isstrongest. Supplementary Planning Guidance on land for transportfunctions will be issued by early Spring international, national and regional transport linksPolicy London’s international, national and regional transport linksThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to:•improve and expand London's international and national transportlinks for passengers and freight, to support London's development; toachieve the spatial priorities of the plan, especially to supportgrowth in the Thames Gateway; and to achieve regeneration benefitswhile mitigating adverse environmental impacts•seek improved access to airports, ports and international rail termini by public transport•develop proposals with neighbouring regions to allow long distancetraffic, especially rail freight, to bypass London•improve links between London and the surrounding 's economy and quality of life depend to a significant extent on the capacity and range of its strategic transport in capacity are needed, particularly for access by publictransport to international stations and airports that service London tomeet growing demand for longer distance travel. Improvements should be made to routes:•to Heathrow Airport•in the Thames Gateway to Stratford and Ebbsfleet international stations•to the Channel Tunnel and main Channel and North Sea ports•through the Lee Valley to Stansted Airport•to Gatwick and Luton transport investments, such as new runways and terminals, portexpansion and new major roads and railways, have enormous impactsupon development and the environment. Decisions taken on theseinvestments should support the spatial and the economic developmentpriorities of this plan and take account of environmental impacts. In
110Mayor of LondonThe London Planparticular, they should support the regeneration of the Thames Gatewayand service the needs of London and its economy as a Mayor and TfL will work in partnership with the SRA, the South Eastand East of England regional planning and transport authorities and othertransport agencies to develop co-ordinated policies for cross-boundaryservices. This will include planning both longer distance traffic movementsand local movements and co-ordinating parking standards and land useplanning policies for outer London and adjoining Mayor will work with the neighbouring regions to consider how totake forward the Secretary of State’s decisions on the ORBIT study of the planning and transport issues around London’s periphery in ways thatsupport the spatial strategies of this Mayor will support in principle proposals that increase port capacityin east London, in the Thames estuary area and in the eastern part of thewider southeast metropolitan region. Such proposals could make avaluable contribution to the regeneration of the Thames Gateway. TheMayor will support in principle proposals that increase the capacity tocross the Channel and thereby strengthen connections between Londonand mainland Europe. He also wishes to see much improved infrastructurethat will enable traffic to and from the Channel Tunnel to bypass Londonwhere appropriate. He supports in principle the concept of a high capacityriver crossing in the Thames Gateway area outside the London Airport developmentThe Mayor supports the development of a sustainable and balancedLondon area airport system, and recognises that further runway capacityin the South East will be required to meet London’s needs. This shouldinclude substantial new capacity that will support the regeneration of the Thames Gateway as well as servicing the needs of London and itseconomy as a whole. This policy will be reviewed in the light of theoutcome of the current national review of airport demand for air travel to and from the London area could result in1the throughput of passengers doubling by 2020. A sustained programmeof development is needed if London and the UK are to competeeffectively in the global and European economies.
The London PlanMayor of London government published its White Paper, the Future of Air Transport in December 2003, which sets out a strategic framework for thedevelopment of air travel in the United Kingdom over the next 30 main implications for London will be addressed in the context of thereview of the London Plan. The needs of the London economy should bepromoted alongside a substantial increase in the capacity of airports thatcan serve and stimulate development in the Thames airports are major generators of economic activity. Sub-Regional Development Frameworks should set out ways to optimise theireconomic contribution and minimise their environmental public transport access to and from London’s airports isessential to ensure that increasing demand is met in an acceptable scale of growth anticipated means further proposals for improvingpublic transport access will need to be developed and implementedalongside any plans for new runways or is also an important transport and economic inter-relationshipbetween London and the airports in the South East and East of Englandregions, and the Mayor will co-ordinate his policies with theirs tomaximise the benefits of this inter-relationship. The Mayor will also workwith the government and other regions to achieve the most effective co-ordination with the UK's network of regional provisionPolicy Heliport developmentThe Mayor will and boroughs should consider heliport proposals in termsof the need for such facilities and their wider environmental impact. Working with boroughs in east London, the Mayor will consider the needand practicality of identifying sites in east London for an additionalheliport to support London’s economy. Boroughs should, in general, resist proposals for private heliport facilitieswith the exception of predominantly emergency use facilities. further provision is necessary to support London’s economy, then thisnew provision should be located to the east of the City to serve it, the Isleof Dogs and the wider Thames Gateway area.
112Mayor of LondonThe London PlanStrategic rail networksPolicy Improving strategic rail servicesThe Mayor supports the early completion of Phase Two of the ChannelTunnel Rail Link (CTRL) and will work with strategic partners to secure transport, economic and regeneration benefits for London from the newrail link, especially at Stratford and King's Cross/St Pancras. The Mayorwill work with all stakeholders to improve the reliability, quality and safetyof inter-regional rail services, including domestic services for commuters,while safeguarding services within London. -speed rail links are a real alternative to air travel, particularly forjourneys of up to three hours duration. Completion of the full CTRLscheme from Ebbsfleet to St Pancras will provide a high speed route intoLondon for international services and domestic commuter services and animproved alternative to air travel, which will also release capacity on theexisting domestic network into London. In addition, it will act as a catalystfor regeneration of the areas around King’s Cross/St Pancras SRA should ensure that the maximum additional capacity is createdfor domestic services and is used in a way that supports the aims of thisplan, in particular by having an appropriate frequency of trains stoppingat Mayor will collaborate with the South East and East of Englandplanning and transport authorities to improve the reliability, quality and safety of inter-regional rail commuting services while encouraging the greatest practical levels of self-sufficiency in local public transport in LondonPolicy Increasing the capacity, quality and integration of publictransport to meet London’s needsThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to increase the capacity of public transport in London by up to 50 per cent over the plan periodand to improve the integration, reliability, safety, quality, accessibility,frequency and attractiveness of the existing public transport Phasing of transport infrastructureThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to facilitate the phasedimplementation of public transport improvements and to co-ordinate improved public transport capacity as closely as possible with its
The London PlanMayor of London 113development priorities and phasing. The Mayor will work with TfL tosecure funding to progress those improvements shown in Table that are within the control of the GLA group, and the Mayor and TfL will work closely with the government, SRA, developers and other keypartners to secure the funding and appropriate phasing of otherimprovements shown in Table transport offers an efficient and sustainable means of carryinglarge numbers of people. It is the key to tackling chronic road congestionand provides access for many people who are not able to travel by ’s public transport network has helped shape London’sdevelopment and will continue to do so. Existing networks serve thecurrent urban structure but need to develop, to raise the standards ofservice, provide an attractive alternative to the car and cater for the bulkof London’s forecast additional population and activity. Networkextensions and new services can help foster new development andregeneration. Taxis and private hire vehicles also play a vital role incontributing to London’s public transport sets out the main public transport improvements that areproposed over the plan period. It indicates the phasing of theircompletion over five-year periods. (Table in Chapter 6 provides moredetail on the increases in capacity over each five-year period, for eachsub-region, in relationship to increases in jobs and population). Table those schemes for which the Mayor (through TfL) has leadresponsibility. The TfL schemes in the period up to 2009/10 include busand Underground improvement schemes that reflect the TfL business planand have a greater degree of certainty. Some schemes will be reliant onprivate sector contributions. Table also indicates other schemes forwhich the SRA is the lead agency. These include the CTRL, which is ontarget for completion in 2007, and improvements in rail services in theperiod up to 2006, for which there is a relatively high degree of information on these schemes is provided the schemes in Table are in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy(indeed most of them were included in RPG 3). The completion dates ofschemes scheduled for completion in the longer term are inevitably lesscertain and depend upon the government, the SRA and private sectorinvestment decisions. New sources of funding should also be phasing programme will be kept under review, taking account ofdecisions made on individual schemes, resources available and progresson the implementation of development priorities. Sub-Regional
114Mayor of LondonThe London PlanDevelopment Frameworks and the first review of this plan will provide opportunities to review and fine-tune phasing assumptions (see Chapter6). Boroughs in their UDPs and subsequent local development documentsshould ensure that adequate provision is made for schemes, having regardtoPolicies whilst avoiding creating unnecesary blight. PPG12(to be replaced by PPS 12) gives appropriate phasing of transport schemes1SchemeCostLeadStatus(as of late 2003)Indicative phasingdelivery 2002-2007-2012-Postagency200620112016201623National Rail – TOC ImprovementsHSRAOngoing throughout the London Plan periodUnderground PPP HTfLOngoing throughout the London Plan periodBus capacity increasesHTfLOngoing throughout the London Plan periodDLR London City Airport ExtensionMTfLUnder constructionCTRLHSRAUnder constructionEast London TransitLTfLScheme under developmentDLR Bank – Lewisham MTfLTWA powers will be sought in 2004Capacity EnhancementDLR Woolwich ExtensionMTfLConsultation now complete Greenwich Waterfront TransitLTfLScheme undergoing refinement followingpublic consultationEast London LineHSRAGovernment approved business case – subjecttoSRA ability to fundDLR Stratford InternationalLTfLSubject to ongoing feasibility and planning studiesDLR Dagenham DockMTfLSubject to ongoing feasibility and planning studiesWest London TramMTfLCurrent feasibility stage will be completed end of 2003/4Croydon Tramlink ExtensionsMTfLShortlisted options for feasibility study being developed further Crossrail 1 HSRA/TfLFinal business case submitted to Secretary of State in July 2003Thameslink 2000HSRABusiness case being re-assessed by SRAThames Gateway Bridge (TGB)MTfL3 month public consultation programme completedSilvertown LinkMTfLSome initial planning work completed. Follows TGBCross River TramMTfLScheme undergoing refinement following public consultationCrossrail 2HSRA/TfLOngoing planning – Implementation will bedetermined on outcome of Crossrail 1
The London PlanMayor of London 115sourceTransport for London, September 2003noteKey to costs: L: up to £100 million; M: between £100 million and £1 billion; H: over £1billion1The information shows the scheduled phase for when new capacity is added to thenetwork – based on information from TfL2 Including South London Metro3All SRA schemes are planned but not committed. Implementation depends on fundingapprovalMaking major improvements to the transport networkPolicy New cross-London links within an enhanced London National Rail networkThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to improve the strategicpublic transport system in London, including cross-London rail links tosupport future development and regeneration priority areas, andincrease public transport capacity by:•implementing Crossrail 1, a particularly high priority to supportLondon’s core business areas•implementing a high frequency Londonwide service on the national rail network (the London Metro) incorporating an extended EastLondon Line and enhancements to the West London Line and, later,completion of an orbital rail network (Orbirail)•completing the Thameslink 2000 project•developing and implementing Crossrail 2 in the later period of the will help improve access to the Central Activities Zone, town centres, major Opportunity Areas and regeneration sites. UDP policiesshould identify development, intensification and regenerationopportunities that these new cross-London links and national railenhancements will support. They should identify and protect land used for rail purposes and identify proposals for major -London rail 1 is critical to supporting the growth of the financial andbusiness services sector in central London and in the Isle of Dogs, wherethere is market demand for additional development capacity. By linkingthese two areas, Crossrail 1 would create a virtual unified economic and business core in London. Significant intensification of developmentaround key interchanges within the Central Activities Zone and to its east and west are crucially dependent on the delivery of Crossrail 1, which is planned for phased completion from 2012. The scheme will alsoimprove links to Heathrow thereby supporting connections for London’sglobal businesses.
116Mayor of LondonThe London 2000, expected to be completed by 2012, is a significantenhancement of cross-London capacity, connecting north and south,linking King’s Cross to Blackfriars and London Bridge and enabling morethrough journeys, as well as increasing interchange opportunities. Thescheme supports key development opportunities in the vicinity of King’sCross and London 2 is due for completion towards the end of the plan period and as currently planned will support intensification and development at Victoria, King’s Cross, Piccadilly Circus, Tottenham Court Road, Hackney Central and, potentially, up the Lee National Rail rail services are often too unreliable and infrequent to meetLondon’s needs. The London Metro concept, proposed in the Mayor’sTransport Strategy, will be a high frequency, reliable national rail network for London, integrated with the Underground’s travel information and existing rail services are radial, routed between central London andthe suburbs. This plan supports proposals to enhance and expand existingorbital routes, especially in inner London – the North, East, South andWest London Lines – to provide a co-ordinated orbital network (Orbirail),through a series of incremental improvements. Orbirail will strengthenorbital public transport and support spatial development priorities. It willrelieve public transport in central London by facilitating access from oneradial route to another without going into the Central Activities Zone; itwill improve access to a number of town centres and potentialdevelopment areas located beyond this area; and it will supportregeneration in key parts of central Underground and DLRPolicy Improved Underground and DLR servicesThe Mayor and TfL will improve the Underground and DLR service and ensure its development supports the spatial strategy of this plan by:•seeking improvements in safety and security, reliability, customerservice and effective capacity•identifying and taking forward improvements to the network thatsupport the priorities of this in their UDPs/LDDs should have regard to possible extensionsof the DLR.
The London PlanMayor of London Underground and DLR networks in London provide dedicated publictransport infrastructure capable of moving high volumes of people. TheUnderground network was transferred to TfL in 2003 and TFL estimates of the planned Public Private Partnership (PPP) capacity enhancementshave been included in the future capacity is progressing five major DLR projects in east London. The LondonCity Airport extension is already under construction and currentlyscheduled to open in late 2005. The DLR three-car upgrade, Woolwichextension and Stratford International projects are in the planning stages,but assuming funding is achieved, they are scheduled to open by Dagenham Dock extension is planned to open by bus priority, and tram and bus transit schemes Policy Enhanced bus priority, tram and bus transit schemesThe Mayor will work with TfL, the boroughs and other strategic partnerstoimplement additional priority measures to assist buses and new tramand bus transit (light transit) schemes (including possible extensions toCroydon Tramlink).UDP policies should seek to:•help make tram and bus transit schemes successful•identify the approved schemes and implications for development along their routes, including the need for land or road space•reflect the increased accessibility and capacity the schemes will also Policy tram or bus transit systems, which are in many respects similar intheir use of road space to intensified bus priority, with very high priorityor segregated tracks along most or all of their routes, can provide a highquality public transport service catering for substantial levels of bus priority and new bus transit and tram schemes will supportthis plan by:•improving access to town centres and the rail and Undergroundnetworks and the suburbs•providing public transport options that offer a real alternative to cars,including for orbital journeys•supporting development and regeneration has consulted on four proposals that are being developed with a viewtoimplementing the West London tram-based scheme by 2011 with a
118Mayor of LondonThe London Plancentral London (Cross River) tram scheme following later, as well as twobus-based transit schemes in east London before that date. Over theperiod of this plan and beyond, the Mayor also wishes to see other transitschemes developed, including extensions to Croydon Tramlink, wherethese can be justified. There may be opportunities in the longer term tolink some of the schemes together. Their development should thereforebe light transit schemes in LondonsourceTransport for LondonNew Thames river crossingsPolicy New Thames river crossingsThe Mayor supports in principle the new Thames river crossings in eastLondon. These should achieve regeneration benefits and incorporate high environmental standards. TfL should, in partnership with the LDA,promote detailed proposals for these crossings. In east London, UDPpolicies should take account of these proposals and their implications for London’s development has been constrained by its poor connectionsacross the Thames, among other factors. Improving access for people,goods and services between the north and south of the Thames is a key
The London PlanMayor of London 119priority in the regeneration and development of the Thames Gatewayregion. Three river crossings are identified in the Mayor’s TransportStrategy and would, over the plan period, make a vital contribution tothe regeneration of the Thames Gateway. They are:•aWoolwich rail crossing through an extension of the Docklands Light Railway•aThames Gateway multi-modal bridge between Barking and Thamesmead•acrossing providing for local links between Silvertown and is working with the LDA, GLA and local boroughs to develop theseproposals, with the key focus being supporting regeneration goals andlinking local communities into opportunities in the Thames Gateway. Theriver crossings proposed for east London will be considered in the contextof the Sub-Regional Development Framework for east London andintegrated within river crossing schemessourceTransport for London
120Mayor of LondonThe London Plan4Reducing congestion and making better use of London’s streetsRoad schemesPolicy Road scheme proposalsAll road schemes in London should:•contribute to London’s economic regeneration and development•not increase the net traffic capacity of the corridor unless essential toregeneration•provide a net benefit to London’s environment•improve safety for all users•improve conditions for pedestrians, cyclists, disabled people, publictransport and business•integrate with local and strategic land use planning schemes worsen conditions when judged against any of thesecriteria, the scheme should not proceed unless benefits in other areas very substantially outweigh any disbenefits and unavoidable disbenefitsare mitigated. UDP policies should incorporate these criteria for assessing road scheme plan fully endorses ‘Managing our Roads’ which says ‘Although thereare exceptions…there is only limited capacity for tackling urbancongestion by increased road capacity’. However, there are some caseswhere new roads are needed to support regeneration, improve theenvironment, increase safety or provide essential local congestion in London’s streetsPolicy Tackling congestion and reducing trafficWorking with strategic partners, the Mayor will aim from 2001 to 2011 to:•reduce weekday traffic by 15 per cent in central London•achieve zero growth across the rest of inner London•reduce growth in outer London by a third, and seek zero growth in2outer London town policies should include measures that support these proposedreductions and secure public benefits from them, including:•assessing all development proposals in terms of their traffic generation and impact on traffic congestion, with particular regard toimpacts on bus routes and the main road network•utilising appropriate controls over development in terms of thelocation, scale, density, design and mix of land uses, together with the associated provision for parking, to help deliver these reductions
The London PlanMayor of London 121and improve conditions for people who use public transport, walk or cycle, and for business•identifying the central London congestion charging zone and anymodifications made to it, and taking account of its effects on trafficflows and any associated modifications to the road network that maybe necessary, including supporting it through a framework ofappropriate land use planning and parking regimes within thecongestion charging zone and near to its boundaries. Policy Allocation of street spaceIn balancing the use of streetspace, UDPs should include policies thatreflect the Mayor’s Transport Strategy and the London road hierarchy. In particular, boroughs should:•presume in favour of movement of people and goods, to supportcommerce, business and bus movements on the Transport for LondonRoad Network (TLRN) and most other ‘A’ roads•presume in favour of local access and amenity on other London roads,particularly for residents, buses, pedestrians and cyclists, and wherenecessary, business•review the re-allocation of road space and land to bus priority, bus ortram (light transit) schemes, cyclists and pedestrians to supportsustainable Local area transport treatmentsTfL will and boroughs should make better use of London’s streets andsecure transport, environmental and regeneration benefits through acomprehensive approach to tackling all the adverse transport impacts in an area – known as a ‘local area transport treatment’. Local areatransport treatments may cover:•town centres•business improvement districts•interchange areas•neighbourhood renewal areas•other residential is an urgent need to reduce congestion and traffic levels,particularly in those parts of London where they are at their highest,including central London and outer town centres. Boroughs shouldconsider local initiatives that aim to reduce traffic, especially in towncentres and where traffic goes through residential and environmentallysensitive areas.
122Mayor of LondonThe London ’s streets should be performing a variety of functions. They shouldprovide a safe and pleasant means of travelling by foot, cycle, bus or carand act as a network of attractive public spaces in which people can meetand enjoy life. Boroughs should make use of integrated approaches suchas local area transport treatments to improve the balance struck betweendifferent street users, and seek opportunities to link these with other localinitiatives. This includes initiatives like Home Zones, a concept describedin paragraph and proposal in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy. plan puts greater emphasis on essential access for people, goods andservices and more localised modes of travel – the bus, walking and cycling– in central London and the larger town centres. Policy of theMayor’s Transport Strategy relates to the allocation of street space. Policy of this plan sets out policy for the public central London congestion charging scheme contributes to the spatial development policies of this plan by reducing substantiallycongestion in the Central Activities Zone and improving its use planning and parking regimes should take account of andsupport the scheme. The Mayor will consider possible schemes fordemand management conditions for busesPolicy Improving conditions for busesThe Mayor will work with TfL and boroughs to implement Londonwideimprovements to the quality of bus services for all. UDP policies shouldactively promote and give priority to the continued development of theLondon bus network, including:•the allocation of road space and the high levels of road priorityrequired for buses on existing or proposed bus routes•ensuring good bus access to and within town centres, majordevelopments and residential areas•ensuring that walking routes to bus stops from homes and workplacesare direct, secure, pleasant and safe•ensuring that bus layover and turning areas, driver facilities, busstations and garages are available where the contribution of the bus is particularly important in andaround central London in the short term (while the rail and Undergroundnetworks are being rehabilitated and extended) and in both short andlong term in the suburbs, where access to rail-based transport is relativelylimited. Higher levels of priority can improve bus services substantially byreducing unreliability. The Mayor will work actively with TfL and boroughs
The London PlanMayor of London 123topromote a bus network that is reliable, comprehensive, frequent, andeasy to use. Large new developments, including major housing sites,should have easily accessible and high quality bus links and facilitiesplanned at the earliest stage of their development. These links should besafe, accessible, pleasant and conditions for walking and cyclingPolicy Improving conditions for walkingUDP policies should:•ensure that safe, convenient, accessible and direct pedestrian access is provided from new developments to public transport nodes and keyland uses, taking account of the need to connect people to jobs, totown centres and to schools•identify, complete and promote high quality walking routes including the six strategic walking routes identified in the Mayor’sTransport Strategy•ensure that Thames-side developments incorporate provision for a3riverside walkway in accordance with Countryside Agency standards•ensure that the pedestrian environment is accessible to disabled people•take account of measures set out in the TfL Walking Plan for London•improve the safety and convenience of pedestrian routes to ’s strategic network of promoted walking routessourceGLA 2002
124Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Improving conditions for cyclingUDP policies should:•identify and implement high quality, direct, cycling routes, wherepossible segregated from motorised traffic, giving access to publictransport nodes, town centres and key land uses•ensure that routes are segregated from pedestrians as far aspracticable, but are not isolated•identify, complete and promote the relevant sections of the LondonCycle Network Plus, and other cycling routes•take account of measures identified in the TfL Cycling Action Plan•encourage provision of sufficient, secure cycle parking facilities within quality and safety of London’s environment should be improved tomake the experience of walking and cycling more pleasant, and anincreasingly viable alternative to the private car. Walking and cycling in and around central London should be safer and more pleasant as aresult of initiatives being introduced to complement the introduction of the Mayor’s congestion charging scheme. Walking and cycling areparticularly important for certain people such as children and thosewithout direct access to cars. Improved pedestrian routes to school areespecially important (see paragraph , and proposal of the Mayor’s Transport Strategy). Improving the quality of the pedestrianenvironment is covered in Chapter 4, Part B of this plan. This plan’spolicies to create a more compact city should aim to ensure that travel on foot and on bicycle are the most attractive options for short longer journeys, good pedestrian and cycle access to public transportis new developments should provide new, high quality, segregatedpedestrian and cycle routes, which are direct and provide goodconnections to the existing pattern of streets, and to bus stops andstations. This may sometimes require the re-allocation of road space and the creation of additional bus stops. Cycle parking facilities should be provided in both commercial and residential development (see Annex 4 on Parking Standards). Boroughs should ensure that the missinglinks in the walking and cycling networks, including parts of the sixstrategic walking routes identified in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy, arecompleted as development opportunities arise. Planning briefs andmasterplans should include principles to encourage a high quality,connected pedestrian environment and facilities for cycling.
The London PlanMayor of London 125Parking strategy and standardsPolicy Parking strategyThe Mayor, in conjunction with boroughs, will seek to ensure that on-sitecar parking at new developments is the minimum necessary and thatthere is no over-provision that could undermine the use of moresustainable non-car modes. The only exception to this approach will be to ensure that developments are accessible for disabled policies and transport Local Implementation Plans should:•adopt on- and off-street parking policies that encourage access bysustainable means of transport, assist in limiting the use of the car and contribute to minimising road traffic•adopt the maximum parking standards set out in the annex on parkingstandards (Annex 4) where appropriate, taking account of localcircumstances and allowing for reduced car parking provision in areasof good transport accessibility•reduce the amount of existing, private, non-residential parking, as opportunities arise•recognise the needs of disabled people and provide adequate parkingfor them•take account of the needs of business for delivery and servicing movements•provide adequate facilities for coaches that minimise impact on the road network capacity and are off-road wherever possible•generally resist the introduction of temporary car parks•encourage good standards of car parking Parking in town centresUDP policies and transport Local Implementation Plans should set outappropriate parking standards for town centres. These should help toenhance the attractiveness of town centres and to reduce standards should take into account: •the standards set out in Annex 4•the current vitality and viability of their town centres (see policies and )•regeneration and town centre management objectives•existing on- and off-street parking provision and control•public transport provision and the need to reduce travel by car•pedestrian and cycle the level of provision and regulation of on- and off-streetparking can contribute to reducing congestion and encouraging the use
126Mayor of LondonThe London Planof public transport. Parking space is often an inefficient and unattractiveuse of land. This plan sets out a parking restraint regime that balances thedesirability of reducing car use with the need to provide for attractive,viable development in town centres, while recognising that many peoplewill continue to use their cars for travel, particularly in the suburbs. Withinthe general policy (Policy ) it allows for additional public car parkingwithin town centres (Policy ), where this is appropriate and supportsthe locational advantage of town restraint on parking provision should increase in many areas as the availability of alternative means of travel increases. In the mostaccessible locations, this should sometimes extend to car-freedevelopments. The Central Activities Zone is particularly well served bypublic transport and is densely developed, such that additional carparking, other than for residential use, is unlikely to be restrictive policies will generally be appropriate in suburban developments come forward, boroughs will be able to apply morerestrictive parking policies and over time this will lead to a reduction inprivate non-residential parking. parking and/or drop-offs for disabled people should alwaysbe provided to ensure that developments are accessible for all. All largedevelopments should provide for appropriate taxi ranks and coach/busparking/stands. Appropriate provision should also be made for cycle andmotor cycle should determine a single maximum standard for the towncentre and edge of town centre as a whole. Competition between towncentres based on parking provision should be avoided by a co-ordinated,complementary approach between neighbouring authorities, includingthose just outside the London annex on parking standards (Annex 4) sets out maximum car parkingstandards for employment, residential and retail uses and providesguidance on parking in leisure and mixed-use developments, and on theprovision of parking for disabled people. Boroughs should have regard tothese in developing their UDPs and in exercising their developmentcontrol functions. standards are only one mechanism to limit the use of the car andachieve wider objectives. They should be used in conjunction with othertransport and spatial integration mechanisms, including location policiesand travel plans. An integrated approach is needed in boroughs’ parking
The London PlanMayor of London 127policies in UDPs, in exercising their development control functions, and in boroughs’ transport Local Implementation developments should make use of existing public car parks and dedicated on-site parking in town centres should be provided onlywhere there is an identified need. (Further guidance is given in Annex 4).For bulk shopping, the preferred location for parking should be in or onthe edge of the town centre to facilitate linked , in conjunction with boroughs, has developed the PTAL method toassess public transport accessibility, which is described in Annex 4. PPG13 introduced the concept of Transport Assessments. These should givedetails of proposed measures to improve access by public transport,walking and cycling, to reduce associated parking and mitigate transportimpacts. Transport Assessments will be a key factor in assisting boroughsin their assessments of development proposals and ensuring that parkinglevels sought for new developments are not car parks should be resisted and only considered in cases ofexceptional need. There may be circumstances in which temporary spacesmay be allowed on condition that these are withdrawn when better publictransport access becomes freight movements and the distribution of goods and servicesPolicy Freight strategyThe Mayor will promote the sustainable development of the full range ofroad, rail and water-borne freight facilities in London and seek to improveintegration between the modes and between major rail interchanges andthe centres they serve. The development of a London rail freight bypassroute is supported. UDP policies should:•implement the spatial aspects of the freight element of the Mayor’sTransport Strategy as developed by the London SustainableDistribution Partnership•seek to locate developments that generate high levels of freightmovement close to major transport routes•ensure that suitable sites and facilities are made available to enable the transfer of freight to rail and water through the protection of existing sites and the provision of new sites•ensure developments include appropriate servicing facilities, off-roadwherever practicable•ensure collection and delivery can take place off the main bus andtram routes.
128Mayor of LondonThe London economy of London, and of the wider surrounding regional area,relies on an efficient system for the distribution of goods and facilities and the provision of storage, handling and modaltransfer facilities to cater for road, rail and water-borne goods are animportant part of the distribution plan facilitates freight distribution and servicing in a way thatminimises congestion and any adverse environmental impact. It aims tofoster a progressive shift of freight from road to more sustainablemodes such as rail and water, where this is economical and practicable. It supports the diversion of rail freight with neither an origin nordestination within London on to strategic ‘bypasses’. Thames provides significant opportunities for sustainable freightaccess into the heart of the capital. The Thames is particularly suited tothe transport of bulk materials, such as waste and aggregates. There isalso potential for extending freight operations on the Lee Navigation andGrand Union canals. A collaborative approach is needed across London tofocus, in particular, on encouraging new facilities and protecting, throughthe planning system, essential existing facilities supporting water-bornefreight movement. Further guidance is provided in Chapter 4, Part reliable and efficient distribution of goods depends in part upon avibrant ports industry. London relies on a range of facilities to service itsneeds, including the Port of London. The Port of London Authority, theUK’s biggest port, is a vital gateway for international trade. Althoughserving London, much of the port is physically located outside London. Aregional ports study was undertaken by the South East and East AngliaPorts Local Authority Group (SEAPLAG) and further collaborative work isongoing between the GLA, SEERA and EELGC to examine the regionalimplications of port expansion and, from a London perspective, ensurethat transport implications for London are fully taken into to support the development of the Thames Gateway regionshould be maximised. In addition, similar joint work is being undertaken inrelation to strategic rail intermodal Strategic Rail Intermodal Freight FacilitiesThe Mayor will and boroughs should support the provision of strategicrail-based intermodal freight facilities. Each proposal will be considered on its own merits and in the context of wider policies in this SRA’s Freight Strategy identifies a requirement for three or four largemulti-modal freight facilities on or close to the periphery of London, witha number of smaller facilities within the urban area. The SRA has
The London PlanMayor of London 129identified an area of search in south-east London as the only one of theseproposed large facilities capable of being located in London. At the timeof publication of this plan, no specific proposals were available. Moredetailed consideration of this proposal will be contained within theSupplementary Planning Guidance on Land for Transport functions and inwork on the east London Sub-Regional Development Framework. Any sitepromoted as a suitable location must meet operational and strategicplanning objectives and should be located wholly or substantially onpreviously developed land. References1GLA estimate based on DTLR data 2Mayor’s Transport Strategy, GLA, June 2001 3Countryside Commission (1998) (now Countryside Agency) ‘The Thames Path NationalTrail – Development Plan Policies: A Good Practice Guide’, (pg Example Policies)
130Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 1313Denjoying part sets out policies to ensure diverse opportunities to enjoy Londonthrough its culture, shopping, sport, tourism and open spaces. As thecity’s population and economy grows and development intensifies, accesstothese activities offers release from the pressures of metropolitan lifeand enhances London’s standing as a centre of culture, relaxation andinnovation. Making London an even more enjoyable city will contribute toObjective 2 of this plan – to make London a better city for people tolive in – as will improving the quality of town centres and strengtheningthe leisure and cultural sectors. Protecting and adding to London’s wealthof open spaces will be especially important in realising Objective 6 – tomake London a more attractive, well designed and green city. All of theseimprovements in the quality and availability of retail, leisure and openspace facilities will be crucial in accommodating growth, contributing toLondon’s prosperity and making the compact city an enjoyable one in which to sustainable and inclusive strategy offers the widest access to shoppingand leisure activities for the greatest number of people, including thosecurrently least able to enjoy them. To achieve this, this plan adopts apolicy of ‘structured choice’, which concentrates the supply of retail andleisure facilities and services in the most accessible places and spreadsthem between central London, town centres and development areas suchas the Thames Gateway. This will help reinvigorate town centres and widentheir role as accessible and diverse community centres. Other policies willrestrain the provision of competing retail and other activities in out-of-town centre locations. London’s specialist leisure activities are supportedand protected through the designation of Strategic Cultural Areas andTourism Action ’s distinctive network of open spaces, from the Green Belt to localplay spaces, should be strongly protected, made more accessible andenhanced. As the use of land becomes more intense, the contribution of open space to physical and psychological health, to biodiversity and tothe relatively open character of the city will become even more London is in four sections:•the first covers town centres, retail and leisure.•the second looks at culture and sport.•the third looks at tourism.•the last section covers the range of London’s open spaces.
132Mayor of LondonThe London Plan1Consumers in LondonPolicy Supporting town centresThe Mayor will and boroughs should enhance access to goods andservices and strengthen the wider role of town centres, including UDPpolicies to:•encourage retail, leisure and other related uses in town centres and discourage them outside the town centres•improve access to town centres by public transport, cycling and walking •enhance the quality of retail and other consumer services in town centres•support a wide role for town centres as locations for leisure and cultural activities, as well as business and housing•require the location of appropriate health, education and other publicand community services in town centres•designate core areas primarily for shopping uses and secondary areasfor shopping and other uses and set out policies for the appropriatemanagement of both types of area•undertake regular town centre health checks•support and encourage town centre management, partnerships and strategies including the introduction of Business ImprovementDistricts in appropriate sets out an over-arching approach to support and regeneratetown Mayor supports the government’s policy of promoting consumeractivity in town centres. These offer an accessible yet competitive rangeof retail and personal services. Healthy town centres with a mixture ofuses, including residential, employment, libraries, primary health carecentres, educational establishments, bars, restaurants, cinemas and otherleisure activities, offer attractive focal points for their surroundingcommunities. Town centres are also more sustainable than out of centreshopping developments, which generate significant traffic volumes buttend to be inaccessible for many people, particularly Londoners withoutaccess to private transport. A spread of successful town centres acrossLondon will underpin a balanced ‘polycentric’ structure promoted by the1European Spatial Development vitality and viability of town centres will be enhanced by a widerrange of uses. Leisure uses contribute to London's evening economy andensure that town centres remain lively beyond shopping hours. So toodoes more and higher density housing. In some centres, there is particular
The London PlanMayor of London 133scope to bring redundant offices or under-used space above shops intomore active uses, especially housing. Over time, high quality, welldesigned development and regeneration will help support, and wherenecessary, re-establish town centres as attractive places and as distinctivecentres of the community's life. Town centres should provide facilitiessuch as accessible public lavatories, affordable childcare facilities andshopmobility London town centre has a complex pattern of town centres. While each centreperforms a different function according to the community and area itserves, five broad types of town centre can be identified within London:international, metropolitan, major, district and local and neighbourhoodcentres. This categorisation creates a strategic network of centres acrossLondon. It provides a framework to co-ordinate appropriate types andlevels of development and transport provision. This will maximise choiceand accessibility to goods and services for all groups of Londoners. Theannex on London’s Strategic Town Centre Network (Annex 1) identifieswhich town centres fall into the first four categories and the locations ofcentres in the four largest categories are shown on Map centre’s role should be tested through regular town centre ‘healthchecks’ and centres can be reclassified in the light of these through Sub-Regional Development Frameworks and subsequent reviews oralterations to this plan and UDPs. This process should ensure that thenetwork is sufficiently flexible to accommodate change in the role ofcentres and their relationships to one another.
134Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap ’s network of town centressourceGLA 2002Locations for retail and leisure activityPolicy Town centre developmentUDP policies should:•assess retail capacity and need, through sub-regional partnershipswhere appropriate. Where need for additional development isestablished, capacity to accommodate such development should be identified within the UDP following a sequential approach
The London PlanMayor of London 135•relate the scale of retail, commercial and leisure development to the size and role of a centre and its catchment and encourage appropriatedevelopment on sites in town centres in the network. If no town centre sites are available in the network, provision should bemade on the edge of centres in the network•treat proposals for out of centre development or for intensification or expansion of existing out of centre retail facilities, in line with thispolicy and relevant central government guidance sets out a sequential approach for identifying thepreferred location for retail and leisure development. This plan supportsthat approach. To facilitate the rigorous application of the sequential test,boroughs should carry out assessments of the capacity of each towncentre to accommodate additional retail development appropriate to itsrole within the network. This supply side assessment should be set againstan assessment of the need for new retail development on a borough andsub-regional basis. Where need is established, boroughs should adopt a sequential approach to identifying suitable sites. Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks will assist this process. The Mayor will publishSupplementary Planning Guidance on retail needs of London’s exceptionally dense form of development,intensification of out of centre supermarkets and shopping centres couldfurther threaten town centres and, where proposed, should be treated 2in line with national policy as new development. Where out of centredevelopments are proposed, the following key considerations shouldapply, in line with national policy and taking account of the exceptionalscale and intensity of London’s town centre network:•the likely harm to the spatial development strategy•the likely impact of the development on the vitality and viability of existing town centres, including the evening economy•their accessibility by a choice of means of transport, taking account of the importance of fostering public transport use in London•their likely effect on overall travel patterns and car central London, major leisure activities should be focused on appropriate elements of the network of town centres. Out of centremajor leisure developments, such as cinemas, bingo clubs and bowlingalleys, have in the past compromised the vitality and viability of some town centres.
136Mayor of LondonThe London PlanMaintaining and improving retail facilitiesPolicy Maintaining and improving retail facilitiesBoroughs should:•work with retailers and others to prevent the loss of retail facilities that provide essential convenience and specialist shopping and toencourage mixed use development•establish local retailing information in collaboration with localcommunities and undertake audits of local retail and service facilities identifying areas considered deficient in convenienceshopping and services•provide a policy framework for maintaining, managing and enhancinglocal and neighbourhood shopping facilities and where appropriate for the provision of further such facilities in accessible locations•support the development of e-tailing and encourage the widening of access to existence of thriving local convenience shopping is important,especially for less mobile people and those on low incomes for whomready access to the components of a good diet are essential to supportgood retail strategies, developed in partnership between communities, the retail industry and local authorities, can identify areas deficient inessential retail facilities and establish the means by which to stimulateinvestment. Co-ordinated planning and other interventions may berequired to retain facilities, such as corner shops or small parades inestates, that provide an essential social service but are on the margins of economic viability. Improvements in e-infrastructure are required toenable access for all and Sport in LondonPolicy Development and promotion of arts and cultureThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to promote culture in the framework of the Mayor’s Cultural policies should:•identify, protect and enhance Strategic Cultural Areas and their settings•designate and develop Cultural Quarters
The London PlanMayor of London 137•where appropriate, support evening and night-time entertainmentactivities in central London, City fringe areas and town centres andwhere appropriate manage their impact through policies such asEntertainment Management Zones•encourage ‘Percent for Art’ schemes and encourage arts and culturalfacilities in major mixed-use considering proposals for cultural facilities, UDP policies should ensure that:•asequential approach is applied (see Policy )•sites have good access by public transport or improvements are planned•facilities are accessible to all sections of the community, includingdisabled people•new provision is focused on areas with deficiencies in Cultural ’s role as a world city is supported by a number of internationallyimportant cultural institutions, including museums, galleries and theatres,which are among London’s major tourist attractions. Together with theirsetting, these represent London’s Strategic Cultural Areas and should beprotected and enhanced. They include Greenwich Riverside, Wembley, theSouth Kensington museums complex, the Barbican, the South Bank andWest End/Soho/Covent Garden. Any redevelopment proposals shouldfollow the principles set out in Chapter 4, Part , development and management of cultural quarters can helpaddress the need for affordable workspace for creative industries, provideflexible live/work space, encourage clusters of activity and provide atrigger for local regeneration. Cultural and creative activities aresometimes priced out of traditional areas. Where they contribute to widerregeneration and mixed-use policies, they should be sustained by theplanning system and supported by wider economic and culturaldevelopment initiatives. Cheaper premises in or on the edge of towncentres are especially suitable, and there is considerable potential for thisin areas of East London (in particular the Lower Lea Valley, Royal Docks,Greenwich Riverside, Deptford Creek and Woolwich Arsenal) as part ofwider regeneration and sub-regional cultural facilities such as local theatres, tourist attractions and libraries are vitally important to all London’s town centres and central London.
138Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThey are particularly valuable as a means of engaging younger people in wider community activity. However, parts of suburban London,especially in the east, lack such facilities. New cultural provision of localand sub-regional importance should be developed in town centres andthe Thames Gateway for residents and to create new tourist attractionsaway from central London. They should be integrated with wider towncentre renewal proposals, especially those to rejuvenate suburban should identify suitable sites for cultural facilities in UDPs anddevelopment briefs, drawing on priorities outlined in the Mayor’s Cultural Strategy and encouraging ‘Percent for Art’ schemes tailored tolocal circumstances. Night-time capital’s vibrant night-time economy is a major contributor toLondon’s world city status and there is an increasing demand for servicestobe provided later in the evening. Tackling the wide range of associatedissues, especially that of disturbance, will require a real commitment toeffective, integrated action by a range of agencies. Different approacheswill be needed to address local circumstances, for example refinement ofthe Entertainment Management Zone concept and the application of theMayor’s London Ambient Noise Strategy and the emerging agenda foraction on and recreation facilities Policy Sports facilitiesThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to promote and developLondon’s sporting facilities. This will include the promotion of London as the home of the 2012 Olympic Games and Paralympics, focused oneast reviewing UDPs, boroughs should identify sites for a range of sportsfacilities to meet local, sub-regional and wider considering proposals for sports facilities, boroughs should ensure that:•asequential approach is applied•sites have good access by public transport, cycling and walking, or improved access is planned•facilities are accessible to all sections of the community, includingdisabled people•new provision is focused on areas with existing deficiencies in facilities•the multiple use of facilities is encouraged, including those of schoolsand commercial organisations.
The London PlanMayor of London 139International, national and regional sports Mayor, the government and the British Olympics Association arespearheading a London bid for the 2012 Olympics focused primarily on east London. The Olympics would provide a major catalyst for changeand regeneration in east London, especially the Lower Lea Valley, leveringresources, spurring timely completion of already programmedinfrastructure investment and leaving a legacy to be valued by futuregenerations (see also paragraphs ). Hosting the Olympics wouldbe in keeping with the overall objectives of this sequential approach should be applied to proposals for sports stadia,although the availability of sufficiently large town centre sites is likely tobe limited. Edge of centre sites are likely to be the most appropriatelocation and should be considered before out-of-centre sites. The locationof stadia in Opportunity Areas may assist in bringing forward regenerationbenefits, including public sports facilities or other community amenitiesthat may be associated with mixed-use schemes. Such sites should havepublic transport services with adequate capacity to cope with largecrowds. Where this is not the case, improvements to public transportshould be planned as part of the and sub-regional sports and recreation needs to develop a wide range of high quality but affordablesports facilities, which are accessible to all sections of the community,including disabled people. The boroughs’ audits of existing provision and assessments of needs, required by PPG17, will ensure that newprovision is focused in areas with the greatest need and co-ordinatedacross boundaries. Development of sports facilities in commercial schemes should be encouraged and made accessible to the localcommunity where ’ LondonPolicy Visitors accommodation and facilitiesThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to implement London’sTourism Strategy and to achieve 36,000 additional hotel bedrooms by 2016 and to improve the quality, variety and distribution of visitoraccommodation and should:•identify capacity for new hotel provision in town centres and otherlocations beyond the Central London sub-region, such as OpportunityAreas, with good public transport access to central London andinternational and national transport termini
140Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•focus strategically important new hotel and tourism provision withinthe central London sub-region on Opportunity Areas•accommodate smaller scale provision in town centres elsewhere withincentral London and Central Activities Zone fringe locations with goodpublic transport and resist further intensification of provision in areasof existing concentration, except where this will not compromise localamenity or the balance of local land uses•support the provision of a wide range of tourist accommodation, such as aparthotels, bed and breakfast accommodation, self-cateringfacilities, youth hostels and camping and caravan sites•support existing and encourage development of new tourist attractions which complement the wider policies of this plan, especially for regeneration and town centre renewal•identify Tourism Action Zones and propose policies for theirdevelopment and for the protection of local communities from adverse Mayor will work with strategic partners to consider the economic case for additional international convention centre capacity in Mayor’s Tourism Strategyseeks to ensure that London expands as a global tourism destination and also develops a broader visitor potential growth a further 36,000 hotel bedroomsshould be provided in the period up to 2016 in a range of suitable4locations throughout London – particularly the West End – is the home of most touristattractions and hotels, although major cultural attractions have recentlyspread to areas such as the South Bank. To reduce pressures on centralLondon, provide more affordable hotel development capacity, increaseLondon’s tourism attractions and contribute to broader regeneration and sustainability objectives, other locations should in future play a much greater role in provision for visitors. Town centres and OpportunityAreas with good public transport access will be especially important mostparticularly in east London. Future provision in the Central London sub-region should focus on its town centres and Central Activities Zonefringe areas with good public transport and, in particular, its OpportunityAreas. Intensification of existing areas of hotel provision should beresisted, except where this will not compromise local amenities and mixesof land use.
The London PlanMayor of London 141map distribution of London’s top 20 tourist attractionssourceVisit view of the labour market constraints facing the hotel industry and the wider need for affordable housing in London, boroughs should seekagreements to provide staff accommodation as part of hotel developmentand re-development and encourage better training for staff to improvethe attractiveness of employment in the sector. Borough tourismstrategies and UDPs should seek to stimulate tourism provision inappropriate locations and provide a framework for Tourism Action Zonestomanage pressures on high volume visitor areas and their for sustainable rural tourism should be made in terms of national has a number of conference, exhibition and multiple eventvenues. However, there are no suitable purpose-built facilities forconventions of 3,500 or more delegates, which London would need tocompete with other leading cities in the conference/convention Mayor will work with the LDA and other partners to consider theeconomic case and best location for an international convention centre.
142Mayor of LondonThe London Plan4Improving London’s open environmentRealising the value of open spacePolicy Realising the value of open spaceThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to protect and promoteLondon's network of open spaces, to realise the current and potentialvalue of open space to communities, and to protect the many benefits of open space, including those associated with health, sport andrecreation, children’s play, regeneration, the economy, culture, biodiversity and the space is an integral part of the spatial character of the ’s Green Belt and Metropolitan Open Land form the basicstructure of London’s strategic network of open spaces. Open spaces thatare of local importance form part of the wider network of open spaces,which in turn is part of the vital and distinctive attraction of London. TheMayor will work with partners to identify any strategic deficiency in theprovision of publicly accessible open 's open spaces include green spaces, such as parks, allotments,commons, woodlands, natural habitats, recreation grounds, playing fields,agricultural land, burial grounds, amenity space, children’s play areas,including hard surfaced playgrounds, and accessible countryside in theurban fringe. Civic spaces, such as squares, piazzas and market squaresalso form part of the open space network. The variety and richness ofLondon's open spaces contribute hugely to its distinctive and relativelyopen character. Open spaces provide a valuable resource and focus forlocal communities, can have a positive effect on the image and vitality of areas and can encourage investment. They provide a respite from thebuilt environment or an opportunity for recreation. They promote health,wellbeing and quality of life. They are also vital facilities for developingchildren's play, exercise and social skills. The Mayor’s draft LondonAmbient Noise Strategy introduced the concept of Areas of RelativeTranquillity that could apply to areas within as well as at the edge of theurban area. Boroughs may choose to promote this in UDPs and theconcept will be addressed in the first review of this plan, along with otherissues of sound quality. The Mayor is working with the ForestryCommission and other strategic partners to prepare the London Tree andWoodland Framework. This Framework will also inform the first London becomes more compact and intensive in its built form, thevalue of these open spaces will increase. The Mayor will plan for a rangeof different types of open space to meet a variety of needs, and workwith others to realise the full potential of those spaces that are currently
The London PlanMayor of London 143undervalued. Poor quality is not reason in itself to justify the loss of openspace. This includes both spaces that are private and those that areaccessible to the ’s strategic open space networksourceGLA
144Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThe network of open spacesPolicy Green BeltThe Mayor will and boroughs should maintain the protection of London’sGreen Belt and proposals for alterations to Green Belt boundaries shouldbe considered through the UDP process in accordance with governmentguidance in PPG2. There is a general presumption against inappropriatedevelopment in the Green Belt, and such development should not beapproved except in very special circumstances. inclusion of land within the Green Belt performs a valuable role inpreventing urban sprawl and promoting an urban renaissance. The GreenBelt also protects the openness of the land in order to prevent townsmerging, safeguards the countryside and preserves historic use of Green Belt land should provide Londoners with access to thecountryside, opportunities for outdoor recreation, protection andenhancement of attractive landscapes, the improvement of damaged andderelict land, protection and promotion of biodiversity and retention ofagricultural land. The Green Belt is a permanent feature and its boundaryshould only be altered in exceptional circumstances. The quality of landwithin the Green Belt is not reason in itself for excluding land from theGreen Belt or allowing development. Where Green Belt land is of poorquality, steps should be taken to improve it. This may include undertakinga review of a wide area and identifying actions to promote Metropolitan Open LandThe Mayor will and boroughs should maintain the protection ofMetropolitan Open Land (MOL) from inappropriate development. Anyalterations to the boundary of MOL should be undertaken by boroughsthrough the UDP process, in consultation with the Mayor and adjoiningauthorities. Land designated as MOL should satisfy one or more of thefollowing criteria:•land that contributes to the physical structure of London by beingclearly distinguishable from the built-up area•land that includes open air facilities, especially for leisure, recreation,sport, arts and cultural activities and tourism which serve the whole or significant parts of London•land that contains features or landscapes of historic, recreational,nature conservation or habitat interest, of value at a metropolitan or national level•land that forms part of a Green Chain and meets one of the above criteria.
The London PlanMayor of London 145Policies should include a presumption against inappropriate developmentof MOL and give the same level of protection as the Green Belt. Essentialfacilities for appropriate uses will only be acceptable where they do nothave an adverse impact on the openness of Metropolitan Open Land (MOL) designation is unique to London,and protects strategically important open spaces within the builtenvironment. Although MOL may vary in size and primary function in different parts of London, it should be of strategic significance, forexample by serving a wide catchment area or drawing visitors from several boroughs. MOL is the same as the Green Belt in terms ofprotection from development and serves a similar purpose. It performsthree valuable functions:•protecting open space to provide a clear break in the urban fabric andcontributing to the green character of London•protecting open space to serve the needs of Londoners outside theirlocal area•protecting open space that contains a feature or landscape of nationalor regional will be protected as a permanent feature, and afforded the samelevel of protection as the Green Belt. Appropriate development shouldminimise any adverse impact on the open character of MOL throughsensitive design and siting and be limited to small scale structures tosupport outdoor open space uses. The boundary of MOL should only bealtered in exceptional circumstances and should be undertaken throughthe UDP process in consultation with the Mayor. Development thatinvolves the loss of MOL in return for the creation of new open spaceelsewhere will not be considered Chains are important to London’s open space network, recreationand biodiversity. They consist of footpaths and the open spaces that theylink, which are accessible to the public. Because of their Londonwidesignificance, the open spaces and the links within a Green Chain shouldbe designated as Open space provision in UDPsUDP policies should:•identify broad areas of public open space deficiency and priorities foraddressing them on the basis of audits carried out as part of an openspace strategy, and using the open space hierarchy set out in as a starting point
146Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•ensure that future open space needs are considered in planningpolicies for Opportunity Areas and other areas of growth and change in their area•encourage functional and physical linkages within the network of open spaces and to the wider public realm, improve accessibility for all throughout the network and create new links based on local and strategic need•identify, promote and protect Green Corridors and Green Chains and include appropriate designations and policies for the protection of local open spaces that are of value, or have the potential to be of value, to local Mayor will assist in co-ordinating this process across boroughboundaries, and in identifying the need for new or improved Regional or Metropolitan ’s public open space hierarchy (see Table ) provides a benchmark for the provision of public open space across London. It categorises spaces according to their size and sets out a desirabledistance which Londoners should travel in order to access each size of open space. Using these standards to map open space provision, thehierarchy provides an overview of the broad distribution of open spaceprovision across London, highlights areas where there is a shortfall andfacilitates cross-borough planning and management of open space. Moredetailed guidance on how to assess local needs is included in the Guide 5toPreparing Open Space Strategies, published by the GLA. table 's public open space hierarchyOpen space categorisationSize guidelineDistances from homes toopen spacesRegional Parks400 to 8 kilometresMetropolitan Parks60 kilometresDistrict Parks20 kilometresLocal Parks and Open Spaces2 hectares400 metresSmall Open SpacesUnder 2 hectaresLess than 400 also has a wealth of locally important open spaces. Developmenton local open spaces will not be acceptable where they have beendesignated for protection in a UDP or where there is a demonstrable needfor that open space, unless that need can be met elsewhere within the
The London PlanMayor of London 147local catchment area, or a new or replacement open space can be created within the local catchment area. The provision of replacementopen space will not be appropriate where English Heritage advises thatthe open space is of historic significance or where the open space is in (or its loss would create) an area of open space deficiency. Thereplacement of open spaces with nature conservation value is covered in Policy . Replacement open space should be of equivalent orbetter size and quality. Unless an assessment of needs demonstratesotherwise, replacement open space should be for the same type of openspace and open space provisionPolicy Open space strategiesBoroughs should, in consultation with local communities, the Mayor and other partners, produce open space strategies to protect, create and enhance all types of open space in their area. Such strategies shouldinclude approaches for the positive management of open space whereappropriate to prevent or remedy degradation or enhance the beneficialuse of it for the community. To assist with such strategies the Mayor hasproduced a Guide to Preparing Open Space Strategies. Boroughs should undertake audits of existing open space andassessments of need in their area, considering both the qualitative andthe quantitative elements of open space, sports and recreational facilities,as part of an open space strategy and in accordance with the guidancegiven in PPG17. In doing so, they should have regard to the cross-borough nature and use of many open spaces in London. for creating new public open spaces should be promotedwhere possible, targeting areas of deficiency and Areas for appropriate this should include opening up public access toprivately owned open spaces such as sports pitches and utilities land,including sites that are no longer required for their original purpose. Otherinnovative initiatives, such as roof terraces, play space created as a resultof traffic calming measures, and better use of amenity space aroundhousing estates, should be encouraged. The London Parks and GreenSpaces Forum will provide a valuable mechanism for the sharing ofexperience and good production of open space strategies should assist in providing a clearframework for investment priorities and action. Boroughs’ open spacestrategies for creating and enhancing open space should include:•acomprehensive audit of all open space
148Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•assessments of local needs and the value of existing open space,including for cultural, educational, structural, amenity, health andbiodiversity value •protection by appropriate designation on UDP maps•prioritisation of investment to address identified needs and deficiencies•identification of opportunities for improving access to and theaccessibility of open spaces, particularly by promoting public transport,cycling, walking and improving access and facilities for disabled people•identification of opportunities for improving linkages between openspaces and the wider public , habitat and speciesPolicy Biodiversity and nature conservationThe Mayor will work with partners to ensure a proactive approach to theprotection, promotion and management of biodiversity in support of theMayor’s Biodiversity planning of new development and regeneration should have regardtonature conservation and biodiversity, and opportunities should betaken to achieve positive gains for conservation through the form and design of development. Where appropriate, measures may include creating, enhancing and managing wildlife habitat and natural for habitat creation should be given to sites which assist inachieving the targets in Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPs) and sites withinor near to areas deficient in accessible wildlife , in reviewing UDPs and in considering proposals fordevelopment should accord the highest protection to internationallydesignated and proposed sites (SACs, SPAs and Ramsar sites), and tonationally designated sites (SSSIs) in accordance with governmentguidance and the Habitat Regulations, Mayor will identify Sites of Metropolitan Importance for NatureConservation (SMIs), which, in addition to internationally and nationallydesignated sites, includes land of strategic importance for natureconservation and biodiversity across London. Boroughs should give strong protection to these sites in their UDPs. Boroughs should use theprocedures adopted by the Mayor in his Biodiversity Strategy to identifysites of Borough or Local Importance for nature conservation and shouldaccord them a level of protection commensurate with their borough or local significance.
The London PlanMayor of London 149The Mayor will and boroughs should resist development that would havea significant adverse impact on the population or conservation status ofprotected species or priority species identified in the London BiodiversityAction Plan and borough BAPs. Appropriate policies for their protectionand enhancement and to achieve the targets set out in BAPs, should beincluded in development is proposed which would affect a site of importancefor nature conservation, the approach should be to seek to avoid adverseimpact on the nature conservation value of the site, and if that is notpossible, to minimise such impact and seek mitigation of any residualimpacts. Where, exceptionally, development is to be permitted becausethe reasons for it are judged to outweigh significant harm to natureconservation, appropriate compensation should be of strategic importance for biodiversity is found across London withparticular concentrations in some areas. London contains many sites ofinternational and national biodiversity importance for which there is astatutory requirement to consult English Nature. The internationallyimportant sites are wetlands identified under the Ramsar Convention andNatura 2000 sites, which include Special Protection Areas (SPA) andSpecial Areas for Conservation (SAC). These, and National NatureReserves together with a number of other areas, are all included withinthe nationally important Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSIs).
150Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap of Metropolitan Importance for nature conservation in LondonsourceGLA 2002 Mayor’s Biodiversity Strategy sets out the criteria and procedures foridentifying land of importance for London’s biodiversity for protection inUDPs. This includes Sites of Metropolitan Importance (which include allbiological Sites of Special Scientific Interest and further areas of regionalimportance), sites of Borough and Local Importance, Green Corridors andother local designations. Protecting this framework of strategicimportance for biodiversity serves to protect the significant areas of BAPpriority habitat in Corridors are relatively continuous areas of open space that runthrough built-up areas and provide an extension to the habitats of thesites they join. They may be the verges alongside road and rail routes orwaterways or a series of linked open spaces. Green Corridors may not beaccessible to the public, but may contribute to landscape quality as wellas Mayor expects the biodiversity and natural heritage of London tobe conserved and enhanced for the benefit of this and futuregenerations. He will assist boroughs in doing this with advice on UDPpolicies for biodiversity. Planning applications should give full
The London PlanMayor of London 151consideration to the effects, both direct and indirect, of developmentupon biodiversity, wildlife habitat and geology. Indirect effects includeincreased use and disturbance, hydrological changes, level of noise,pollution, shading and lighting disturbance. In Policy ,compensation is used in the context of reducing and off-setting the harmcaused by development and involves the provision of features to replacethose lost as a result, preferably by like with like. Because most wildlifehabitats are difficult to recreate, the replacement or relocation of speciesand habitat should be considered only as a last species are identified in a Biodiversity Action Plan (BAP), forexample the UK, London or a borough of the key objectives of the Mayor’s Biodiversity Strategy is to ensurethat all Londoners have ready access to wildlife and natural green is particularly important where there is a shortage of green space andin Areas for Regeneration. Access can be improved by making places moreattractive and safer, enhancing or creating new wildlife habitats andopening up access to existing habitats. Wherever appropriate, newdevelopment should include new or enhanced habitat, or design (such asgreen roofs) and landscaping that promotes biodiversity, and provision fortheir LondonPolicy London’s countryside and the urban fringeThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to improve access tothe countryside and the quality of landscape in the urban Mayor will and boroughs should support sub-regional and cross-borough boundary urban fringe management and, in particular,explore the potential for taking forward the concept of CommunityForests within proximity of London’s countryside to high concentrations of peoplecreates demand for recreational enjoyment. This must be carefullymanaged to address problems of litter, damage and dereliction and takeinto account the operational needs of farmers and nature conservationinterests. In terms of countryside management and good environment the‘edge’ between the urban fringe and the countryside should be clear andwell should address barriers to access in rural areas, includingphysical barriers, and introduce strategies and enhancement schemes that
152Mayor of LondonThe London Planensure everyone has equal access to the recreational opportunities inLondon’s countryside, having regard to government guidance and Agriculture in LondonThe Mayor will and boroughs should seek to encourage and support a thriving agricultural sector in London. Policies in UDPs should providefor the protection of the best and most versatile agricultural land inaccordance with national guidance, and allow for appropriate projects for farm diversification and other measures to meet the needs of farmingand rural business development. Such policies should be consistent withthe other policies of this plan, such as having regard to sustainabledevelopment and transport and the presumption against inappropriatedevelopment in the Green farming industry in London, as elsewhere, is suffering from 15 per cent of London’s area is farmed and London’s agriculturalcommunity plays an important part in managing and maintaining anattractive landscape, providing opportunities for recreation and education,contributing to a sustainable source of food and promoting sustainableurban development. The development of farmers’ markets in London isone good example of this. In accordance with national guidance,appropriate farm diversification should be encouraged, particularly wherewider community and environmental benefits would result. Examplesinclude, protecting landscapes, the production of bio-fuels and promotingaccess and enjoyment. As the majority of farmland in London isdesignated as Green Belt or MOL, development associated withappropriate farm diversification should contribute to achieving theseobjectives. Land management schemes and environmental improvementsshould be spacePolicy Burial spaceUDP policies should ensure that provision is made for London’s burialneeds, including the special needs of certain religious or cultural groupsfor whom burial is the only option. Provision should be based on theprinciple of proximity to local Mayor will promote the policies for sustainable cemeteries published6by London Planning Advisory Committee (LPAC) in boroughs have run out of burial space, and reserves in otherboroughs will run out over the next few years. For central and inner
The London PlanMayor of London 153London boroughs, this means that provision is often made in outerLondon, and this can cause serious problems of access and exceptionalcosts. This has a disproportionate effect on people in London’s poorestboroughs and on some of London’s poorest communities, such as theBangladeshi community in east London. To ensure burial is retained as a choice for Londoners, and to meet the special needs of variouscommunities, boroughs should continue to make provision for a burial ground or cemetery is full, its income stream dries up and maintenance is threatened. The Mayor believes that the governmentshould revise burial law to allow the sustainable reuse of graves, in accordance with guidelines promoted by LPAC and endorsed by theMayor, the Confederation of Burial Authorities (CBA), and Institute ofBurial and Cremation Administration (IBCA). This would enable London tomeet all of its future burials needs within existing burial grounds and,where appropriate, to restore old Spatial Development Strategy, European Commission, 19992NRaynsford. Hansard columns 401- 402, 5 December 19973Visit London, GLA, 20024Demand & Capacity for hotels and conference centres in London, SDS Technical Report13, GLA, 20025Guide to preparing Open Space Strategies, GLA, to be published in 20046Planning for Burial Space in London, LPAC, 1997
154Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 1554the crosscutting policiesThis chapter contains policies that contribute to all the six objectives of this plan. Its particular focus is on Objective 6: to make London a more attractive, well-designed and green city and Objective 4: to promotesocial inclusion and tackle deprivation and ’s metabolism: using and managingnatural become an exemplary, sustainable world city, London must use naturalresources more efficiently, increase its re-use of resources and reducelevels of waste and environmental degradation. As London grows, theseobjectives will become even more important. The shift towards a compactcity will contribute towards these objectives. It will enable the efficientuse of resources such as land and energy. It will also enable the ‘proximityprinciple’ – which states that resources and wastes should be collected,re-used or disposed of as close as possible to their source – to be intensive development will require strategies to minimise noise andair the objectives and policies set out in his strategies on MunicipalWaste Management, Air Quality, Energy, Biodiversity and Ambient Noise,the Mayor will work with partners to give a stronger emphasis to theprevention of environmental problems in London. This emphasis is carried forward in this plan. Policies relating to biodiversity can be foundin Chapter 3, Part D of this plan. More details of the implementation of the Mayor’s environmental policies can be found in the relevant12345strategy the Mayor’s environmental policies will enable London todraw on the resources it needs to live, breathe and develop as a growingworld city. London should become a more sustainable and self-sufficientcity, healthier to live in and more efficient in its use of resources. It shouldalso be a better neighbour to its surrounding regions by consuming moreof its own waste and producing less also needs to take measures against the impacts of climatechange, some of which are already being felt. Implementation of theMayor’s environmental policies, particularly in the Energy Strategy, willhelp to mitigate climate change by reducing carbon dioxide emissions.
156Mayor of LondonThe London Plan1Planning for wastePolicy Waste strategic policy and targetsIn order to meet the national policy aim that most waste should betreated or disposed of within the region in which it is produced (regional self-sufficiency) the Mayor will work in partnership with the Londonboroughs, the Environment Agency, statutory waste disposal authoritiesand operators to ensure that facilities with sufficient capacity to manage75 per cent (16 million tonnes) of waste arising within London areprovided by 2010, rising to 80 per cent (19 million tonnes) by 2015 and 85 per cent ( million tonnes) by 2020. An early alteration to this plan will seek to bring forward regional self sufficiency targets forindividual waste Mayor will work in partnership with the government, boroughs,Environment Agency, statutory waste disposal authorities and operators tominimise the level of waste generated, increase re-use and recyclingand composting of waste and reduce landfill disposal. Boroughs shouldensure that land resources are available to implement the Mayor’sMunicipal Waste Management Strategy, Waste Strategy 2000, the Landfill directive and other EU directives on Mayor will work in partnership with the waste authorities,Environment Agency and operators to exceed recycling or compostinglevels in household waste of:•25 per cent by 2005•30 per cent by 2010•33 per cent by minimum quantities represented by those targets are 1 million tonnes in 2005, million tonnes in 2010 and million tonnes in2015. This would leave some million tonnes in 2005, milliontonnes in 2010 and million tonnes in 2015 to be dealt with by othermeans, with a declining reliance on landfill and an increasing use of newand emerging regard to the existing incineration capacity in London and with a view to encouraging an increase in waste minimisation, recycling,composting and the development of new and emerging advancedconversion technologies for waste, the Mayor will consider these wastemanagement methods in preference to any increase in mass burnincineration capacity. Each case however will be treated on its individualmerits. The aim is that current incinerator capacity will, over the lifetimeof this plan, become orientated towards non-recyclable residual waste.
The London PlanMayor of London 157Policy Spatial policies for waste managementIn support of the Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy, theproximity principle and the need to plan for all waste streams, UDPpolicies should:•safeguard all existing waste management sites (unless appropriatecompensatory provision is made)•identify new sites in suitable locations for new facilities, such as CivicAmenity sites, construction and demolition waste recycling plants andclosed vessel composting•require the provision of suitable waste and recycling storage facilitiesin all new developments•ensure that the principles of Best Practical Environmental Option are applied•support appropriate developments for manufacturing related torecycled waste•support treatment facilities to recover value from residual waste•where waste cannot be dealt with locally, promote waste facilities that have good access to river or rail transport•identify and forecast for the period covered by the UDP: total waste arisings, that is controlled wastes that include municipalwaste and also commercial, industrial, hazardous and inert arisings, and the amount of waste that will be imported or Mayor will promote the co-ordination of the boroughs’ waste policies by bringing forward, as an early alteration to this plan, strategicguidance which will evaluate the adequacy of existing strategicallyimportant waste management and disposal facilities to meet London’sfuture needs, both for municipal and other waste streams, and identifythe number and type of new or enhanced facilities required to meet thoseneeds and the opportunities for the broad location of such facilities. Thisguidance will provide sufficient sub-regional guidance, including thedisposal of waste arisings from the central sub-region, to inform thepreparation of SRDFs and UDPs. Until the alteration of this plan isbrought forward, the Mayor will work with boroughs to identifystrategically important sites and will expect boroughs to apply theprovisions set out in this Policy and Policies and in bringingforward development plans and in considering development proposals. He will also work with the South East England and East of Englandregional authorities to co-ordinate strategic waste management across the three regions.
158Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Criteria for the selection of sites for waste management and disposalUDP policies should incorporate the following criteria to identify sites and allocate sufficient land for waste management and disposal:•proximity to source of waste•the nature of activity proposed and its scale•the environmental impact on surrounding areas, particularly noise,emissions, odour and visual impact•the transport impact, particularly the use of rail and water transport•primarily using sites that are located on Preferred Industrial Locationsor existing waste management Mayor will keep these criteria under review, and SRDFs should reflect the need for any sub-regional currently produces 17 million tonnes of waste every year. This is7forecast to rise to million tonnes in 2020. Table shows that thisis divided into municipal, commercial/industrial and construction/demolition waste. Overall London recycles less than half this waste, aperformance that requires major improvement. Only eight per cent ofmunicipal waste is currently recycled, while over 70 per cent of municipalwaste goes into landfill sites that are located largely outside London. It is estimated that London currently manages 60 per cent of its own waste,taking account of total waste waste produced and disposal method, London 2001Source ofwasteMillion % % % %tonnes DisposedRecycledIncineratedOtherper annumat landfillMunicipal solid / / on Enviros and government policy and directivesrequire both substantialreductions in the use of landfill and increases in recycling andcomposting. The Mayor has had regard to and supports these policies and his Municipal Waste Management Strategy seeks to exceed thetargets of those in the government’s Waste Strategy 2000. Although itwould not be appropriate to reflect it in the policies in this plan, the
The London PlanMayor of London 159Mayor believes higher targets could be achieved in the longer term andwill lobby the government to develop the legislative changes and othermeasures necessary to achieve rates of recycling and composting ofmunicipal waste of:•50 per cent by 2010•60 per cent by should improve for all forms of waste in London in terms of greater efficiency of use, a reduction in amounts generated and anincrease in recycling. The greatest need and opportunity for improvedperformance is in the sector of municipal waste collected by councils,largely from households. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste ManagementStrategy (MMWMS) states that waste should be treated in the followingpriority order: to reduce, re-use, recover (recycling, composting, energy),dispose – on the basis that energy recovery is not considered before theopportunities for recycling and composting have been maximised. This plan sets out the spatial policies to support the MMWMS and includes its targets for recycling and reduction of facilities that support waste should be retained or replaced in asuitable way. As London grows and recycling performance improves, new facilities will be needed. These include materials recycling facilitiesand depots, inert waste recycling plants, composting facilities, wastetreatment and energy recovery facilities, and reprocessing of recovery should be carried out through advanced conversiontechniques, ie gasification, pyrolysis or anaerobic digestion or anycombination of these as defined in the Renewables Obligation Order92002. Modern facilities should be well designed and demonstrate thatthey achieve the Best Practical Environmental Option. They need not be bad neighbours and could be a source of new products and new should be developed and designed in consultation with localcommunities, taking account of health and safety within the facility, thesite and adjoining neighbourhoods. The proximity principle requires thatwaste be treated as close to source as possible. However this will require a phased approach while new facilities are being developed. Wheremovement is required, priority should be given to facilities for movementby river or rail. Guidance on the number and type of new or enhancedstrategically important waste management facilities needs to meet thetargets of this plan and the identification of opportunities for the locationof such facilities will be brought forward as an early alteration of this planduring 2004. The Mayor will work closely with the London RTAB andother key stakeholders in developing the guidance, which will then besubject to full public consultation and testing in accordance with thenormal statutory requirements. This work and ultimately the strategic
160Mayor of LondonThe London Planguidance in the altered London Plan, will inform the preparation of SRDFsand UDPs. In the meantime, the Mayor will work with boroughs to ensurethat exising and potential strategically important sites for wastemanagement and disposal are not lost to other forms of has significant incineration capacity in the form of two mass burnincinerators, dealing with 20 per cent of municipal waste. The Mayor isconcerned that opportunities to develop recycling and composting shouldnot be crowded out by mass incinerator use. He therefore will considerother forms of new and emerging technology including mechanical andbiological treatment before new mass burn capacity. It is also theintention that current incinerator capacity will be reoriented towards non-recyclable residual London boroughs are the waste planning authorities for London. The achievement of ambitious targets for minimising and recycling wasterequires collaborative working. The Mayor will work in partnership withboroughs and other bodies to assist the achievement of these targets. He is already working with the South East England regional authoritiesand East of England regional authorities to co-ordinate strategic wastemanagement across the three regions and, in particular, to reduceLondon’s dependence on landfill disposal in these regions. The supply of landfill sites around London is likely to be reduced severely during the10plan period. The neighbouring regions are also proposing to adoptstringent self-sufficiency policies on waste, limiting London’s ability tolandfill waste. Landfill of biodegradable untreated mixed waste is the leastsustainable disposal option. London needs to become more self-sufficientin its treatment of waste. The reduction of landfill should be phased overthe lifetime of this plan while facilities for municipal, commercial andindustrial, and construction and demolition waste are developed. Thisplanning for waste in London depends on accurate data and process of plan, monitor and manage will be vitally important toensure that the planning system in London provides for the substantialchange in waste management for all waste streams envisaged in this for mineralsPolicy Better use of aggregatesToensure an adequate supply of aggregates the Mayor will work withstrategic partners to achieve targets of:•80 per cent re-use of construction and demolition waste•60 per cent re-use of that waste as aggregates in London by 2011.
The London PlanMayor of London 161Policy Spatial policies to support the better use of aggregatesUDP policies should:•identify and safeguard aggregate resources suitable for extraction•adopt the highest environmental standards for aggregates extraction in line with National Minerals Policy Guidance•support the development of aggregate recycling facilities inappropriate and environmentally acceptable locations, with measurestoreduce noise, dust and visual intrusion to a practical minimum•safeguard wharves with an existing or future potential for aggregateshandling and ensure adjacent development is designed accordingly tominimise the potential for conflicts of use and disturbance•protect existing railhead capacity to handle and process aggregates•minimise the movement of aggregates by needs a reliable supply of materials to support high levels ofbuilding and transport construction. These materials include land-wonsand and gravel, crushed rock, marine sand and gravel and recycled andalternative materials. There are relatively small reserves of land-won sandand gravel in London. Most aggregates used in London come fromoutside including marine sand and gravel and land-won materials fromother regions, including the South East and East. There are limitedreserves of land-won sand and gravel to meet the new guidelines forLondon of 19 million tonnes of land-won sand and gravel in the period102001-2016. The ability to achieve the guideline, particularly for land-won aggregates is problematic, as it requires an increase over pastperformance. The ability to achieve the London element of the newguidelines will be tested with partners. Research indicates ‘that thetargets in Policy could be higher increasing to 95 per cent re-use of construction and demolition waste by 2016 with 90 per cent of that 12re-use as aggregates’. The establishment of the London AggregatesWorking Party in October 2003 will enable the London implications of the guidelines to be tested alongside the potential higher re-use targets. The implications of any change will be for the review of this principle of this plan is to support the government’s MineralsPlanning Guidance and the objective of achieving an essential level of supply in the most sustainable fashion. Aggregates are bulky materialsand policy should maximise their use and re-use and minimise theirmovement, especially by road. This plan’s Policy on sustainabledesign and construction will be important in helping to reduce thedemand for natural materials. The proximity principle dictates the bestand most local use of materials that can be extracted in London.
162Mayor of LondonThe London should develop policies that support the protection andenhancement of recycling facilities and minimise their impacts on theenvironment. Boroughs should also balance the environmental concernsarising from some of the existing and proposed recycling facilities againstthe collective need for recycled aggregates in London identified in the11new national are often pressures for the redevelopment of wharves along the Thames. However, existing and future wharf capacity is essential,especially for marine-dredged aggregates. Boroughs should thereforeconsider carefully any alternative developments and ensure that anydevelopment on adjacent sites is suitably designed (see also Chapter 4,PartC). Similarly, existing and new railhead capacity will be needed tosupport sustainable forms of movement. Sites for depots may beparticularly appropriate in Preferred Industrial Locations and otheremployment air qualityPolicy Improving air qualityThe Mayor will and boroughs should implement the Mayor’s Air QualityStrategy and achieve reductions in pollutant emissions by:•improving the integration of land use and transport policy andreducing the need to travel especially by car (see Chapter 3, Part C)•promoting sustainable design and construction (see Chapter 4, Part B)•identifying environmental constraints on polluting activities to ensureprotection of local air quality, setting out criteria in respect of different pollutants against which plans and policies can be appraisedand proposals assessed•ensuring at the planning application stage, that air quality is taken into account along with other material considerations and that formalair quality assessments are undertaken where appropriate, particularlyin designated Air Quality Management Areas•seeking to reduce the environmental impacts of transport activities by supporting the increased provision of cleaner transport fuels,particularly with respect to the refuelling infrastructure•working in partnership with relevant organisations, taking appropriatesteps to achieve an integrated approach to air quality management and to achieve emissions reductions through improved energyefficiency and energy use (see Policy ).The Mayor will work with strategic partners to ensure that the spatial,transport and design policies of this plan support his Air Quality Strategy.
The London PlanMayor of London accordance with the objectives of the National Air Quality Strategy,the Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy seeks to minimise the emissions of keypollutants and to reduce concentrations to levels at which no, or minimal, effects on human health are likely to occur. The Mayor’s strategy provides guidelines on policies for UDPs and SupplementaryPlanning Guidance and refers to applicable documents. It also givesguidelines on air quality assessments and outlines steps local authoritiescan take to improve air should ensure their UDPs include policies that seek to reducelevels of pollutants referred to in the government’s National Air QualityStrategy having regard to the Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy, and takingaccount of the findings of Air Quality Review and Assessments, in particularwhere Air Quality Management Areas (AQMAs) have been Mayor, together with Transport for London, the ALG, boroughs, thegovernment and other key bodies have recently completed a study intothe feasibility of establishing a Low Emission Zone in London in order todeliver air quality improvements. Consideration is being given to the resultof the study and what action should be Modelled 1999 annual mean NOconcentrations in mg/m2sourceMayor’s Air Quality Strategy, GLA 2002noteA ‘poor’ weather year is one where weather conditions give rise to elevated air pollutionlevels. These years may vary by pollutant.
164Mayor of LondonThe London Plan4Improving the use of energyPolicy Energy efficiency and renewable energyThe Mayor will and boroughs should support the Mayor’s Energy Strategy and its objectives of reducing carbon dioxide emissions,improving energy efficiency and increasing the proportion of energy used generated from renewable sources by:•improving the integration of land use and transport policy andreducing the need to travel by car (see Chapter 3, Part C)•requiring the inclusion of energy efficient and renewable energytechnology and design, including passive solar design, naturalventilation, borehole cooling, combined heat and power, communityheating, photovoltaics, solar water heating, wind, fuel cells, biomassfuelled electricity and heat generating plant in new developmentswherever feasible•facilitating and encouraging the use of all forms of renewable energywhere appropriate including giving consideration to the impact of newdevelopment on existing renewable energy schemes•minimising light lost to the sky, particularly from street Mayor will work with strategic partners to ensure that the spatial, transport and design policies of this plan support the Mayor’sEnergy Strategy and contribute towards achieving COand renewable2energy should become more energy efficient and use more energy from renewable sources. In taking forward the spatial implications of the Mayor’s Energy Strategy, this plan represents an opportunity toimprove the sustainability and environmental performance of London’sbuilt environment. This applies to both new development and the existingbuilt form. Energy efficient measures and renewable energy technologyshould not be precluded in areas of heritage, but should be designedsensitively. In order to clarify what is expected of developers in terms ofthe inclusion of renewable energy technology and design, working withLondon Renewables, a study will be commissioned to set about both thetechnical feasibility and to assess the extent to which the incorporation ofrenewable energy schemes affects the financial viability of developmentprojects. Consideration will be given to the development of the tool kit toassist both planners and developers in carrying out assessments of whattechnologies are feasible. The Energy Strategy sets targets for thereduction of carbon dioxide emissions by 20 per cent relative to the 1990level by 2010 as the crucial first step on a long-term path to a 60 per centreduction from the 2000 level by 2050. It should be possible to reduceemissions to 23 per cent below 1990 levels by 2016. The Energy Strategy
The London PlanMayor of London 165also contains targets in relation to the installation of types of renewableenergy schemes to increase London’s generation of power and heat fromrenewable energy schemes up to 2020. The Energy Strategy contains thedetails of these targets, which will inform the first review of the LondonPlan. In support of these Londonwide targets the Energy Strategy includespolicies requesting boroughs to set consistent targets for the generation ofrenewable energy in their areas, to install at least one zero carbondevelopment and to identify Energy Action Areas. These concepts will beaddressed in the SPG or development of SRDFs with a view toincorporating the outcomes into the first review of the London Energy assessmentThe Mayor will and boroughs should request an assessment of the energy demand of proposed major developments, which should alsodemonstrate the steps taken to apply the Mayor’s energy hierarchy (see Paragraph ).The Mayor will expect all strategic referrals of commercial and residentialschemes to demonstrate that the proposed heating and cooling systemshave been selected in accordance with the following order of preference:passive design; solar water heating; combined heat and power, for heating and cooling, preferably fuelled by renewables; community heating for heating and cooling; heat pumps; gas condensing boilers and gas central should apply the same criteria to major Energy Strategy sets out and explains how to apply a hierarchy toguide decision-making and the consideration of development hierarchy states that essential energy needs should be met throughapplying in sequence the following factors: using less energy, usingrenewable energy and supplying energy of the hierarchy will ensure that carbon dioxide emissions from the development are minimised during operation. Appropriate design,orientation, layout and construction of buildings can avoid energy loss,minimise energy demand through natural lighting, heating and coolingand allow on-site generation of heat or electricity from renewable heat and power along with community heating schemes canoptimise energy efficiency and should be included in new developmentswherever feasible. High density mixes of residential and commercialproperties can present opportunities to include the necessary energyinfrastructure. These issues will be addressed through the SupplementaryPlanning Guidance on sustainable design and construction.
166Mayor of LondonThe London PlanRenewable energyPolicy Providing for renewable energyThe Mayor will and boroughs should require major developments toshow how the development would generate a proportion of the site’s electricity or heat needs from renewables, wherever Supporting the provision of renewable energyThe Mayor will support and encourage the development of at least onelarge wind power scheme in London together with building mountedschemes, where these do not adversely affect the character and amenityof the area. UDP policies should identify suitable sites for wind turbinesand other renewable energy provision, such as non-building integratedsolar technologies along transport routes, reflecting the broad criteria tobe developed by the Mayor in partnership with the EnvironmentAgency and land is needed for the provision of renewable energy technologies,such as anaerobic digesters and biomass plants, as part of appropriatedevelopments, boroughs should encourage this provision through theirinclusion in development briefs and area development frameworks. TheMayor, in partnership with the boroughs and the Environment Agency will produce Supplementary Planning Guidance on renewable energy. This will set out broad guidelines to define locations where stand-alonerenewable energy schemes would be appropriate and set criteria for theassessment of such schemes. The Mayor will encourage use of the rangeof renewable energy technologies which should be incorporated whereversite conditions make them feasible. Development not initiallyincorporating photovoltaics should be of a suitable design and orientationtosupport them later. Work on feasibility will be attached toSupplementary Planning Guidance and so be subject to publicconsultation. The first review of this plan will consider issues around theproportion of renewable energy that a site will be expected to generate. 5Efficient use of waterPolicy Water suppliesThe Mayor will work in partnership with appropriate agencies withinLondon and neighbouring regions to protect and conserve water suppliesin order to secure London’s long term needs by:•ensuring that adequate sustainable water resources are available for major new development•minimising the use of treated water•maximising rainwater harvesting opportunities
The London PlanMayor of London 167•using grey water recycling systems•reaching cost-effective minimum leakage levels•keeping under review the need for additional sources of water supply. In determining planning applications, the Mayor will and boroughs should have proper regard to the impact of those proposals on waterdemand and existing Mayor recognises that additional water infrastructure will be requiredtofacilitate London’s growth. A clean and reliable supply of water is afundamental need of everyone. London has a high-quality reliable watersupply much of which is supplied from outside London. The concentrationof people and services within London can lead to pressure on suppliesduring periods of prolonged hot weather when water usage pressure is likely to increase in the future with the predicted changestoour climate. Warmer temperatures are likely to increase the overalldemand for water and stormier rainfall patterns are likely to make it moredifficult to retain the water that does fall. When combined with the levelsof growth forecast for London, it is vital that a precautionary approach is taken in order to ensure that London’s future water resource needs aresustainable. The Mayor will produce Supplementary Planning Guidance on sustainable design and construction, which will contain further detailsof water efficiency Mayor recognises that failure to make sufficient progress on leakageand demand reduction would lead to a water resource deficit for Londontowards the end of the plan period. The Mayor is also aware of the longlead in times required to implement any major new water supplyinfrastructure. The Mayor wishes to keep this situation under close reviewso that if it becomes clear that water shortages are likely, then suitablemeasures can be put in place in a timely and sustainable amount of water that is lost through leakage in the supply network 14in the London area is currently estimated to be around 25 per centofthe total amount of supplied water. It is a figure that should be 4, Part C contains policies on water as they relate to the BlueRibbon Network.
168Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Water qualityThe Mayor will and boroughs should seek to protect and improve waterquality to ensure that the Blue Ribbon Network is healthy, attractive and offers a valuable series of habitats by:•ensuring that adequate sewerage infrastructure capacity is available for major new development•refusing, or directing refusal of proposals that are likely to lead toa reduction in water quality•using sustainable urban drainage systems to reduce the amount and intensity of urban run-off and pollution (see also Policy ).Policy Water and sewerage infrastructureThe Mayor expects developers and local planning authorities to worktogether with water supply and sewerage companies to enable theinspection, repair or replacement of water supply and sewerageinfrastructure, if required, during the construction of development. The Mayor will work with Thames Water, the Environment Agency and other relevant organisations to ensure that London’s drainage and sewerage infrastructure is London’s waterways have suffered from severe to legislation and regulation of pollution, combined withsignificant shifts in the types of industry in London, have reducedpollution and led to subsequent improvements in the biodiversity and attractiveness of most waterways. The result is that the Thames is now one of the cleanest metropolitan rivers in the world and a majorvisitor are still problems. In some cases the returning wildlife is subject tothe threat of periodic pollution from urban run-off following heavyrainfall. There are still a number of tributary streams that are highlypolluted, often with domestic sewage, and there is the on-going problemof sewage overflow into the Thames during times of high rainfall. The15Thames Tideway Strategic Studyis examining the issue of storm sewagedischarges to the Thames Tideway. The Mayor is keen to support thiswork and also to work in partnership with appropriate agencies to ensurethat there is sufficient sewerage capacity for the scale of developmentenvisaged in this plan.
The London PlanMayor of London 1696Reducing noisePolicy Reducing noiseThe Mayor will and boroughs should reduce noise by:•minimising the existing and potential adverse impacts of noise on, from, within, or in the vicinity of, development proposals•separating new noise sensitive development from major noise sources wherever practicable •supporting new technologies and improved practices to reduce noise at source, especially in road, rail and air transport•reducing the impact of traffic noise through highway management and transport policies (see Chapter 3, Part C)•containing noise from late night entertainment and other 24-houractivities, and where appropriate promoting well-managed designatedlocations (see Chapter 3, Part D).The Mayor will work with strategic partners to ensure that the transport,spatial and design policies of this plan support the objectives, policies and proposals set out in the London Ambient Noise in terms of both abating adverse effects and maintaining orenhancing soundscape quality is expected to gain a higher profile indesign and management during the life of this plan. The government hasmade a commitment to produce a National Ambient Noise Strategy andthe Environmental Noise Directive 49/2002 will require action plans to beadopted. As it becomes a more compact, even busier city, London willneed a more vigorous approach to noise reduction at the strategic andlocal level. At the strategic level, main roads, major rail corridors andaircraft are the principal sources of ambient noise. Reducing aircraft noiseshould be a priority for government, which is responsible for regulation atairports. This plan’s transport policies, together with the impact of quietertechnologies, will assist in tackling the main sources of noise. Many morelocal sources of noise can be addressed through sensitive design,management and operation. These issues will be considered in more detailin Supplementary Planning Guidance on sustainable design andconstruction. As policy and practice develops, noise and soundscapequality issues, such as the contribution of urban form to noise reductionand the application of Noise Action Statements, will need to be addressedin the first review of this plan.
170Mayor of LondonThe London Plan7Tackling climate changePolicy Climate changeThe Mayor will and boroughs should assess and develop policies for thelikely impacts of climate change on London identified in the work of theLondon Climate Change Partnership. Policies will be developed inconjunction with the Partnership and addressed in the first review of theLondon is already feeling the effects of climate change. Sea-level riserelative to the land is now widely accepted as occurring at 6mm/year athigh tide in the London area. A significant proportion of futuredevelopment will be in east London, which could be increasingly at riskfrom tidal flooding. Preventative and adaptive measures will therefore beneeded, including the construction of appropriate flood defences in newdevelopments. Policies address these study by the London Climate Change Partnership identified a number16of climate change impacts that could affect London in the include:•higher temperatures – with increases in demand for summer cooling, yet less demand for winter heating so reducing incidences of fuel poverty•increased risk of flooding – rising sea levels and increased winterstorminess could increase closures of the Thames Barrier•higher water demand – river flows are likely to be lower in summer and higher in winter, which could aggravate water quality problems•effects on health – both less winter mortality and yet higher summermortality caused by stress•biodiversity – summer drought could stress wetlands; warmer weathercould encourage spread of disease and pests•built environment – subsidence could worsen as clay dries out; butincreased number of days when construction is possible•transport – disruption from flooding and from warmer temperatures;but decreased disruption from cold weather•business and finance – insurance industry could be exposed toincreased volume of claims; potential reduced access to insurance in areas at flood risk•tourism – increased temperatures attract more tourists; but could alsolead to residents leaving London for a more comfortable environment•lifestyle – green and open spaces will be used more intensively withmore outdoor living.
The London PlanMayor of London 1718Contaminated landPolicy Bringing contaminated land into beneficial useThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to identify best practicemechanisms to enhance remediation of contaminated sites and bring the land into beneficial principle of sustainable development means that where practicable,brownfield sites including those affected by contamination should berecycled into new uses. Such recycling also provides an opportunity todeal with the threats posed by contamination to health and theenvironment. The re-use of brownfield sites is a key objective runningthroughout this plan. Any land which is affected by contamination,whether or not identified under the regulations, may require measures toprevent contamination being mobilised when building takes place. Mayor, with strategic partners, will work to identify ways in which theprocess of remediation of contaminated land can be enhanced whether in relation to remediation techniques or in other parts of the process as substancesPolicy Dealing with hazardous substancesUDPs should include policies relating to the location of establishments,where hazardous substances are used or stored, and to the developmentof land within the vicinity of establishments where hazardous substancesare present in order to limit the consequences of any potential accidents;the Mayor will and boroughs should take into account the presence ofhazardous substances in making policies and determining applicationsthat relate to the development of land in the vicinity of establishmentswhere hazardous substances are EU Directive on the prevention of major accidents involving17hazardous substancesrequires land use policies to take prevention and minimisation of consequences into account and this is reflected in PPG 12. The Mayor has also had regard to Regulation 6(1)(c)(ii) of theTown and Country Planning (London Spatial Development Strategy )Regulations 2000 in framing policy . Where appropriate, adviceshould be sought from the Health and Safety Executive.
172Mayor of LondonThe London PlanReferences1 Rethinking Rubbish in London, The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy,Greater London Authority, September 20032 Cleaning London’s air, The Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy, Greater London Authority,September 2002 3 Green Light to Clean Power, The Mayor’s Energy Strategy, Greater London Authority,forthcoming February 20044 The Mayor’s London Ambient Noise Strategy, Greater London Authority, forthcomingMarch 2004 5 Connecting with London’s nature. The Mayor’s Biodiversity Strategy, Greater London Authority, July 2002 6 Enviros Technical Assessment for Waste Management in London 2003 7Environmental Protection Act 1990, section 44A and Regulation 6(1)(a) of the Town and Country Planning (London Spatial Development Strategy ) Regulations 20008 Waste Forecast Modelling Technical Report, Greater London Authority, 2004 9 Renewables Obligation Order 2002. . No. 91410 Strategic Waste Management Assessment 2000: East of England and South East,Environment Agency 11 National and Regional Guidelines for aggregate provision in England, 2001-2016 (a replacement annex to MPG6), ODPM 2003 12 Survey of Arisings and Use of Construction and Demolition Waste in England and Walesin 2001, ODPM, October 200213 Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, DETR, 2000 14 Leakage figures from Environment Agency 15 Thames Tideway Steering Group consists of Thames Water, Environment Agency, DEFRAand the Greater London Authority 16 London’s Warming. The Impacts of Climate Change on London. London Climate ChangePartnership 2002 17 Council Directive 96/92/EC which came into force on 3 February 1999
The London PlanMayor of London 1734Bdesigns on design is central to all the objectives of this plan. It is a tool forhelping to accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries (Objective1). Particularly given its strong growth, very high standards of design areneeded to make London a better city to live in and one which is moreattractive and green (Objectives 2 and 6). There is a strong link betweengood design and the attraction to economic investors to help create a prosperous city (Objective 3). Areas of social exclusion are usuallyassociated with poor, hostile environments and far better, more inclusivedesign must form part of their regeneration (Objective 4). Excellence in design can also make higher densities a source of better, more variedand more sustainable environment in places of high accessibility andreduce the need to travel (Objective 5). London’s population and economy grow, the existing fabric will need to be carefully maintained, and new spaces and buildings sensitivelyintroduced. Good urban design gives order to space and beauty tobuildings. Poor design results in inefficient and fragmented use of landand in buildings and spaces that make hostile and unattractiveenvironments for citizens and part is in two sections: first it looks at general design principles and then at specific design of design for a compact city Policy Design principles for a compact cityThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, seek to ensure that developments:•maximise the potential of sites •create or enhance the public realm •provide or enhance a mix of uses •areaccessible, usable and permeable for all users •aresustainable, durable and adaptable •aresafe for occupants and passers-by •respect local context, character and communities •arepractical and legible •areattractive to look at and, where appropriate, inspire, excite and delight •respect the natural environment •respect London’s built principles should be used in assessing planning applications and in drawing up area planning frameworks and UDP policies. Urban design
174Mayor of LondonThe London Planstatements showing how they have been incorporated should be submitted with proposals to illustrate their design Promoting world-class architecture and designThe Mayor will seek to promote world-class design, by collaborating with partners to:•promote improvements to London’s public realm, for example throughthe Mayor’s 100 Spaces for London programme •promote community involvement and, through the involvement of the GLA Architecture and Urbanism Unit, competitive selection of designers and design-led change in key locations. The Mayor will also work with partners to prepare and implement:•design guidelines for London •apublic realm strategy for London to improve the look and feel of London’s streets and compact city must maximise the potential of its sites. In order to absorbgrowth in population and jobs, London must achieve more intensivedevelopment in the right places (see Policy ). It must be designedand managed to ensure long-term efficient use, and in forms that are safe and sensitive both to their own operational needs and to theirsurroundings. Design quality is central to this and poorly designedschemes will squander London’s valuable resources and can blight thelives of users and neighbours. public realm comprises spaces between, around and within includes schemes such as the rejuvenation of Trafalgar Square and otherprojects in the Mayor’s 100 Spaces for London programme that will helptoimprove key public spaces for Londoners. But incrementalimprovements to all parts of the public realm are also vital and everyopportunity should be taken to achieve -use development encourages a reduction in the need to travel long distances, by including a balance of housing, employment,commercial and other community facilities in the same area. Mixing usescan also help achieve intensive development by using the same space formore than one purpose. It contributes to vitality and safety by preventingareas becoming deserted and hostile. New developments should create or enhance a mix of uses within large buildings, within the developmentand/or between the development and its surroundings. Use of openspace as well as buildings should be taken into account. Where mixed
The London PlanMayor of London 175uses are problematic between housing and industrial areas, innovativedesign should be used to reduce noise and other nuisances. Chapter 3,Parts A and B encourage mixed use as part of predominantly housing oremployment based developments. Chapter 5 indicates potential for mixesof use in many Opportunity Areas and other key development should be safe and secure, taking into account the12objectives of ‘Secured by Design’, ‘Designing out Crime’andDOECircular 5/94 ‘Planning out Crime’. They should also incorporate specificsecurity requirements such as those relating to high-profile buildings andspaces. At the same time, buildings should not ensure their own safety byturning inwards and presenting a blank wall or fenced-in enclosure to thestreet, but should provide an urban environment where outward lookingbuildings and natural surveillance contribute to, and benefit from, life atstreet design is rooted firmly in an understanding and appreciation of the local social, historical and physical context, including urban form andmovement patterns and historic character. London is highly diverse andconstantly changing, but developments should show an understanding of, and respect for, existing character. The Mayor has already produced3some guidance on best practice for well-designed higher density housingand will produce Supplementary Planning Guidance on urban design. proposals should show that developers have sought toprovide buildings and spaces that are designed to be beautiful andenjoyable to visit, as well as being functional, safe, accessible, sustainableand inclusive for all. New building projects should ensure the highestpossible space standards for users, in both public and private spacesinside and outside the building, creating spacious and usable private aswell as public spaces. In particular, buildings should provide good storageand secondary space and maximise floor–ceiling heights where this iscompatible with other urban design is a green city with rich biodiversity. Development proposalsshould respect and enhance the natural environment and incorporategreening and planting initiatives. They should identify new opportunitiesfor creating private space for example, in roof gardens and terraces. Theyshould ensure that opportunities to naturalise and green the urbanenvironment, for example through tree planting, are maximised.
176Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Maximising the potential of sitesThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, ensure that development proposalsachieve the highest possible intensity of use compatible with localcontext, the design principles in Policy and with public transport capacity. Boroughs should develop residential and commercial densitypolicies in their UDPs in line with this policy and adopt the residentialdensity ranges set out in Table . The Mayor will refuse permission for strategic referrals that, taking into account context and potentialtransport capacity, under-use the potential of the commercial developments to fulfil Policy , plot ratios should bemaximised. For example, average site densities of at least 3:1 generallyshould be achieved wherever there is, or will be, good public transportaccessibility and capacity. In highly accessible areas within central Londonand some Opportunity Areas, especially in the Thames Gateway area,ratios nearer to 5:1 can be achieved. The ability for plot ratios to bemaximised at any site or area will depend on local context, including builtform, character, plot sizes and existing or potential public transportcapacity. These should be assessed through area planning frameworks, or when individual proposals are submitted. The Mayor will providefurther technical advice on appropriate plot ratios and their measurementand it should be noted that they are to be used as a tool to assess densityconsistently, not to provide specific numerical Mayor will expect a maximum contribution towards housing provisiontobe achieved by checking that UDP reviews and planning applicationsreferred to him are in conformity with the density matrix in Table density matrix sets a strategic framework for appropriate densities atdifferent locations. It aims to reflect and enhance existing local characterby relating the accessibility of an area to appropriate development andthe number of car parking spaces that should be matrix is not static as it provides a tool for increasing density insituations where transport proposals will change the public transportaccessibility ranking. Such changes allow a shift to a higher density range.
The London PlanMayor of London 177table location and parking matrix (habitable rooms anddwellings per hectare)Car parkingHighModerateLowprovision2 – – 1 spaceLess than 1 per unitper unitspace per unit PredominantDetached andTerraced housesMostly flatshousing typelinked houses& flatsLocationAccessibility SettingIndexSites within 6 to 4Central650 – 1100 hr/ha10 mins240 – 435 u/hawalking distanceAve. a town centreUrban200 – 450 hr/ha450 – 700 hr/h55 – 175 u/ha165 – 275 u/haAve. – 300 hr/ha250 – 350 hr/ha50 – 110 u/ha80 – 120 u/haAve. along 3 to 2Urban200 – 300 hr/ha300 – 450 hr/hatransport corridors 50 – 110 u/ha100 – 150 u/ha& sites close to Ave. town centre Suburban150 – 200 hr/ha200 – 250hr/ha30 – 65 u/ha50 – 80 u/haAve. remote 2 to 1Suburban150 – 200 hr/hasites30 – 50 u/haAve. density ranges are related to location, setting in terms of existing building form and massing, and the index of public transportaccessibility (PTAL). Site setting can be defined as:•Central – very dense development, large building footprints andbuildings of four to six storeys and above, such as larger town centresall over London and much of central London.•Urban – dense development, with a mix of different uses and buildingsof three to four storeys, such as town centres, along main arterialroutes and substantial parts of inner London.
178Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•Suburban – lower density development, predominantly residential, of two to three storeys, as in some parts of inner London and much of outer density figures should be based on net residential area, which includes internal roads and ancillary open spaces (see also Annex Cof PPG3).Policy Enhancing the quality of the public realmThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to develop a coherent and strategic approach to the public realm. Boroughs should develop local objectives and implementation programmes for their public realm. In doing so they should involve stakeholders, including their local Mayor will, and boroughs should, work to ensure the public realm is accessible, usable for all, meets the requirements of Policies and , and that facilities such as public toilets are provided. Planningapplications will be assessed in terms of their contribution to theenhancement of the public strategic approach is needed to ensure consistency and high quality in the design and management of public spaces and also to help makesure they are seen both as individual and linked entities to form acoherent public realm. Public spaces can contribute to good access forpedestrians and should offer inclusive access and ease of use. The highestquality of design in London’s public places is needed to achieve a citythat is more attractive, safer and easier to get around for everyone. Thismeans ensuring the buildings that surround or house public places areappropriate, that the design, layout, furnishing and management of thepublic spaces themselves are of the highest quality and that facilities suchas public toilets are provided. Natural planting and trees can enhance thepublic realm. Boroughs’ open space strategies should reflect therequirements of this Creating an inclusive environmentThe Mayor will require all future development to meet the higheststandards of accessibility and policies should integrate and adopt the following principles of inclusive design that will require that developments:•can be used easily by as many people as possible without undue effort, separation, or special treatment
The London PlanMayor of London 179•offer the freedom to choose and the ability to participate equally in the development’s mainstream activities•value diversity and should require development proposals to include an AccessStatement showing how the principles of inclusive design, including thespecific needs of disabled people, have been integrated into the proposeddevelopment, and how inclusion will be maintained and principles and the requirements of Policy should be adoptedby all responsible for changing or managing the built truly inclusive society demands an environment in which a diversepopulation can exist harmoniously and where everyone, regardless ofdisability, age or gender, can participate equally and independently, with4choice and dignity. The design, construction and management of thewhole range of buildings, spaces, and places is a fundamental part of people are not a homogenous group with identical needs. Whenthe principles of inclusive design are applied from the beginning of thedesign process and the needs of disabled people are integrated with the5needs of others, the building will also become accessible to other usersof the built environment who are excluded through poor design ordiscriminatory attitudes. This includes children, young people and olderpeople. The Mayor has prepared draft Supplementary Planning Guidanceon creating inclusive Sustainable design and constructionThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, ensure future developments meetthe highest standards of sustainable design and construction and reflectthis principle in UDP will include measures to:•re-use land and buildings•conserve energy, materials, water and other resources•ensure designs make the most of natural systems both within and around the building•reduce the impacts of noise, pollution, flooding and micro-climatic effects•ensure developments are comfortable and secure for users•conserve and enhance the natural environment, particularly in relation to biodiversity
180Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•promote sustainable waste behaviour in new and existingdevelopments, including support for local integrated recyclingschemes, CHP schemes and other treatment options (subject toPolicy and ).Applications for strategic developments should include a statementshowing how sustainability principles will be met in terms of demolition,construction and long-term should ensure that, where appropriate, the same sustainabilityprinciples are used to assess planning design and construction can reduce the consumption of resources, cut greenhouse gases and contribute to the good health of Londoners. Sustainable design is based on principles that are intended toensure that buildings are efficient in resource use, recognise theuniqueness of locations, are healthy, adaptable and responsible inprotecting the environment and make the most of natural systemsincluding, for example the use of passive solar design or local of these issues are addressed through Building Regulationrequirements and other procedures. This policy should sit alongside thoserequirements. The Mayor will work with partners to produceSupplementary Planning Guidance and to provide further information on relevant aspirational Respect local context and communitiesThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, work with local communities torecognise and manage local distinctiveness ensuring proposeddevelopments preserve or enhance local social, physical, cultural,historical, environmental and economic characteristics. In doing so, the requirements of Policy should be taken into has a great range of different types of places and spaces, as diverse and changeable as its cultural, ethnic and historical diverse places and spaces should be valued and local communities in the development process will help toensure that new buildings and spaces are welcomed and respected bylocal people, as well as integrated with local built form. A variety ofenvironments should be protected and enhanced and boroughs should be sensitive to these local distinctions and work with local communities toensure they are sustained and enhanced. Good modern design canrespect and add to local distinctiveness through both sensitive changeand preservation.
The London PlanMayor of London 1812The specifics of design for a compact cityPolicy Tall buildings – locationThe Mayor will promote the development of tall buildings where theycreate attractive landmarks enhancing London’s character, help to provide a coherent location for economic clusters of related activitiesand/or act as a catalyst for regeneration and where they are alsoacceptable in terms of design and impact on their surroundings. TheMayor will, and boroughs should, consider all applications for tallbuildings against the criteria set out in Policies , and . The Mayor will work with boroughs and the strategic partnerships to help identify suitable locations for tall buildings that should be includedin UDPs and Sub-Regional Development Frameworks. These may includeparts of the Central Activities Zone and some Opportunity should take into account the reasons why the Mayor maysupport tall buildings when assessing planning applications that arereferable to the may wish to identify defined areas of specific character thatcould be sensitive to tall buildings within their UDPs. In doing so, theyshould clearly explain what aspects of local character could be affectedand why. They should not impose unsubstantiated borough-wide considering applications for tall buildings, the Mayor will take intoaccount the potential benefit of public access to the upper floors and may require such and should apply to all buildings that are significantlytaller than their surroundings and/or have a significant impact on theskyline and are larger than the threshold sizes set for the referral ofplanning applications to the Mayor. Boroughs may wish to set locallybased thresholds for their tall building policies within their compact city and intensive development does not necessarily implyhigh-rise buildings. London has achieved some of its highest residentialdensities in relatively low-rise areas, while isolated, poorly designed towerblocks have not necessarily delivered high density or usable public tall buildings can be a very efficient way of using land and canmake an important contribution to creating an exemplary, sustainableworld city. They can support the strategy of creating the highest levels of activity at locations with the greatest transport capacity. Well-designed
182Mayor of LondonThe London Plantall buildings can also be landmarks and can contribute to regenerationand improve London’s Large-scale buildings – design and impactAll large-scale buildings including tall buildings should be of the highestquality design and in particular:•meet the requirements of the View Protection Framework set out in Policy of this plan•be suited to their wider context in terms of proportion andcomposition and in terms of their relationship to other buildings,streets, public and private open spaces, the waterways or othertownscape elements•be attractive city elements as viewed from all angles and whereappropriate contribute to an interesting skyline, consolidating clusterswithin that skyline or providing key foci within views•illustrate exemplary standards of sustainable construction and resource management and potential for renewable energy generationand recycling•be sensitive to their impact on micro-climates in terms of wind, sun,reflection and overshadowing•pay particular attention, in residential environments, to privacy,amenity and overshadowing•be safe in terms of their own integrity and the safety of occupiers and have an acceptable relationship to aircraft, navigation andtelecommunication networks•be appropriate to the transport capacity of the area ensuring adequate,attractive, inclusive and safe pedestrian and public transport access•provide high quality spaces, capitalise on opportunities to integrategreen spaces and planting and support vibrant communities botharound and within the building•where appropriate, contain a mix of uses with public access, such as ground floor retail or cafes•relate positively to water spaces taking into account the particularneeds and characteristics of such -scale, intensively used buildings, including tall buildings, are likelytohave greater impact than other building types because they tend to bemore visible and generate a lot of movement and activity. They thereforeneed to be flexible and adaptable, and of exemplary design, in line withthe above policy, in addition to the requirements of Policy . WhereEnvironmental Impact Assessments are required, they must includeaccurate visual modelling of proposals.
The London PlanMayor of London buildings make a significant impact, not just locally, but across largeparts of London. They also create the opportunity for magnificent viewsacross the capital. Many tall buildings around the world have popular andsuccessful public spaces on their top floors and the Mayor wishes to seemore of such opportunities in buildings can have particular impacts on waterways. Proposals for tall buildings near the Blue Ribbon Network should meet the designrequirements set out above and address the specific impacts on the waterspaces. These impacts include those on hydrology, on the biodiversity ofthe water space and on the public realm of the waterside, particularly interms of wind turbulence effects and visual appearance of canyonisationalong heritage and viewsPolicy London’s built heritageThe Mayor will work with strategic partners to protect and enhanceLondon’s historic policies should seek to maintain and increase the contribution of the built heritage to London’s environmental quality, to the economy,both through tourism and the beneficial use of historic assets, and tothe well-being of London’s people while allowing for London toaccommodate growth in a sustainable manner. Policy Heritage conservationBoroughs should:•ensure that the protection and enhancement of historic assets in London are based on an understanding of their special character, and form part of the wider design and urban improvement agenda, and that policies recognise the multi-cultural nature of heritage issues•identify areas, spaces and buildings of special quality or character and adopt policies for their protection and the identification ofopportunities for their enhancement, taking into account the strategicLondon context•encourage and facilitate inclusive solutions to providing access for all, to and within the historic Historic conservation-led regenerationThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, support schemes that make use of historic assets and stimulate environmental, economic and community
184Mayor of LondonThe London Planregeneration where they:•bring redundant or under-used buildings and spaces into appropriate use•secure the repair and re-use of Buildings at Risk•help to improve local economies and community cohesion•fit in with wider regeneration objectives•promote inclusiveness in their World Heritage SitesThe Mayor will work with the relevant boroughs, English Heritage and site owners and occupiers to prepare management plans for London’sWorld Heritage Sites. UDPs and management plans should protect theirhistoric significance and safeguard, and where appropriate enhance, their ArchaeologyThe Mayor, in partnership with English Heritage, the Museum of Londonand boroughs, will support the identification, protection, interpretationand presentation of London’s archaeological resources. Boroughs inconsultation with English Heritage and other relevant statutoryorganisations should include appropriate policies in their UDPs forprotecting scheduled ancient monuments and archaeological assets 6within their thousand years of building have left layers of history, illuminatingLondon’s social, political and economic heritage. Today London has agreat wealth of fine historic buildings, spaces and archaeology, includingfour World Heritage Sites and many buildings and sites of nationalimportance that add to the capital’s identity, attractiveness and culturalrichness. The historic environment also helps to attract tourists, andprovides valuable leisure opportunities and commercial and residentialspace, and is an important part of London’s economy. The Mayor wishestosee the sensitive management of London’s extraordinary historic assetsplanned in tandem with the promotion of the very best modernarchitecture and urban design. Designation of historic buildings is notenough. Sensitive management requires clear details of what needs to beprotected, how and why. The Mayor expects boroughs and others to useappropriate tools to manage the historic environment, including characterappraisals and conservation plans.
The London PlanMayor of London of London’s historic inheritance is inaccessible, badly maintained or not viewed as relevant to local communities. The sensitive andinnovative use of historic assets within local regeneration should beencouraged. Schemes such as Townscape Heritage Initiatives, HeritageEconomic Regenerations Schemes and Buildings at Risk Grants and theirsuccessors, can play an import role in fostering the regeneration ofhistoric areas (see Policy ). of the city’s unique character is the juxtaposition of many differenttypes of buildings and spaces and this should be reflected in the way thehistoric environment is managed. Buildings and places should not be seenin isolation, and the settings of historic assets are often important to theircharacter and should be appropriately protected. Policy London View Protection FrameworkThe Mayor designates the selected set of strategically important viewslisted in Table to be managed in accordance with Policies and . These policies will become operational when Strategic Viewdirections are withdrawn (see below).The Mayor will keep the list of designated views under review. Views will only be considered for designation where:•the viewing place is open, publicly accessible and well used, a place in its own right allowing for pause and enjoyment of the view •significant parts of London, or significant buildings, would be visible•the view is highly valued and allows for the appreciation andunderstanding of London as a whole, or of major elements within it,and does not replicate existing managed views without added benefit •the view represents at least one of the following: a panorama across a substantial part of London, a broad prospect along the river or aview from an urban space, including urban parks, which may be alinear view to a defined object or group of objects, which offers acohesive viewing experience. Within designated views, the Mayor will identify strategically importantlandmarks where the landmark is easy to see and to recognise, provides a geographical or cultural orientation point, and is aesthetically will be given to landmarks that are publicly accessible. Thelandmark should be a natural focus within the view although it does nothave to be the only one. Boroughs should base the designation and management of local views in their UDPs on Policies .
186Mayor of LondonThe London Plantable designated as part of the London View ProtectionFrameworkLondon panoramasIFrom Alexandra Palace to central LondonIIFrom Parliament Hill to central LondonIIIFrom Kenwood to central LondonIVFrom Primrose Hill to central LondonVFrom Greenwich Park to central LondonVIFrom Blackheath Point to central LondonRiver prospectsATower Bridge prospectBLondon Bridge prospect CSouthwark Bridge prospect DMillennium Bridge and Thames side at Tate Modern prospect EBlackfriars Bridge prospect FWaterloo Bridge prospectGSouth Bank prospect HHungerford Footbridges prospect IWestminster Bridge prospectJLambeth Bridge prospectKVictoria Embankment between Waterloo and Westminster prospectLJubilee Gardens and Thames side in front of County Hall prospect MAlbert Embankment between Westminster and Lambeth Bridges along Thames path by the side of St Thomas’s Hospital prospectTownscape views1Bridge over the Serpentine, Hyde Park to Westminster 2Island Gardens, Isle of Dogs to Royal Naval College3City Hall to Tower of London4St James’s Park Bridge to Horse Guards RoadLinear views aThe Mall to Buckingham PalacebSt Paul’s Cathedral from Westminster PiercSt Paul’s Cathedral from King Henry’s Mound, Richmond sourceGLA
The London PlanMayor of London 187Policy View management plansThe Mayor will, in collaboration with strategic partners, prepare andreview management plans for the views designated under Policy plans should seek to:•reflect the benefits of the view, helping to promote an appreciation of London at the strategic level and to identify landmark buildings and to recognise that it is not appropriate to protect every aspect of an existing view•seek to enhance the view and viewing place in terms of access and the ability to understand the view•prevent undue damage to the view either by blocking, or unacceptablyimposing on, a landmark or by creating an intrusive element in theview’s foreground or middle ground•clarify appropriate development height thresholds•protect backgrounds that give a context to landmarks. In some cases,the immediate background to landmarks will require safeguarding toensure the structure can be appropriately appreciated•be based on an understanding of its foreground, middle ground andbackground, landmark elements and the relative importance of each tothe view in its plans for different types of view will also be based on thefollowing principles:•River prospects. The management of these prospects should ensure that the juxtaposition between elements, including the river frontages and major landmarks, can be appreciated within their wider London context.•Townscape and linear views. These views should be managed so that the ability to see specific buildings, or groups of buildings, in conjunction with the surrounding environment, including distantbuildings within views, should be enhanced.•Panoramas. Within these views, proposed developments, as seen fromabove or obliquely in the front and middle ground, should fit withinthe prevailing pattern of buildings and spaces and should not detractfrom the panorama as a whole. The management of landmarks shouldafford them an appropriate setting and prevent a canyon effect fromnew buildings crowding in too close to the landmark.
188Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Assessing development impact on designated viewsThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, assess development proposals wherethey fall within the assessment areas of designated views (listed below)against general principles of good design set down in this plan, local urbandesign policies, and the management principles in Policy areas are:•landmark viewing corridors •front and middle ground assessment areas•landmark lateral assessment areas•landmark background assessment Mayor will, and boroughs should, normally refuse or direct refusal of all development within the landmark viewing corridors above thresholdheights (see Policy ), and development within landmark backgroundand lateral assessment areas, which fails to preserve or enhance the abilitytorecognise and appreciate landmark buildings. The Mayor will, andboroughs should, normally refuse or direct refusal of developments in front and middle ground assessment areas that are overly intrusive,unsightly or prominent to the detriment of the view as a Mayor values the importance of strategic views of London and itsmajor landmarks. These views must be protected and managed in a waythat enhances the selected number of genuinely important strategicviews, but which also avoids creating unnecessary constraints over abroader area than that required to enjoy the Mayor proposes that the current views set down in Government7Directionsshould be replaced by this plan and forthcomingSupplementary Planning Guidance, which he will produce in collaborationwith boroughs, English Heritage, the Royal Parks and other organisationsrepresented at the EIP. The proposed view management plans will be anintegral part of the proposed Supplementary Planning Guidance. Themanagement of protected views as listed in Table will not becomeoperational until the Supplementary Planning Guidance is published andthe existing Strategic View directions are withdrawn by the First Secretaryof State. However Policies , and will take affect onpublication of this plan, in so far as they will inform the development ofthe Supplementary Planning for planning permissions would be expected to provide visualrepresentation of the effect of their proposals for new developments onviews that may be affected once the Supplementary Planning Guidance
The London PlanMayor of London 189has been published and existing Strategic View directions withdrawn. Before that time they should provide visual information depicting theimpact of their proposals on the existing Strategic Views. plans should recognise the role of landmark buildings withinthe views and will set down appropriate development height thresholds,viewing corridors, assessment areas and townscape guidelines for eachview. It may not be appropriate to apply all types of assessment areas toall views. View management plans will also encompass local controlmechanisms where appropriate such as World Heritage Site ManagementPlans. In the case of River Prospects, design principles set down in will be particularly important in terms of regulating the appearanceof the river frontage that is vital to the success of River Prospects. Suchdesign principles will be applicable within the Thames Policy Area. Ingeneral, the ability to see structures in the front, middle and back of theprospects allows for greater appreciation of the three-dimensionalqualities of the views and the metropolitan setting of the for the protection and enhancement of views are explainedbelow. They are based on a number of different spatial areas within whichdevelopment may affect the protected view. These are listed in above. They cover sight lines, lateral spaces and backgrounds tolandmarks and areas in the middle and front of the whole view they are referred to as view assessment areas. When boroughsreceive proposals that could affect managed views they should consultother boroughs crossed by the same view. Further details on consultationmechanisms will be provided in Supplementary Planning Guidance. Thiswill be complemented by the Mayor’s referral powers that allow for astrategic overview to be taken on proposals that affect views in all cases referable to the Mayor, accurate visual representations ofchanges to all views affected will be required. However, two-dimensionalpictures tend to flatten views and the influence of distance on impact isoften reduced. In addition to the effect of perspective on size, distanceeffects sharpness of focus, appearance of materials, colour and will be expected to make every effort to take these issues into account. The Mayor will investigate the development of a three-dimensional computer model to help the assessment of viewing proposed sight lines to the landmarks of St Paul’s Cathedral and thePalace of Westminster within the London panoramas are indicated onMap . These sight lines create viewing corridors encompassing thelandmark but not their wider setting within the panorama. The objectiveof the viewing corridors is to preserve the ability to see the landmark
190Mayor of LondonThe London Planas a focus of the view but not to control their setting and they may be narrower than the existing Strategic Views. Landmark lateral assessment indicates the proposed position of landmark lateral assessmentareas for London panoramas. These sit to the side of the landmarkviewing corridor from the viewing place to St Paul’s Cathedral. They arenot indicated for the Palace of Westminster as existing buildings in theview make them impractical. The objective of these assessment areas is tomanage the wider setting of the landmark. Issues such as design,massing and relative prominence in the view will be relevant. There is noautomatic presumption against new visible buildings in these areas. Inparticular a canyon effect from new buildings around the landmark shouldbe prevented and the use of progressively higher threshold heights awayfrom the landmark will be considered within the Supplementary PlanningGuidance. These assessment areas are in line with the EiP panel’srecommendation to include Wider Setting Consultation Areas and fulfilthe purposes the panel suggested as appropriate for such background assessment areas also indicates the proposed position of backdrop assessmentareas for London panoramas. These have been formed by extrapolatingthe landmark lateral assessment area behind the landmark to the distanceof the existing Strategic View Background Consultation Areas. Theobjective is to ensure the landmarks are visible and can be appropriatelyappreciated as a focus in the panorama. Buildings that would be visiblefrom the viewing place and would fall within the background assessmentarea should preserve or enhance the ability to recognise and appreciatethe landmark. This does not mean that all visible buildings should beprohibited and in some cases new visible buildings behind landmarks may be appropriate. Accurate visual representation of the impactproposals would have on the ability to recognise and appreciate thelandmark will be required. Front and middle ground assessment areas cover the whole width of the views, not just the width of anylandmark viewing corridors within them as indicated on Map for thepanoramas. For the river prospects they are likely to cover the spaces andbuildings immediately fronting the river and the embankments. For linearand townscape views they should encompass the parkland or viewingplace and its frame in the direction of the viewing object. The objective of management is to prevent unsightly and overly prominent elementsaffecting these areas, such as intrusive block sizes, building heights, roofdesign, materials and colour, as they could disrupt the viewing experience.
The London PlanMayor of London 191Not all such elements or alterations will need planning permission and theMayor will work with those responsible for these areas to help ensure theappropriate management of the Protection FrameworksourceGLA
192Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap London panoramassourceGLAReferences1Secured by Design, Association of Chief Police Officers Project and Design Group, 19942Designing out Crime, RVG Clarke and P Mayhew, HMSO, 19803Housing for a Compact City, GLA, February 20034ODPM Planning and Access for Disabled People A Good Practice Guide 20035Inclusive Projects: A guide to best practice on preparing and delivering project briefs tosecure access. DPTAC 20036Planning Policy Guidance Note 16: Archaeology and Planning7RPG3a, as amended by Annex 2 of Circular 1/2000
The London PlanMayor of London 1934Cthe Blue Ribbon part of the London Plan sets out policies for the Blue RibbonNetwork. It replaces the London parts of RPG3b/9b (Strategic PlanningGuidance for the River Thames). It also recognises the inter-relationshipsof all of London’s waterways and water bodies by extending policy tocover the whole network rather than just the part is in seven sections:•the first sets out the Blue Ribbon Network Principles•the second defines the Blue Ribbon Network•the third looks at natural resources, forces and human heritage •the fourth looks at sustainable growth principles•the fifth at enjoying the Blue Ribbon Network•the sixth examines design•the last looks at London’s water Blue Ribbon Network has an essential role to play in delivering all thekey elements of the Mayor’s vision of an exemplary, sustainable worldcity. Water is a valuable and scarce asset within London and its use mustbe set within sustainable limits which prioritise those uses and activitiesthat need a waterside location. The Mayor has a visionary approach to theBlue Ribbon Network, taking the water as the starting point for decision-making. This approach is encapsulated by the following Blue RibbonNetwork Principles, which reflect the objectives set out in theIntroduction, and which should structure relevant Blue Ribbon Network Principles•To accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries withoutencroaching on green spaces, policies should make the mostsustainable and efficient use of space in London, by protecting andenhancing the multi-functional nature of the Blue Ribbon Network sothat it enables and supports those uses and activities that require awater or waterside location. •To make London a better city for people to live in, policies shouldprotect and enhance the Blue Ribbon Network as part of the publicrealm contributing to London’s open space network. Opportunities forsport, leisure and education should be promoted. The Blue RibbonNetwork should be safe and healthy and offer a mixture of vibrant andcalm places.•To make London a more prosperous city with strong and diverseeconomic growth, policies should exploit the potential for water-bornetransport, leisure, tourism and waterway support industries. Theattractiveness of the Blue Ribbon Network for investment should be
194Mayor of LondonThe London Plancaptured by appropriate waterside development and regeneration. Thiswill include the restoration of the network and creation of new links.•To promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation and discrimination,policies should ensure that the Blue Ribbon Network is accessible foreveryone as part of London’s public realm and that its cultural andenvironmental assets are used to stimulate appropriate development inareas of regeneration and need.•To improve London’s accessibility, use of the Blue Ribbon Network forwater-borne transport of people and goods (including waste andaggregates) should be increased. Alongside the Blue Ribbon Networkthere also opportunities for pedestrian and cycling routes.•To make London a more attractive, well-designed and green city,policies should protect and enhance the biodiversity and landscapevalue of the Blue Ribbon Network. The network should also berespected as the location of a rich variety of heritage that contributestothe vitality and distinctiveness of many parts of London. Londonmust also have reliable and sustainable supplies of water and methodsof sewage disposal and a precautionary approach must be taken to therisks created by global warming and the potential for implementation means balancing competing economic, social and environmental interests to contribute to achieving sustainable development. This requires co-ordination between the GLA and the GLA group organisations, local authorities and other public, private and voluntary organisations. Annex 5 sets out an actionplan for Blue Ribbon Network Principles have been developed and refinedfrom the five functions of the Thames and the objectives that wereidentified in RPG3b/9b. One fundamental change is that the water is notseen as merely a setting for development. Rather, this plan promotes theuse of the water-related spaces. Types of sustainable use are many andvaried but include water transport, water recreation, waterside openspace, natural habitats and flood storage or the Blue Ribbon Blue Ribbon Network includes the Thames, the canal network, theother tributaries, rivers and streams within London and London’s openwater spaces such as docks, reservoirs and lakes. It includes culverted (or covered over) parts of rivers, canals or streams. A diagram illustratingsome of the main elements of the Blue Ribbon Network is shown in
The London PlanMayor of London 195Map . However this does not show every tributary or water should include these when reviewing their water space is taken to include that area where water is normallypresent or is within expected variations in levels, such as within banks ortidal ranges. Flood plains are defined separately and may extend somedistance from a watercourse. The Mayor expects proposals with thepotential to affect waterways to have reference to the Blue RibbonNetwork policies and principles. However, the Blue Ribbon Networkconcept does not attempt to define a set margin beside water spaces thatis subject to these considerations, as this will vary with the differingcharacter and landscape of water corridors. Policy The strategic importance of the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, recognise the strategic importanceof the Blue Ribbon Network when making strategies and plans, whenconsidering planning applications and when carrying out their otherresponsibilities. Other agencies involved in the management of the BlueRibbon Network should recognise its strategic importance through theirpolicies, decisions and other agencies involved in the management of the Blue Ribbon Networkshould seek to work collaboratively to ensure a co-ordinated and cohesive approach to land use planning, other activities and the use of the Blue Ribbon Network. Decisions should be based upon the BlueRibbon Network Principles.
196Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap Blue Ribbon NetworksourceEnvironment and Scientific Services, British WaterwaysnoteNot all tributaries are shown
The London PlanMayor of London 1973Natural resources, forces and human heritagePolicy Context for sustainable growthDevelopment and use of the water and waterside land along the Blue Ribbon Network should respect resource considerations and natural forces in order to ensure that future development and uses are sustainable and and natural heritagePolicy The natural value of the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect and enhance thebiodiversity of the Blue Ribbon Network by:•resisting development that results in a net loss of biodiversity•designing new waterside developments in ways that increase habitat value•allowing development into the water space only where it serves a water-dependent purpose or is a truly exceptional case which adds to London’s world city status•taking opportunities to open culverts and naturalise river channels•protecting the value of the foreshore of the River biodiversity issues are covered by Policy Blue Ribbon Network comprises semi-natural and man-made watersystems. It is a resource for London and its use must ensure the futureprotection and enhancement of the network. The Blue Ribbon Network is also subject to natural forces such as tides, erosion and floods. It is adynamic system and its use and development should respect these Blue Ribbon Network serves as a valuable series of habitats forwildlife. Many parts of it are semi-natural systems and in such a heavilyurbanised area, they often offer a sense of nature that has been lostacross much of London. The biodiversity of the Blue Ribbon Network hasgenerally improved over the past few decades from a position where manyrivers and canals contained little life. However, the natural value is stillunder threat from sources of pollution (see Policies ) andinsensitive development and all of London’s waterways have been physically altered from theirnatural state and this has usually led to a reduction in their habitat into the waterways, also known as encroachment, has anegative impact on biodiversity. This plan promotes the continuedecological recovery of the Blue Ribbon Network.
198Mayor of LondonThe London are exceptional cases where development that is unsympathetic tobiodiversity can be allowed, such as piers or wharves that enable rivertransport. In such cases development should be designed to minimise,and wherever possible mitigate, its impact on biodiversity. water bodies have fared differently. While many natural pondshave been lost, there is evidence to show that there are large numbers of ponds in Londoners’ back gardens and that these make a valuable1contribution to water bodies have been created as reservoirs to supply water, asdocks, as lakes following mineral extraction or as ornamental also make a positive contribution to biodiversity and opportunitiestoimprove their biodiversity value through better management orsensitive planting should be taken. Several water bodies are designated as Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSIs). Policy Natural landscapeThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, recognise the Blue Ribbon Networkas contributing to the open space network of London. Where appropriatenatural landscapes should be protected and enhanced. As part of OpenSpace Strategies, boroughs should identify potential opportunitiesalongside waterways for the creation and enhancement of open , canals and other open water spaces can contribute by their verynature to a feeling of openness. It would not be appropriate to protect allwater spaces in the same way as open spaces on land. Open spacesadjacent to the river network can also provide areas for flood mitigationmeasures. The Mayor recognises that London’s ‘natural’ landscapes are, infact, mostly Impounding of riversThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, resist proposals for the impoundingor partial impounding of any rivers unless they are clearly in the widerinterest of London. Proposals that include the removal of suchimpounding structures should generally be of rivers (that is, creating dams or barrages) disrupts naturalsystems and usually results in a significant maintenance burden in ordertomanage the flood risks and silt build-up that can occur.
The London PlanMayor of London 199Policy Flood plainsIn reviewing their UDPs, boroughs should identify areas at risk fromflooding (flood zones). Within these areas the assessment of developmentproposals should be carried out in line with PPG25. In particular,boroughs should avoid permitting built development in functional flood Flood defencesFor locations adjacent to flood defences, permanent built developmentshould be set back from those defences to allow for thereplacement/repair of the defences and any future raising to be done in a sustainable and cost-effective way. The Mayor will, and boroughsshould, ensure that development does not undermine or breach flooddefences in any way. Development associated with buildings andstructures already within the statutory defence line should not increasethe risk to occupiers of these buildings or inhibit the raising of futureflood management of flood risk is extremely pertinent to London. Thetwice daily fluctuations in the tidal Thames estuary are a major cause forconcern, especially when the effect is exacerbated by weather government now advises that the net sea level rise for the southeastis 6mm per year. This means that the future adequacy of tidal defencesneeds to be kept under review. The Environment Agency has embarked ona five-year investigation into the nature of the future flood risks toLondon. The Mayor will be involved in this main implications in London are for development within the ThamesGateway, where significant areas are shown to be within an area at riskfrom flooding, see Map . The need to take a precautionary approachtoflood risk will affect the form, layout and design of many sites and notjust those adjacent to the river. Suitable measures will need to beidentified on a site-by-site basis as the result of flood risk may include flood warning systems, buildings that will remainstructurally sound and could recover in the event of flooding and, for sitesnear flood defences, a suitable development-free margin that will allowfor the sustainable and cost effective maintenance and improvement offlood defences. In some cases, flood defences can be incorporated intobuildings. Given that built development is to be wholly exceptional onfunctional flood plains, there may be scope for some such areas to beused for renewable energy generation such as wind turbines. The Mayor
200Mayor of LondonThe London Planhas carried out a Climate Change Impact Study and will keep this policyarea under review (see also Policy ).map flood risk areassourceEnvironment AgencynoteThese areas are currently protected from this level of is also an issue on many of London’s tributary rivers. Climatechange is likely to mean that there will be up to 10 per cent more rainfall,which may occur in more unpredictable weather patterns. Given thesetrends, this plan sets out a framework based on a precautionary will ensure that development minimises future risks of flooding in asustainable way by making reasonable allowances for possible futureclimate Sustainable drainageThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, seek to ensure that surface waterrun-off is managed as close to its source as possible. The use ofsustainable urban drainage systems should be promoted for developmentunless there are practical reasons for not doing so. Such reasons mayinclude the local ground conditions or density of development. In suchcases, the developer should seek to manage as much run-off as possibleon site and explore sustainable methods of managing the remainder asclose as possible to the site.
The London PlanMayor of London drainage techniques will be one of the keys to ensuring thatlong-term flooding risk is managed, particularly given the extent of hardsurfaced area in London. These techniques include permeable surfaces,storage on site, green roofs, infiltration techniques and even water details will be provided in Supplementary Planning Guidance onSustainable Design and Construction. Many of these techniques also havebenefits for biodiversity by creating habitat and some can help to reducethe demand for supplied Rising groundwaterIn considering major planning applications in areas where risinggroundwater is an existing or potential problem, the Mayor will, andboroughs should, expect reasonable steps to be taken to abstract and use that groundwater. The water may be used for cooling or wateringpurposes or may be suitable for use within the development or by a water supply central and inner London the level of groundwater has been risingover recent decades due to reduced commercial abstraction. This causes aproblem because much of London’s infrastructure including tube tunnels,underground services and building foundations has been built while thegroundwater was Mayor supports the GARDITproject on utilising groundwater andwill work to ensure that its recommendations are continued in theinterests of resources, quality, sewerage and water supply infrastructure areclosely linked to the sustainability of the Blue Ribbon Network. Theseissues are covered by Policies heritagePolicy Historic environmentThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, give careful consideration to therelationship between new development and the historic environment,including listed buildings and archaeological areas. The tidal foreshore is an area of particular importance. Development should also respectwaterway heritage including important structures, such as cranes andother waterway infrastructure (see Policies and ).
202Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Conservation areasBoroughs, in conjunction with the Mayor, English Heritage andneighbouring local planning authorities, should develop a consistentapproach to the delineation of Conservation Areas and the relationship ofboundaries to water of London’s best loved and historically important buildings andplaces are situated along the banks of the Thames and London’swaterways. London’s four World Heritage Sites are found adjacent to theThames, and there are numerous Conservation Areas and listed buildingsadjacent to all waterways. Historical infrastructure, such as cranes, canalso add to our understanding of present the delineation of Conservation Areas is inconsistent with someboundaries extending into the water space and others not. It is notgenerally appropriate for Conservation Areas to extend across waterspaces as they may not meet all the criteria and designation could be aninappropriate constraint on waterways achieving some of the Blue RibbonNetwork Principles. Conservation Areas should relate to the quality of thewaterside and how it relates either to the historical functions orappearance of the area. Where conservation areas do cover the water or waterside areas, their management plans should ensure that they donot prohibit water-dependent development. Policies coverconservation and heritage issues. Archaeological issues are covered byPolicy Blue Ribbon Network in an exemplary sustainable world in the use and development of the Blue Ribbon Network isconstrained by the capacity of a semi-natural system and existing humanheritage. There must be enough space for vital services and facilities andfor mixed use development wherever possible, to allow all Londoners theopportunity to use, enjoy, work and live on or near water Blue Ribbon Network is an important part of London’s economy andexperience in terms, for example of cargo-handling, port activities,transport and tourism. 4Sustainable growth prioritiesPolicy Sustainable growth priorities for the Blue Ribbon Network The uses of the Blue Ribbon Network and land alongside it should beprioritised in favour of those uses that specifically require a waterside
The London PlanMayor of London 203location. These uses include water transport, leisure, recreation, wharvesand flood sites that are not suitable or not needed for these priority uses,developments should capitalise on the water as an asset and enhance the Blue Ribbon Network in order to improve the quality of life forLondoners as a whole, as well as for the users of the locations will continue to be important for regeneration andeconomic growth in London. Many of the waterside areas withdevelopable land are in the Opportunity Areas defined in Chapter 5. TheMayor will work with boroughs and other development partners to ensurethat development of these locations includes a mix of opportunities touse, enjoy and improve the Blue Ribbon following locations, which are identified as Opportunity Areas orAreas for Intensification (see Chapter 5) include or adjoin parts of theBlue Ribbon AreasRelevant water spacesBarking ReachThames and tributariesLondon RiversideThames and tributariesBelvedere/ErithThamesCricklewood/Brent CrossRiver BrentDeptford Creek/Greenwich RiversideDeptford Creek, ThamesGreenwich PeninsulaThamesHayes/West Drayton/SouthallGrand Union Canal, Yeading BrookHeathrow/Feltham/Bedfont LakesRiver CraneKing’s CrossRegents CanalIlfordRiver RodingIsle of DogsDocks, ThamesLower Lea ValleyBow Back Rivers, River LeaPaddingtonGrand Union CanalPark RoyalGrand Union CanalRoyal DocksDocks, ThamesStratfordBow Back Rivers, River LeaThamesmeadThamesTottenham HaleRiver Lea, Pymmes BrookUpper Lea ValleyRiver Lea and tributariesVauxhall/Nine Elms/BatterseaThamesWaterlooThamesWembleyWealdstone Brook
204Mayor of LondonThe London PlanAreas for IntensificationBecktonThames, River RodingSouth Wimbledon/Colliers WoodRiver WandleKidbrookeQuaggyRiverHaringey Heartlands/Wood Green Moselle BrookWoolwich Town Centre/ ThamesRoyal ArsenalsourceGLAUsing the Blue Ribbon Network to support sustainable initiatives to encourage the sustainable distribution of goodsand services have led to renewed interest in using the waterway network tomove goods and people. This can contribute to reducing congestionand minimising the environmental effects of heavy goods planning of facilities to support sustainable growth in watertransport, tourism, leisure, sport, support facilities and safety provisionand to redress deficiencies, should be undertaken through the ThamesPolicy Area appraisals (see Policy ) and through the UDP Passenger and tourism uses on the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect existing facilities forpassenger and tourist traffic on the Blue Ribbon Network. Newdevelopment facilities that increase use of the Blue Ribbon Network forpassenger and tourist traffic should be encouraged, especially in areas ofdeficiency. Proposals for Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensificationshould provide such facilities, where they are appropriate and contributetowards improving the connections between different transport use of the Blue Ribbon Network for passenger and touristtransport requires cruise liner facilities, new piers and on the canalsdedicated stopping facilities (mooring sites/places/posts and inter-change points). These facilities can be co-located on piers and watersidesites. Where possible, new services should be integrated with othertransport services and routes by well-designed inter-change points andsignage. New facilities should not affect safe navigation nor have anadverse impact on important waterway Freight uses on the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, support new development andfacilities that increase the use of the Blue Ribbon Network to transportfreight and general goods, especially in areas of deficiency.
The London PlanMayor of London the use of the Blue Ribbon Network for freight transport is a widely supported objective as this is a more sustainable method oftransport and can help to reduce congestion and the impact of goodsvehicles on London’s roads. The Thames has many wharf facilities andthere are a small number of discreet opportunities on the canal use of water transport for freight is also encouraged in Policy Safeguarded wharves on the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect safeguarded wharves forcargo-handling uses, such as inter-port or transhipment movements andfreight-related purposes. The Mayor will, and boroughs should, encourageappropriate temporary uses of vacant safeguarded wharves. Temporaryuses should only be allowed where they do not preclude the wharf beingre-used for cargo-handling uses. Development next to or opposite safeguarded wharves should be designed to minimise the potential forconflicts of use and redevelopment of safeguarded wharves should only be accepted if the wharf is no longer viable or capable of being made viable for cargo-handling. (The criteria for assessing the viability of wharves are set out in paragraph ). with boroughs and the Port of London Authority, the Mayor hasidentified and reviewed the appropriate location and size of sites along3the Thames to be protected for freight-handling. The safeguarding will bereviewed periodically in redevelopment of safeguarded wharves should only be accepted ifthe wharf is no longer viable or capable of being made viable for cargo-handling uses. The only exceptional circumstance to this would be for astrategic proposal of essential benefit for London, which cannot beplanned for or delivered on any other site in Greater London. The viabilityof a wharf is dependant on:•the wharf’s size, shape, orientation, navigational access, road access,rail access (where possible), planning history, environmental impactand surrounding land use context•the geographical location of the wharf, in terms of proximity andconnections to existing and potential market areas•the existing and potential contribution that the wharf can maketowards reducing road-based freight movements•existing and potential relationships between the wharf and othercargo-handling sites or land uses
206Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•the location and availability of capacity at comparable alternativewharves, having regard to current and projected Port of London andwharf capacity and market demands•in the case of non-operational sites, the likely timescale within which a viable cargo-handling operation can be attracted to the site, having regard to the short-term land-use policy, and long-termtrade a wharf is no longer viable, redevelopment proposals must incorporatewater-based passenger transport, leisure and recreation facilities andwater transport support facilities first, before non-river-related uses thatdo not require a riverside temporary uses on vacant safeguarded wharves can ensurethat investment in the wharf is maintained and image problems areminimised for the wider area. Temporary uses must maintain the existingcargo-handling infrastructure to a specified standard, be limited by atemporary permission with a specific end date and priority should be giventouses which require a waterside location as set out in Policy are increasingly surrounded by different land uses that do nothave an industrial or freight purpose. Many wharves are in the OpportunityAreas identified in Chapter 5. The challenge is to minimise conflictbetween the new and the old land uses. This must be met throughmodifications and safeguards built into new and established operators should use the latest available technology, equipment andbusiness practices. New development next to or opposite wharves shouldutilise the layout, use and environmental credentials of buildings to designaway these potential conflicts. Boroughs should ensure that highwayaccess to wharves for commercial vehicles is maintained when consideringproposals for development of neighbouring the Blue Ribbon Network Policy Increasing sport and leisure use on the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect existing facilities for sportand leisure on the Blue Ribbon Network. Other than in locations wherethere would be conflict with nature conservation interests, newdevelopment and facilities that increase the use of the Blue RibbonNetwork for sport and leisure use should be encouraged, especially inareas of deficiency. Proposals for Opportunity Areas and Areas forIntensification should provide these facilities and improve access todifferent sport and leisure activities.
The London PlanMayor of London Blue Ribbon Network should not continue to be developed as aprivate resource or backdrop, which only privileged people can afford tobe near to or enjoy. It provides many different opportunities forenjoyment, some actively involving the water and others simply benefiting from the calm and reflective feeling of being near water. Both active and passive activities can contribute towards improving the health of can experience a great variety of watersport opportunitieswithin a relatively short distance of their home or work. Policy to sports facilities in Increasing access alongside and to the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect and improve existing accesspoints to, alongside and over the Blue Ribbon Network. New sections toextend existing or create new walking and cycling routes alongside theBlue Ribbon Network as well as new access points should be provided aspart of development proposals for Opportunity Areas and Areas forIntensification, especially in areas of Thames Path initiative continues to expand as gaps in the walkingnetwork are filled in, as part of redevelopment schemes. Opportunitiesshould be examined to extend the Thames Path to London’s easternboundary. New sections of the network should be designed to be easilyaccessible and understood by all Londoners. Canals tend to have a pathon one side only. In some busy areas it may be appropriate to have atowpath on both sides, but in most cases the existing access structureshould be respected. New walkways should link to the surroundingwalking network, be dedicated for public use and include appropriatesignage and interpretation parts of riverside footpaths and canal towpaths are suitable forcycling. Measures are sometimes needed to reduce potentially dangerousconflicts between cyclists and Mayor supports the work of a number of organisations andpartnerships that work to clean up the Blue Ribbon Network and provideeducation, awareness and promotion of various parts of it. Parts of theBlue Ribbon Network are used as an educational resource both formallythrough organised events and school visits and informally throughindividual exploration. Opportunities to extend safely these experiencesshould be welcomed particularly as part of major development proposals.
208Mayor of LondonThe London PlanSupport facilities for using and enjoying the Blue Ribbon NetworkPolicy Support facilities and activities in the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect waterway support facilities,infrastructure and activities. New support facilities, infrastructure andactivities that support use and enjoyment of the Blue Ribbon Networkshould be encouraged, especially in areas of deficiency and as part ofdevelopment in Opportunity Areas and Areas for criteria set out below should be used to assess proposals for theredevelopment of existing facilities and sites for other activities and facilities are vital to delivering greater use andenjoyment. These include boat building, servicing and repair activities,mooring sites and posts, boat houses and boatyards, slipways, steps andstairs and other landing or stopping places. Support facilities andinfrastructure should be identified and protected through UDPs and theThames Policy Area appraisals. Proposals to remove or redevelop these fornon-supporting uses should be refused unless it can be proven that:•the site or facility is surplus to current or anticipated futurerequirements, and•appropriate methods have been used to market the premises forsupport facilities uses prior to proposals for redevelopment and that no realistic offer has been received, or•alternative facilities are to be provided at a newly established or improved facility capable of serving the same market a site is found to be surplus to current or anticipated requirements,redevelopment proposals must incorporate other water-dependent usesfirst, including water-based passenger and freight transport and otherwater-based sport and leisure facilities, before non-river-related uses thatdo not require a riverside challenge to minimise conflict between the new and the old land usesmust be met both through modifications and safeguards built into newand established developments. New support facilities and infrastructureshould not affect safe navigation on the waterways or adversely impacton important waterway Moorings facilities on the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect and improve existingmooring facilities on the Blue Ribbon Network. New mooring facilitiesshould generally be in basins or docks but may be appropriate in areas
The London PlanMayor of London 209of deficiency or as an aid to regeneration, where the impact onnavigation, biodiversity and character is not moorings for visitors and residents are a key support facilitycurrently in short supply. Moorings can add to the activity, diversity andsafety of the canals and parts of the river network. New moorings shouldbe designed to minimise their impact on waterway navigation andbiodiversity and be managed in a way that respects the character of thewaterway and the needs of waterway users. New residential and long-stayvisitor moorings should have land-based support facilities, including power,water, sewage and rubbish disposal, secure storage and washing to use moorings for other uses should only be permitted wherethey can be shown to be of wider benefit to the Blue Ribbon Networksuch as an education resource. The Blue Ribbon Network should not beused as an extension of the developable land in London nor should partsof it be a continuous line of moored Design – starting from the waterThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, seek a high quality of design for all waterside development. All development, including intensive or tallbuildings, should reflect local character, meet general principles of goodurban design and improve the quality of the built addition, development should integrate successfully with the water space in terms of use, appearance and physical impact and should in particular:•include a mix of uses appropriate to the water space, including publicuses and open spaces, to ensure an inclusive accessible and activewaterside and ground level frontage•integrate into the public realm, especially in relation to walking andcycling routes and borough open space strategies. Public art will often be appropriate in such locations as well as clear signage,information and lighting to promote the use of waterside spaces by all•incorporate built form that has a human scale of interaction with the street, public spaces and waterside and integrates with existingcommunities and places•recognise the opportunity to provide landmarks that are of cultural and social significance along the waterways, providing orientationpoints and pleasing views without causing undue harm to thecohesiveness of the water’s edge
210Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•relate successfully in terms of scale, materials, colour and richness of detail, not only to direct neighbours but also to buildings on theopposite bank and those seen in the same context with the RiverProspects (see Policy ) or other locally identified views. Suchjuxtaposition of buildings should take into account river meanders and the impact these can have on how buildings may be seen together•incorporate sustainable design and construction techniques, inparticular a precautionary approach to flood quality of the built environment alongside the rivers and waterwaysmakes an important contribution to London’s image and status as a worldcity. Every stretch of the waterways has its own character and this needstobe reflected in the design of new space needs to be set at the heart of consideration of developmentalong the waterside – the water must be the starting point. The emphasison context does not mean that a uniform blandness for the areas aroundwater spaces is sought or that new forms of development are notappropriate, but rather that the waterside should be regarded as a scarceresource and development should achieve a balance between the rolesidentified in the Blue Ribbon Network proposals for developments along the Blue Ribbon Network should take account of the urban design guidelines for London set out in Chapter 4, Part B. The Mayor also intends to produce SupplementaryPlanning Guidance on design and specific issues relating to the waterways will be Blue Ribbon Network offers a diversity of water soundscapes. Someplaces are tranquil and quiet, while in others, the sounds of water-relatedactivities such as boatyards and docks may contribute to distinctive localcharacter. This diversity is to be valued as set out in the Mayor’s LondonAmbient Noise Design statementsFor all major development proposals within the Thames Policy Area andadjacent to the rest of the Blue Ribbon Network, the Mayor will, andboroughs should, ensure that development is attractive and should prepare assessments to cover:•impacts of scale, mass, height, silhouette, density, layout, materialsand colour
The London PlanMayor of London 211• proposals for water edge, visual and physical permeability and linkswith hinterland, public access, including addressing safety provision,landscaping, open spaces, street furniture and lighting•impacts of the proposal on the water space to demonstrate how thewater space will be used and affected including impacts on biodiversityand hydrology•impact on river prospects and any other locally designated to and from the waterways are especially significant because theopenness of water spaces allows for relatively long-distance views. TheMayor’s policies for the new views framework for London recognise thespecial value of views from and across the may also wish to designate local views related to water quality of the development along the edges of the water spaces willbe of particular importance to these views. Policies for design are set outin Chapter 4, Part meandering course of the Thames, as well as other rivers, can giveadditional emphasis to the location of tall buildings adjacent to waterspaces. There are a number of distinct adverse effects that tall buildingscan have when located next to water. These include the impacts ofovershadowing, wind turbulence and creating a visual canyon. The designof tall buildings along the Blue Ribbon Network needs to address theseeffects (see Policies and ).Structures over and into the Blue Ribbon NetworkPolicy Structures over and into the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect the unique character andopenness of the Blue Ribbon Network. Proposals for new structuresshould be accompanied by a risk assessment detailing the extent of theirimpact on navigation, hydrology and biodiversity, and mitigationmeasures proposed to address the adverse impacts identified. Proposalsfor structures over or into the water space for uses that do not specifically require a waterside location should be across and into rivers and canals are vital for effectivecommunications and service provision. Bridges are also monuments andtourist attractions. New structures should be restricted to structures thatsupport activities that specifically require a waterside location or helpLondoners to appreciate the Blue Ribbon Network. Where structures are
212Mayor of LondonThe London Planneeded they should minimise their navigational, hydrological andbiodiversity on and near to the Blue Ribbon Network Policy Safety on and near to the Blue Ribbon NetworkThe Mayor will work with boroughs, the Port of London Authority, theEnvironment Agency, British Waterways and others, to ensure thatexisting safety provision on the Blue Ribbon Network is protected andregularly maintained. New safety provision should be provided as part ofproposals for Opportunity Areas, Areas for Intensification, and in areas ofdeficiency. Proposals for major developments along the Blue RibbonNetwork must be accompanied by a safety and risk on and near to the Blue Ribbon Network should be a key priorityfor all organisations involved in the management and stewardship of thewater space. The principles of water safety should be observed in existingand new developments and in the safety procedures of all those using theBlue Ribbon ’s water spacesThe Thames and tidal tributariesPolicy Importance of the ThamesThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, recognise that the Thames plays anessential role in maintaining London as an exemplary, sustainable worldcity and should promote greater use of the river for transport and water-based leisure Thames itself changes a great deal in its size and character as it flowsthrough London. The Blue Ribbon Network Principles value this diversity,and the twice daily changes brought by the tidal nature of the river. central London stretches of the Thames are world-famous locations,featuring well-known landmarks and views. Many other stretches haveimportant historic, cultural and natural connections. These aspects of theThames should be are opportunities to increase the role that the Thames plays in transport terms. The Mayor believes that river transport should be increased within sustainable limits and that owners and users ofriverside sites should consider how they could contribute to or benefitfrom river transport.
The London PlanMayor of London 213Policy Thames Policy AreaRelevant boroughs, in reviewing their UDPs, must designate a ThamesPolicy Area. Boroughs should identify the detailed boundaries based onthe indicative diagrams in Annex 5. This should be done in consultationwith neighbouring authorities, including those across the river. In definingthe boundaries, boroughs should have regard to the following criteria:•proximity to the Thames, including its tributaries and associated areasof water such as docks, canals, filter beds and reservoirs, whether ornot directly linked to the Thames, but where an association with theThames is retained together with a proportion of open water•contiguous areas with clear visual links between areas and buildingsand the river, including views from across the river and areas where itmay be beneficial to establish future visual links•specific geographical features – such as main roads, railway lines,hedges, identified as particularly relevant for defining the boundaryacross large open spaces•the whole curtilage of properties or sites adjacent to the Thames,except where major development sites have been identified and it isintended to publish master plans/strategies of future development•areas and buildings whose functions relate or link to the Thamesand/or river-related uses or sites that have the potential to be linked•areas and buildings that have an historic, archaeological or culturalassociation with the Thames, including planned vistas marked byexisting or former landscape features•boundaries should have coherence with neighbouring Appraisals of the Thames Policy AreaIn order to deliver policy and actions within the Thames Policy Area,relevant boroughs should prepare detailed appraisals of their stretches of the river and its environs. Boroughs are encouraged to carry out thiswork in collaboration with other boroughs, the Mayor and relevantstakeholders. These appraisals would be expected to consider:•the local character of the river•public and freight transport nodes (both land- and water-based,existing and potential)•development sites and regeneration opportunities•opportunities for environmental and urban design improvements•sites of ecological or archaeological importance•areas, sites, buildings, structures, landscapes and views of particularsensitivity and importance•focal points of public activity•public access
214Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•recreation and marine infrastructure•indicative flood appraisal should also identify areas of deficiency and the actionsneeded to address these deficiencies. These relate to facilities for:•water-based passenger, tourism and freight transport •water-based sport and leisure•access and safety provision•marine support facilities and infrastructure and , in collaboration with the Mayor and other relevantstakeholders, should carry out appraisals of the river and its environs. The Thames Strategies, Hampton–Kew and Kew–Chelsea, fulfil this rolebut will need updating to take into account the London Plan. The ThamesStrategy East is being developed in line with this plan. These appraisalsshould be adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance by the relevantboroughs and kept under review and consistent with the Blue RibbonNetwork Principles. They should also be used to determine some of theexpectations for the development of riverside part of major development proposals for sites with a Thames frontage,consideration should be given to the need and desirability of havingfacilities to enable access to and from the river, both for boats and forpedestrians. This may include the retention, refurbishment or re-instatement of existing or former access points or the provision of newfacilities. Along the Thames in east London there are locations where alarge amount of development is envisaged in Opportunity Areas. Some ofthese locations offer the opportunity for creating significant public openspaces. These may be dovetailed with the need to allow a margin of landfor future flood defences (see Policy ).Policy Green industries along the ThamesThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, generally welcome the use of waterside sites, especially those within Strategic EmploymentLocations, for green industries, where the majority of materialstranshipment is by need for increased rates of recycling and re-use of waste will requirelocations to be found for green industries. Locations along the Thamesand tidal tributaries will offer the additional advantages of being able tomove materials by sustainable means.
The London PlanMayor of London 215Canals and river ’s network of canals includes the Grand Union Canal, RegentsCanal, Limehouse Cut, Hertford Union Canal and the River Lee Navigationas well as numerous basins and canal arms. Together they make up over90km of waterway running through 15 boroughs. Canals are differentfrom rivers, brooks and streams in that they are essentially man-madestructures that usually have relatively little flow of water. Policy Development adjacent to canalsThe Mayor will, and relevant boroughs should, expect developmentadjacent to canals to respect the particular character of the canal. Forstrategic referrals the Mayor will require a design statement as set out inPolicy to cover the site and its context. In particular, opportunitiesshould be taken to improve the biodiversity value of within London have a rich and vibrant history, are an asset toLondon and contribute to its world city role. They are also important tothe quality and diversity of the local communities along the canals. Partsof the system have been improved and other parts are still to beimproved. Any opportunities to increase their transport use should beencouraged. They are also significant assets for recreation, heritage and biodiversity. The increased role of recreation and any decrease in transportuse offer more opportunity to increase historical aspects of canals lie in the infrastructure itself as well as thebuildings that line them. Canals link many areas of open space. Their scaleis smaller and more intimate than the Thames. This means that they offergreater potential for Waterways has developed the concepts of character assessmentsand water space strategies. Boroughs may find these tools useful to carryout throughout the length of their canal or for other types ofdevelopment. The principles of these concepts are captured in the designstatements set out in Policy Open water spaceThe permanent loss of open water space should be avoided along canals,as for the rest of the Blue Ribbon Network. The loss of open water tomoored craft could be allowed provided there is no adverse detriment tonavigation, recreation potential, the heritage or biodiversity value of the canal and that the proposals are in the overall interest of the canal system.
216Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy New canals and canal restorationThe Mayor will, and relevant boroughs should, seek opportunities for the creation of new canals and the restoration of the network, includingformer canal links and basins, as part of major development proposals and regeneration projects. The Mayor will particularly seek the restoration of the Bow Back Rivers on canals adds to their vibrancy and attraction and the presenceof boats can aid the feeling of security. However these aspects also need to be balanced against creating a cluttered canal environment and the need to preserve open and tranquil areas. New and reinstatedcanals should be designed to be navigable and connect to the widernavigation , brooks and streamsPolicy Rivers, brooks and streamsThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, in discharging their developmentcontrol and other duties, ensure that rivers, brooks and streams of all sizes are protected, improved and respected as part of the Blue Ribbon Network and as valuable entities in themselves. In particular,measures should be taken to improve the habitat and amenity value of such quality of the water in many of London’s larger and more prominentrivers and canals is often dependent upon the quality of what flows intothem from the tributary streams. Unfortunately many of London’s rivershave been modified from their natural state and suffer pollution frommany sources, including sewage from wrongly connected sewers. Thesefactors clearly reduce their amenity and biodiversity value. This, in turn,can lead to pressure to culvert or divert such small streams, an approachwhich deals with the symptoms rather than the causes of these Mayor will work with others to investigate what courses of action are available to reduce the problem of wrongly connected sewers across DocksThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, protect and promote the vitality,attractiveness and historical interest of London’s remaining dock areas by:•preventing their partial or complete in-filling•promoting their use for mooring visiting cruise ships and other vessels
The London PlanMayor of London 217•encouraging the sensitive use of natural landscaping and materials inand around dock Royal DocksThe Mayor will, and the London Borough of Newham should, take a precautionary approach to any development proposals that wouldprohibit or make impractical the use of the Royal Docks as a navigational ‘bypass’ to the Thames ’s docks were once the heart of the city’s international into the dock areas, thereby losing part of the water space goesagainst the Blue Ribbon Network Principles and the Mayor will generallyoppose further such docks do offer a greater degree of flexibility with regard to themooring of vessels and the design of dockside buildings because they donot have to accommodate flowing water or natural habitats. There are fewremaining historic buildings and they do not usually form part of strategicor local footpath or towpath presence of vessels in dock areas can add to the interest and vibrancyof the area and facilities for cruise ships add to the role of London as aninternational tourist destination. This should generally be encouraged,especially where such vessels can be shown to aid regeneration dock areas have very little natural landscaping in and around this is clearly a reflection of their previous use, the sensitiveaddition of natural indigenous plants would improve the appearance ofthe built environment, as well as having benefits for possibility of using the Royal Docks as a bypass to the Thames Barriershould be explored and a cautious view should be taken of developmentthat would prohibit this until the position is understood more clearly. London’s lost the central part of London had a number of rivers, which were tributaries to the Thames. Many of these had important historicalconnections, for example the Rivers Fleet, Tyburn and Effra. They are not part of the Blue Ribbon to re-establish lost rivers are likely to be extremely the Mayor’s approach is to welcome in principle any such
218Mayor of LondonThe London Planproposal but not to require the reinstatement in the same way thatculverted parts of the Blue Ribbon Network should be opened. There may be merit in projects that mark the historic route of such rivers atstreet level as an educational or tourist outside LondonPolicy Links outside LondonThe Mayor will work with key organisations, regional government bodies,local authorities and others on strategic issues of planning and managingthe Blue Ribbon Network. The Mayor recognises that solutions to somechallenges may lie outside the London boundary and that choices withinLondon may affect other for the Blue Ribbon Network in London should be closely relatedtothose for neighbouring regions, taking account of their differing derives much of its drinking water from sources outside itsboundary and is reliant on receiving good quality water from areasupstream of the Thames and other river catchments. The opportunities for transport links are greatest in the Thames Estuary although there arealso possibilities for the River Lea, the Grand Union Canal and theupstream close to the Thames to the east of the London boundary may findincreasing pressure for development. The Mayor encourages localplanning authorities in this area to consider adopting an approach similartothe Thames Policy Area as a useful tool for structuring land use, designand capturing the opportunities that may exist. The Mayor is keen towork on a partnership basis with neighbouring regions to investigate howpolicies can be London Garden Pond Project2General Aquiter Research Development and Investigation Team (GARDIT) consists of Thames Water, London Underground, the Environment Agency, the Corporation of London, British Property Federation, the Association of British Insurers and British Telecom3Technical research report, Safeguarded Wharves on the River Thames, GLA, 2003
The London PlanMayor of London 219
220Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 2215the sub-regions1London’s sub-regions and their strategic 2, 3 and 4 set out the key spatial, thematic and cross-cuttingpolicies of the London Plan. Chapter 6 deals with its implementation. TheMayor considers that there is an essential bridge between the two – thatis the role of the sub-regions and development of Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks as a powerful implementation boroughs already look wider than their own boundaries, plan withtheir neighbours and work with the many institutions now operating at a sub-regional level. The Mayor wishes to build on this and considers aflexible concept of sub-regions to be the best way to develop thestrategic policies in the London Plan and to provide the focus forimplementation. The boundaries of these sub-regions are shown on . Several sub-regional partnerships have begun to operate withinthese boundaries, and are poised to become a critical resource inimplementing this London’s sub-regionssourceGLA with any boundaries, some issues and institutions do not fit exactlywithin them. The sub-regions used in this plan have boundaries thatshould be regarded as permeable. The City of London has been includedin the East London sub-region to support the strategy of creating strong
222Mayor of LondonThe London Planlinks between the City and the areas to its east, as part of theregeneration of Thames Gateway – but it does of course retain itstraditional strong links to central London. This is recognised through thedesignation of a Central Activities Zone that spans across the Central andEast London sub-regions and through the City’s membership of thepartnerships for both East and Central London. Other important cross-boundary links are highlighted in the following sections, including thoseaffecting Wandsworth and Richmond. The sub-regions reflect substantialstructural linkages relevant to a spatial strategy, such as sectoralclustering, the economic power of the centre and the developmentopportunities of the east. Each also has a particular focus. The first partof this chapter outlines the overall policy approach to the sub-regions andlater parts outline the spatial frameworks for these sub-regions, aiming to1make the longer term development within each of them more approach to sub-regionaldevelopmentPolicy Sub-Regional Development FrameworksThe Mayor will, in partnership with other stakeholders in each of the five sub-regions – Central, East, West, North and South London, bringforward Sub-Regional Development Frameworks for implementing anddeveloping the policies set out in this plan. These Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks will build upon existing partnershiparrangements operating within the sub-regions, and will includearrangements for involving relevant boroughs, including those inneighbouring sub-regions and authorities in adjoining regions, statutoryagencies including the NHS and Environment Agency, infrastructureproviders, and representation from the private sector, voluntary sector and community Mayor’s priority is to provide overall strategic guidance for London asquickly as possible after a long vacuum. Within the overall policies of thisplan, the Mayor intends to develop more detailed Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks (SRDFs) in collaboration with key will include relevant authorities and agencies in the rest of thesouth-east, including the Regional Assemblies and Development Agenciesfor the South East and East of England, the Inter-regional Forum andneighbouring districts and counties. This wider partnership is needed toco-ordinate the London Plan with related Regional Spatial Strategies sothat account is taken of inter-regional linkages and the potential benefits
The London PlanMayor of London 223of complementary, sustainable corridor-based development across theLondon boundary (see also Chapter 1). The Mayor wishes to build uponvaluable work carried out by boroughs and others at the sub-regional leveland will work closely with existing and new sub-regional partnerships. TheMayor will discuss with the sub-regional partnerships both the scope ofeach SRDF and a timetable for its focus of SRDFs will be to address issues of wider than boroughsignificance that need to be addressed at a sub-regional level. Theframeworks will provide guidance on development in each sub-region,including the Opportunity, Intensification and Regeneration Areas, towncentres, suburbs and Strategic Employment Locations (SELs). The Sub-Regional Development Frameworks should be completed as soon aspracticable, with the priority being given to East London, so as to offerfurther detail on matters such as implementation and phasing. DraftSRDFs will be consulted upon. The frameworks will be consistent with and provide further guidance on the policies and other content of thisplan. SRDFs will inform the review of, or an alteration to, the LondonPlan. If they give rise to the need for new policy content, this will beaddressed through an early alteration to or review of this plan, includingall necessary in the of the most important functions of the Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks will be to set out, consistent with the contents of this plan,how the projected growth in population and jobs could beaccommodated. The starting point for the development of Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks is therefore an analysis of how the forecastpopulation and economic growth will impact across London in the sub-regions, together with an assessment of the linkages necessary betweenland use, transportation and intensification to meet that growth. Population projections based on the government’s latest populationestimates and migration trends indicate that London’s population couldgrow by some 800,000 by 2016 (see paragraphs ). Capacity foran extra 23,000 homes per annum has so far been identified to meet theresultant housing need (see paragraphs ). The provisional sub-regional distribution of population growth, not weighted for futurehousing provision, is set out in Table , to be tested in the Sub-Regional Development Frameworks. The housing figures are minimumprovision figures, and should be exceeded wherever possible. They will be revised in light of a new housing capacity study (see paragraphs ).
224Mayor of LondonThe London terms of future known capacity for new housing, there is aconcentration of large sites in Central and East London (see Map ),and this is reflected in the allocations in Table . table sub-regional population, housing, and employmentgrowth, 2001 –201624Sub-PopulationMinimum Employmentregion20012016Annualannual 20012016Annual(‘000)(‘000)growthhousing(‘000)(‘000)growth3(‘000)target(‘000)(‘000)Central1,5251,,6441,,9912,,0871,,4211,,0421,,3291,,3088,, and rows may not total exactly because of rounding. source (2)GLA Population and Household Forecasts: 2001 – 16, SDS Technical Report 5. GLA, 2003(3)London’s Housing Capacity, GLA, 2000. The table shows the housing capacity estimatesover the last three phases of the study. The annual average figures differ from those intable , which are based on four phases.(4)The Future of Employment in Greater London. SDS Technical Report 8. GLA, VolterraEconomic Consulting, 2002. Demand and Supply of Business Space in London, SDSTechnical Report 21. GLA, Roger Tym & Partners, 2002
The London PlanMayor of London 225map location of housing sites by gross capacity – (100 or more dwellings)sourceLondon’s Housing Capacity Study (2000), GLAEconomic the projected growth of 636,000 jobs across London, projectionshave been made for the likely distribution of economic growth, in total andby sector, across the sub-regions. The resulting sub-regional distribution isshown in Table . The growth figures reflect economic structure anddevelopment capacity. The historic potential capacity for the sub-regions5tocope with these levels of growth is set out in SDS Technical Report projections, although the result of robust analysis, are onlyindicative. The sub-regional development frameworks and the ongoingprocess of ‘plan, monitor and manage’ will investigate potential furtherdemand and seek to identify additional capacity. ,000 jobs, nearly 40 per cent of London’s total projected growth injobs, are projected for the East London sub-region, including the City and the Isle of Dogs. Beyond the City and the Isle of Dogs, the sub-region of East London could accommodate a further 56,000 jobs. Thisreflects the Mayor’s priority to see development in the east. Much of thatgrowth, up to 30,000 jobs, could be in Stratford which could develop as anew European business quarter on the Channel Tunnel Rail Link (CTRL).
226Mayor of LondonThe London considerable growth is expected for the Central London sub-region -239,000 or 38 per cent of the total increase. Most of Central London’sgrowth can be accommodated in the Central Activities Zone andassociated Opportunity Areas. Though in the East London sub-region, theCity is likely to have a key role in accommodating the growth in financialand business services traditionally associated with central other three sub-regions should all experience employment West London sub-region is likely to see growth of 86,000 jobs (14per cent of the total). The North and South London sub-regions are likelytosee smaller but significant levels of growth, together accounting for 10 per cent of the accessibility and the expected growth in population and jobs in Londonwill hinge on the ability of the transport system to cope – in terms oflocation and phasing of increase in capacity. Future public transportimprovements include those that support development of East London,growth in Central London and Opportunity Areas and better access totown centres and Areas for relationship between the scale and phasing of development andpublic transport accessibility is critical. This is detailed more fully inChapter 3, Part C and Chapter For role of the SRDfs in planning for waste is detailed more fully inChaper 4A, particularly Policy and paragraph .
The London PlanMayor of London 2275BCentral LondonDefinition and Central London sub-region comprises the boroughs of Kensington & Chelsea, Camden, Islington, Wandsworth, Lambeth, Southwark and the City of Westminster. Over million people live in the sub-region(Map ).map London sub-region sourceGLA 2002Policy The strategic priorities for Central LondonThe strategic priorities for the Central London sub-region will be to:•promote and protect the vital mix of culture, government, leisure andcommerce together with its historic buildings, housing, open spacesand public realm that are central London’s unique attraction forresidents, visitors and business•sustain, enhance and promote the unique scale and mix of activitiesand settings of the Central Activities Zone which form the core ofLondon’s wider offer as a world city and as a capital city•identify capacity to accommodate new job and housing opportunitiesand appropriate mixed-use development. This is especially important in relation to the Central Activities Zone, Opportunity Areas and Areas
228Mayor of LondonThe London Planfor Intensification, while recognising the overall strategic developmentpriority to the east. It will include co-ordinating skills development,transport and planning to improve access to jobs for people fromdeprived communities in Central London and neighbouring parts of other sub-regions•maximise the number of additional homes, including affordablehousing, by exceeding housing provision targets set out in this planand secure mixed and balanced communities•promote and intensify retailing, services, employment, leisure andhousing in town centres and opportunities for mixed-use development•plan for and secure the necessary financial resources to deliver planned transport infrastructure for the sub-region including localschemes that improve public transport, walking and cyclingconnections to town centres and employment locations. Particularpriorities for the sub-region are the CTRL, Crossrail 1, Crossrail 2,Thameslink 2000 and Cross River Tram, the Central London CongestionCharging scheme and upgrades at several major rail stations•improve the variety, quality and access to available employment sites,especially within Strategic Employment Locations, to meet theidentifiable demands for employment land•ensure that social and community infrastructure is retained, enhancedand expanded where needed•ensure that new development is sustainable, safe, secure and welldesigned, improves the environment, particularly air quality, and takesaccount of the sub-region’s outstanding heritage. The open space andBlue Ribbon Networks are key features, particularly the Royal Parksand the Thames•identify areas suitable for tall buildings•plan for waste facilities, as far as possible in line with the principle of self Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for Central London in which these priorities will be further London is an extraordinarily diverse, dynamic and innovative sub-region. This plan builds on and enhances these qualities, while beingsensitive to the unique environment and the needs of Central London’smany residents. The strategy is to increase its capacity to accommodatemuch of the economic and population growth, recognising the Mayor’soverall strategy to promote development further to the east. CentralLondon is home to many of London’s world city activities, includinginternational business and finance, government, culture and tourism.
The London PlanMayor of London 229Demand for these activities will continue to grow and much of it willrequire a Central London location. The sub-region could have 107,000new homes and 239,000 new jobs by 2016. These can largely beaccommodated by more intensive development in four types of locations:•in the heart of London, known as the Central Activities Zone (Map )•in the Opportunity Areas, identified in Map •in the Areas for Intensification, also shown on Map •other parts of the sub-region that have good public transport access,especially the sub-region’s 14 ‘Major’ town land uses and activities, including those associated withuniversities, legal and medical professions, culture and the arts,government and special industries, are concentrated in parts of CentralLondon. These concentrations are of value to London as a whole, and inrecognition of their strategic importance they should be protected andsupported through character of the sub-region is also strongly influenced by the heritageof its townscape and buildings. Some of these are of internationalimportance and form a key contribution to London’s tourism and culturaloffer (see Chapter 3, Part D) as well as giving a strong national and morelocal sense of place and identity. Sustaining, enhancing and managing the environmental quality of Central London in the face of uniquedevelopment and other pressures, especially in and around the CentralActivities Zone, should be a major concern of the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework. The quality of new development should beworthy of one of the world’s most interesting and attractive urbanenvironments. Particular emphasis should be placed on investment in and management of the public realm. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework should indicate where tall buildings may be appropriate inaccordance with Policies and . Chapter 3, Part C indicates thepotential to reduce further congestion in and around central London. are also vulnerable neighbourhoods, largely just beyond the CentralActivities Zone but some within it, which contain long-standingcommunities and valuable small businesses that could be displaced byoutward growth from the zone. These should be protected and growthchannelled into the areas designated for it. Despite its overall affluence, the sub-region contains some of the highest and mostextensive concentrations of deprivation in the country. These must benefit from new opportunities flowing from major growth elsewhere in the sub-region.
230Mayor of LondonThe London Sub-Regional Development Framework will build on existingpartnerships to secure more effective transport, training and otherlinkages between these communities and the sub-region’s mainconcentrations of economic activity. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework must also ensure that Central London’s town centres,especially its fourteen ‘Major’ town centres (as defined in Annex 1),identify sufficient capacity to address economic and regeneration needs and those which will be associated with a growing and ethnicallydiverse population. work to forge linkages between the Central Activities Zone andits hinterland is already being done by a number of partnerships includingthe Central London and Cross River Partnerships. The Mayor will workclosely with these and other bodies, including neighbouring boroughs, toimplement this London is also the focus for London’s transport network and at the hub of the national rail network. Improved public transportcapacity is fundamental to accommodating growth within the Mayor's Transport Strategysets out proposals for majorimprovements to the existing Underground, rail and bus networks acrossthe sub-region. Four major new schemes are proposed, which couldprovide additional capacity and accessibility to, from and within theCentral London sub-region.•Crossrail 1 (expected phased completion from 2012) has the Mayor’shighest priority and would unite the Central Activities Zone,particularly the City, with the Isle of Dogs, to create a unified businesscore, and substantially increase capacity to transport workers intothese areas.•Thameslink 2000 (completion expected by 2012) would further expandthe capacity of the existing cross-London link between Farringdon andLondon Bridge.•Crossrail 2 (plans for which are yet to be fully developed, completionexpected towards the end of the plan period) would relieve pressureon the Victoria and Northern lines.•Cross River Tram (completion expected post 2011) would also provideadditional capacity and relieve congestion on the four new schemes are needed to provide new developmentopportunities and help support regeneration in parts of Central London.
The London PlanMayor of London 231The Central Activities ZonePolicy Development in the Central Activities ZoneWithin the Central Activities Zone, boroughs should accommodatecommercial development associated with business, tourism and retail andprovision for national and international agencies, institutes and services,subject to the protection of housing and identified special policy account of local amenity, land use mix and transport capacity,developments will be expected to maximise density. The Central ActivitiesZone is shown on Map . Its boundaries should be refined through the Sub-Regional Development Framework for definition in Special policy areasClusters of specialist activity in and around the Central Activities Zonemust be defined in UDPs and their activities protected and Central Activities Zone is the focus of London’s wider linkages withthe rest of the south-east, as well as the wider UK and world. Sustainingits role as the core location for international business and finance and as a national transport node is crucial for the wider south-east and for thecountry. The zone straddles two London sub-regions, extending into theCity, which is included in East London. The need for ‘permeable’ sub-regional boundaries and policies, which take account of these linkages, is outlined in paragraph .
232Mayor of LondonThe London Planmap Activities ZonesourceCentral London UDP Co-ordination Guidelines Report, London Planning AdvisoryCommittee, Central Activities Zone contains a range of activities such as centralgovernment offices, headquarters and embassies, which are unique to the centre of the capital and form distinct quarters. The largest part ofLondon’s financial and business services sector is based in the Zone, as are the offices of trade, professional bodies, institutions, associations,communications, publishing, advertising and the media. Other uses andactivities, such as those associated with tourism, are more concentrated,or on a larger scale than elsewhere in the capital. There is particularconcern to secure and enhance the breadth, depth and quality of theoffer of London’s two ‘International’ shopping centres (as defined inAnnex 1), centred on Oxford Street and Knightsbridge, and to sustain and manage strategic clusters of entertainment activities in line with the broader objectives of this activities are at the heart of London’s world city role and should beprotected and their appropriate expansion supported. In order to makethe best use of land and existing infrastructure, developments should
The London PlanMayor of London 233maximise density. Subject to other policies in this plan, in locations withhigh public transport accessibility and capacity, broad area densitiesapproximating to plot ratios of at least :1 may be appropriate, forexample, in Opportunity Areas. More local site densities could beconsiderably higher, especially in areas where tall buildings will beencouraged. The Sub-Regional Development Framework will providefurther detail on development often, mixed-use developments are especially valuable in the CentralActivities Zone (see also Policy ). Large areas of housing or localbusinesses are less dominant in some parts of the Zone. Thesenevertheless play a vital part in sustaining the international, national andregional importance of central London. The intensification of commercialactivities should be supported in ways that harmonise with the residentialenvironment within the indicative boundary of the Central Activities Zone is shown on and should be refined through the Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework for identification in the boroughs’ UDPs. Any future changesthat may be needed should be developed in association with the Areas in Central LondonPolicy Opportunity Areas in Central LondonThe Central London Opportunity Areas are shown in Table , withindicative estimates for homes and jobs growth. The Mayor will work withpartners to draw up planning frameworks for these areas. These shouldinform UDP reviews and broader regeneration and community strategiesand initiatives. Taking account of other policies, developments will beexpected to maximise residential and non-residential densities and tocontain mixed uses (see Chapter 3, Part B and Chapter 4, Part B). Giventheir scale, they are also likely to give rise to substantial planningobligations (see Policies and ). The general policy directions tobe followed in the planning frameworks are indicated below.
234Mayor of LondonThe London Plantable Areas in Central London - indicative estimates of growthOpportunity AreasArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Waterloo3915,000500London Bridge3024,000500Elephant and Castle234,2004,200Vauxhall/Nine Elms/Battersea787,6001,500King's Cross5311,4001,250Paddington3023,2003,000sourceGLA London’s Opportunity Areas fall into two main geographicalgroups. One coherent group is known as the ‘London South Central’ zoneof change. There is also a wider distribution of individual opportunities aswell as others mostly offering scope for intensification rather than newdevelopment. In all these areas, planning frameworks should be sensitivetothe needs of local residents. Account should also be taken of theparticularly close relationship between the Central Activities Zone and the East London Opportunity Areas of the Eastern City Fringe () and Isle of Dogs (paragraphs ). possible, the estimates in Table should be applications will be assessed against their contribution tomeeting these overall estimates and other policies in this South zone contains four distinct Opportunity Areas centred aroundtransport interchanges, as well as smaller yet cumulatively significantopportunities spread across three boroughs. The zone should experiencegeneral intensification of development, together with significantenvironmental and accessibility improvements over time, if its potential is to be realised. This is necessary to redress the perception of the zone’srelative isolation from the rest of central London. Sensitive intensificationrather than brownfield renewal is the greatest source of developmentcapacity across a number of relatively small sites. In the balance of uses,planning frameworks should reflect the entertainment and cultural rolesplayed by areas along the South Bank. Secure and enhanced pedestrianaccess to the riverside should be a further priority.
The London PlanMayor of London Bridge: Among the larger opportunities, and complementing thearea’s heritage and environmental character, the riverside between LondonBridge station and Tower Bridge can accommodate a significant increasein office stock. Redevelopment and intensification of London Bridgestation and its environs are proposed together with improved publictransport and interchange facilities and better pedestrian integration withthe surrounding area. This is a good location for a tall, landmark mixed-use development. The planning framework should draw visitors eastwardsalong the : The planning framework for the area around Waterloo shouldintegrate opportunities for commercial, residential and cultural intensificationassociated with an international and national rail terminal, the improvedaccess offered by the Jubilee Line and proposed Cross River Tram and theriverside Strategic Cultural Area. This should house a world class culturalfacility, building on the existing facilities. Guidelines should extend the area’sentertainment offer and capacity to support local regeneration and widerstrategic objectives, carefully managed to take account of local residentialand other needs. Particular attention should be paid to removing barriers topedestrian movement, establishing links with the rest of central Londonand creating a more attractive and safe Elms/Battersea: At Vauxhall, good public transport coupledwith strong traffic management, easier pedestrian movement, majorenvironmental improvement and scope for intensification should create a stronger sense of local identity and increase housing and commercialcapacity. Development further west should be related to existing andimproved public transport capacity and be supported by effectivepedestrian linkages, especially around Vauxhall Cross. Strategicallyimportant leisure and housing provision is anticipated at Battersea. Awider appraisal of Central London wholesale markets should inform thepotential for comprehensive renewal and intensification on and aroundNine Elms. All development should help improve the degradedenvironment of this area and strengthen perceptual and physical linkswith the rest of central and Castle: The planning framework for the area around theElephant and Castle should draw on its good public transport accessibility,closeness to the Central Activities Zone and relatively affordable land. Thiscould be a suitable location to meet some of Central London’s longer-term needs for extra office space and is generally suitable for tallbuildings. Large scale, car-based retail development should not beencouraged. The framework should seek a significant increase in housingand integrate this with a more efficient transport interchange.
236Mayor of LondonThe London PlanEnvironmental and traffic management improvements are crucial to thesuccessful redevelopment of this southern gateway to central Central London Opportunity ’s Cross has the best public transport accessibility in London. This willimprove further with the completion of the CTRL, Thameslink 2000 andthe Cross River Tram. Construction of the CTRL will release 20 hectares of underused land. Its central location and unique public transportaccessibility offer particular scope for high-density business development,as well as housing. Conference facilities could be appropriate, providedthey can be integrated satisfactorily with other activities. In such a highlyurbanised quarter, environmental quality is crucial. The developmentframework should draw upon the historic features of the site to create a truly sustainable business and residential community, reliant on minimaluse of is a major national and commuter rail terminal, which hasgood links with Heathrow and London rail services. Crossrail 1 wouldextend links to the City and eastwards. The area has a distinct ‘canal-side’character to build on. Existing developments have already begun torespond to the site’s scope for high density, good quality, business andhousing development. Proposals for the renewal of St Mary’s Hospital and the relocation of the Royal Brompton and Harefield Hospitals shouldsupport the creation of the largest health campus in London. It is an areagenerally suitable for tall buildings. Future development should enhanceenvironmental quality, support low car use and integrate with thesurrounding neighbourhood. Areas for Intensification in Central LondonPolicy Areas for Intensification in Central LondonThe Areas for Intensification in the Central London sub-region are shownin Table , with indicative estimates of additional homes and jobsgrowth. To help accommodate growth, boroughs, in consultation with the Mayor, should promote development opportunities through higherdensity redevelopment at key transport nodes of good accessibility andcapacity and in town centres and seek to achieve higher levels ofprovision wherever possible, especially for housing.
The London PlanMayor of London 237table for Intensification in Central London – indicative estimatesof growthAreas for IntensificationArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Farringdon/Smithfield102,000100Holborn132,000200Euston164,000200Tottenham Court Road102,000200Victoria412,000200Arsenal/Holloway381,5002,000sourceGLA general policy for Areas for Intensification is set out in Policy existing Victoria, Euston and Farringdon Stations could providevarying levels of development. Land use development should notcompromise long-term measures to improve public transport provision at these key locations. Development at Farringdon should be set in thecontext of the proposed review of London’s wholesale markets to ensureintegration with any potential increment to development capacityassociated with nearby Smithfield. new Crossrail interchange could support increased developmentcapacity, suitably phased, in the area around Tottenham Court RoadStation. It is also close to the wider Holborn/Midtown area, which couldrespond to improved public transport accessibility and capacity throughredevelopment at higher densities. There are already proposals forHolloway/Arsenal to secure a new 60,000 seater stadium entailingsequential mixed development across three sites, which is an example of the type of intensive development that should be sought in Areas for Intensification. Areas for Regeneration in Central general policy for Areas for Regeneration is set out in Policy some parts of Central London are extremely affluent, there aresignificant concentrations of deprivation in the rest of the sub-region. In planning for these areas, boroughs should identify links that will enabletheir residents to benefit from the growth in nearby Opportunity Areasand the Central Activities Zone. These linkages extend to parts of Areasfor Regeneration elsewhere in London, especially East London. combination of new transport links to these areas, training programmes,and capacity-building initiatives should ensure that developmentopportunities benefit and assist in regenerating local communities.
238Mayor of LondonThe London is a general need to co-ordinate spatial, social and economicpolicies and action. In particular the area’s residents need to be equippedwith the skills, access and support facilities that will allow them to benefitfrom job opportunities, especially in their own centres in the Central London general policy for town centres is set out in Policy . A strategyfor the network of town centres in the sub-region will be developed in theSub-Regional Development Framework. Strategically designated towncentres in the sub-region (shown on Map ) should be considered as opportunities for more intensive development and boroughs shouldconsider how their roles could be consolidated or enhanced to meet retailand other consumer needs and to increase capacity for mixed-usedevelopment, including housing. The expected strong growth in andincreasing diversity of the Central London population mean that the rolesof its centres are changing and some should develop specialist services tomeet the needs of black and minority ethnic communities, includingthose for retail and leisure-related of the sub-region’s ‘Major’ town centres (as defined in Annex 1)compete with the retail offer of the West End and larger centres beyond the sub-region. Boroughs should prioritise locations for retailinvestment to revitalise the ‘Major’ centres and improve the overallaccessibility to town centre services, including the diversification of useswhere appropriate. The suburbs of the Central London ’s suburbs are one of its defining and most attractive , as set out in Chapter 2, they also face a range of challenges toredress historic under-investment and to secure sustainable forms ofrenewal. There is particular variation in the way in which these challengesare expressed in Central London. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework should draw on Policy and the proposed ‘sustainablesuburbs toolkit’ to address local circumstances for implementationthrough UDPs, Community Strategies and other local Employment Locations in the Central London London contains only three of London’s SELs. In managing the release of surplus industrial land outside the SEL in accordance with Policy , boroughs should ensure that adequate provision is made for firms which serve the Central Activities Zone economy, needready access to it but cannot afford a Central Activities Zone provision may be close to but not necessarily within the Zone’sfringe. Account should also be taken of the need to reserve capacity
The London PlanMayor of London 239tomanage Central London’s waste, as far as possible, in line with theprinciple of the main growth areas, Central London is characterised by a mix of residential and other activities, which relate better to the localeconomy and communities than to the national, regional and internationalroles of activities prevalent in the Central Activities Zone. This plancontains policies to protect and manage these local, smaller scale landuses and activities, recognising the contribution they make to thecharacter of Central London and the often acute development pressuresthey face. Accordingly, boroughs should resist large-scale redevelopment in the Central London sub-region outside the Central Activities Zone,Opportunity Areas, Areas for Intensification, SELs and town centres.
240Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 2415CEast London and the Thames Gateway Definition and East London sub-region is the largest of London’s sub-regions,covering 10 boroughs on both sides of the Thames (the City of London,Hackney, Tower Hamlets, Newham, Barking & Dagenham, Havering,Redbridge, Lewisham, Greenwich and Bexley) and is home to two millionpeople. It is shown on Map . The London part of the ThamesGateway, a national priority area for regeneration, is contained in the EastLondon London sub-regionsourceGLA 2002Policy The strategic priorities for East LondonThe strategic priorities for the East London sub-region will be to:•deliver the London element of the government’s priority for theThames Gateway for development, regeneration and transport improvement, while recognising the links with other parts of theThames Gateway and the London-Stansted-Cambridge corridor•promote the sub-region’s contribution to London’s world city role,especially in relation to the City and Isle of Dogs
242Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•promote and plan for the Olympic bid and, if successful, enable thenecessary development for a successful sustainable Olympics in 2012,enhancing London’s facilities in a sustainable way in order to havemaximum benefit for Londoners after 2012•recognise that development in the sub-region will continue as a priority well beyond the plan period as major infrastructureimprovements stimulate development and environmental improvements•promote and enable the comprehensive development of Stratford as a new commercial, retail and residential area of London, making themost of its European links and its pivotal role connecting the London-Stansted-Cambridge corridor and Thames Gateway growth area•work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for East London.•identify capacity to accommodate new job and housing opportunitiesand appropriate mixed-use development. This is especially important in relation to the Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification. It will include co-ordinating skills development, transport and planningtoimprove access to jobs for people from deprived communities in the sub-region•maximise the number of additional homes, including affordablehousing, by exceeding housing provision targets set out in this plan,and secure mixed and balanced communities•promote and intensify retailing, services, employment, leisure andhousing in town centres and opportunities for mixed-use development•plan for and secure the necessary financial resources to deliver plannedtransport infrastructure for the sub-region including local schemes thatimprove public transport, walking and cycling connections to towncentres and employment locations. Particular priorities for the sub-region are CTRL, Crossrail 1, East London Line extension, DLRextensions, improved bus services, Greenwich Waterfront and East London Transit schemes, new river crossings and in the longerterm, Crossrail 2•improve the variety, quality and access to available employment sites,especially within Strategic Employment Locations, to meet theidentifiable demands for employment land, including assessing thefuture scale of provision•ensure that social and community infrastructure is retained, enhancedand expanded where needed•ensure that new development is sustainable, safe, secure and welldesigned, secures much needed improvement to the sub-region’senvironment and takes account of the sub-region’s heritage. The openspace and Blue Ribbon Networks are key features, in particular theThames and network of waterways in the Lower Lea/Stratford area.
The London PlanMayor of London 243Special attention should be paid to long-term flood risk•identify areas suitable for tall buildings•plan for waste facilities in line with the principle of self-sufficiency,including limited provision to meet part of central London’s Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherentSub-Regional Development Framework for East London in which thesepriorities will be further London is the Mayor’s priority area for development, regeneration andinfrastructure improvement. It has many of the capital’s largest developmentsites and a large number of areas suffering multiple deprivation. East Londonshould plan for a minimum 104,000 additional homes and 249,000 jobs upto2016. Development in this sub-region should continue well beyond theplan period as the impacts of major new transport infrastructure, such asCrossrail 1, and of programmes of land assembly stimulate a virtuous circle of development and environmental of the forecast growth in jobs should be accommodated in theOpportunity Areas close to the City such as the City Fringe, Isle of Dogsand Stratford. The Mayor will encourage the extension of central Londontype activities outwards and the growth of Central and East Londonshould be planned in a complementary way. This is partly why the Cityforms part of the East London sub-region. The Central Activities Zonealready straddles both the Central and East sub-regions and forms a majordriver for further jobs growth in the East, as does the new financial andbusiness services hub at the Isle of substantial proportion of London’s Opportunity Areas are in eastLondon. Several are found close together and form zones of change thatneed co-ordinated planning. Equally, there are large areas suffering fromdeprivation located close to these Opportunity Areas and developmentsshould provide appropriate levels of access, skills and support necessaryfor them to benefit as fully as possible from the development that willtake place close of the East London sub-region demands major improvements in thequality of services and the environment. A concerted effort from all theagencies involved is needed to raise the standards of education, healthservices, public facilities and training opportunities. The Thames Gatewayrequires a huge environmental upgrade and improvement in image.
244Mayor of LondonThe London in East London must take account of flood risk (see Chapter 4, Part C). Concentration of the development on OpportunityAreas and Areas for Intensification within East London substantiallyreduces the requirement for extra flood defences, since such areas arealready generally protected. In partnership with the Environment Agency,development should be planned to meet the required standard of flood defence. London should become London’s gateway to mainland Europe,building particularly on the Stratford International Railway Station, but also on access to the City and Stansted airports, the Channel Tunneland the Port of London. Economic development should be geared for the long-term opportunities these London has seen significant recent additions to public transportcapacity, such as extensions to the DLR network south to Lewisham and the Jubilee Line extension from Stratford to Green Park. support the development opportunities necessary to underpinLondon’s role in the global economy and to support local regenerationinitiatives, East London needs further significant improvements intransport accessibility. Transport for London is working with otheragencies to develop an area transport strategy for Thames proposed transport schemes affecting East London are (see alsoChapter 3, Part C):•Crossrail 1, with two proposed corridors from Whitechapel – one to the Isle of Dogs, the Royal Docks and out to Ebbsfleet and a secondleg to Stratford, scheduled for phased completion from 2012. This isbeing developed by Cross London Rail Links Ltd, a 50/50 joint venturebetween Transport for London and the Strategic Rail Authority.•Crossrail 2, which would significantly improve public transport accesstoHackney in the inner part of the sub-region, and from Hackney intocentral London. The earliest completion date is towards the end of theplan period. This scheme is also being developed by Cross London RailLinks Ltd.•Phase II of the CTRL will deliver enhanced international accessibility toStratford and also increase the capacity for commuting from outsideLondon into the sub-region and central London. It is currently underconstruction and completion is due in 2007. It is the responsibility of Union Railway.
The London PlanMayor of London 245•Expanded capacity on the DLR, with three-car trains planned forintroduction in 2007, completion of the City Airport extension and theplanned Woolwich extension, and investigation of new routes, notablyalong the north bank of the Thames. DLR proposals are theresponsibility of Transport for London.•The East London Line northward extension to Dalston, scheduled for completion by 2009, will provide services to the inner part of thesub-region. It is the responsibility of the Strategic Rail Authority.•Two local transport schemes: East London Transit, serving town centresand development sites north of the river and the Greenwich WaterfrontTransit, proposed to run between Greenwich and for London is responsible for delivery.•Three new river crossing schemes, to provide vital links betweeneconomic activity and residential areas north and south of the river;improve regional and local movements by road and rail and stimulateregeneration without encouraging long distance commuting by road(see Policy ). Transport for London is responsible for Isle of Dogs and Stratford will be key beneficiaries of the substantialplanned increases in transport capacity and accessibility and wouldtherefore be able to sustain significantly increased development levels. of new jobs in existing town centres and towards the outerpart of the sub-region would assist in creating a better balance betweenpopulation and employment. The quality of housing and the environmentin East London in areas accessible to central London and the Isle of Dogsshould be improved to encourage access to employment from the east,rather than the west. This would also make more efficient use of accordance with the government’s Sustainable Communities ActionPlan, the strategic planning of the Thames Gateway as a whole (includingthe part outside London) is being led by the Thames Gateway StrategicPartnership (TGSP), including the government, the Mayor, localauthorities in east London, Kent and Essex and the regional developmentagencies. The Mayor will work closely with this body and the Sub-Regional Development Framework will reflect its work within the contextof the policies of this plan. The Mayor and the Minister for London jointlychair the Thames Gateway London Partnership Board. A draft Development7and Delivery Strategyhas been presented to the Board and the Sub-Regional Development Framework will be informed by this. The Thames
246Mayor of LondonThe London PlanGateway London Partnership, which represents the London boroughs inthe sub-region, has already begun to implement a programme of targetedlocal action and the Mayor will work closely with of the objectives of the TGSP is to co-ordinate development policies,priorities and progress across the boundary into north Kent and southEssex. The Mayor will support this process. A coherent programme of newinfrastructure provision is needed. There should be complementary rolesfor Stratford and Ebbsfleet stations and their development lands. Thedevelopment of river crossings throughout the Thames Gateway regionshould be planned coherently. The planning and context of developmentshould be co-ordinated in a long-term phased strategy. The proposedCrossrail 1 route beyond the Isle of Dogs along the south bank of theThames provides particular scope for higher density development in thetown centres and Opportunity Areas there and around other would also support integrated planning and development withauthorities outside London. The Opportunity Areas north of the Thameswill depend on local feeder services to support intensification and linkages to the north and south are also needed if the ThamesGateway is to prosper fully. In particular, there are important relationshipsbetween the Thames Gateway and development of transportimprovements through Stratford and up the Lee Valley towards Stansted,the area identified by government as the London-Stansted-Cambridgegrowth Areas in East LondonPolicy Opportunity Areas in East London The East London Opportunity Areas are shown in Table , withindicative estimates for homes and jobs growth. The Mayor will work withpartners to draw up planning frameworks for these areas. These shouldinform UDP reviews and broader regeneration and community strategiesand initiatives. Taking account of other policies, developments will beexpected to maximise residential and non-residential densities and tocontain mixed uses (see Chapter 3, Part B and Chapter 4, Part B). Giventheir scale, they are also likely to give rise to substantial planning obligations (see Policies and ). The general policy directions tobe followed in the planning frameworks are indicated below.
The London PlanMayor of London 247table Areas in East London – indicative estimates of growthOpportunity AreasArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Bishopsgate/South Shoreditch3516,000800Whitechapel/Aldgate3114,000700Isle of Dogs100100,0003,500Stratford12430,0004,500Lower Lea Valley2508,5006,000Royal Docks36811,0005,500Barking Reach21020010,000London Riverside4184,0003,000Deptford Creek/Greenwich Riverside725,5001,000Greenwich Peninsula10415,0007,500Belvedere/Erith2425,0001,400Thamesmead1211,5003,000Ilford565,500TOTAL1,812210,70052,400sourceGLA City Fringe. The arc from Shoreditch round the eastern fringes ofthe City to Wapping contains a number of accessible, relatively central siteswith significant development capacity. The area includes two OpportunityAreas – Bishopsgate/South Shoreditch and Whitechapel/Aldgate. Becauseof its proximity to the City, the area provides particular scope to supportLondon’s critical mass of financial and business services in ways that cancontribute to the Mayor’s sustainability objectives and underpin clusteringof economic activity, such as creative industries. The Eastern City Fringecontains some of London’s most deprived inner city communities as well asaffluent new quarters and London’s largest Bangladeshi with these are affordable business premises, some serving thelocal communities, others meeting the needs of national and internationalbusiness and others which have developed into strategically importantcommercial and cultural attractions in their own right, such as Spitalfields,Shoreditch and Brick Lane. While some parts are environmentally degraded,others are good quality Conservation Areas or heritage of Dogs. Canary Wharf is already known globally as a prime focus forbanking headquarters, as well as for financial and business services. Thenumber of jobs in the area has risen from 19,000 in the early 1990s to57,000 in 2001, mostly in financial and business services. Although notphysically part of central London, many of the future activities on the Isle
248Mayor of LondonThe London Planof Dogs are interdependent with central London. Development densitiesshould reflect planning framework for the area should consolidate and expand thisrole. It should aim to accommodate at least 150,000 jobs in total by requires not just partnership working to bring forward adequate landbut a significant enhancement to transport capacity. Development in theIsle of Dogs should complement the international offer of the CentralActivities Zone and support a globally competitive business planning framework should also co-ordinate provision of at least 3,500additional dwellings, increasing the population in the area by around 9, would help meet London’s strategic housing need and support a widermix of services for both residents, workers and nearby . Stratford is already one of the best connected places in London interms of public transport. This will be improved by the CTRL and Crossrail new A12 extension has greatly improved road access. As well as the raillands, Stratford town centre offers considerable scope for through a properly structured partnership could provide anopportunity to redress some of the greatest concentrations of deprivation in the country, which are found in nearby planning framework for the area should build on existing proposals toharness transport, development and labour market capacity and createa major new commercial centre at Stratford, drawing on the CTRL links toestablish a new mixed use European Business Quarter for London. Thiscould accommodate some 600,000 square metres of office space over the next 10 to 15 years, generating over 30,000 jobs. It should becomplemented by strategically significant new retail and leisure provisionsufficient to ensure that Stratford develops as a new ‘Metropolitan’ towncentre (as defined in Annex 1) for East London and at least 4,500 newhomes to suit a range of requirements. Close integration of newdevelopment on the rail lands and rejuvenation of the existing towncentre, including physical links, is Lower Lea Valley. This area, stretching from Hackney Wick in thenorth to Canning Town and beyond to the Thames in the south, is anindustrial area based around a network of canals and watercourses. Many of the industrial premises are in low-grade uses and only partiallyoccupied, which give parts of the area a poor appearance. The railwayforms a barrier to development opportunities towards the west. The exactboundaries of the SELs in the Lower Lea will need to be defined through
The London PlanMayor of London 249the planning framework for this area to optimise the utility of theindustrial offer and release surplus land for mixed-use area has been identified as the core location for a London Olympicbid for 2012. The planning framework must reflect this bid (see ) and draw on the area’s excellent public transport connections,particularly at West Ham and Canning Town, where there is the potentialtocreate high-density development hubs. It should guide the extensionof the cluster of creative industries at Three Mills to other parts of thearea. The network of watercourses creates the potential for a much higher quality environment, able to attract modern business facilities, substantially more than 6,000 new housing units and leisureopportunities, and including enhanced public open space. Site assemblyand land decontamination are needed to help enable the full potential ofthe area to be realised. The Sub-Regional Development Framework forthis sub-region will be integrated with that for North London and providethe flexibility necessary to secure sustainable regeneration of the wholeLee Valley and Royal Docks. The docks have already been transformed from aderelict expanse to a high quality development area with moderninfrastructure and facilities. The planning framework should draw onexisting initiatives to guide the provision of new housing and enhance the quality of the environment. It should also promote development of a new urban quarter at West Silvertown and promote a major newvisitor attraction to provide the focus for facilities and community activitythat the area currently lacks. The DLR City Airport extension will supportfurther growth of the City Airport, providing a direct link between theairport and central London, with the extension to North Woolwichimproving access from the south. In the longer term, Crossrail 1 or otherimprovements to public transport could help sustain further housing andeconomic development. The Thames Gateway Bridge will be important inopening up links to south-east London and so supporting developmentand Riverside. London Riverside includes extensive developmentopportunities at Dagenham Dock and within South Dagenham, SouthHornchurch and Rainham and is adjoined by 500 hectares of open spaceincluding Rainham Marshes. The area has suffered from economic decline,a degraded environment, and poor accessibility, but recent developmentshave begun to reverse these trends with, for example, completion of thenew A13, development of the Centre of Engineering and ManufacturingExcellence (CEME), and the establishment of a large RSPB nature planning framework should reflect the vision of the Urban Strategy
250Mayor of LondonThe London Planfor London Riverside (July 2002) adopted as Interim Planning Guidanceby the two boroughs, Barking and Dagenham and should plan for compact, mixed urban communities at SouthDagenham, along the A1306 East, and in Rainham. The core employmentareas should be developed as a leading centre for innovation and high-tech manufacturing, for industries that serve London, and for the growthsector of environmental technology. The adjacent Rainham Marshes andriverside open space should be planned to provide a regionally importantenvironmental and leisure asset for East London. Improved publictransport will be needed, building on plans for a DLR extension and eastLondon transit schemes to serve London Riverside, looking at thepotential for improved services and additional stations along the currentrail corridor, and extended bus services. Development can build aroundcurrent already good public transport links at Barking town centre whichis the major retail and transport node for London Riverside. The plannedchanges should enable the minimum figures for new homes and jobs tobe substantially exceeded, the scale and timing will be determinedthrough the Sub-Regional Development Reach is a 210 hectare riverside area of derelict and vacant is London’s single largest housing development opportunity, withcapacity for as many as 10,000 new homes if transport and developmentconstraints could be addressed. It has therefore been identified as anOpportunity Area in its own right, although it forms part of the widerLondon Riverside area. The planning framework should focus on creatinga successful and attractive residential community. It should establish notjust a high quality environment and a full range of community facilitiesbut a whole new urban area with a distinct character of its own, whichshould change the image of the area as a place to live. development should be considered as a new urban settlement withinthe city, with strong links to Barking town centre, its nearby ‘Major’centre (as defined in Annex 1). It should include a local centre with high-density, mixed-used development comprising leisure and otherservices, together with urban residential densities in the surroundingareas. Improvements to public transport such as an extension to the DLRand implementation of the East London Transit will be necessary tosupport this level of development. The planning framework should alsocontain proposals to deal with contamination, to provide new access roadsand utilities, to deal with unsightly overhead power cables and to providenew public open spaces.
The London PlanMayor of London Creek/Greenwich Riverside. The waterside and heritagecharacter of parts of this area coupled with recent public transportimprovements give it considerable regeneration potential. This will befurther enhanced through proposed additional Thames river would benefit major concentrations of deprivedcommunities across three boroughs (Greenwich, Lewisham andSouthwark). The planning framework should build on these assets andhistoric regeneration investment to sustain the rejuvenation of the area. It should address large-scale regeneration opportunities, including partsof Convoys Wharf, as well as harnessing market potential for smaller scaleleisure and tourism-related provision. It should explore potential for a cultural quarter to complement similar initiatives nearby and seekadditional Peninsula. The peninsula has the land capacity for substantialamounts of development, which could contribute to the wider regenerationof the Thames Gateway and east London. The main focus of developmentshould be at the north of the peninsula around the Dome and the JubileeLine station. Here, a dramatic new urban quarter could be created throughhigh-density development with minimal parking provision, using innovativearchitecture to reinforce a high quality Greenwich Peninsula can play two important strategic roles. First, the development of the Dome as a leisure attraction of internationalsignificance. Secondly, as a major contributor to meeting London’s needfor additional housing. Taking this into account, the planning frameworkshould include plans for more than 7,500 new homes provided over a 10-to15-year period. In addition to leisure facilities focused on the Dome,some commercial development to provide a sustainable community andsupport London’s overall economic growth should be accommodated onthe peninsula. This should be focused on the Jubilee Line station andshould be phased to recognise the existing public transport commercial development should not be promoted until newpublic transport capacity is available. and Erith is a self-contained area of specialised industrial uses,including waste related operations and manufacture of building activities tend to make the area unattractive, although recentdevelopment has achieved high standards of design. The large sites andlocation away from sensitive uses enable industrial uses to operate withmaximum flexibility. There is substantial potential for employment-generating development through several large, vacant sites. Improvedinfrastructure and landscaping would make the area more attractive, aswould the renewal of older plant. The existing businesses contribute to
252Mayor of LondonThe London Planthe diversity of the London economy and employment opportunities, andthe area should be protected as an industrial location to accommodatethese uses. Improvements in accessibility through Crossrail 1 and theThames Gateway bridge will support regeneration and . A large potential development area with an attractiveriverside setting lies to the west of Thamesmead centre and the centrallake. The development of this area represents a strategic housingopportunity that should provide new community and recreation facilitiestogether with improved open space and Metropolitan Open should be phased to accommodate the Thames Gatewayriver crossing approach road which will open up access to employmentopportunities north of the river. The proposed Greenwich WaterfrontTransit will link the area effectively into the public transport systemproviding fast, direct links between Thamesmead, Woolwich . Ilford is both an Opportunity Area and a ‘Metropolitan’ town centre(as defined in Annex 1) serving outer east London. The opportunity exists toprovide up to 5,500 additional homes on development sitessurrounding the town centre. In addition, Ilford town centre shoulddevelop a new leisure-oriented role to complement the proposeddevelopment at Stratford. Initial phases of residential development areunderway. Longer term development would be assisted by improvedtransport links, particularly Crossrail 1 and the East London for Intensification in East LondonPolicy Areas for Intensification in East LondonThe Areas for Intensification in the East London sub-region are shown inTable , with indicative estimates of additional homes and jobs accommodate growth, boroughs, in consultation with the Mayor,should promote development opportunities through higher densityredevelopment at key transport nodes of good accessibility and capacity,and in town centres and seek to achieve higher levels of provisionwherever possible, especially for housing.
The London PlanMayor of London 253table for Intensification in East London – indicative estimates of growthAreas for IntensificationArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Beckton801,500500Woolwich Town Centre and Royal Arsenal401,0001,000Kidbrooke103-2,200sourceGLA general policy for Areas for Intensification is set out in Policy contains up to 80 hectares of land available for development, in a potentially attractive location on the riverside and with good roadaccess. However, there is currently insufficient road capacity to servefurther major development. A planning framework for this area shouldguide the realisation of long-term opportunities for higher densitydevelopment, taking advantage of riverside locations. This should be co-ordinated in line with greater public transport accessibility forexample from the East London Transit scheme. Regeneration should be oriented towards the west to create synergy with the Royal Docksdevelopment, with opportunities for enhancing public open space around the River Roding. Kidbrooke Area centres on Kidbrooke rail station and could includethe Ferrier housing estates together with adjoining recreation facilities. A masterplan for the redevelopment of the area is being prepared, withthe aim of creating a sustainable mixed-use neighbourhood incorporatingover 2,000 additional new homes. The development should focus onintegrating the station, which will have improved links to northGreenwich, with the surrounding area and improving links within the areaacross existing roads and rail Royal Arsenal is a 40 hectare development opportunity on theriverside that should raise the profile of Woolwich and encourage thewider regeneration of the town centre. Significant resources have alreadybeen invested in site clearance, new infrastructure, and upgrading thelisted Arsenal buildings. The Royal Artillery Museum has opened and amixture of uses should be accommodated on the rest of the site,including a cluster of creative industries. The A206 presents a barrier tomovement between the site and the town centre. Attractive links betweenthe two areas are required to ensure that the town centre benefits fromvisitors to the Arsenal and further investment is encouraged. Theextension of the DLR to Woolwich will improve the accessibility of the
254Mayor of LondonThe London Planarea and the Greenwich Waterfront Transit will improve links withGreenwich town centre and for Regeneration in East general policy for Areas for Regeneration is set out in Policy . The East London sub-region contains London’s largest concentration ofdeprivation, much of it in and around the Opportunity Areas. Many of themost deprived wards in London are concentrated in large areas of TowerHamlets, Hackney and Newham with smaller areas in Greenwich, Barking,Dagenham and Havering (see Map ). In planning for these areas,boroughs should identify links that will enable their residents to benefit fromthe growth in nearby Opportunity Areas and in the Central Activities Zone. A combination of new transport links to these areas, training programmes,and capacity-building initiatives should ensure that developmentopportunities benefit and assist in regenerating local is a general need throughout the sub-region to co-ordinate spatial, social and economic policies and action. In particular, its residentsneed to be equipped with the skills, access and support facilities that will allow them to benefit from job opportunities, especially in their own centres in East general policy for town centres is set out in Policy . A strategyfor the network of town centres in the sub-region will be developed in the Sub-Regional Development Framework. Strategically designated towncentres in the sub-region (shown on Map ) should be considered asopportunities for more intensive development and boroughs shouldconsider how their roles could be consolidated or enhanced to meet retailand other consumer needs and to increase capacity for mixed-usedevelopment including housing. It is anticipated that Stratford, with aunique role in the regeneration of East London, will develop into a‘Metropolitan’ centre (paragraph ), Ilford, as a ‘Metropolitan’ centre,has particular opportunities for complementary mixed residential, leisureand other specialist development (paragraph ). The Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework should also explore the potential of centres likeBexleyheath, Barking, Dalston, Woolwich, Lewisham and Romford toprovide accessible and more sustainable alternative attractions to regionalshopping centres outside London and to increase housing and viableemployment suburbs of East ’s suburbs are one of its defining and most attractive , as set out in Chapter 2, they also face a range of challenges
The London PlanMayor of London 255toredress historic under-investment and to secure sustainable forms ofrenewal. These challenges are particularly acute in parts of East Sub-Regional Development Framework should draw on Policy the proposed ‘sustainable suburbs toolkit’ to address localcircumstances for implementation through UDPs, Community Strategiesand other local Employment Locations in East East London sub-region contains over a third of London’s , substantial areas do not meet modern industrial , environmental and other factors also constrain theirredevelopment. Partnership action, including the LDA in many cases, willbe necessary to address these in accordance with Policy . Decliningindustrial demand at the strategic level should inform development ofcriteria to manage the more local protection, release or enhancement ofsites outside the SEL framework. In managing industrial land stocks,account should be taken of the need to make provision for wastemanagement in line with the principle of self-suffiency and takingaccount of some of central London’s needs.
256Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 2575DWest London sub-regionDefinition and West London sub-region comprises the six boroughs of Hammersmith& Fulham, Brent, Ealing, Harrow, Hillingdon and Hounslow. It has apopulation of almost million and is shown on Map London sub-regionsourceGLA 2002Policy The strategic priorities for West LondonThe strategic priorities for the West London sub-region will be to:•capture the benefits of the economic generators, including Heathrow,within the sub-region for residents, while ensuring that thisdevelopment improves not degrades the environment•realise the potential of Wembley as a nationally and internationallysignificant sports, leisure and business location, co-ordinated withtown centre regeneration and new housing•identify capacity to accommodate new job and housing opportunitiesand appropriate mixed-use development. This is especially important in relation to the Western Wedge, Heathrow Airport, Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification. It will include co-ordinating skillsdevelopment, transport and planning to improve access to jobs forpeople from deprived communities in the sub-region
258Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•maximise the number of additional homes, including affordablehousing, by exceeding housing provision targets set out in this planand secure mixed and balanced communities•promote and intensify retailing, services, employment, leisure andhousing in town centres and opportunities for mixed-use development•plan for and secure the necessary financial resources to deliver planned transport infrastructure for the sub-region including localschemes that improve public transport, walking and cyclingconnections to town centres and employment locations. Particularpriorities for the sub-region are Crossrail 1, the West London Tram,improved bus services and enabling more sustainable access toHeathrow Airport•improve the variety, quality and access to available employment sites,especially within Strategic Employment Locations, to meet theidentifiable demands for employment land•ensure that social and community infrastructure is retained, enhancedand expanded where needed•ensure that new development is sustainable, safe, secure and welldesigned, improves the environment, and takes account of the sub-region’s heritage. The open space and Blue Ribbon Networks are key features. Air quality and noise in the Heathrow area areparticular issues•identify areas suitable for tall buildings•plan for waste facilities in line with the principle of self-sufficiency,including limited provision to meet part of central London’s Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for West London in which these priorities will be further , West London is a thriving part of the city with a diverse economyincluding clusters of international businesses, a growing knowledgeeconomy and some concentrations of manufacturing. This role shouldcontinue, with new development aimed at exploiting West London’sdynamism and potential and addressing the needs of some significantpockets of deprivation, especially in inner parts such as Acton and ParkRoyal and more local pockets such as those around Hayes and London could accommodate 45,000 additional homes and 86,000new jobs. Much of this should be located in the ‘Western Wedge’, theLondon part of which extends from Paddington in central London throughPark Royal and Wembley to Heathrow and its environs.
The London PlanMayor of London London should derive greater benefit from the enormous growthpotential around Heathrow airport. There is a relatively limited amount ofbrownfield development land and therefore much of the planned growthshould be realised through higher density development, exploiting locationswith good existing or potential access by public transport. There is a riskthat valuable industrial sites may be lost through pressures from competinguses and sites with real long-term potential should be transport capacity and planned additional transport investmentshould enable West London to accommodate the forecast level of to local transport including buses, cycling and walking willbe very important in facilitating local access especially in the earlierphases of the plan when major schemes have yet to come to schemes are proposed in the Mayor's Transport Strategy:•an improved West London Line (Willesden Junction to ClaphamJunction) passenger service, and the building of two new stations toserve developments in the West London Line corridor (at Shepherd'sBush and Chelsea Harbour), which would improve an important part ofthe core orbital rail network. •the proposed West London Tram would relieve congestion and createextra public transport capacity along a 20km corridor connectingUxbridge, Southall, Hanwell, Ealing, Acton and Shepherd's Bush•the Crossrail 1 branch to the west is currently planned to servePaddington, Heathrow and access to Heathrow by more sustainable modes wouldcontribute to its development and also make a major contribution to moresustainable development and especially to improving air wider area of West London and the Thames Valley has experiencedhigh rates of economic growth during the past decade. Much of this, inparticular the international business element of growth, has locatedbeyond the London boundaries. A coherent Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework would help improve the economic performance in WestLondon, and both address its social and economic needs and relieve someof the problems (such as skills shortages) associated with the populationof the Thames Valley area. The Mayor is working in collaboration withSEERA, SEEDA and the LDA on a joint study and towards a collaborationstrategy that will address these issues. Authorities on the other side of theWest London boundary will be involved in the production of the Sub-Regional Development Framework. London’s planning should also be co-ordinated with those of theother four London sub-regions. Access to Heathrow is important to the
260Mayor of LondonThe London Planwestern parts of the North and South sub-regions. It is especiallyimportant to achieve a compatible development programme with that ofEast London. A competitive approach between the two sub-regions wouldnot be in London’s best Areas in West LondonPolicy Opportunity Areas in West LondonThe West London Opportunity Areas are shown in Table , withindicative estimates for homes and jobs growth. The Mayor will work with partners to draw up planning frameworks for these areas. Theseshould inform UDP reviews and broader regeneration and communitystrategies and initiatives. Taking account of other policies, developmentswill be expected to maximise residential and non-residential densities andtocontain mixed uses (see Chapter 3, Part B and Chapter 4, Part B).Given their scale, they are also likely to give rise to substantial planningobligations (see Policies and ). The general policy directions tobe followed in the planning frameworks are indicated below. table Areas in West London – indicative estimates of growthOpportunity AreasArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Wembley2385,000400White City3011,0001,200Park Royal47010,000-Heathrow/Feltham/Bedfont Lakes/ 915,500930Hounslow Town CentreHayes/West Drayton/Southall/37135,0005,800Stockley Business ParksourceGLA and environs. Heathrow is the country’s largest passenger andfreight airport. Terminal 5 will sustain it as one of London’s maineconomic drivers in West London. Directly and indirectly, the airportexerts a significant influence on surrounding local economies throughoutthe ‘Western Wedge’ and outside London. This in turn helps to make outer West London one of the few suburban parts of the capital currentlyattractive for office planning framework should establish the scale of opportunities andmix of development and seek to harness more of the benefits of widercross-boundary growth for Londoners. Objectives should include securing
The London PlanMayor of London 261local and sub-regionally important public transport improvements,reducing pressures for car use and parking, facilitating commercial siteassembly, decontamination and intensification of use and bringingforward further housing capacity. The planning framework should alsoseek better access to the area’s opportunities for local excludedcommunities, build on current strengths, such as Southall’s ethnic identityand links with the Indian sub-continent, and enhance and protect theenvironment. The LDA and Heathrow Area Alliance should play centralroles in developing and implementing the framework. It should focus on sites within two distinct Opportunity Areas:•to the north of the airport, Hayes, Stockley Business Park, WestDrayton and Southall •to the south of the airport, Feltham, Bedfont Business Park andHounslow town Royal. This Opportunity Area is closely associated with the longerterm development potential at Willesden Junction and the brownfieldrailway lands, old industrial and vacant land south to Old Oak planning framework should build on the sheer scale of Park Royaland address the need for site assembly and decontamination andimprovements to local access and the environment. A longer term,strategic perspective should take account of London’s future rail freightrequirements and their land use implications and the scope forimprovements in strategic rail accessibility. represents a nationally important Opportunity Area for leisure-related development. The planning framework should recognise its historicsporting and assembly associations and integrate the proposed newworld-class stadium and other facilities, including the Arena andConference Centre, with new leisure-related development. It should takeaccount of the key role of public transport in sustaining such generatorsof heavy demand for mass movement, including upgrading the threestations (Central, Stadium and Park) and improving links between themand the strategic leisure facilities. This will contribute to the regenerationof Wembley as a town centre and to meeting sub-regional housing needswith new homes expected to be substantially greater than the minimum400 in table . City already has permission for significant new retail provision. It abuts a wider 30 hectare area where there is pressure and scope tointensify activity. This is of more than local importance. It should be co-ordinated strategically to support the viability of other West andCentral London centres and to ensure that development is based onpublic transport rather than more intensive use of parking provision,
262Mayor of LondonThe London Planwhich is already excessive and damaging and which ideally should bereduced over time. The planning framework should resist furtherextension of retail and parking provision, build on the area’s existingstrengths as a centre of broadcasting excellence, increase affordablehousing provision and develop the area’s potential to contribute to rejuvenation of the office market beyond central London. It should alsorelate to the intensification of development at Shepherd’s for Intensification in West LondonPolicy Area for Intensification in West LondonThe Area for Intensification in the West London sub-region are shown in Table , with indicative estimates of additional homes and jobsgrowth. To help accommodate growth, boroughs, in consultation with the Mayor, should promote development opportunities through higherdensity redevelopment at key transport nodes of good accessibility andcapacity, and in town centres and seek to achieve higher levels ofprovision wherever possible, especially for for Intensification in West London – indicative estimates of growthArea for IntensificationArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Willesden Junction963,600500sourceGLA general policy for Areas for Intensification is set out in Policy Junction has potential for substantial employment growth andsome housing. It should be planned in co-ordination with Park Royal andthe development potential to the south of Old Oak Common. Areas for Regeneration in West general policy for Areas for Regeneration is set out in Policy being a relatively affluent sub-region, there are significant areasof acute deprivation within the West London sub-region, concentratedaround Acton and Park Royal. A combination of new transport links tothese areas, training programmes, and capacity-building initiatives isneeded to ensure that development within and beyond the sub-regionbenefits and assists in regenerating local communities. In planning forthese areas, boroughs should identify links that will enable their residentstobenefit from the growth in nearby Opportunity Areas and in theCentral Activities Zone.
The London PlanMayor of London is a general need throughout the sub-region to co-ordinate spatial,social and economic policies and action. In particular its residents need tobe equipped with the skills, access and support facilities that will allowthem to benefit from job opportunities, especially in their own centres in West general policy for town centres is set out in Policy . A strategyfor the network of town centres in the sub-region will be developed in the Sub-Regional Development Framework. Strategically designated towncentres in the sub-region (shown on Map ) should be considered as opportunities for more intensive development and boroughs shouldconsider how their roles could be consolidated or enhanced to meet retailand other consumer needs and to increase capacity for mixed-usedevelopment including housing. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework should, in particular, explore the implications of developing awider role for Uxbridge, of better integrating of Ealing Broadway / WestEaling and Shepherd’s Bush/White City and of regenerating Wembley. Theimplications for Hounslow’s Western International Market of the proposedreview of London’s wholesale markets should be taken into planned West London Tram between Uxbridge and Shepherd’s Bushwould generate capacity and support the growth of these town would benefit from the scheme as well as from the substantialgrowth in capacity gained through Crossrail 1. Opportunities forintensification at other town centres in West London, including Harrow,should be suburbs of West ’s suburbs are one of its defining and most attractive , as set out in Chapter 2, they also face a range of challenges toredress historic under-investment and to secure sustainable forms ofrenewal. These challenges vary from place to place within the Sub-Regional Development Framework should draw on Policy the proposed ‘sustainable suburbs toolkit’ to address localcircumstances for implementation through UDPs, Community Strategiesand other local strategies. Strategic Employment Locations in West London contains a quarter of London’s SELs. Though parts requireremediation to meet modern industrial needs, relatively buoyant demandprovides particular potential to support renewal in accordance with . This general level of demand should also inform the development ofcriteria to guide the management of smaller sites outside the SEL
264Mayor of LondonThe London Planframework. In managing the stock of industrial land, account should alsobe taken of provision for waste management in line with the principle ofself-sufficiency and taking account of some of central London’s needs.
The London PlanMayor of London 2655ENorth London sub-regionDefinition and London comprises the boroughs of Barnet, Enfield, Haringey and Waltham Forest and has a population of million. It is shown onMap London sub-regionsourceGLA 2002Policy The strategic priorities for North LondonThe strategic priorities for the North London sub-region will be to:•deliver the London element of the government’s priority for theLondon-Stansted-Cambridge corridor for development, regenerationand transport improvement, while recognising the links with otherparts of the corridor•identify capacity to accommodate new job and housing opportunitiesand appropriate mixed-use development. This is especially important in relation to the Upper Lee Valley and other Opportunity Areas and
266Mayor of LondonThe London PlanAreas for Intensification. It will include co-ordinating skillsdevelopment, transport and planning to improve access to jobs for people from deprived communities in the sub-region•maximise the number of additional homes, including affordablehousing, by exceeding housing provision targets set out in this planand secure mixed and balanced communities•promote and intensify retailing, services, employment, leisure andhousing in town centres and opportunities for mixed-use development•plan for and secure the necessary financial resources to deliver planned transport infrastructure for the sub-region, including localschemes that improve public transport, walking and cyclingconnections to town centres and employment locations. Particularpriorities for the sub-region are Thameslink 2000, improved busservices and improved links with Stansted and Stratford andpotentially, in the longer term, Crossrail 2•improve the variety, quality and access to available employment sites,especially within Strategic Employment Locations, to meet theidentifiable demands for employment land•ensure that social and community infrastructure is retained, enhancedand expanded where needed•ensure that new development is sustainable, safe and secure and welldesigned, improves the environment and takes account of the sub-region’s heritage. The open space and Blue Ribbon Networks are keyfeatures, in particular the Lee Valley Park•identify areas suitable for tall buildings•plan for waste facilities in line with the principle of self sufficiencyincluding limited provision to meet part of central London’s Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for North London in which these priorities will be further performance in the sub-region has been varied in recent yearswith some strong employment growth, notably in Barnet, but with otherareas of continuing deprivation and stagnation, for example, in parts of the Upper Lee Valley and the industrial areas around the North Circular plan proposes that North London should accommodate some 47,000additional homes and 26,000 new jobs by 2016. Development should befocused upon Opportunity Areas with particular emphasis upon the UpperLee Valley and the town centres.
The London PlanMayor of London extremely important stimulus to the regeneration of the Lee Valley,and to the economy of London and the UK, will come from thedevelopment of the bid for London to host the 2012 Olympic Games. Theproposals in that bid will follow the policies of this plan and will seek tomaximise the benefits that will accrue to the Lee Valley and the sub-region as a whole. The Sub-Regional Development Framework will set afuller spatial planning context for the formulation of the Mayor is working with the Government Office for London, the LDAand others to investigate the potential for more growth in the Londonpart of the London-Stansted-Cambridge growth area, in accordance withthe government’s Sustainable Communities Plan. This will seek tomaximise development and regeneration opportunities, particularly for theUpper Lee Valley, exploiting the potential of Stratford, Stansted and otherstrategic transport links. The corridor and transport links between NorthLondon and Luton Airport also require strategic co-ordination. There areespecially strong links into the Thames Gateway and sub-regionalstrategies should therefore be co-ordinated. Similarly, there should be co-ordination with the Opportunity Areas near the West London Sub-Regional Development Framework should reflect and review theavailability of land for industry and should take into account theattractiveness of the sub-region’s relatively good access to the M25 andother major of the Lee Valley, and associated development in theLondon-Stansted-Cambridge corridor, will require substantialenhancements to the rail network.•The West Anglia Route Modernisation programme would enhanceservices on the Lee Valley line to Stansted and link Stratford toStansted airport. Although this is not a current priority for the StrategicRail Authority, it is essential that work progresses on this during theplan period. •Crossrail 2 is yet to be fully planned, but could open up rail access tokey regeneration areas in north-east London, through Hackney andpotentially into the Lee Valley. It could provide new journeyopportunities and relief to the Victoria Line corridor. This scheme isunlikely to be implemented until towards the end of the plan periodbut it is essential that it remains a priority and its relationship withWest Anglia Route Modernisation is clear.
268Mayor of LondonThe London in local transport, including the planned increase in buscapacity of 40 per cent by the end of the plan period across London,better cycling and walking facilities are also important for thedevelopment of the North London sub-region. These should particularlystrengthen connections to town centres and employment Areas in North LondonPolicy Opportunity Areas in North LondonThe North London Opportunity Areas are shown in Table , withindicative estimates for homes and jobs growth. The Mayor will work withpartners to draw up planning frameworks for these areas. These shouldinform UDP reviews and broader regeneration and community strategiesand initiatives. Taking account of other policies, developments will beexpected to maximise residential and non-residential densities andcontain mixed use (see Chapter 3, Part B and Chapter 4, Part B). Giventheir scale, they are also likely to give rise to substantial planningobligations (see Policies and ). The general policy directions tobe followed in the planning frameworks are indicated Areas in North London – indicative estimates for growthOpportunity AreasArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Upper Lee Valley41610,000700Tottenham Hale265,000200Cricklewood / Brent Cross1075,0005,000sourceGLA Upper Lee Valley is a six-mile corridor extending north fromTottenham Hale to the M25, focused around a regional park. Togetherwith the Blackhorse Lane and Leyton ‘industrial villages’ in WalthamForest, it comprises one of the largest clusters of manufacturing andtechnology-led industrial estates in London (with leisure and sports-basedactivities at Picketts Lock). These help broaden London’s economic baseand provide employment for nearby, often deprived, communities. Thecorridor is linked to the M25 by the A1055 road and to Stansted Airportby the West Anglia railway. are several development sites within the area, and the mainrequirement is for high quality renewal, including modernising estates andimproving transport. This will enable retention of key anchor firms andencourage new business growth. Innova Park at the northern end of the
The London PlanMayor of London 269corridor should provide a focus for growth of new knowledge-basedindustry, including new media and ICT. The Lee Valley Regional ParkAuthority and water utilities should collaborate with the boroughs inrelating industrial renewal to the environmental assets of the Lee ValleyPark and the green Hale, a well-established manufacturing area, offers significantredevelopment opportunity. Areas north and east of the station containmixed industrial uses (. waste, storage) in new and old buildings. Thearea has good public transport accessibility with mainline rail services tocentral London, Stansted Airport and the Upper Lee Valley, andUnderground services. However, the local road network requiresreorganisation to enable more efficient use of the area could accommodate higher density development, particularlyclose to the station and become the main service area focus for the sub-region. Plans for a new 10,000 student teaching campus for MiddlesexUniversity should provide an opportunity to establish a stronger identitytothe area, and site assembly may be key to enable more comprehensivehigher density development. Cross. This area combines the expanse of formerrailway land to the north, and the industrial land to the east ofCricklewood Station, together with Brent Cross regional shopping centreacross the A406 North Circular Road. Subject to its development as anintegrated entity, the planning framework should seek the redevelopmentof Brent Cross as a town centre complementing the roles of other centresnearby. This should be informed by an independent assessment of theneed for and impact of further retail development. Redevelopment as atown centre would entail an extension of town centre activities beyondretail including housing with no increase in current parking levels. Theplanning framework should make provision for at least 5,000 additionalhomes together with local ancillary services and a rail station on theCricklewood site. Any new development should be contingent uponprovision of improved public transport and accessibility across the future use of the railway lands will be influenced by Policy –Land for Transport for Intensification in North LondonPolicy Areas for Intensification in North LondonThe Areas for Intensification in the North London sub-region are shown in Table , with indicative estimates of additional homes and jobsgrowth. To help accommodate growth, boroughs, in consultation with
270Mayor of LondonThe London Planthe Mayor, should promote development opportunities through higherdensity redevelopment at key transport nodes of good accessibility andcapacity and in town centres and seek to achieve higher levels ofprovisions wherever possible, especially for for Intensification in North London – indicative estimates of growthAreas for IntensificationArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Mill Hill East385002,000Colindale425002,000Haringey Heartlands/Wood Green301,5001,000sourceGLA general policy for the Areas for Intensification is set out in Policy for redevelopment exist around the Underground station at Mill Hill East, principally at the MOD Inglis Barracks, Mill Hill gasworks, and council depot sites. Development would be primarily newhousing at higher densities, with a mix of uses to provide localemployment and Colindale, the regeneration of the Grahame Park estate and theavailability of land at the former RAF East Camp and other adjoining sites,represent an opportunity to provide at least an additional 2,000 homestogether with a range of leisure and other uses in recognition of thetourism focus associated with Hendon RAF Museum. There are emergingareas for redevelopment, such as the hospital site, which could addsignificantly to the capacity of this planning framework for Haringey Heartlands/Wood Green should co-ordinate the range of development opportunities on the railway andindustrial lands to the south-west of Wood Green town centre. These sitesinclude the Clarendon Road gas works, adjacent Coburg Road industrialarea and Hornsey waterworks on the north side of Hornsey High is significant scope for enhancement of these areas, building on thearea’s industrial heritage. Site assembly and provision of better links withthe town centre will be key to a comprehensive development. Theprovision of sustainable high density mixed-use development for housing,leisure, retail, employment and open space should be included in any
The London PlanMayor of London 271redevelopment plans. Opportunities should be taken to redevelop parts of Wood Green town centre for high-density, mixed-use for Regeneration in North general policy for Areas for Regeneration is set out in Policy of London’s 20 per cent most-deprived wards extend up the LeeValley into North London and include eastern Haringey (particularlyTottenham), south-east Enfield (Edmonton) and Waltham Forest (Leyton).The relationship of these areas to the defined Opportunity Areas of theUpper Lee Valley, Tottenham Hale and Stratford is important as well aslinks with development opportunities within and beyond the sub-region,particularly those associated with Stansted Airport. A combination of newtransport links to these areas, training programmes, and capacity-buildinginitiatives is needed to ensure that development within and beyond thesub-region benefits and assists in regenerating local is a general need throughout the sub-region to co-ordinate spatial,social and economic policies and action. In particular, its residents need tobe equipped with the skills, access and support facilities that will allowthem to benefit from job opportunities, especially in their own centres in North general policy for town centres is set out in Policy . A strategyfor the network of town centres in the sub-region will be developed in the Sub-Regional Development Framework. Strategically designated towncentres in the sub-region (shown on Map ) should be considered as opportunities for more intensive development and boroughs shouldconsider how their roles could be consolidated or enhanced to meet retailand other consumer needs and to increase capacity for mixed-usedevelopment including housing. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework will guide the evolution of Brent Cross regional shoppingcentre into an integrated town centre. This should not compromise thepotential of Wood Green, Wembley, Harrow and other centres to providesustainable access to higher quality goods and suburbs of North ’s suburbs are one of its defining and most attractive , as set out in Chapter 2, they also face a range of challenges toredress historic under-investment and to secure sustainable forms ofrenewal. Some of these challenges are particularly acute in parts of NorthLondon. The Sub-Regional Development Framework should draw onPolicy and the proposed ‘sustainable suburbs toolkit’ to addresslocal circumstances for implementation through UDPs, CommunityStrategies and other local strategies.
272Mayor of LondonThe London PlanStrategic Employment Locations in North London contains 10 SELs. Historically some of these have beensubject to particular pressures for changes to retailing and otherinappropriately located uses. The Sub-Regional Development Frameworkshould ensure that their capacity to meet future industrial need issustained in accordance with Policy . In developing criteria to manageany release of surplus sites outside the SEL framework, boroughs shouldtake account of the need to maximise housing provision, especiallyaffordable housing and to resist proposals for inappropriately locatedretail and leisure development. In managing the stock of industrial land,account should be taken of the need to make provision for wastemanagement facilities in line with the principle of self-sufficiency andtaking account of some of central London’s needs.
The London PlanMayor of London 2735FSouth London sub-regionDefinition and South London sub-region comprises the boroughs of Bromley,Croydon, Merton, Sutton, Kingston and Richmond. It has a population million and is shown on Map London sub-regionsourceGLA 2002Policy The strategic priorities for South London The strategic priorities of the South London sub-region will be to:•promote opportunities to increase employment and housing within the sub-region to secure increased self-sufficiency•identify capacity to accommodate new job and housing opportunitiesand appropriate mixed-use development. This is especially important in relation to the Croydon town centre Opportunity Area and securingregeneration in the Wandle Valley. It will include co-ordinating skillsdevelopment, transport and planning to improve access to jobs forpeople from deprived communities in the sub-region
274Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•maximise the number of additional homes, including affordablehousing, by exceeding housing provision targets set out in this planand secure mixed and balanced communities•promote and intensify retailing, services, employment, leisure andhousing in town centres and opportunities for mixed-use development•plan for and secure the necessary financial resources to deliver planned transport infrastructure for the sub-region including localschemes that improve public transport, walking and cyclingconnections to town centres and employment locations. Particularpriorities for the sub-region are securing Crossrail 1 to Kingston,Thameslink 2000, improvements to National Rail services, development of orbital public transport including Croydon Tramlinkextensions and local improvements to bus, cycle and pedestrian links•improve the variety, quality and access to available employment sites,especially within Strategic Employment Locations, to meet theidentifiable demands for employment land•ensure that social and community infrastructure is retained, enhancedand expanded where needed•ensure that new development is sustainable, safe and secure and well designed, improves the environment and takes account of thesub-region’s heritage. The open space and Blue Ribbon Networks arekey features, in particular the Wandle Valley and the Thames•identify areas suitable for tall buildings•plan for waste facilities in line with the principle of self-sufficiency,including limited provision to meet part of central London’s Mayor will work with sub-regional partnerships to develop a coherent Sub-Regional Development Framework for South London in which these priorities will be further developed. London is a relatively prosperous sub-region, noted for its highenvironmental quality, with a diverse economy, a major office location inCroydon town centre and the economic benefits of proximity to GatwickAirport. Many businesses, particularly in the Wandle Valley, are in asupply-chain relationship with the central London economy. There are alsoimportant local economies in services such as retail, leisure and logisticsand in new industrial sectors. sub-region has strong radial as well as orbital linkages to the othersub-regions. These should be recognised in the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework. Though Wandsworth is part of Central Londonit also has strong links with South London, especially through the Wandle
The London PlanMayor of London 275Valley. Richmond and Kingston have close associations with West Londonand Bromley with parts of East London London’s development opportunities are mostly small scale,compared with other London sub-regions, and are concentrated in thetown centres and along the Wandle Valley corridor, the part of SouthLondon most in need of renewal. Nevertheless South London can make a considerable contribution to accommodating further economicdevelopment, particularly where transport infrastructure improvements are London has been characterised by strong residential developmentin recent years. The plan proposes that the sub-region shouldaccommodate 42,000 new homes by 2016. On the basis of historic trends and development capacity so far identified, the sub-region couldaccommodate around 36,000 new jobs by 2016. The Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework should investigate the potential to increase thisin light of a realistic, strategic appraisal of demand. are important linkages with the areas to the south of the Londonboundary and especially to Gatwick airport and its surrounds. The Mayorwill work with SEERA and others to co-ordinate strategy. There are alsoimportant links to the east and west, where improved public transportconnections to Heathrow will be beneficial for places to the west of SouthLondon. The production of the Sub-Regional Development Frameworkwill involve authorities on the other side of the South London transport capacity and planned transport investment will enablethe South London sub-region to accommodate the level of economicgrowth so far anticipated. Local transport improvements will help toimprove local access, especially to town centres and employment locationsand to encourage demand for further economic investment. Four largeschemes are proposed:•Potential extensions to Croydon Tramlink could be developed where this is beneficial and there is demand from existing and new developments.•Thameslink 2000 would significantly reduce journey times to central London and benefit Wimbledon, Croydon, Sutton, Mitcham and Bromley.•One of the western arms of Crossrail 1 is proposed to terminate at Kingston.
276Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•The southern extension of the East London Line will see servicesrunning through to West Croydon, Crystal Palace and ClaphamJunction, providing improved orbital access. the longer term, Wimbledon would benefit from being the southernfocus of Crossrail 2. This would improve accessibility significantly andenhance the prospects for more intensive Area in South LondonPolicy Opportunity Area in South LondonThe South London Opportunity Area is shown in Table , with itsindicative estimates for homes and jobs growth. The Mayor will work withpartners to draw up a planning framework for this area. This should informUDPs and broader regeneration and community strategies and account of other policies, developments will be expected tomaximise residential and non-residential densities and to contain mixeduses (see Chapter 3, Part B and Chapter 4, Part B). Given their scale, theyare also likely to give rise to substantial planning obligations (see and ). The general policy directions to be followed in theplanning frameworks are indicated Area in South London – indicative estimates of growthOpportunity AreaArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016Croydon town centre785,5002,000sourceGLA of the sources of development capacity in South London arerelatively small scale. It has only one of a size that can be classified as an Opportunity Area. town centre is already recognised as London’s largest‘Metropolitan’ centre (as defined in Annex 1) and one of the capital’s twostrategic office centres outside central London. Because of the scale ofthe opportunities it offers and the need for integrated action it is alsorecognised as an Opportunity Area. The planning framework should takean integrated approach to a number of sites which even individually are ofstrategic importance – those covering the station, Fairfield Halls, CroydonCollege, Park Place and the Whitgift extension.
The London PlanMayor of London framework should build on the council’s strategy to re-brand the offerof Croydon to meet modern commercial needs, developing its ability toprovide a major London presence with ready access to central London butat considerably less cost. This will require realism in the balance to bestruck between new office development and encouraging the conversionof redundant buildings to other uses. A rejuvenation of the mix and vitalityof supporting uses and enhancement of the environment will help supportredevelopment, as well as exploration of new opportunities that may arisethrough Croydon’s proximity to Gatwick airport. The planning frameworkshould explore the scope for encouraging tall buildings in Area for Intensification in South London The Area for Intensification in the South London sub-region is shown in Table , with indicative estimates of additional homes and jobsgrowth. To help accommodate growth, boroughs, in consultation with the Mayor, should promote development opportunities through higherdensity redevelopment at key transport nodes of good accessibility andcapacity and in town centres and seek to achieve higher levels ofprovision wherever possible, especially for for Intensification in South London – indicative estimate of growthArea for IntensificationArea (ha)New jobs to 2016New homes to 2016South Wimbledon / Collier’s Wood1202,0001,300sourceGLA general policy for Areas for Intensification is set out in Policy strategic importance of the Wandle Valley is highlighted in the KeyDiagram. It is characterised by a discontinuous chain of older industrialareas and relatively small industrial sites. Taken as a whole it represents a strategic opportunity for the whole sub-region and a co-ordinatedapproach to its future should form a key part of the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework. Traditional manufacturing remains importantbut newer activities are emerging including some related to the media and aviation. Improved sub-regional and local transport links could helptorejuvenate the Wandle Valley. The opportunities that this could providewould be accessible to deprived inner London communities as well asresidents within the sub-region. Colliers Wood/South Wimbledon area is particularly important as anArea for Intensification within the Wandle Valley. This contains four major
278Mayor of LondonThe London Planopportunities for intensification and brownfield redevelopment – WandleValley Sewage Works, Wimbledon football club and dog track sites,Durnsford Road industrial estate and Colliers Wood itself. A planningframework for this area should explore how improvements in publictransport could enhance local accessibility to these relatively remotelocations. Linkages with communities in areas for regeneration should beconsidered. The framework should provide incentives for intensification ofuse, encouraging changes from current inappropriately located retailprovision to more sustainable business activities. Site assembly anddecontamination are also important. In preparing the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework, partners should explore potential forintensification around Mitcham/Willow Lane – an area covering up to 60hectares, which would offer considerable redevelopment potential as akey node in the Wandle Valley, if public transport could be for Regeneration in South general policies for Areas for Regeneration are set out in Policy one of London’s worst 20 per cent of deprived wards lies within thesix boroughs of South London. Nevertheless, parts of northern Croydonand Merton show particular problems and some large social housingestates (such as St Helier and Roundshaw in Sutton, New Addington inCroydon) feature in estate renewal programmes. A combination of newtransport links to these areas, training programmes, and capacity-buildinginitiatives is needed to ensure that development within and beyond thesub-region benefits and assists in regenerating local communities. is a general need throughout the sub-region to co-ordinate spatial,social and economic policies and action. In particular, its residents need tobe equipped with the skills, access and support facilities that will allowthem to benefit from job opportunities, especially in their own centres in South general policy for town centres is set out in Policy . A strategyfor the network of town centres in the sub-region will be developed in theSub-Regional Development Framework. All designated town centres inthe sub-region (shown on Map ) should be considered asopportunities for more intensive development and boroughs shouldconsider how their roles could be consolidated or enhanced to meet retailand other consumer needs and to increase capacity for mixed-usedevelopment including housing. The importance of Croydon in the towncentre network is highlighted in Policy . The Sub-RegionalDevelopment Framework should also recognise the roles of Kingston,Bromley and Sutton as ‘Metropolitan’ centres and of Orpington,Wimbledon and Richmond as ‘Major’ centres serving large suburban
The London PlanMayor of London 279populations (as defined in Annex 1). Co-ordination of their developmentwith that of centres outside London so that they can serve theircatchments more sustainably will be important. The suburbs of South ’s suburbs are one of its defining and most attractive , as set out in Chapter 2, they also face a range of challenges toredress historic under-investment and to secure sustainable forms ofrenewal. South London contains some of the wealthiest suburbs as well as relatively deprived neighbourhoods. The Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework should draw on Policy and the proposed ‘sustainablesuburbs toolkit’ to address local circumstances for implementationthrough UDPs, Community Strategies and other local Employment Locations in South sub-region contains a fifth of London’s SELs, as well as numeroussmaller sites. They should be promoted, protected and managed in linewith Policy . The Sub-Regional Development Framework shouldsupport the definition of SELs in UDPs. It should take into accountstrategic and local circumstances and competing land use needs toaddress industrial demand, support the emergence of new growth sectorsand sustain lower value added businesses which are important to the localeconomy. In managing the stock of industrial land, account should betaken of the need to make provision for waste management facilities inline with the principle of self-sufficiency and to meet some of centralLondon’s , Circular 1/20002GLA Population and Household Forecasts: 2001 – 16, SDS Technical Report 5. GLA, 20033London’s Housing Capacity, GLA, 20004The Future of Employment in Greater London. SDS Technical Report 8. GLA, VolterraEconomic Consulting, 2002. Demand and Supply of Business Space in London, SDSTechnical Report 21. GLA, Roger Tym & Partners, 20025Demand and Supply of Business Space in London, SDS Technical Report 21. GLA, Roger Tym & Partners, 20026Mayor of London. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy. GLA, 20017London Thames Gateway, Draft Development and Delivery Strategy, GLA, July 2003
280Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London 2816implementing the London chapter outlines how the Mayor will translate his vision for London’sfuture into reality. Achieving the vision will be challenging. The Mayorcannot implement the London Plan alone. He will work with Londonersand a range of stakeholders including the GLA group, boroughs, thegovernment and statutory agencies, the private sector, the voluntary andcommunity sectors and others to ensure that the objectives and policies inthis plan are Mayor’s implementation strategy is one of co-ordination of thepolicies, resources and decisions of the key stakeholders so that these arein line with this plan’s policies, are mutually compatible and are aseffective as possible. This chapter is in three parts. The first looks atdelivering the vision, the second at monitoring and review and the third at long-term future strategic planning in Mayor must have regard to the resources available to implement thisplan. This chapter looks at the relevant resources in all forms: people,institutions, funding, policy vehicles, information and natural resources. It shows how they will be used and co-ordinated to support theimplementation of the the part sets out:•the plan’s sphere of influence: wherethe plan will impact•the main implementation processes: how and whenit will take effect•the main stakeholders involved in the implementation of the plan andtheir contributions: whowill help to implement it•the strategies that will contribute to implementation: whatwill be usedto do plan’s sphere of London Plan itself is a statutory document. It is the main vehicle forstrategic decision-making on London’s development. Figure shows themain areas of spatial development that the plan will directly are:•Development decisions: These include, for example, proposals todevelop new housing or to regenerate town centres. Most of thesedecisions will be taken by the private sector and will have to be takenin the context of the plan’s policies.•Investment decisions with a spatial impact: These include, for example,
282Mayor of LondonThe London Plandecisions on funding of transport or utilities infrastructure or on majorland acquisitions. Both public and private sectors will make thesedecisions, which will be strongly influenced by the plan’s policies.•Other spatial policy vehicles: These will have to be formulated withinthe policies of the plan and may be at sub-regional level, such as Sub-Regional Development Frameworks, or at local level, such as UDPs,which must be in general conformity with the London Plan.•Decisions that regulate proposals for development and especiallydevelopment control, which is exercised by the boroughs and, inspecified cases, the Mayor. These decisions must reflect the policies of this addition there are policies and decisions that will be influenced by (and will influence) the London Plan in a less direct way. These are:•Policies, investment and other decisions made at a higher level by, for example, the EU and government.•Policies, investments and other decisions made in other sectors such as health, education and housing, but with important spatialdimensions such as the location of schools and hospitals.•Amultitude of individual decisions and behaviours about, for example,which form of transport to use or what form of waste disposal toselect. Accumulatively, these will be of immense importance inachieving the plan’s plan is realistic about the extent of its capacity to influence activitiesoutside its main sphere of influence. Chapter 1 sets out some of the mainforces driving change and the ways in which the Mayor will seek to workwith and manage their spatial development impacts.
The London PlanMayor of London 283figure sphere of influence of the London PlansourceGLA2The main implementation Mayor’s powers in the field of spatial development are substantial, buteffective implementation will require the use of a range of implementationprocesses to ensure the most effective co-ordination of the contributionsof the various stakeholders. There are six main processes:•the Mayor’s powers and resources•working in partnership•promoting development•negotiation on development proposals•generation and use of resources•phasing and co-ordination of for each of these processes are set out below. Annex 9summarises some of the many important mechanisms available to supportthe implementation of this plan.
284Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThe Mayor’s powers and resourcesPolicy The Mayor’s own powers and resourcesThe Mayor will ensure that the policies and resources of the GLA grouppromote the implementation of this Mayor controls major elements of the policy and resources neededfor the implementation of the London Plan. These include the full rangeof statutory strategies and the budgets of the GLA group. The GLA groupcomprises the GLA, Transport for London, the London DevelopmentAgency, the Metropolitan Police Authority and the London Fire &Emergency Planning Authority. The group works together to achieve theMayor’s vision for London. This means strategic planning, transport,economic development and public safety decisions and expenditures canbe made in an integrated way. The impact of this combination of powersand resources can be magnified by using them to create high levels ofleverage from other sources of funding, especially from the private for London (TfL) has key responsibilities for major roads andmuch of the public transport London Development Agency (LDA) has a vital role to play ineconomic development and Metropolitan Police Authority (MPA) and London Fire & EmergencyPlanning Authority (LFEPA) have a critical role in delivery and caninfluence safety and security throughout London. Making London a safercity is a key objective for both these Mayor and other London partners have established a London Officein Brussels, which will spearhead efforts to increase London’s influenceupon and benefits from the Mayor has responsibility for a range of other strategies: these areidentified later in this chapter and in other appropriate chapters of thisplan. The London Plan provides the spatial framework for all thesestrategies and they will contribute to its in partnershipPolicy Working in partnershipThe Mayor will work with strategic partners and where appropriate,initiate new partnerships, to secure the implementation of the policies in this plan.
The London PlanMayor of London the GLA group, the principal London stakeholders are the Londonboroughs, central government and public sector agencies, the privatesector, the voluntary and community sectors and individual roles are set out in below. They will work most effectively togetherthrough institutions must work together on a common agenda and use theirrespective resources in ways that avoid conflict or duplication andmaximise joint working and pooling of resources. Important cross-cuttingpartnerships include, among many others, the sub-regional partnershipsand Local Strategic Partnerships. Public and private sector partnershipscan offer an invaluable mechanism for both policy development andfunding. Some partnerships can provide impetus for the implementationof specific programmes and may be valuable in some Opportunity engagement of the relevant communities will often be essential tothe success of partnership working. Annex 8 lists some of the partnershipsthat will be key to the implementation of this developmentPolicy Promoting developmentThe Mayor will work with strategic partners, including those in thedevelopment industry, to ensure that comprehensive arrangements are in place for the implementation of this plan. In particular, he will:•promote locations for strategic development and seek to bring themforward for development in line with this plan’s policies, especiallythose on transport capacity and phasing•assist in preparing planning frameworks or action plans for strategicareas and where necessary, initiate management bodies (for exampleUrban Regeneration Companies or teams under existing partnerships)todeliver them•work with boroughs, the LDA, and TfL to identify the appropriate useof Compulsory Purchase Order (CPO) powers where this is necessary tosecure development•promote the use of Business Improvement Districts and othermechanisms, such as Urban Regeneration Companies, to generaterevenue funding to provide community facilities and services fordeprived communities for the long term•encourage public/private/community partnerships to manage these Mayor’s approach to delivery of the London Plan will be mainlyproactive. The LDA and boroughs and other key stakeholders should formpartnerships with the Mayor to promote development in key locations,
286Mayor of LondonThe London Plantown centres and Opportunity Areas. Where possible, these partnershipsshould work in an open book approach with the local communities andthose who share the vision of creating lively, vital, economically active,well designed, sustainable, mixed-use private sector should be involved proactively and the Mayorrecognises that a major implementation role of the public sector is tosupport the private investment that helps achieve the objectives of thisplan. The task is firstly to support that investment through the supply ofkey services and infrastructure, secondly to steer appropriate types ofinvestment into areas of need and opportunity and thirdly to use theinvestment itself to support the plan’s plan includes a number of additional requirements for assessments tobe made of the impacts of development proposals, several of whichreflect government guidance or well-established practice. These are listedas Annex 7. The intention is not to over-burden developers, but rather toensure that the impacts of development are understood and appropriatelydealt with. If handled constructively, these should make the developmentprocess clearer and simpler by establishing an overall approach at an earlystage in the development overall approach is to create long-term value through good design, a high quality public realm and environmental sustainability, and to retaina share in long-term growth in value for reinvestment in the for the promotion of development include new BusinessImprovement Districts and Urban Regeneration Companies. In a city as large and complex as London, all these mechanisms have their placeand the Mayor will work with partners to encourage their appropriate use in individual and local circumstances. Annex 9 sets out some available on development proposalsPolicy Priorities in planning obligationsThe Mayor will, and boroughs should, reflect the policies of this plan and include appropriate strategic as well as local needs in their policies for planning obligations. The Mayor wishes to develop with boroughs avoluntary system of pooling for the provision of facilities related toproposed developments. Affordable housing and public transportimprovements should generally be given the highest importance withpriority also given to learning and skills and health facilities and servicesand childcare provisions.
The London PlanMayor of London 287The Mayor when considering planning applications of potential strategicimportance will take into account, among other issues, the content andexistence of planning Planning obligationsBoroughs should set out a clear framework for negotiations on planningobligations in UDPs having regard to central government policy andguidance and local and strategic considerations (see Policy ) to theeffect that:•it will be a material consideration whether a development makesappropriate provision for, or contribution towards requirements that are made necessary by and are related to, the proposed development•negotiations should seek a contribution towards the full cost of allsuch provision that is fairly and reasonably related in scale and in kindtothe proposed development and its impact on the wider area•boroughs should refer to planning obligations that will be sought inthe relevant parts of the UDP (such as transport and housing policies). priorities, such as increasing the supply of affordable housingand funding public transport, rely on a substantial contribution beingmade through the negotiation of planning obligations on a consistentbasis throughout developments have impacts beyond borough boundaries, such asthose involving public transport improvements and new school and healthfacilities. The acute shortage of homes and the constraints on the publictransport system mean that all developments make an incremental impactupon the overall needs of the city. A strategic approach is needed inrespect of the wider impacts of an application, in addition to theassessment of more local needs, in accordance with in accordance withnational guidance. The Mayor wants to reconcile strategic with more localimpacts. There is also need for pooling of contributions in cases wherepartial contributions towards a larger objective may be appropriate: forexample towards secondary schools, open space provision or strategicpublic transport investment.
288Mayor of LondonThe London PlanGeneration and use of resourcesPolicy Generation and use of resourcesThe Mayor will work with partners from all sectors to generate and use resources to implement this plan in the most sustainable and effective Mayor has identified the overall scale of London’s funding government’s policy and funding decisions are pivotal for London tomeet those needs in areas such as transport, housing, neighbourhoodrenewal and the environment and in supporting social services, health,safety, education and skills. Over four million jobs in the rest of the UK2depend on London’s demand for goods and services. London needs ashare of public expenditure over the period of the London Plan thatproperly reflects its needs and its role in the national potential contribution from public sector agencies is spelt out Mayor aims to steer the formidable investment and purchasing powerof the private sector and consumers in line with his priorities, for example,into town centres and into east London. This plan has indications of thelocation, type and quantity of development anticipated. This provides thekind of clear investment framework that the private sector seeks. TheMayor expects that planning benefits will be generated from this hugeincrease in value both through the planning system granting developmentpermissions and by the betterment gained from public expenditure (seealso Policies and ). The Mayor will work with public sectorfunders, such as government departments and the LDA, to use theirresources in ways that stimulate and support effective private sectorinvestment in realising the policies in this London Plan lays heavy emphasis on the sustainable use and re-useof natural resources, including land, water and energy, and uponminimisation of waste of all forms (see Chapter 4, Part A). Time is anotherresource rarely considered in planning documents. However, a compactcity with improved accessibility and a mix of uses will be one in whichpeople and businesses are able to make far better use of the finiteresource of time. For example, the plan lays emphasis upon spatialdevelopment that seeks to reduce the need to travel. Policy Increasing the capacity of LondonThe Mayor will work with all stakeholders to make best use of the hugepotential capacities of Londoners, of communities, of other institutionsand of professional skills. In particular, he will:
The London PlanMayor of London 289•work with partners to help equip Londoners with the skills they needtocompete successfully for London’s jobs•develop a strategic approach to childcare provision•support the development of local community strategies•work with key institutions in London to ensure that their objectivesand programmes are aligned to the policies of this plan•support a centre of excellence in urban regeneration and award annualprizes for planning full realisation of London’s capacity, not least the capacity of itspeople, is key to the success of the London Plan. London’s Learning andSkills Councils and the higher education institutions in London have verysubstantial budgets. The Mayor and the LDA will work closely with theseand other key bodies to address labour supply issues in support of thisplan’s objectives. In particular, the Mayor is determined to create newopportunities for Londoners, many of whom are excluded from the labourmarket because they lack the necessary skills or other constraints toachieve secure access to high quality, well paid jobs (see Chapter 3, PartsA and B).’s communities need the capacity to have a greater say in thefuture of their areas and to benefit from full participation in communitylife (see Chapter 3, Part A). The Mayor will support the development ofCommunity Strategies to this end and would welcome a neighbourhoodresponse to the strategic goals of this plan. The Mayor’s AnnualMonitoring Report (see Policy ) will seek to reflect local communityresponses to the implementation of this London Mayor supports the government’s desire to increase the capacity ofthe planning system. Mayor is looking for excellence in the delivery of this plan. He wantstosee the fullest co-ordination of the work of professional sectors so thatthe spatial integration strategy at the heart of the plan is fulfilled. TheMayor will support the Centre of Excellence in Urban Regeneration,proposed by the Urban Task Force and now being set up by the LDA. TheMayor, in association with other partners, has instituted the award ofannual prizes for planning achievement with categories that include bestcommunity initiative and best professional practice.
290Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPhasing and co-ordination of developmentPolicy Phasing of development and transport provisionThe Mayor will keep the supply of land, premises and transport underregular review to ensure that development proceeds in a well-phased andco-ordinated fashion. Boroughs should seek to manage development sothat it is phased around the broad indicative targets in Table implementation of this plan requires phasing to achieve a consistentsupply of infrastructure, land, premises and labour throughout the planperiod. Bunching of development would put a strain on infrastructure andcould create unhelpful competition for resources such as transport of lag in supply will push up prices and dent confidence and should be a regular and sufficient supply of land and premises. Theresearch undertaken for this plan suggests that, as a broad rule, there issufficient land to accommodate projected growth. Some OpportunityAreas, especially around the Central Activities Zone, are already beingdeveloped to help meet the targets set out in this plan. Several of theseare located at major rail termini, which already have high levels ofaccessibility, although capacity also needs to be considered. Others,especially some of the Opportunity Areas in the Thames Gateway, willrequire land assembly, transport and/or other infrastructure before theyare available for development. The Mayor will work closely with the LDA,boroughs, private sector and other bodies, such as the Thames GatewayStrategic Partnership, to secure the phased supply of key in east London and in the Thames Gateway area is thehighest priority, but its scale and complexity are such that it will be phasedthroughout the period of this plan and beyond. Chapter 5 provides policydirections for each of the main areas of development. These will be carriedforward in the Sub-Regional Development shows an indicative outline of how growth in jobs, homes and population should be phased over the first three five-year periods of this plan.
The London PlanMayor of London 291table average annual phasing of growth in jobs and homesSub-RegionNew jobsNew homesPhasing of development (jobs/homes)Average Average Period 2002–06Period 2007–11Periodper year per year – average – average 2012–16to2016to 2016each yeareach yearaverage each yearCentral15,9007,10015,000 jobs16,200 jobs16,200 jobs8,100 homes6,700 homes6,600 homesEast16,6006,90019,000 jobs16,200 jobs14,600 jobs8,300 homes6,400 homes6,100 homesWest5,7003,0005,800 jobs6,200 jobs5,400 jobs3,600 homes2,800 homes2,600 homesNorth1,7003,1001,600 jobs2,000 jobs1,800 jobs3,100 homes3,100 homes3,200 homesSouth2,4002,8002,600 jobs2,600 jobs2,000 jobs3,200 homes2,700 homes2,600 homesTotal for 42,40023,00044,000 jobs40,000 jobs 43,200 jobsLondon26,300 homes21,700 homes21,100 homessourceLondon’s Housing Capacity, GLA, 2000. The table shows the housing capacity estimatesover the last three phases of the study the annual average figures differ from those intable , which are based on four and rows may not total exactly because of Housing Capacity Study provides an indication of the phasing ofdevelopment up to 2016. Not surprisingly, there is more housing capacityidentified in the earlier phases. There will be an increasing reliance onwindfall sites in the later phases, which is a normal and realistic approachin a long-range plan. The Housing Capacity Study will be updated toinform an early review of this plan (see Chapter 3, Part A). developments will depend in part upon the provision of suitablepublic transport or in some cases road infrastructure. Most of the majornew infrastructure schemes will not be operational until after the first fiveyears of this role of bus services and of cars is important in ensuring continuingtransport capacity because they are much more flexible than largeinfrastructure projects such as fixed rail. TfL’s focus for the first part of its4business planperiod is the continued operation, maintenance andimprovement of its core network, including bringing its assets to a stateof good repair, tackling road traffic congestion through the centralLondon congestion charging scheme and complementary measures, andincreasing capacity on the buses and on the DLR network. The Mayor’s
292Mayor of LondonThe London Plancurrent programme of improvement in bus services is particularly important in improving public transport accessibility in the first few yearsof the plan before the major rail and transit schemes are shows how the capacity of the public transport system isexpected to increase in periods up to 2006, to 2011, to 2016 and post2016. It includes local schemes in the form of bus services; Underground;bus and tram transit schemes; DLR extensions; heavy rail and the newcapacity created by completion of major new infrastructure schemes. Indrawing up the proposals for transport schemes, TfL has had regard toresource availability and has identified the associated fundingrequirements. In the shorter term, the figures for bus, Underground, DLR, and transit capacity increases reflect priorities identified through TfL business planning process, which currently covers the period up to2009/10. There is a greater degree of certainty in the figures in theearlier years. Figures for later periods are inevitably more indicative andreflect an assessment of resources required for London in the longer sources of funding should also be explored to meet the requirementsof a growing confirms that much of the overall increase in capacity shouldoccur in the period after 2011 when several larger schemes will be due forcompletion. Nevertheless, there will be a 14 per cent increase in overallcapacity in the period 2001- 2011. This capacity will be available to meetthe projected increases in jobs and population over this period that areindicated in Table . Capacity will increase in all sub-regions andincreases will occur in bus, Underground, rail, DLR and transit 2001 and 2011, capacity on the Underground will increase million passenger kilometres (measured by Planning GuidelineCapacity, PGC) over all sub-regions. Bus capacity will increase by PGC kms over all sub-regions. National Rail capacity will increaseby million PGC kms over all regions. Extensions to DLR will serve newdestinations and increase capacity in east London. There are a variety ofother smaller schemes which increase capacity elsewhere in of CTRL will add million PGC kms, mainly in east in Chapter 3, Part C gives further information on the cost andstatus of each main category of improvement in public transport capacityand the lead agency responsible for has undertaken a more detailed strategic analysis of the relationshipbetween increased transport capacity and the increased demand5generated by this jobs and population growth. This analysis suggests that provided current transport plans are implemented, there should besufficient capacity to meet anticipated demand, assisted by the spatial
The London PlanMayor of London 293policies to reduce the need to travel and to encourage walking andcycling trips. However, impacts of development proposals will clearly needtobe examined on a case by case basis. This analysis will be updated on aregular basis and included in the Annual Monitoring Report. As part ofthe ‘plan, monitor and manage’ approach, variation in the supply of anddemand for public transport capacity will be monitored and, whereappropriate, adjustments will be made to transport and developmentphasing through the mechanisms of the Transport Strategy review, theSub-Regional Development Frameworks, future TfL business plans, thefirst review of the London Plan and major planning is a good correlation between increases in public transport capacityshown in Table and the increases in employment and homes shownfor each sub-region in Table . The highest increases in publictransport capacity will occur in East and Central London, which will havethe highest employment and housing increases, followed by West London,which will have rather higher increases than North and South London.
294Mayor of LondonThe London Plantable of public transport capacity increases Indicative Public Transport Capacity Provision (absolute change in each 5 year period).Planning Guideline Capacity Km's (Millions) – within Greater London – Morning peakYearModeSub RegionTotalNorthEast SouthWestCentral2001 London (base ) 1& London of RailLondon - London 1& London of RailLondon - London 1& London of RailLondon
The London PlanMayor of London 295YearModeSub RegionTotalNorthEast SouthWestCentral2012 - London London of RailLondon London London of RailLondon increase capacity on London Underground, Rest of National Rail and London Buses is netof individual schemes on for the London area for the AM peak period (7am-10am)Reductions on LUL in 2006 are due to reductions in scheduled trains in the AM peak toimprove reliability on Piccadilly and District LinesReliability improvements are not included in these calculations, but are expected to addtoeffective capacity growthTotals may not exactly match due to roundingsourceTransport for London September 20033The main stakeholders and their the GLA group, the principal London stakeholders are the Londonboroughs, central government and public sector agencies, the privatesector, the voluntary and community sectors and individual shows some of the main stakeholders and indicates the key powers and resources they will bring to the implementation process. Theseare further discussed below.
296Mayor of LondonThe London are many other key institutions in London. Some, including thebusiness organisations (such as London First, CBI and the LondonChamber of Commerce and Industry) already have a Londonwide operate on a national or local basis but will also have a vital role in London’s future. As the leader of the London community, the Mayorwill work with all these institutions to ensure that their objectives,resources and programmes are stakeholderssourceGLAPolicy Working with stakeholdersThe Mayor will take a consultative approach to working with stakeholdersand will:•work with boroughs and sub-regional partnerships to prepare anddeliver sub-regional development frameworks•work with boroughs and Local Strategic Partnerships to ensure thatlocal and community plans, policies and actions conform to strategicpriorities•work with boroughs on the preparation of planning frameworks forstrategic areas
The London PlanMayor of London 297•establish strategic technical assistance to boroughs on matters such asvaluation advice on Section 106 agreements and will support the casefor greater resources for pro-active planning by boroughs•establish close working relationships with the private sector where it isable and willing to deliver this plan’s priorities (see also Policy )•work with the EU to secure a higher profile for urban affairs and morefunding to promote sustainable urban development•work with the Housing Corporation to align their policies with thisplan, in particular, their subsidies for affordable housing•work with the government, the SRA and TfL on transport integrationand to align strategic priorities•work with the LDA, LSCs and higher education sector to deliver theskilled workforce needed by London’s employers and to help tackleunemployment and disadvantage, especially in Areas for Regeneration•work with the NHS and Strategic Health Authorities to identify andmeet the needs for new health facilities and to improve the health ofLondoners•work with the voluntary and community sectors both locally and at thesub-regional level to develop their role in the delivery of skills, trainingand services and community empowerment•work with the Environment Agency, water companies and others topromote sustainable development•work as appropriate with other has identified in its business plan the resources needed to deliver theTransport Strategy. Increased investment in transport is particularlyimportant for the success of this plan. The Minister for Transport and theMayor have established regular meetings to examine transport in Londonand prioritise investment. In addition to resources that may be generatedthrough planning obligations, the Mayor will continue to argue for anddiscuss with the government, additional and innovative ways of financingnew transport projects. LDA’s Corporate Planprovides more operational detail on itspriorities and programmes. The LDA’s land and property investmentprogramme is particularly focused on the Thames Gateway in the RoyalDocks, Dagenham and Woolwich. A series of priority areas for investmenthas been identified. It will be kept under review and does not excludeintervention in other areas, subject to the scale of potential economicimpact and resources available. Initial priority areas for investment are:•Barking/Dagenham•Wembley/Park Royal•City fringe
298Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•London south central•Upper Lee Valley•Stratford/Lower Lea/Royal boroughs, as local planning authorities, have a prime role indelivering the London Plan. They have two major responsibilities. First,they are responsible for the delivery of a range of services and strategiesthat are vital to the achievement of economic, social, transport andenvironmental policy. These include housing, education, social andcommunity, environmental and local transport , the boroughs will implement this plan through their UDPs,which must be in general conformity with it, through the developmentcontrol function and as key partners in sub-regional partnerships, whichoffer the vehicle to link the strategic and the local level. The Mayor willwork in partnership with boroughs in reviewing their UDPs and indeveloping sub-regional development frameworks and planningframeworks for key sites. The Mayor is aware of the demands the LondonPlan will make upon borough planning resources. He supports the case for greater resources for local planning Mayor meets regularly with the Chair of the Association of LondonGovernment (ALG). The GLA has a borough liaison programme in whichhigh level meetings take place with every borough on an individual addition, there are regular meetings with the Association of LondonBorough Planning Officers (ALBPO). government is a key partner both at national and London level. Itspolicy and funding decisions are pivotal in areas such as transport,housing, employment, neighbourhood renewal and the environment, andin supporting social, health, safety, educational and skills agendas. Thegovernment also sets overarching planning policy. The London Plan hastaken account of government regional spatial policy. Its successfulimplementation will make a substantial contribution to the achievementof government policies, for example on urban renaissance and sustainable Mayor meets regularly with the Minister for London and has meetingswith ministers from the Office of the Deputy Prime Minister and otherrelevant public departments. There are regular meetings with theGovernment Office for London at officer Mayor will continue to collaborate with neighbouring regions, notablythrough the Inter-Regional Forum. This helps to facilitate the best use of
The London PlanMayor of London 299joint resources, for example through the co-ordination of strategictransport infrastructure (see Chapter 1 and Chapter 3, Part C, -19). The Inter-Regional Forum provides a regular mechanism forthe co-ordination of policy with the South East and East of EnglandRegional Assemblies and a joint programme of planning studies isemerging. There have also been discussions with the Core Cities groupwith a view to carrying out joint research on the needs of UK’s cities. In addition, the Mayor is a member of the government’s Thames GatewayStrategic Partnership and established with the Minister for London aLondon Thames Gateway Partnership Board to strengthen deliveryarrangements in the London part of the Thames Gateway. Lastly, there are mechanisms emerging to support work on the London-Stansted-Cambridge growth single regional housing pot includes substantial funding for inestmentin new supply of affordable housing. Effective use of this funding is vitaltoachieve the Mayor’s priority of securing higher levels of affordablehousing (see Chapter 3A). The Mayor will work with the London Housingboard to ensure that the London Housing strategy aligns with the LondonPlan and that funding from the single regional housing pot is used tomaximise the number of affordable homes, appropriate to meetingidentified housing need, being delivered through the planning new Strategic Health Authorities, together with Primary Care Trustsand NHS Trusts have primary responsibility for achieving the serviceimprovement and modernisation contained in the NHS Plan and toimprove the health of Londoners. Policies in this plan support the NHS inmeeting these objectives, and particularly in meeting the spatial needs fornew NHS facilities. The Mayor will work with NHS organisations and otherpartners, especially through the London Health Commission, to promotehealth improvement in addition to the LDA’s regeneration budgets, the Government Office forLondon administers the Neighbourhood Renewal Fund for the 20 Londonboroughs currently eligible, as well as the Regional Selective Assistanceand Enterprise Grants. These streams of economic and social regenerationfunding should also be used to support this plan’s Strategic Rail Authority should lead a renaissance in the level of railfunding and quality of services serving London and the wider metropolitanregion. TfL and SRA have established jointly a London Programme Officetoco-ordinate national rail improvements across London.
300Mayor of LondonThe London Environment Agency is responsible for a very wide range of servicesand regulation in key areas such as flood prevention and waste are frequent meetings with the agency at officer private sector will provide much of the impetus needed to implementthis plan. Many of the resources will come from private sector investmentin homes, offices, shops and leisure facilities. The scale of privateinvestments in London is enormous, reflecting confidence in the city’sfuture. This plan is realistic in working with the grain of investment anddevelopment demand (see Chapter 1). The private sector should beappropriately engaged at an early stage in work that will structureinvestment, such as Sub-Regional Development Frameworks and planning Mayor meets with business representatives regularly at the LondonBusiness Board, in addition to a series of meetings with individualorganisations. Most discussions with private developers who are seekingtoimplement large-scale schemes in London are handled by the Mayor’sPlanning Decisions voluntary and community sectors have a major role to play, especiallyin tackling social inclusion and supporting deprived communities. Theywill also be key partners at the sub-regional level. The sectors have agrowing role in the delivery of skills and training and services at the locallevel in a way that empowers the local community. The Mayor will workwith the sectors to expand this role and has signed a compact with themtothis end. There are regular meetings at mayoral and officer level with arange of community groups, including the Civic Forum and major Londonstakeholder comprise the largest and in many ways the most importantgroup of stakeholders. They need to be aware of this plan and to own itspriorities. The Mayor will use his Annual Monitoring Report (see ) to report on progress. The Mayor will seek a positive approach tocommunity engagement generally and will work with local communities andboroughs to promote effective means of public participation in planning.
The London PlanMayor of London 3014Strategies that will contribute to implementationPolicy Complementary strategiesThe Mayor will work with other stakeholders to ensure that, whereverappropriate, other relevant policy documents are compatible with theLondon a statutory spatial development strategy this plan will have a powerfulinfluence over a range of other strategies and policy tools, which willcontribute towards its of the key strategies and policy vehicles are categorised andidentified statutory statutory basis of planning in London is formed by:•the London Plan as the Spatial Development Strategy for Greater London•UDPs, which are statutory documents and will be of primaryimportance in taking forward the London Plan policy at local level andin particular, in land use policy. Where a policy in this plan relies onUDPs for some or all of its implementation, this is clearly stated. Thegovernment is proposing changes in the development plan system thatwould replace UDPs with Local Development Documents. Such achange would not adversely affect the delivery of the London Plan:indeed its potential for flexibility would enhance delivery.•Planning Policy Guidance, which provides a national framework andwhich this plan follows, develops and interprets at a London are strategies at national and international level that the Mayor willwork within and seek to influence so that they support this plan’sstrategies. These include:7•the Sustainable Communities programme, which sets out manypolicies, tools and resources for strategic planning and in particularcontains policy on the Thames Gateway and the London-Stansted-Cambridge corridor•other government policies, such as the ten-year Transport Plan. These are referred to in this plan where especially significant•national and regional policy for key sectors, such as the NHS Plan•European policy: the plan follows the policy directions of the EuropeanSpatial Development Strategy•inter-regional strategies: the Mayor will participate in the development of the Regional Spatial Strategies for the East and South East regions
302Mayor of LondonThe London Planthrough the Inter-Regional Forum as a consultee and will work with theregional bodies to ensure maximum compatibility across the three -regional -Regional Development Frameworks will have a major role in helpingtoimplement this plan by supplementing policy and aiding deliverybetween the strategic and the local dimensions (see Policy ).Thematic Mayor has responsibility for the production of a number of strategiesand will use these to develop and implement the policies in this plan. TheGLA group has a co-ordination mechanism to ensure consistency betweenits various strategies. Other important strategies are produced by otherbodies. Some of the most significant thematic strategies are listed below,some of which are the responsibility of the Mayor and GLA group. in London•Community Strategies are the main mechanism for ensuring the co-ordination of local services and local plans. They should be producedwithin the spatial framework of the London Plan (see Policy ).•The London Housing Board produces the London Housing strategy;the boroughs produce local housing strategies, and groups ofboroughs are developing sub-regional housing statements andstrategies.•Local Delivery Plans are developed by Primary Care Trusts and agreedwith Strategic Health Authorities and their spatial dimensions shouldbe aligned with this plan (Policy ).•Education Strategies are produced at a regional level by the HigherEducation Funding Council and locally by the boroughs and theirspatial dimensions should be aligned with this plan (Policy -22).•Access Statements should accompany planning applications (Policy ). in London•Many boroughs produce Neighbourhood Renewal Strategies, linked togovernment funding programmes and focused on the Areas forRegeneration.
The London PlanMayor of London 303•The Learning and Skills Councils (LSCs) produce LSC strategies thatwill be central to the development of skills in the workforce ().•The LDA’s Framework for Regional Employment and Skills Action willbe delivered through the London Skills Commission (Policy ).•An Innovation and Knowledge Transfer Strategy is produced by the London•The Mayor’s Transport Strategy sets out a ten-year transport plan,which will be updated to reflect this plan (see Chapter 3, Part C). Thisis prepared in the context of the government’s ten-year Transport Plan.•The government also intends to finalise an Airports Strategy, whoseoutcomes will be reflected in the first review of this plan (Policy ).•The Strategic Rail Authority has produced its annual Strategic Plan andis also producing a Freight Strategy (Policies ).•Transport Local Implementation Plans are produced by boroughs andwill contain proposals to implement the Transport Strategy at the locallevel and parking and enforcement plans that will operate within theparking policies of this plan (Policies ). •Transport Assessments and Travel Plans will be required to support newdevelopment and employers and others may produce Travel Plans on a voluntary London•The Mayor is producing a Culture Strategy and its spatial policies arereflected in this plan (Policy ).•The Mayor has produced a tourism strategy and boroughs will producelocal tourism strategies and identify Tourism Action Zones (Policy ).•Boroughs produce open space strategies. The Mayor has published aBest Practice Guide to assist and ensure these strategies develop thepolicies in this plan (Policy ).
304Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•The London Tree and Woodland Framework is being produced by theMayor with the Forestry Commission and other ’s Mayor produces a range of strategies, whose key spatial policies arereflected in this plan:•The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy published in 2003(Policy -3)•The Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy published in 2002 (Policy )•The Mayor’s London Ambient Noise Strategy published in 2004 (Policy )•The Mayor’s Biodiversity Strategy published in 2002 (Policy );boroughs produce biodiversity action plans that should reflect this strategy.•The Mayor’s Energy Strategy published in 2004 (Policies ).Designs on London•Boroughs produce Conservation Area Management Plans and localurban design policies.•The Mayor will work with partners to produce View Management Plans(Policy ).Water•Catchment Flood Management Plans are produced by the Environment Agency.•Thames Policy Area Appraisals will be produced by boroughs (Policy ).Spatial policies•Boroughs produce town centre strategies that should follow thestrategic policies of this plan (Policies ).•Boroughs should work with the Mayor and other partners to produceplanning Frameworks for Opportunity Areas (Policy ) and Areas forIntensification (Policy ). They will also make use of planning briefsin areas of potential change.
The London PlanMayor of London 305•Neighbourhood plans may be produced where appropriate with the fullengagement of the local community (Policy ).•The Mayor intends to put into practice a toolkit on sustainable suburbs(Policy ).Supporting Mayor will produce Supplementary Planning Guidance whereappropriate to elaborate the policies in this plan. A list of SupplementaryPlanning Guidances is included in Annex requirements 6(3) of the Town and Country Planning (London SpatialDevelopment Strategy) Regulations 2000 (‘the 2000 Regulations’)requires the London Plan to contain a statement, within the reasonedjustification, of the regard the Mayor has had to matters specified insections 41 and 342(1)(a) of the GLA Act 1999 and Regulation 6(1) ofthe 2000 41 refers to the requirement for the Mayor to have regard to theprincipal purposes of the Authority (as set out in section 30 of the GLAAct) in promoting economic development and wealth creation, socialdevelopment and the improvement of the environment in GreaterLondon. These form the basis of the Mayor’s Vision as set out in theMayor’s introduction and the Objectives in the Introduction. They thenstructure the whole document. Section 41 then refers to the need toinclude policies that are calculated to promote the health of persons inGreater London and that contribute to the achievement of sustainabledevelopment in the United Kingdom. Health issues are consideredspecifically in Chapter 3, Part A and a detailed review of the policieswhich are particularly relevant to health issues are set out in Annex 3. A Health Impact Assessment has also been carried out. Similarly, variousSustainability Assessments have been carried out at each stage of thepreparation of the plan and Policy , together with paragraphs , make clear that the promotion of sustainability runs throughout allthe policies in the 41 also refers to the requirement to have regard to consistencywith national policies and international obligations – which is covered as a matter of fact and by extensive referencing and footnotes, as well asconsultations with and representations from the Government Office forLondon. As to the other requirements of Section 41, consistency withother statutory strategies is covered in the Preamble and the relevantChapters, particularly Chapter 6, and cross references; resources available
306Mayor of LondonThe London Planfor implementation are covered in Chapter 6 and in Chapter 3, Parts Aand C; and encouraging the use of the River Thames in Chapter 4, Part Cin 33 of the Act requires the Mayor to have regard to the principleof equality for all people and Section 404 is more specific in regard toequality of opportunity, the elimination of unlawful discrimination and thepromotion of good relations. This also is a theme which runs through theMayor’s Vision, the objectives, the various Chapters, especially Part A ofChapter 3, and is detailed in Annex Section 342 (1) (a) of the Act, the Mayor must have regard to anyregional planning guidance that affects London or adjoining regions. Thisis done principally in Chapter 1 ‘Positioning London’, but there are extensive references and footnotes throughout and an overall statementon this issue in the , the Mayor must have regard to four specific matters set out inRegulation 6(1) of the 2000 Regulations, namely, the recovery anddisposal of waste, the prevention of major accidents and limiting theirconsequences, the need to maintain appropriate distances betweencertain types of development and the control of major-accident hazardsinvolving dangerous substances. The Mayor has given carefulconsideration to these matters and to the role which this spatial plan canproperly play in addressing the issues they raise. In the Mayor's view, thepolicies contained throughout the plan, when read as a whole, butparticularly Chapters 2 and 4, seek to address Regulation 6(1) matters inan appropriate way. In taking this view, he has had regard to the powersand responsibilities of other statutory and non-statutory bodies.
The London PlanMayor of London 3076Bmonitoring and review of this planPolicy Monitoring and reviewBoroughs should update their UDPs following the adoption of the LondonPlan so as to be in general conformity with it. The Mayor will monitorchange and prepare a formal review of this plan in the next Mayoral Measuring progressThe Mayor will publish an Annual Monitoring Report that measuresprogress on the London Plan against a set of specific targets. He willinvolve key stakeholders in this review process and consider any policyadjustments needed to keep the plan on track. Boroughs should includeborough-wide targets that reflect the plan’s strategic targets at a locallevel in their Community Strategies and Mayor’s vision, objectives and policies set out in this plan are basedon strong evidence and it seems unlikely that the context in which theyhave been made will alter significantly in the near future. Even in theimprobable event that economic or population growth were to fall belowthe levels envisaged, there would still be a need to tackle the backlog inthe supply of housing, business premises, public transport and educationand health Mayor’s policies are strategic in nature and capable of interpretationin their detailed implementation to suit particular should update their UDPs following adoption of the London Plan. This will give an opportunity for detailed specification of policy in a more local number of key performance measures are identified in Table . Theseare both quantifiable and central to the achievement of the objectives setout in the Introduction. They have been selected because together theymeasure progress across all six objectives. Many other policies in this plan8will also be monitored, but the Mayor agrees with government advicethat a core set of measures can give an overall indication of howeffectively the central strategy is being plan as a whole, and the targets in Table in particular, will bemonitored in an Annual Monitoring Report that will analyse the state ofstrategic planning in London and set priorities for the coming year. Thereport will be made public and discussed with stakeholders. The resultscould lead to changes in the way the plan is being implemented if this isnecessary. For example, there may be a need to adjust phasing of someelements as a result of changing market conditions or levels of governmentfunding. It can be used as a key input into future Supplementary Planning
308Mayor of LondonThe London PlanGuidance, as material for the consideration of Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks, Community Strategies and UDPs and as inputs to the firstreview of the London Plan and of other mayoral Annual Monitoring Report will include changes in contextual, outputand process indicators and will report on the government’s Core NationalIndicators. A draft framework of the report is set out below in . This will be developed in consultation with stakeholders. Thereport will draw upon indicators from a range of sources, such as theMayor’s State of the Environment Report and the SustainableDevelopment Indicators put forward by the London SustainableDevelopment Commission. The report will also address the indicatorsidentified for the sustainability appraisal Mayor will establish mechanisms to support the Annual MonitoringReport. He will set up a regional planning monitoring group in order toco-ordinate the work of all the agencies dealing with planning data. Hewill develop regional databases and information systems, such as theLondon Development Database (LDD). An annual report monitoringgroup will be established in early 2004 to assist in the preparation of thefirst Annual Report to be published in December 2004 and annuallythereafter covering the previous financial year. This group will includerepresentatives from GOL, LDA, TfL, ALG and representatives of theprivate, voluntary and community, education and black and minorityethnic Mayor also wants to hear Londoners’ views on the issues and will create a network that can be used to gather stakeholder opinion and Plan Performance measures will be used to monitor the key elements of each of thesix objectives set out in the Introduction. In each case, an indicator ofperformance is listed and a specific, measurable target is identified. Themeasures follow the government’s Good Practice Guide but also reflectthe specific circumstances of London. The information on the matters tobe moitored is either available or can be made available. The AnnualMonitoring Report will also cover contextual indicators which are outsidethe direct influence of the London Plan but which will impact on theimplementation of its policies and monitoring of the government’s CoreNational Indicators. The Annual Monitoring Report will also give anupdate on progress with other London Plan related outputs, such asSupplementary Planning Guidance and Sub-Regional DevelopmentFrameworks.
The London PlanMayor of London 309table Plan Performance Indicatorsobjective 1to accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries withoutencroaching on open spaces (see Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Part Dand Chapter 4, Part B).Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refIncreasing the proportion of development 1A minimum five per cent place on previously developed landimprovement over each five-year the density of residential 2Over 95 per cent of development comply with the housing density and SRQ matrix (Table ).Protection of open space3No net loss of open space -10designated for protection in UDPs due to new 2to make London a better city for people to live in (see Chapter 3, Part A).Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refAn increased supply of new homes4Completion of at least 23,000 new a year between 2004–2016. to be reviewed by 2006. (The Annual Monitoring Report will also monitor individual borough targets as set out in Table .)An increased supply of affordable homes5Completion of 50 per cent of new -9homes as affordable homes each year between 2004–2016. (The Annual Monitoring Report will also monitor individual borough percentage targets set out within framework of Policy ).
310Mayor of LondonThe London Planobjective 3to make London a more prosperous city (see Chapter 2 andChapter 3, Part B and Chapter 5)Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refIncreasing sustainability and social 6Net increase in the proportion of by increasing the proportion London residents working in jobs of London residents working in Londonin London over the plan that there is sufficient 7Stock of office planning capacity in the to be at least three times the averageoffice marketrate of starts over the previous three of economic and 8Development in Opportunity Areas growth to follow the and Areas for Intensification for each sub-regional allocations sub-region measured against theChapter 5and fulfil the priority to east Londonindicative figures in this 4to promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation anddiscrimination (see Chapter 3, Parts A and B).Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refIncreased employment opportunities 9Age specific unemployment rates those suffering from disadvantage black and minority ethnic groups to bein the employment marketno higher than for the white population by 2016, 50 per cent reduction of the difference by employment opportunities 10Percentage of lone parents those suffering from disadvantage on income support to be no higher thanin the employment marketthe UK average by 2016, 50 per cent reduction of the difference by performance against 11Improvements in performance against Renewal floor all agreed floor as a co-ordinated approach totackling deprivation
The London PlanMayor of London 311objective 5to improve London’s accessibility (see Chapter 2, Chapter 3,PartC and Chapter 4, Part B).Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refAchieve a reduced reliance on the 12Use of public transport per head car and a more sustainable grows faster than use of the private -3modal split for journeyscar per 2001-2011, 15 per cent reduction traffic in the congestion charging zone, zero traffic growth in inner London, and traffic growth in outer London reduced tono more than 5 per five per cent increase in passengers -14and freight transported on the Blue Ribbon Network from in public transport capacity1550 per cent increase in public transport Chapter 3Ccapacity between 2001 – 2021, with interim increases to reflect Table assessment of the adequacy Chapter 3Cof transport capacity to support Chapter 5development in opportunity and intensification in the number of jobs 17GLA and TfL will investigate the 3C. 21located in areas with high PTAL values practicality of monitoring growth of jobs in high PTAL areas compared to low PTAL areas by the time of publication of the first Annual Monitoring Report.
312Mayor of LondonThe London Planobjective 6to make London a more attractive, well-designed and greencity (see Chapter 3, Part D and Chapter 4, Parts A, B and C).Performance measureNoTargetPolicy refProtection of biodiversity habitat18No net loss of designated Sites of for Nature Conservation over the plan in household waste 19At least 25 per cent by or compostedAt least 30 per cent by least 33 per cent by of quantified requirement waste treatment facilities (once established in SRDFs).Increased regional self-suficiency2175% (16 million tonnes) of London’ wastewaste treated or desposed of withinLondon by 2010Reduce carbon dioxide emissions22Reduce emissions to 23 per cent below levels by in energy generated from 23Production of 945GWh of energy sourcesrenewable sources by 2010 including at six large wind turbines. (See Mayor’s Energy Strategy GWh = Gigawatt hours)Ensure a sustainable approach 24No net loss of functional flood and improving London 25Reduction in the proportion of -12heritage and public realmbuildings at risk as a percentage of the total number of listed buildings in of Annual Monitoring addition to the indicators on Table , the Annual Monitoring Reportwill also include monitoring on the government’s Core National Indicatorsand a range of contextual indicators which this plan influences but doesnot directly control. Contextual indicators•population change - broken down by sub-region, borough, and agebrackets, ethnic mix, gender•household change - broken down by sub-region, borough•average house price trends by type of dwelling, sub-region and borough•migration trends between London and surrounding regions•commuting trends into and within London
The London PlanMayor of London 313•new open spaces as identified in borough open space strategies•health evidence, life expectancy, infant mortality rates, illness rates,especially in Regeneration Areas•age, gender, disability and race specific unemployment rates in London to be no higher than the UK average by 2016 especially in Regeneration areas•number of workers below the minimum wage•economic performance by sector and area•learning performance as measured, for example, by NVQ levels•air and water quality and energy sources, levels of carbon emissionsfrom State of Environment report•number of tourists and their levels of spend•demand for and supply of town centre premises•employment levels in town centres•office floorspace availability and price in the main market areas•industrial and office demand and supply relationships in the mainmarket areas•household, commercial and industrial waste arisings, levels of importand export of waste, distribution between means of disposal and levelsof recycling•measurement of GVA growth and overall employment levels in Annual Monitoring Report will also report on progress with theactions that the plan sets out. These process indicators are set out Indicators:•Progress on development plans in London, number that are in generalconformity with the London Plan and numbers with full SustainabilityAppraisal and up-to-date capacity studies.•Numbers of boroughs producing open space strategies.•Production of Sub-Regional Development Frameworks, SupplementaryPlanning Guidance, Best Practice Guidance and planning frameworksfor Opportunity Areas and Areas for Intensification.•Progress on the programme of improving 100 Public Spaces in Annual Monitoring Report will cover the following themes:1Changes in London’s circumstances2Performance against the key indicators in Table on a wider range of contextual indicators 4Performance against the government’s Core National Indicators5Performance against indicators of sustainability appraisal objectives
314Mayor of LondonThe London Plan6Progress on Sub-Regional Development Frameworks7Progress on Supplementary Planning Guidance and Mayoralstrategies8Delivery of increased transport capacity and progress on majortransport projects, in the context of transport demand trends 9Progress on major developments10Summary of Mayoral planning activity including number of referredplanning applications and appearances at public inquiries11Progress on UDP’s conformity with the London Plan12Report on the Mayor’s Annual Planning Awards13Update on inter-regional liaison14Setting priorities for the coming year and identifying possible areas of London Plan policy to be reviewed in the next London Plan review.
The London PlanMayor of London 3156Clooking to the part briefly sets out some of the longer term issues affecting thisplan including the next plan period (London after 2020), and the likelyprocess and timetable for review of this after of the major decisions that will affect London in the decadesbeyond 2020 need to be taken during the timespan of this plan. This reflects, for example, the fact that major new transport infrastructureschemes take many years from conception to there is less certainty about the longer term, the changesdiscussed above seem likely to continue and to be mutually will continue to stimulate growth in global cities that willattract high levels of investment, the leading edge of technologicalinnovation and in-migration of people attracted by growth and quality oflife. The imperative of sustainable development will grow ever stronger asproblems such as climate change become more inescapable. The best useof the land and infrastructure that already exists in major cities will be theobvious policy will remain significant continuing potential to absorb growth in asustainable manner in the decade after 2020. For example, the ThamesGateway’s complete regeneration will take longer than two 2020, the infrastructure and fabric of several suburban areas willbe in increasing need of renovation and thereby create opportunities forsensitive intensification. In a city as vast and old as London there willalways be potential for renovation and change that cumulatively will makea big contribution to accommodating future infrastructure decisions will be taken in coming years on, forexample, increased airport and port capacity, the orbital road systemaround London and lower Thames crossings. These should promote thespatial priorities of this plan and especially the regeneration of theThames Gateway. This will also inevitably be re-inforced by the growingstrength of the linkages between London and mainland Europe that will,over a period of decades, underpin both London’s global and European role, provide a major counter-balance to the growth drivers in the westand result in a more balanced and cohesive will be continuing need to replace infrastructure that dates fromLondon’s expansion in the Victorian period. This plan envisages asubstantial programme of public transport infrastructure improvementsduring the plan period. However, in a growing city further improvementswill need to be planned for implementation after 2020. Before the first
316Mayor of LondonThe London Planreview of the London Plan, the Mayor will consider what new proposalsmay be needed, including schemes to service metropolitan and othertown centres whose role will continue to Mayor will draw upon expert advice to consider policy issues beyondthe timescale of the current plan. He will consider setting up a long termstrategy study group to consider these issues, such a group would includesome participants from the Examination in review of or alteration to the London London Plan will be reviewed in the next Mayoral term. That reviewshould reflect upon the impacts of change identified in the AnnualMonitoring Reports and take on board progress made in more detailedspecification of phasing and implementation through the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks. It may lead to proposed alterations to thisplan. It will need to address issues beyond 2020 mentioned above. It ismost likely that it will focus on revision to specific parts of this plan ratherthan on the whole indicative programme for the first review or alteration is:•completion of draft Sub-Regional Development Frameworks by end 2004•completion of the new Housing Capacity Study by end 2004•consultation on alteration to waste planning policies during 2004,publication by mid 2005•consultation on first review early 2005•draftplan by late 2005•EiP in mid 2006•publication in early for the first review or alteration may include:•government decisions on the scale and pace of development in theThames Gateway•any further policy content arising from the Sub-Regional DevelopmentFramework process•planning strategies and proposals to support the 2012 Olympic Games bid•government decisions on new runway capacity for airports in Londonand the south-east•implications for the town centre network and policy of retail need and capacity assessments•results of the new housing capacity study and implications for housingprovision target figures
The London PlanMayor of London 317•policy impacts of the Regional Spatial Strategies to be produced for the South East and East of England regions•policy impacts of Supplementary Planning Guidances needing tobe incorporated into the plan•new and revised Mayoral strategies•outcomes of work on climate change•any policy implications of emerging census data•the potential of Business Planning Zones•further proposals to increase public transport surprisingly the preparation of this plan has suggested a number of areas – legislative, fiscal and financial – where in the Mayor’s opinion,change is needed. The key changes, which the Mayor will discuss furtherwith the government as part of the lead into the first review of oralteration to this plan include:•an increase in London’s resources. This plan sets out London’s needsfor additional resources after decades of under-investment ininfrastructure•areview of arrangements for allocating and co-ordinating strategic funds•legislative changes to meet higher targets for municipal waste recycling and composting, to achieve 50 per cent by 2010 and 60 per cent by 2015•secondary legislation to enable the Mayor to be a party to Section 106 agreements•amechanism partially to recoup large increases in land valueattributable to the planning system or public investment, andespecially public transport improvements•changes to government guidance, in particular Circular 1/97 andCircular 6/98 on planning obligations and affordable in London: the Case for the Capital, GLA, 2001 and Public Services for a Growing City, GLA, 20012London’s Contribution to the UK Economy, Corporation of London, 20013London’s Housing Capacity, GLA, 20004Transport for London Business Plan: 2003/4 – 2008/9, TfL, 20035Analysis of the Transport Programme to Support the London Plan, TfL, January 20036London Development Agency Corporate Plan, LDA, 20027Sustainable Communities: Building for the Future, ODPM, 20038DraftGood Practice Guide on RPG Targets and Indicators, DTLR, 2001
318Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A1annex 1London’s strategic town centre network1Policy , Policies -3 and statements on town centres in Chapter 5of the London Plan set out the strategic policies that will support thedevelopment of London’s town centres over the lifetime of this plan andguide the location of retail and leisure centres’ current functions are set out in the London Town CentreNetwork below. This network shows how town centres of different typesrelate to each other in terms of the different levels of services theyprovide. It acts as a framework to ensure that London’s residents, visitorsand workers have ready and sustainable access to a full range of work on categorisation will be provided through the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks and will inform the first review of this will also be Supplementary Planning Guidance on retail needs andassessment. This will provide guidance on the amount of futuredevelopment that centres could accommodate sustainably to meet thewider objectives of this plan and PPG6. The London Town Centre Network3London has a complex pattern of town centres. While each centreperforms a different function according to the community and area itserves, five broad types of town centre can be identified within town centre type is described below. The categorisations of centresin the first four categories are set out in Table below.•International centres (2) are major concentrations of a wide range of globally attractive, specialist or comparison shopping.•Metropolitan centres (10) mainly in the suburbs, serve wide catchmentareas covering several boroughs and offer a high level and range ofcomparison shopping. They typically have over 100,000 square metresof retail floorspace, including multiple retailers and department also have significant employment, service and leisure functions.•Major centres (35) characteristic of inner London, such as Brixton,Putney or Camden, are also important shopping and service centres,often with a borough-wide catchment. They are typically smaller inscale and closer together than those in the metropolitan attractiveness for retailing is derived from a mix of bothcomparison and convenience shopping. Some major centres, whichhave developed sizeable catchment areas, also have some leisure andentertainment functions. Major centres normally have over 50,000square metres of retail floorspace.
A2Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•District centres (156) have traditionally provided convenience goodsand services for more local communities and are distributed acrossLondon. Some district centres have developed specialist shoppingfunctions, often as a result of their lower rents. Developing thecapacity of district centres for convenience shopping is critical toensure access to goods and services at the local level, particularly forpeople without access to cars. Many have a linear nature, which mayneed to be consolidated to make more efficient use of land andtransport capacity.•Neighbourhood and more local centres (over 1,200) provide servicesfor local communities and are of cumulative strategic significance. Anumber of recent initiatives, including the NHS Plan 2000, highlightthe importance of access to local and affordable fresh fruit andvegetables for the improvement of health. The report of the SocialExclusion Unit's Policy Action Team 13 'Access to Shops in DeprivedNeighbourhoods' emphasised the role of local shopping facilities infostering social inclusion. Neighbourhood shopping centres have a keyrole to play in addressing the problems of areas lacking accessible retailand other shows the location of London’s international, metropolitanmajor and district addition to, but in policy terms separate from, these town centres,London contains a Regional Shopping Centre – Brent Cross, which servesa regional role and is not currently a town centre. The separate policyapproach to Brent Cross is set out in Chapter town centre categorisations6The GLA will work in partnership with boroughs and other relevantagencies to identify the capacity of different centres to meet Londoners’likely future needs in the light of the broader objectives of this will be identified though ‘health checks’, which will be 1co-ordinated by the GLA. The current borough-level assessment of needwill be refined to assess pressures arising from consumer expendituregrowth and other needs which may be placed on individual centres, suchas the need for community facilities. These assessments of capacity andneed will be reconciled through partnership working on the Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks and area planning centres will be broadly classified according to their capacity to meetexpected needs in light of their current and future roles in the towncentre network and in relation to the roles of other centres including
The London PlanMayor of London A3those outside London. This will require inter-regional working. This broadclassification of centres should be refined in the light of localcircumstances through Unitary Development Plans. The Sub-RegionalDevelopment Frameworks will provide an opportunity to provide morespecific policy direction for some individual centres, where this isnecessary to support local and strategic objectives (for example, toidentify likely future changes in a centre’s functional classification ordevelopment of a strategically significant specialist role, so that these can be taken into account when this plan is reviewed).table centre classificationsInternational centresMajor centresBoroughCentreBoroughCentreKensington & Chelsea/Knightsbridge GreenwichWoolwichWestminsterGreenwichElthamWestminsterWest EndHackneyDalstonHammersmith & FulhamHammersmithMetropolitan centresHammersmith & FulhamFulhamBoroughCentreHillingdonUxbridgeBromleyBromleyHounslowChiswickCroydonCroydonIslingtonNags HeadEalingEalingIslingtonAngelHaringeyWood GreenKensington & ChelseaKensington High StreetHarrowHarrowKensington & ChelseaKing’s Road EastHaveringRomfordLambethStreathamHounslowHounslowLambethBrixtonKingstonKingstonLewishamLewishamRedbridgeIlfordLewishamCatfordSuttonSuttonMertonWimbledonNewhamEast HamMajor centresNewhamStratfordBoroughCentreRichmondRichmondBarkingBarking SouthwarkPeckham& DagenhamWaltham ForestWalthamstowBarnetEdgwareWandsworthClapham JunctionBexleyBexleyheathWandsworthPutneyBrentWembleyWandsworthTootingBrent/CamdenKilburnWandsworthWandsworthBromleyOrpingtonWestminsterQueensway/ CamdenCamden TownWestbourne GroveEalingSouthallEnfieldEnfield Town
A4Mayor of LondonThe London PlanDistrict centresDistrict centresBoroughCentreBoroughCentreBarkingDagenham & Heathway CroydonPurley Chadwell HeathThornton Heath BarnetNorth Finchley Upper Norwood Chipping BarnetNorbury Church End, FinchleySouth Norwood East FinchleyCoulsdonTemple Fortune AddiscombeGolders Green EalingActonWhetstone GreenfordHendon centralHanwellNew Barnet EnfieldAngel Edmonton Brent Street Edmonton Green Mill HillPalmers Green Barnet/BrentCricklewood SouthgateColindale/The HydeGreenwichGreenwich WestBarnet/Brent/HarrowBurnt OakThamesmeadBexleyWellingPlumsteadSidcupHackneyMare StreetCrayfordStoke NewingtonBrentHarlesden Hackney/Haringey/IslingtonFinsbury ParkWillesden Green Hammersmith & FulhamShepherds BushWembley Park HaringeyMuswell HillPreston Road Crouch EndNeasdenTottenham Ealing RoadGreen Lanes Brent/HarrowKingsburyWest Green RoadBromleyWest Wickham HarrowPinner BeckenhamWealdstone Petts WoodRayners Lane PengeSouth Harrow Bromley/Croydon/LambethCrystal PalaceStanmore CamdenSwiss Cottage/ North Harrow Finchley Road Harrow/BrentKentonKentish Town HaveringHornchurch Hampstead Upminster West HampsteadCollier Row City of LondonFleet Street Elm Park CheapsideHarold Hill Leadenhall Market RainhamMoorgate Liverpool Street
The London PlanMayor of London A5District centresDistrict centresBoroughCentreBoroughCentreHillingdonYiewsley/West DraytonRichmondEast SheenRuislipTeddingtonHayesWhittonEastcote TwickenhamNorthwood SouthwarkWalworth Road IckenhamSurrey Quays/HounslowFeltham High StreetCanada Water BrentfordDulwich – Lordship Lane IslingtonArchwayBorough High Street Kensington and ChelseaPortobello Road Elephant & Castle Notting Hill Gate Southwark/LambethCamberwellFulham Road (east) SuttonWallington South Kensington Worcester Park Earls Court Road North Cheam King’s Road (west)CheamFulham Road (west)RosehillKingstonNew MaldenTower HamletsBethnal Green SurbitonCrisp Street TolworthPoplarLambethClapham High StreetWhitechapelWest NorwoodRoman Road (east) StockwellWatney Market Lower MarshIsle of Dogs/Tulse HillCanary WharfLewishamDeptford Waltham ForestBakers Arms SydenhamLeytonstone Forest Hill South Chingford New Cross Wood Street Lee Green North ChingfordDownhamWandsworthBalhamBlackheathWestminsterEdgware Road SouthMertonMordenMarylebone High Street MitchamEdgeware Road/NewhamUpton Park Church Street NTForest GatePraed Street/PaddingtonEast BecktonWarwick Way/Canning TownTachbrook Street RedbridgeBarkingsideHarrow Road South WoodfordSt John's WoodGants HillWansteadReferences1 CACI. Consumer Expenditure in London 2001 – 2016,GLA, 2003
A6Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A7annex 2Strategic Employment LocationsIntroductionThe Strategic Employment Locations framework is intended to reconcilethe demand for, and supply of, productive industrial land in Employment Locations in the London Plan involve two types ofareas: Industrial Business Parks for businesses requiring a high qualityenvironment, and Preferred Industrial Locations for businesses with lessdemanding requirements. These two types of location are intended totake account of the needs of different types of industry in terms ofcapacity, environment, servicing and 2 and Chapter 3, Part B of the London Plan address StrategicEmployment Locations, requiring that they should be identified in Supplementary Planning Guidance has been prepared to set outcriteria to assist with the management, protection and enhancement ofthese designated strategic employment 1 and 2 below identify Preferred Industrial Locations and IndustrialBusiness Parks by Industrial LocationsNumberBoroughPreferred Industrial Location name1Barking & DagenhamRiver Road Employment Area 2Barking & DagenhamRippleside 3Barking & Dagenham HaveringDagenham Dock (part)4BexleyBelvedere Industrial Area (part)5BexleyErith Riverside (part)6Brent, Ealing Hammersmith & FulhamPark Royal (part)7BrentWembley Stadium (part)8Brent, BarnetStaples Corner9CroydonMarlpit Lane10Croydon, SuttonPurley Way Area11EalingGreat Western Road (part)12EalingNortholt, Greenford, Perivale (parts)13EnfieldBrimsdown14Enfield, HaringeyCentral Leaside Business Area 15EnfieldFreezywater16GreenwichNorth Charlton Employment Area17GreenwichGreenwich Peninsula West18GreenwichPlumstead Industrial Area19HackneyHackney Wick (part)
A8Mayor of LondonThe London Plan20HarrowWealdstone Industrial Area21HaveringHarold Hill Industrial Estate22HaveringColdharbour Lane Employment Area23HillingdonUxbridge Industrial Estate24HillingdonStonefield Way/Victoria Road25HillingdonHayes Industrial Area26HounslowNorth Feltham Trading Estate27HounslowBrentford (part), including Transport Avenue Industrial Area, Commerce Road28KingstonChessington Industrial Estate29Lewisham, SouthwarkSurrey Canal Area (part)30LewishamBromley Road31MertonWillow Lane, Beddington 32MertonMorden Road Factory Estate33MertonNorth Wimbledon (part)34MertonBeverley Way Industrial Area35Newham, Tower HamletsLower Lea Valley (part)36NewhamLondon Industrial Park37NewhamMarshgate Lane Area38NewhamThameside West39NewhamThameside East40RedbridgeSouthend Road Business Area41RedbridgeHainault Industrial Estate42SouthwarkBermondsey South East43SuttonKimpton Industrial Area44Waltham ForestLea Bridge Gateway45Waltham ForestBlackhorse Lane46WandsworthNine Elmstable Industrial Business ParksNumberBoroughIndustrial Business Park name1BarnetNorthern Telecom, Brunswick Park2BexleyThames Road, including Crayford Industrial Area3Bexley, BromleyFoots Cray Business Area4Brent, Ealing Hammersmith & FulhamPark Royal (part)5BrentEast Lane6BromleySt Marys Cray7EnfieldGreat Cambridge Road (part)8Hammersmith & Fulham Kensington & ChelseaWood Lane (part), including Freston Road9HaringeyTottenham Hale
The London PlanMayor of London A910HaringeyWood Green (part)11HarrowStanmore (part)12HillingdonNorth Uxbridge Industrial Estate13HounslowGreat Western Road (part)14KingstonBarwell Business Park15NewhamBritish Gas Site16NewhamBeckton Gateway
A10Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A11annex 3reconciliation tables1As set out in the Introduction, the Greater London Authority (GLA) Act 1999 requires that the London Plan take into account threecrosscutting themes:•the contribution to sustainable development in the UK•the health of Londoners•equality of themes have been integral to the research and development of theLondon Plan. The purpose of this reconciliation check is to focusattention on the crosscutting themes, highlighting those parts of this planthat are particularly relevant to them. For each of the three themes, thecheck covers the key functional linkages between the theme and spatialdevelopment and the process by which each theme has been also provides a signpost to particular sections or policies of the planthat closely relate to them and introduces further work andSupplementary Planning Guidance to follow publication of this development3Process: Consultants were commissioned to undertake an independentsustainability appraisal. Building on the work in the GLA to establish a setof sustainable development principles together with objectives from theUK strategy on sustainable development, a draft set of objectives wasdrawn up by the consultants and verified with an external review group. 4Thirty-three objectives were identified. These objectives were used tocarry out a scoping exercise of ‘Towards the London Plan’ and anappraisal of emerging policies for the draft London Plan. The appraisalprocess was validated by the external review group. Reports on workingdrafts were fed into the production of the draft plan. The consultantsproduced an independent report on the policies in the draft plan and thiswas considered at the Examination in Public. A further iteration of thesustainability appraisal was carried out on the working draft followingreceipt of the Report of the Panel and the output from this fed into thisplan. A final appraisal has been carried out and the results publishedalongside this plan. The report starts to address some of the issues thatwill be required in Strategic Environmental Assessments that will comeinto force from July : The 33 objectives selected to appraise each policy cover allelements of sustainable development. These include aspects of makingbetter use of natural resources, reducing the need to travel, the value ofopen space, the health of Londoners, crime, housing, air quality, inwardinvestment, waste, noise, freight transport, poverty and social exclusion,cultural and historic environment, high quality design and urban form
A12Mayor of LondonThe London Planusing sustainable techniques, use of the rivers and waterways,opportunities for employment and valuing Londoners. No attempt hasbeen made to identify single specific policies that impact on sustainabilityin particular. As written in Chapter 2, section , the theme ofsustainability runs throughout all the policies in this work: The report of the sustainability appraisal into this plan setsout an environmental baseline of information relating to the appraisalobjectives and identifies indicators and targets. These will be monitoredalongside the indicators in the London health of Londoners7Functional linkages: Health is a critical determinant of the quality of allour lives. A range of factors affect the health of Londoners and these areoutlined in Table . Factors such as access to leisure facilities, freshfood or decent living conditions can all lead to healthier, longer decisions have the potential to influence these : The starting position was that promoting public health is farmore than ensuring access to a high quality health care service. This hasinfluenced the process by which matters of public health fed into thedevelopment of the London Plan. Two pieces of work were key tounderstanding this relationship. The first was of a ‘health evidence base’1for the London Plan. This evidence draws together existing research andevidence that has sought to quantify some of the links between keypolicy areas of the draft London Plan and public health. It has been usedtocross-check and reference the health benefits of policies. The secondpiece of work was to determine the role of the London Plan in influencinglocational decisions around health care provision. This was undertakenthrough a series of meetings with the NHS London Regional Office andNHS Estates. Following the publication of the draft plan, London’s HealthCommission undertook an independent Health Impact Assessment (HIA).A panel of health experts reviewed all available evidence, to explore thefollowing questions: which determinants of health are likely to be affectedby the strategy? How may health determinants change as a result of thestrategy? What outcomes for health might result from these changes?What might be the impact on health inequalities of these changes? Thefull report of the HIA and its recommendations was presented to theMayor and to the panel at the Examination in Public. The HIA found thatmany important health considerations were already incorporated in thedraft plan. It outlined those policies that will make a significantcontribution to improving health and reducing health inequalities andoutlined some areas of concern. The latter have been considered inproducing this plan.
The London PlanMayor of London A139Signposting: The health evidence base has enabled the identification ofbroad areas of the plan that are particularly relevant to determinants ofgood health. The latter have been defined as falling into five maincategories: social and economic factors; environmental factors; lifestyle2factors; access to services and equality. This work has been reinforced bythe outputs from the HIA. Some policies and objectives of this plan aredirectly designed to maintain and enhance public health, such as thepromotion of walking and cycling. Other policies have indirect publichealth benefits, such as opportunities to shop locally. Table providesa signpost to those key sections of the plan have particular healthbenefits. Many other policies will also impact on health and wellbeing,but to a lesser work: The Mayor believes that there are important links betweenspatial development and public health. Chapter 3, Part 3 includes aproposal for the GLA to work in partnership with London’s HealthCommission and the providers of health care, to publish a set ofguidelines on the role of the development planning process in securingpublic health of opportunity for all Londoners11Functional linkages: The promotion of equality of opportunity is a themeunderlining the majority of policies in this plan, whether it is access tofacilities and services, enhancing employment opportunities, theprotection of open spaces, or a broad range of policies concerned withthe quality of life. The Mayor recognises that there are groups ofLondoners for whom equality of opportunity is of particular are groups who suffer discrimination, or have particular needs, as a result of their race, gender, disability, age, sexual orientation orreligion. This plan attempts to address the strategic land use, transportand development aspects of these : In Towards the London Plan, the Mayor emphasised theimportance of seeking to address the spatial needs of particular groups ofLondoners. This prompted responses from a wide range of organisationshighlighting the particular priorities of their interest group. This helpedgreatly in understanding the ways in which a strategic plan could addresssuch issues. A number of events and consultation meetings have takenplace during the preparation of this plan to identify those strategic issuesand priorities relating to groups who are marginalised or discriminatedagainst. This plan seeks to address those issues and also draws on theexpertise contributing towards the preparation of other strategies, such asthe Children and Young People’s Strategy, the Domestic Violence Strategyand the Rough Sleepers Strategy.
A14Mayor of LondonThe London Plan13The Race Relations Amendment Act 2000 requires public authorities tocomply with specific duties to eliminate unlawful discrimination, topromote equality of opportunity and good relations between people ofdifferent racial groups. Following this act, together with its duties set outin the GLA Act, the GLA has devised and published its own race equalityscheme. The assessment and consultation on proposed policies for theirimpact on promoting race equality and the monitoring of their impact areparticularly pertinent to the London Plan. As part of this work EqualitiesImpact Assessments were carried out of the draft and final plan’s output from these assessments are addressed in this : Chapter 3, Part A, outlines the importance of assessing thespatial needs of London’s communities of identity and interest andidentifying ways of addressing deficiencies through the planning highlights policies in this plan that are particularly relevant todifferent communities. Other policies also impact on equality and equity,but to a lesser work: The Mayor is committed to ensuring that the planningsystem is used to its full potential to deliver benefits to all proposed in Chapter 3, Part A, the Mayor intends to prepareSupplementary Planning Guidance on the particular additional needs ofeach of London’s marginalised communities of identity and to show how policies relate to health and equalitiescrosscutting themes HealthEqualitiesSocial and Environ-LifestyleAccess to economicmentalfactors servicesfactorsfactors(for example:(for example: (for example: (for example:diet, physical education, poverty, air quality,activity)NHS, leisure, employment, housing,transport)social exclusion) water quality)Policy The Mayor’s objectives Policy Sustainability criteria Policy Opportunity Areas Policy Areas for Intensification Policy Areas for Regeneration Policy Town centres Policy Spatial strategy for suburbs Policy Increasing London’s supply of housing
The London PlanMayor of London A15HealthEqualitiesSocial and Environ-LifestyleAccess to economicmentalfactors servicesfactorsfactors(for example:(for example: (for example: (for example:diet, physical education, poverty, airquality,activity)NHS, leisure,employment, housing,transport)social exclusion) water quality)Policy Housing choice Policy Affordable housing targetsPolicy Partnership approach and Sub-Regional Development FrameworksPolicy Special needs and specialist housingPolicy London's travellers and gypsiesPolicy Loss of hostels, staff accommodation and shared accommodationPolicy Addressing the needs of London’s diverse populationPolicy Protection and enhancement of social infrastructure and community facilitiesPolicy The voluntary and community sectorPolicy Health objectives Policy Locations for health carePolicy Medical excellence Policy Health impacts Policy Community strategiesPolicy Meeting floor targetsPolicy Social and economic impact assessmentsPolicy Supporting neighbourhood plansPolicy Developing London’s economyPolicy Mixed-use developmentPolicy Creative industries Policy Tourism industry
A16Mayor of LondonThe London PlanHealthEqualitiesSocial and Environ-LifestyleAccess to economicmentalfactors servicesfactorsfactors(for example:(for example: (for example: (for example:diet, physical education, poverty, air quality,activity)NHS, leisure, employment, housing,transport)social exclusion) water quality)Policy Improving the skills and employment opportunities for LondonersPolicy Integrating transport and developmentPolicy Matching development totransport capacityPolicy Sustainable transport in LondonPolicy Increasing the capacity, quality and integration of public transport to meet London’s needsPolicy Improved Underground and DLR servicesPolicy Enhanced bus priority, tram and bus transit schemesPolicy Tackling congestion and reducing trafficPolicy Allocation of street spacePolicy Local area transport treatmentsPolicy Improving conditions for busesPolicy Improving conditions for walkingPolicy Improving conditions for cyclingPolicy Parking strategyPolicy Supporting town centres Policy Town centre developmentPolicy Maintaining and improving retail facilitiesPolicy Development and promotion of arts and culture
The London PlanMayor of London A17HealthEqualitiesSocial and Environ-LifestyleAccess to economicmentalfactors servicesfactorsfactors(for example:(for example: (for example: (for example:diet, physical education, poverty, air quality,activity)NHS, leisure, employment, housing,transport)social exclusion) water quality)Policy Sports facilities Policy Visitors’ accommodation and facilitiesPolicy Realising the value of open spacePolicy Open space provision in UDPsPolicy Open space strategies and auditsPolicy Burial space Policy Improving air quality Policy Water quality Policy Reducing noisePolicy Climate changePolicy Dealing with hazardous substancesPolicy Design principles for a compact cityPolicy Enhancing the quality of the public realmPolicy Creating an inclusive environmentPolicy Sustainable design and constructionPolicy Respecting local context and communitiesPolicy London’s built heritagePolicy Heritage conservationPolicy The strategic importance of the Blue Ribbon NetworkPolicy Increasing sport and leisure use on the Blue Ribbon NetworkPolicy Increasing access alongside and to the Blue Ribbon NetworkPolicy Supporting facilities and activities in the Blue Ribbon Network
A18Mayor of LondonThe London PlanHealthEqualitiesSocial and Environ-LifestyleAccess to economicmentalfactors servicesfactorsfactors(for example:(for example: (for example: (for example:diet, physical education, poverty, airquality,activity)NHS, leisure,employment, housing,transport)social exclusion) water quality)Policy Sub-Regional Development FrameworksPolicy The strategic priorities for Central LondonPolicy Development in the Central Activities ZonePolicy Special Policy Areas Policy The strategic priorities for East LondonPolicy The strategic priorities for West LondonPolicy The strategic priorities for North LondonPolicy The strategic priorities for South LondonPolicy The Mayor’s own powers and resourcesPolicy Working in partnership Policy Priorities in planning obligationsPolicy Generation and use of resourcesPolicy Increasing the capacity of LondonPolicy Working with stakeholders Policy Complementary strategiesPolicy Monitoring and review Policy Measuring progressReferences1Ahealth evidence base for the draft London Plan. Ben Cave. GLA, 20022Health Impact Assessment Screening Tool. Draft for Piloting. GLA, 2001
The London PlanMayor of London A19annex 4parking standards1This annex sets out the approach to determining appropriate maximumparking standards within the policy context established by Policies should interpret these standards with appropriate flexibility and have regard to them in developing policies for their UDPs and inexercising their development control functions. The approach set out in this annex will be used by the Mayor in considering applications forstrategic approach set out in Policy seeks to regulate parking in order tominimise additional car travel, reduce trip lengths and encourage use of other, more sustainable means of travel. Policy also recognisesthe need to support the economic development and regeneration ofLondon’s town centres. The approach provides for flexibility to enableboroughs to take account of local circumstances in balancing thedesirability of reducing car use with the need to provide for attractiveviable development. The approach has been developed in line with PPG13. It supercedes the interim parking standards in the Mayor’s Transport the level of on-site parking provision is seen as a keyreinforcing measure to promote alternative means of transport. It is alsoimportant that boroughs manage on-street and off-street parking as awhole and prepare a local integrated parking strategy, which can formpart of the transport Local Implementation Standards, Transport Assessments and Public TransportAccessibility Levels (PTALs)5PPG 13 (March 2001) introduced the concept of Transport should give details of proposed measures to improve access bypublic transport, walking and cycling, to reduce associated parking andmitigate adverse transport impacts. Transport Assessments will be a keyfactor in assisting boroughs in their assessments of developmentproposals and ensuring that parking levels sought for new developmentsare not excessive. 6The Transport Assessment will provide an estimate of car parking the proposed development should not exceed the borough’sstandards, unless there is a very good justification for doing so. Accountalso needs to be taken of transport capacity constraints. TransportAssessments for major trip generating developments will need todemonstrate that sufficient capacity exists or can be provided on thesignificantly affected parts of the transport network. Major commercial
A20Mayor of LondonThe London Plandevelopments will also need to assess catchment areas in order todemonstrate that the intended customer/commuter catchment can accessthe site by public transport or on foot or by cycle. Account should also be taken of the level of public car parking already available, including on-street parking, particularly within town Transport Accessibility Levels (PTALs) have been adopted by TfL toproduce a consistent Londonwide public transport access mappingfacility to assist boroughs with locational planning and assessment ofappropriate parking provision by measuring broad public transportaccessibility levels. This method provides a consistent framework, whichallows differences in public transport accessibility in different parts ofLondon to be taken into account. The PTAL method is a useful tool, butdoes not preclude the use of additional assessment methods to assess a particular development or is evidence that car use reduces as access to public transport, as measured by PTALs, increases. Therefore, given the need to avoid over-provision, car parking provision should also reduce as publictransport accessibility increases. 9The use of PTALs in assisting the determination of appropriatedevelopment locations and parking standards requires TfL to maintain and periodically update such information. Map in the main body of this plan is illustrative only. TfL will provide borough level PTALs mapstoeach borough and will provide site specific information on request, free of charge, to boroughs for planning and development controlpurposes. TfL will provide updated maps generally on a bi-annual basis,with interim updates for areas affected by significant schemes. A technicalworking group will be maintained with the boroughs and technicalguidance will be issued and updated as car parking standards10The standards for employment uses are set out in Table below. Theyare consistent with those in RPG9 and the Mayor’s Transport and a Transport Assessment should be used to inform the level ofparking within the range specified in Table . Normally they should notbe used to increase the level of parking beyond the range indicatedunless there is an identified regeneration need. Locations with higherPTALs should have a lower level of parking provision within or below therange specified. It is expected that the GLA and boroughs will graduallymove to a PTAL and Transport Assessment based approach to determiningemployee parking standards over time.
The London PlanMayor of London A2111Further work is being undertaken with adjoining regions to bring parking standards in neighbouring areas outside London closer to thoseappropriate in outer London over time. This will be reflected in the Sub-Regional Development Frameworks. However, in the interim, account can be taken of standards in adjoining areas outside Londonwhere this can be demonstrated to have an impact upon the viability of the -operational employment car parking standardLocationMaximum of one parking space per x square metres of gross floor area, where x is(Value of x)Central London (CAZ)1,000 – 1,500Inner London600 – 1,000Outer London100 – 600sourceGLA, derived from RPG9notesCentral London is defined as the Central Activities Zone (CAZ), as shown in Map London consists of Camden, Greenwich, Hackney, Hammersmith & Fulham,Haringey, Islington, Kensington and Chelsea, Lambeth, Lewisham, Newham, Southwark,Tower Hamlets, Wandsworth and Westminster excluding those parts in the London consists of Barking & Dagenham, Barnet, Bexley, Brent, Bromley, Croydon,Ealing, Enfield, Harrow, Havering, Hillingdon, Houslow, Kingston-upon-Thames, Merton,Richmond-upon-Thames, Redbridge, Sutton and Waltham can continue to use these categories as a basis for setting standards, althoughsome flexibility in defining boundaries may be appropriate. Where boroughs use differentdefinitions these should be car parking standards12Public transport accessibility should be used to assist in determining theappropriate residential density and the appropriate level of car parkingprovision, particularly for major developments. Maximum residentialparking standards are set out in Table and summarised in Table Residential Car Parking StandardsPredominant Detached andTerraced houses Mostly flatshousing typesemi-detached houses& flatsCar parking 2 – spaces – 1 space 1 to less than 1provisionper unitper unitspace per unit* *Flat developments in areas of good public transport accessibility and/or town centresshould aim for less than 1 space per unit. The needs of disabled residents will need tobe taken into account in developments with low car parking provision, so thatadequate spaces, either on site or convenient dedicated on-street spaces, are identified for occupants.
A22Mayor of LondonThe London Plan13Overall residential standards are consistent with PPG 3, which requiresthat on average car parking should not exceed off-street spaces perdwelling, particularly in urban areas. Detached and semi-detached houseswill form a small part of the overall growth in housing, and the maximumstandard for these larger properties of up to two spaces recognises theimpracticality of imposing a lower standard for houses with garages andfor large detached houses. The substantial majority of new housingdevelopment will be higher density houses and flats which have amaximum standard of or below, so on average car parking is notexpected to exceed off-street spaces per development at higher densities and with lower car parkingprovision is encouraged in areas with high PTAL scores and/or close totown centres. An element of car-free housing should be included whereaccessibility and type of housing centre and retail car parking standards15A new framework set out in Policy for setting car parking standardsfor retail developments links car parking provision to public transportaccessibility and encourages more restrictive car parking where publictransport accessibility (PTALs) is high, to prevent over-provision of carparking. This takes account of the trend for shopping centres with betterpublic transport provision, to have a higher public transport modal shareand lower car use for shopping -based car parking standards should be used flexibly and avoid aperverse incentive to develop in out-of-centre locations, where publictransport is poor, rather than in town centres. It is therefore vital thatparking policy is applied in conjunction with PPG6, which requires parkingtoreinforce the attractiveness and competitiveness of town centres andthe locational policies in PPG can vary across town/local centres and their immediate catchmentarea. In order to avoid different standards within a centre, boroughsshould identify the appropriate maximum parking standards that shouldapply across a whole town centre including its edges. These standardsshould be informed by Policy and the indicative maximumstandards given in Table . By concentrating development in towncentres, access is improved for those without a car and access by publictransport and other modes is car parking standards given in Table start from an assessment of car parking demand, which is reflected in the PTAL 1 standards. Thesestandards are tighter than the indicative national standards set out in PPG
The London PlanMayor of London A2313 as they reflect the above average propensity to use public transport in London, even in many suburban locations. Maximum parking standardsshould not exceed those given for PTAL , in developing their UDP policies, are advised to consult withappropriate bodies such as the town centre forum or is a difference between PTAL 6 scores in central London and outerLondon, due to the large size and density of the network serving centralLondon. Outside central London, PTAL 6 is banded with PTAL 5. Incentral London (PTAL 6), no non-operational parking should be provided,except for disabled people. In some PTAL 5/6 locations outside centralLondon, car park-free developments may also be maximum car parking guidelines for retail uses in townand local centresPTAL6 central6 inner/outer 4 to 21LondonLondon & 5maximumRetail land use1 space per x square metres of gross floor areaSmaller food store7550 - 35302(up to 500mgfa)Food supermarket45 - 3030 - 201822(up to 2500mrfa/c4000mgfa)Food superstore38 - 2525 - 181522(over 2500mrfa/c4000mgfa)Non-food warehouse60 - 4050 - 3030Garden centre65 - 4545 - 3025Town centre/shopping mall75 - 5050- 3530sourceGLA 2003noteFor PTAL 6 central no non-operational parking should be provided except for disabled food retail size thresholds are illustrative and should not be used to avoidappropriate parking stores and other non-food and non-warehouse stores should be based on the town centre/shopping mall standards, although a retail impact study may berequired to assess linked is a difference between non-bulk and bulk (trolley-based)shopping. At non-bulk shopping developments, the starting point formeeting parking demand is the existing public off-street parking parking requirements should be assessed and take account of the
A24Mayor of LondonThe London Planreduction in demand associated with linked trips. If on-site parking isjustified there should be a presumption that it will be publicly should take a co-ordinated approach with neighbouringauthorities, including, where appropriate, those outside London, toprevent competition between centres based on parking availability and bulk shopping, the preferred location is also in or on the edge of thetown centre to facilitate linked trips. It is recognised that the use oftrolleys to carry purchases means that some on-site car parking may beappropriate. Where new on-site car parking is required, this should bemade available to the general public to ensure that the town centrebenefits as a whole, and can also benefit in the evenings. Where possible,adjacent sites should have a linked parking layout to facilitate linked is important that the quality, attractiveness and safety/security of carparks is improved and maintained to support and enhance theattractiveness of town centres. Car parks should provide a high quality of service and security to facilitate town centre improvement and principles of good design promoted in this plan should apply to thedesign of car uses24Social/cultural activity generally does not normally involve carrying heavyloads or equipment. Peak usage of these facilities often takes place duringevenings and weekends. While it is recognised that public transportservices often reduce late in the evening, especially in suburban areas,existing public car parking supply is normally under-used in the starting point for determining car parking provision for leisuredevelopments appropriate for town centre/edge of town centre locationsis to make use of the existing public car park supply. This is particularlytrue for any developments within the central activities zone. Howeverimprovements to car park security, especially at night may be assessing the requirement for car parking for leisure uses, it isrecognised that some edge-of-town sites will need on-site parking. Anyprovision should reflect the availability of public transport and, whereappropriate, pedestrian/cycle accessibility. For sites with good publictransport provision, car parking provision should be reduced. Informationon possible car parking standards for a variety of leisure uses is given in1the report on Parking Standardswhich was comissioned by the GLA toinform parking standards. These can serve as a starting point whenconsidering relevant standards. In locations with poor accessibility the scale
The London PlanMayor of London A25and mix of development should reflect the reliance on the car. A TransportAssessment should be used to assess the parking requirements. The varietyand scale of leisure developments means that many larger developmentsmust be assessed on an individual basis rather than by reference tostandards. Where a large-scale development is of national and/or regionalimportance, a nearby rail connection of adequate capacity will generally be an important may need to be made for coach parking where substantialnumbers of participants and spectators are expected. Stadia and otherlarge-scale schemes which attract a lot of people should be located where PTAL 3 or above is achieved. Public transport access should be encouraged and parking provision should be minimised. Mixed use and large multi unit developments28It is not possible to prescribe parking standards for mixed/multi-usedevelopments as these differ widely. The key to identifying parkingprovision lies in a Transport Assessment supported by impact studies of large mixed use developments. The Transport Assessment will need totake appropriate account of public transport accessibility and highwaynetwork time profiles of car parking demand vary according to use. If theestimated peak parking demands for each element are simply addedtogether, the total will generally exceed the actual peak parking demandfor the development as a whole. Such over-provision should be avoidedthrough appropriate analysis. The total parking provision will therefore be less than the sum of each individual rates for retail parks are significantly lower than for most of theindividual elements in isolation. Parking provision should be reducedcorrespondingly. Linked trip-making can reduce parking demand by up to50 per cent, and 25 per cent appears readily attainable. Account shouldalso be taken of improvements in public transport. Developers shoulddemonstrate such effects in their Transport uses (A2, A3, B8, C1, C2 and D1)31The following standards provide a starting point for determining maximumparking standards, taking account of local circumstances. Lower provisionis likely to be appropriate in many cases, particularly where publictransport provision and/or pedestrian/cycle access is good.
A26Mayor of LondonThe London Indicative carparking standards for other uses (A2, A3, B8, C1,C2, D1)USEMaximum StandardA2 Financial and professional services, •Headquarters-style buildings of financial institutions andincluding banks, building societies, high street banks, building societies etc., should be estate agencies, employment agencies, treated as B1 offices and professional and •For branches of banks, building societies etc, financial services. no site-specific parking should be provided. The presumption is that such uses are ancillary to retailing and should be located in a town/district centre. A3 Food and drink, including pubs, •In central town centre locations, no parking bars, cafes, restaurants and hot food provision should be made. The public parkingtakeaway shops. supply should be used. • On mixed-use sites (ie retail/leisure parks), food and drink should be treated as ancillary to other uses, unless significant restaurant facilities are provided and are likely tobe a main attraction. •For outer London, at edge of centres or in smaller 2centres, 1 space per 10 mgfa.•For drive-through or take-away restaurants where no seating is provided, no parking provision other than for operational requirements is likely to be appropriate2B8 Storage or distribution, including •1 lorry space per 200 mgfa (minimum 1 lorry space), to2wholesale warehousing, distribution 1 lorry space minimum plus 1 lorry space per 500 and repositories. Any associated office accommodation •Car parking as B1 (see Table )should be treated as offices for parking purposes. C1 Hotels, including boarding houses •Car parking should generally be assessed on an individualand guest housesbasis using a transport assessment.•Small hotels, particularly those in central London, should have no on-site parking provision.•Hotels in town centres should generally not have on-site parking provision or coach parking beyond operational requirements. Outside town centres, relevant factors to consider in determining standards include public transport accessibility, target markets, the mix of domestic and international clients and the implications of any conference and sports facilities. •Hotels on key arterial roads outside central locations tend to rely on car-borne trade and may require relativelyunfettered parking provision. A benchmark maximum is up to 1 space per bedroom, though where there is good public transport, lower provision will be appropriate.
The London PlanMayor of London A27C2 Residential institutions, including •Residential schools/colleges and hospitals should beresidential schools/colleges and hospitals assessed on an individual basis using a transportand convalescent/nursing homes. assessment. Travel Plans will have a role to play.•For hospitals it is likely that many patients and visitors will be car-dependent, as the very young and elderly form a large proportion of the patients’ profile.•New nursing homes centrally located should rely largely or entirely on public parking, whilst outside central locations a benchmark maximum standard (catering for both resident staff and visitors) is in the order of 1 spaceper 2-4 beds. D1 Non-residential institutions•Car parking requirements should be assessed on anThis use class includes a wide variety individual basis using a transport assessment. Important of institutions including places of worship considerations include catchments/target markets, and religious halls; crèches, day nurseries location, public transport accessibility and maximisingand non-residential education and use of the public parking supply (particularly relevanttraining health and cultural facilities). Travel Plans should be used to minimise the use of less sustainable transport options.•Parking needs should take account of the nature of the institution eg•places of worship/religious halls are likely to require some parking to cater for large gatherings drawn from a wide catchment eg in the case of weddings and funerals, although public parking should be used where possible.•crèches/day nurseries may require a dropping-off/collection area rather than parking provision•non-residential education and training centres may require some parking for staff and operational requirements, but the focus of attention should be on child safety, including segregation of vehicle and pedestrian movements on site. Safe Routes to School programmes should be promoted. Safe and convenient dropping-off/collection areas should be provided for parents’ cars and coaches/school buses. Provision for taxis, coaches and buses32All large developments should provide for appropriate taxi ranks andcoach/bus parking/stands. Consideration of these will form part of thedevelopment’s Transport Assessment. More details of these facilities willbe provided in the Land for Transport Functions SPG.
A28Mayor of LondonThe London PlanOperational parking33Operational parking is that which is required to enable the developmenttofunction. It includes arrangements for maintenance, servicing anddeliveries, but excludes employee and visitor parking. Some operationalparking is likely to be required on site, to cater for servicing, which shouldoccur off-road, even if there is no car parking provided foremployees/ should be up to the developer to present a convincing case foroperational car parking above this level. It is important to remember thatplanning permissions are attached to the land in question, not usually toa particular occupier. Any exceptional provision of operational space tomeet the needs of a specific occupier may be surplus to requirements at alater date. Genuine need for operational parking (such as a workforce witha high proportion of travelling salespeople) should be minimised throughthe use of a travel for disabled people35Policy recognises that developments should always includeprovision for car parking/car-based access for disabled people. Despiteimprovements to public transport, some disabled people still require theuse of private cars. Suitable designated car parking and/or drop-offs aretherefore required. 36Boroughs should take a flexible approach, but developments should havea least one accessible car parking bay designated for use by disabledpeople, even if no general parking is provided. All developments withassociated car parking should have at least two parking bays for use bydisabled people. The appropriate number of bays will depend on the sizeand nature of the development and boroughs should take into accountlocal issues and estimates of local demand in setting appropriatestandards. Where no off-street parking is proposed, applicants mustdemonstrate where disabled drivers can park in order to easily use thedevelopment. The Mayor has published draft Supplementary PlanningGuidance - Accessible London, which provides detailed guidance onaccessibility for disabled parking37Developments should provide for sufficient secure cycle parking andsupporting facilities in accordance with PPG 13 and the TransportStrategy. TfL has indicative guidance on cycle parking standards.
The London PlanMayor of London A29Motor cycle parking38Developments should provide for appropriate secure motorcycle parkingin accordance with PPG 13 and the Transport Strategy (Proposal andParagraphs -27). The London Motorcycle Working Group has beenset up to improve safety and reduce the environmental nuisance ofmotorcycles and and ride39Park and ride for town centres can have a role in serving catchment areas which are less easily served by public transport. It can also provideadditional capacity at peak seasonal times. Park and ride also has a role toplay at railway stations, particularly in outer London, in cases where the catchment is not always easily served by walking, cycling or need to ensure that proposals are compatible with overalltransport objectives and in line with TfL’s Policies and AssessmentFramework, due to be published by early 2004 and future Land forTransport Functions Standards for retail and leisure and mixed use development in London. SDSTechnical Report 12. GLA August 2002
A30Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A31annex 5implementation of the Blue Ribbon NetworkThis annex sets out a series of strategic actions for the Mayor toundertake in partnership with others, in pursuance of the Blue RibbonNetwork principles and policies set out in Chapter 4, Part C. The ThamesPolicy Area indicative maps are included at the end of this The Mayor will work with the London ongoingstaff timeLDADevelopment Agency (LDA), boroughs and possibleboroughsregeneration partnerships to promote and LDA fundspartnershipsencourage the use of the Blue Ribbon Network in regeneration The Mayor will work with the LDA, Port of ongoingstaff timePLALondon Authority (PLA) and boroughs to LDAexamine opportunities for using waterside sites boroughsfor green industries in conjunction with the partnershipspriorities in the Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy for The Mayor, together with Transport for within staff timeTfLLondon (TfL), the LDA, and others will 3 yearsconsultantLDAinvestigate the feasibility of passenger ferry river schemes from east London to Docklands and servicecentral The Mayor will continue to support work ongoingstaff timeThames21commenced in 2001 by Thames21 and LRALondon Rivers Association (LRA) to re-open othersaccess points to the Thames foreshore5 The Mayor will work with others and 3-5 yearsstaff time/ Environmentparticularly the Environment Agency to consultantAgencyestablish a restoration strategy for the tributary boroughsriver The Mayor will work with planning authorities within staff timeEnvironmentand the Environment Agency to increase the 5 yearsconsultantsAgencyuse of Sustainable Drainage Techniques boroughsincluding identifying areas where surface water otherscould be sustainably managed at a strategic level. 7 The Mayor will continue to play a role in ongoingstaff timeboroughsco-ordinating the work of boroughs and other otherspartnerships particularly in pursuing the preparation of appraisals of the Thames Policy Area. In particular, the Mayor will continue his involvement in the Thames Strategy – East.
A32Mayor of LondonThe London PlanNoActionTimeResourcesPartners8 The Mayor will seek to work with the Environment ongoingstaff timeEnvironmentAgency, local authorities and others on strategic Agencyissues of flood defence and water resources. The waterMayor recognises that solutions to some challenges companiesmay lie outside the London The Mayor has set up three advisory groups on ongoingstaff timestakeholdersissues connected with the Blue Ribbon Network. members A Steering Group, a Stakeholders Forum and the of groupsLondon Canals Committee. The Mayor will look tothese groups to advise him and to ensure that the various agencies working with the Blue Ribbon Network are jointly considering the challenges that face London and ensuring that London’s interests as a whole are at the forefront of The Mayor will work with the LDA, TfL, boroughs ongoingstaff timeTfL, LDAand the PLA to investigate measures to ensure TfL, LDA,boroughsthat wharves that are essential to meet capacity DTLR fundsPLAand policy requirements are made available. This may include the use of Compulsory Purchase Order (CPO) powers, duties assigned in the GLA Act and applying for Freight Facilities The Mayor will continue to work with Thames ongoingstaff timeThamesTideway Strategy Steering Group, sewerage Waterundertakers, the Environment Agency and boroughs Environmenttoensure that London’s sewerage system is safe, Agencyreliable and minimises environmental damage, boroughssewer flooding and The Mayor will establish a Thames Policy Area UDP fromstaff timeboroughsco-ordination group to ensure a consistent 2004keyapproach to the Thames Policy London Canals Committee (LCC) guidelines –the withinstaff timeLCCMayor will look to review the guidelines that were 3 yearspublished by the LCC in December 2000.
The London PlanMayor of London A33maps -4Thames Policy Area – indicativemap to Wandsworthmap Wandsworth to Bermondseymap to Woolwichmap Woolwich to Crayford NesssourceRPG3b/9b Strategic Planning Guidance for the River Thames, Government Office for London, February 1997
A34Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A35annex 6list of Supplementary Planning Guidance1The Mayor will prepare the Supplementary Planning Guidance (SPG) listedbelow in consultation with the Association of London Government,boroughs and other stakeholders. 2SPGs will benefit from robust and consistent public each SPG may need specific consultation depending on itssubject, scope or how it has been prepared, a basic process for all SPGswill be followed. The following groups will be included in publicconsultation:•relevant voluntary sector organisations and representatives from thetarget Londonwide stakeholder groups identified in Chapter 3, Part A(such as the Black Londoners’ Forum, the LVSC, Age Concern, theLondon Access Forum, Greater London Action on Disability)•heads of Planning in 33 London boroughs and the ALG•relevant statutory bodies, including Government Office for London,English Heritage and CABE (Commission for Architecture and the BuiltEnvironment)•relevant statutory undertakers and neighbouring authorities •relevant business organisations such as London First and the CBI(Confederation of British Industry)•GLA group organisations, including the London Development Agencyand Transport for London•London Assembly members •organisations which responded to the relevant parts of the draftLondon Plan consultation or appeared at the timetable for consultation should be at least 12 weeks. This is toallow boroughs and others sufficient time to seek agreement to considering the comments received, the Mayor will decide when topublish the final of London Plan Supplementary Planning Guidance1Accessible London (draft published July 2003)2Industrial Capacity (draft published September 2003)3Housing provision (draft to be published March 2004)4Urban design principles (draft to be published March 2004)5Affordable housing (draft to be published March 2004)6Sustainable construction and design (draft to be published April 2004)7View framework management (draft to be published April 2004)8Land for transport functions (draft to be published April 2004)
A36Mayor of LondonThe London Plan9Renewable energy (draft to be published May 2004)10Meeting the spatial needs of London’s diverse communities (draft to be published May 2004)11Retail need assessments (draft to be published July 2004)
The London PlanMayor of London A37annex 7main requirements for additionalassessments as a result of the London PlanThe London Plan requires developers to carry out a number ofassessments additional to those already required by other national or localplanning policy. These have been kept to the minimum necessary toassess the impacts of development on London. Many of the assessmentswill only apply to specific types or scale of development or specificlocations. ‘Major developments’ are defined in the Glossary and morelocal interpretations should be included in Social and Major developments in, or with the potential economic impact to impact on, Areas for Regeneration shouldassessmentsbe subject to social and economic impact Energy assessmentMajor developments should require an assessment of energy demand including demonstrating the steps taken to apply the Mayor’s energy Providing for Major developments should show how the development renewable energywould generate a proportion of the site’s electricity or heat needs from renewables, wherever feasible. Design statementsDevelopment proposals should include urban design statements showing how design principles have been incorporated which illustrate their design impacts. The detailed requirements will be defined in UDPs and for proposals referred to the Mayor, further advice will be given in the urban design SPG.
A38Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Creating an Development proposals should includeinclusive environmentan Access Statement showing how the principles of inclusive design, including the specific needs of disabled people, have been integrated into the proposed development, and how inclusion will be maintained and managed. The detailed requirements will be defined in UDPs. All proposals referred to the Mayor should include an Access Sustainable design Major developments should includeand construction a statement showing how sustainability principles will be met in terms of demolition, construction and long-term Rising groundwaterMajor developments within areas of rising groundwater should take reasonable steps toward using the water. Design statementsMajor development proposals withinthe Thames Policy Area and adjacent tothe rest of the Blue Ribbon Network should include design statements setting out the relationship with the Structures over Proposals for new structures over andand into the Blue into the Blue Ribbon Network shouldRibbon Networkinclude assessments to cover impacts on navigation, hydrology and biodiversity, and proposed mitigation Safety on and Major developments along the near to the Blue Blue Ribbon Network should be Ribbon Networkaccompanied by an assessment of existing and proposed safety provision.
The London PlanMayor of London A39annex 8partnerships that can help to deliver the London PlanIntroductionThis annex sets out key partnerships that are important to help deliver the London Plan. Some already exist, others are Association (existing)The Access Association brings together the GLA, boroughs andconsultants to share experiences of promoting and securing inclusive and accessible environments in Steering Group (existing)Set up by the GLA, this group helps formulate and implement the strategyon inclusive and accessible environments. Members are experts in theaccess needs of disabled people and include representatives from theLondon Access Forum, Greater London Action on Disability (GLAD), the Access Association and the Development Trusts (existing)Development trusts are a particular type of partnership organisation – one that offers benefits to the local community and has advantages formany public bodies, non-profit agencies and funders. There is no singlemodel for development trusts, but they do have common characteristics,including being concerned with the regeneration of an area, not forprivate gain, aiming for long-term sustainability, and community-basedand accountable. Many develop a land or property base, which can earnthem income. All aim to provide local solutions to local need. Finsburyand Paddington are two large trusts in Empowerment Networks (existing)These networks operate in the 20 boroughs in receipt of neighbourhoodrenewal funds. The networks facilitate and support communityinvolvement and participation in neighbourhood renewal and act as aforum through which the community could express its needs, concernsand London Rail Links (existing)Consisting of representatives of the Strategic Rail Authority and Transportfor London, this body’s remit is to plan, gain approval and developCrossrail 1 and Crossrail 2, the proposed new cross-London rail links.
A40Mayor of LondonThe London PlanCultural Strategy Group (CSG) (existing)Bringing together the GLA and representatives of the cultural sector, thisgroup acts as a reference group for the Mayor’s Cultural Strategy. It hasalso provided a policy input into the draft London Quality Partnerships (existing)These are partnerships between business and local authorities. They existtodevelop an understanding of distribution issues and problems at thesub-regional Partnerships (proposed)These partnerships would involve strategic health authorities, primary caretrusts, Local Strategic Partnerships and the GLA. They would produceguidelines on how boroughs can best use the development process topromote public night entertainment forum (existing)This forum of the key agencies involved in late-night entertainmentincludes the GLA, the boroughs, the police, the government, localpartnerships and other agencies. The forum discusses issues, shares bestpractice and develops better co-ordinated management of areas with highlevels of late-night activities. The forum assists in policy development andwill lobby for any additional resources for extra policing, late nighttransport and other contingent and Skills Councils (LSC) (existing)They are responsible for the funding and commissioning of post-16training (excluding higher education and New Deal adult training). Theyare also responsible for adult and community learning, workforcedevelopment, adult guidance on training and business links witheducation. There are five LSCs in London whose boundaries are the samea the London Plan Strategic Partnerships (LSPs) (existing)These are cross-sectoral, cross-agency partnerships, which bring together,at a local level, different parts of the public sector with private business,and the community and voluntary sectors, so that different initiatives andservices support each other and work together. They aim to ensure thatservices and decisions reflect the aspirations of and meet the needs oflocal communities and neighbourhoods. Their core tasks are to:•improve the delivery of services to local people, especially those livingin the most deprived neighbourhoods•prepare and implement a community strategy
The London PlanMayor of London A41•develop and deliver neighbourhood renewal strategies•work with local authorities developing Public Service preparing of the community strategies, the LSPs in London shouldensure that community strategies refer to the strategic direction of theLondon Access Forum (existing)RADAR (the Royal Association for Disability and Rehabilitation), GLADand representatives from Local Access Groups sit on the forum, whichaims to promote and secure inclusive and accessible environments Biodiversity Partnership (existing)Involving the GLA, statutory and voluntary organisations, boroughs,academics and business partners, this partnership is to prepare andimplement London’s Biodiversity Action Climate Change Partnership (existing)The GLA is leading the London Climate Change Partnership, whichcomprises many interested public, private and voluntary sectororganisations. The partnership looks at various scenarios of climatechange and the adaptations that would be Health Commission (existing)The London Health Commission (LHC) has approximately 40 members,drawn from across the health sector in London. The LHC informs andsupports efforts to improve health and reduce inequalities across is responsible for overseeing the development and implementation ofthe London Health Strategy and ensuring that health considerations areintegrated into all key Londonwide Regional Technical Advisory Body on Waste (existing)This body includes representatives from the Environment Agency, theGLA, the ALG, the waste industry, environment groups and neighbouringRegional Technical Advisory Bodies. It exists to fulfil the purposes of PPG10 in relation to information requirements and as a forum for discussionof waste Retail Fora (proposed)These groups would provide fora for communities, boroughs, local tradersand landlords to work in partnership to:•audit the current local retail provision, identify local assets, includinglong-term vacant properties, overlaps and gaps
A42Mayor of LondonThe London Plan•assess demand and develop and agree a local strategy for improvingaccess to shops and services, in the context of district and regionalplans•work together to implement, monitor and review the developed by local retail fora could help to encourage theretention and enhancement of local retail facilities. Other complementarymeasures could be Housing Board (existing)The London Housing Board was established in 2003. It is chaired by theRegional Director, GOL and comprises representatives of GOL, theHousing Corporation, GLA, ALG, LDA and English Partnerships. The Boardis responsible for preparing the London Housing Strategy and advisingministers on the allocation of funding from the single regional pot forhousing Housing Forum (existing)This forum includes representatives from the GLA, GOL, the HousingCorporation, the LDA, sub-regional partnerships, boroughs, developersand landowners. Its purpose is to bring forward housing provision, byidentifying and quantifying capacity, securing necessary resources andprioritising sites for assistance with funding and land Parks and Green Spaces Forum (existing)The boroughs, the GLA, and other key stakeholders meet in this primary role of the forum is to develop a network for the exchange ofexpertise, experience, information and best practice in the planning,design, and management of London's open spaces. It is envisaged thatthe forum will undertake work complementary to the London Plan andadvise GLA policy research and Sustainable Distribution Partnership (existing)This partnership brings together TfL with those involved in thedistribution business to assist in the development and implementation ofproposals for effective distribution of goods in London. London Thames Gateway Partnership Board (existing)The London Thames Gateway Partnership was established in 2003 and ischaired jointly by the Mayor and the Minister for London. It exists tooptimise the delivery of sustainable communities in the London part ofthe Thames Gateway region.
The London PlanMayor of London A43London Views Framework Focus Group (existing)This group includes representatives of the GLA, the boroughs, EnglishHeritage, the Royal Parks and other organisations represented at theExamination in Public, and will advise on the production ofSupplementary Planning Guidance on the London Views Walking Forum (existing)Through this forum, the GLA, TfL, the Countryside Agency, the Lee ValleyPark Authority, Greenwich Council and other boroughs aim to establish sixstrategic walking routes in Waste Action (existing)This cross-sector, delivery agency for waste brings together London First,waste industry representatives, the ALG, Waste Watch, the EnvironmentAgency and the GLA. Small area-based partnerships (existing)There are many small area-based partnerships which will have a role incontributing to planning at the neighbourhood level, including Sure Start,Health Action Zones, Employment Zones, Education Action Zones, SingleRegeneration Budget partnerships, New Deal partnerships and otherinformal neighbourhood-based networks and forums. They may have arole in identifying neighbourhood needs that could then be addressedthrough development and planning obligations or other -regional partnerships (existing)These are partnerships that promote development opportunities withinthe sub-regions. They encourage linkages between the variousregeneration initiatives, and seek to maximise benefits associated withregeneration for local communities. The sub-regional partnerships willassist with the delivery of the London Plan objectives to accommodategrowth and will help develop Sub-regional Planning design and construction advisory group (existing)This GLA-led group exists to advise on development of information aboutsustainable design and Access Project (existing)The GLA is working with Thames21 and the London Rivers Association toprotect and improve access to the Thames foreshore in this project.
A44Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThames Gateway Strategic Partnership (existing)This is a government body that aims to co-ordinate development inThames Gateway across three regions and act to identify resources andmechanisms needed to deliver Policy Area strategy partnerships (existing and proposed)These are public, private and community sector partnerships to prepareand implement policies and actions for the Thames Policy centre partnerships (existing)These partnerships bring together the public, private and voluntarysectors to enhance and sustain the vitality and viability of town areas of activity for town centre partnerships include:•development: creating a positive environment that enhances the town centre and secures investment to ensure the town centres' long term future•management: ensuring the maintenance functions operate effectivelyand efficiently, and a safe and clean environment is available for alltown centre users•promotion: promoting and publicise the town actions vary between individual town partnershipsOther partnerships will be developed to take the work of the plan forwardas appropriate. The Mayor is committed to the concept of partnershipworking and welcomes proposals which will facilitate his vision for Londonset out in the plan.
The London PlanMayor of London A45annex 9implementation toolsThis annex contains a list of some of the tools that can be used to deliver the London Plan, including some that already exist and some that are Public Spaces in London (existing)This programme is identifying projects to improve and create new openspaces in London. It is led by the Mayor's Architecture and UrbanismUnit, working with Transport for London and the London DevelopmentAgency. Ten pilot projects were launched July 2002. Access adaptation programmes (existing)These are to improve access for disabled people to public buildings and streets in their areas. Some boroughs fund charitable and voluntaryorganisations to undertake access improvements. Access Statements (existing)These are statements to accompany planning applications which provideevidence that development proposals have been designed to meet thehighest standards of accessibility and Action Plans (proposed – Planning Green Paper)The government’s proposals for Area Action Plans are contained in draft trusts, such as Bridge House Estates Trust, the AdaptTrust (existing)Charitable trusts working in London, such as the Bridge House EstatesTrust, can make a contribution to the accessibility of existing buildings in London by incorporating the principles of inclusive design into theirfunding Improvement Districts (BIDS) (existing) Legislation was passed in 2003 to create a model for BIDs to be fundedby an agreed additional levy on rates paid by local businesses, where theyhave voted in favour of the scheme. The starting point of a scheme is theidentification of a source of concern for local businesses which could beaddressed by revenue raised by a BID. Businesses located within towncentres, for example, may wish to fund crime prevention measures,remedial measures such as street wardens, or invest in the town centre’svisual appearance. Importantly, BIDs are a partnership between the public and private sector,designed to supplement, not substitute, services provided by the publicsector. Five BIDs under the Circle Initiative are being implemented,
A46Mayor of LondonThe London Plansupported by £ million SRB funds. BID type partnerships between TFL,the MPA, the LDA, boroughs and businesses could be used for areas witha vibrant evening and night-time economy. Business ImprovementDistricts should promote an inclusive and accessible clubs (existing)Car clubs provide access to private car usage, without the drawbacks of car ownership. People sign up to a club, receive an electronic key foband can book up a car within 15 minutes of needing it. Cars are usuallywithin a short walk. It has been estimated that a car in a car club replacessix private cars. Car clubs are particularly useful to help implement theSustainable Residential Quality approach to housing density and more accessible locations, particularly town centres and publictransport interchanges, car parking can be reduced, in some areas to nilparking. Car clubs ensure that low car parking provision can be made,without denying people access to the benefits of a private car. Thisincludes city car clubs and car pools, which facilitate vehicle sharing. They assist the provision of housing development with low car parking development trusts (existing)Development trusts are a particular type of partnership organisation – one that offers benefits to the local community and has advantages formany public bodies, non-profit agencies and funders. There is no singlemodel for development trusts, but they do have common characteristicsof being concerned with the regeneration of an area, not for private gain,aiming for long-term sustainability, and community-based andaccountable. Many develop a land or property base, which can earn them income. All aim to provide local solutions to local need. The PaddingtonDevelopment Trust, for example, is one of the largest trusts in Empowerment Fund (existing)The fund is available to support voluntary and community sector groups,and the wider community, to participate in Local Strategic Partnerships(LSPs), so that all community interests are able to engage on an equalbasis with other sectors in the local neighbourhood renewal and LSPprocess. Over £8 million is available for London for the period 2001-04. The Community Fund (existing)The Community Fund (formally the National Lotteries Charities Board)awards grants to groups that help meet the needs of those at greatestdisadvantage in society. There are a number of national priorities, and also specific priorities for London, which currently include projectsfocusing on older people, refugees and asylum seekers, capacity building
The London PlanMayor of London A47for small groups and infrastructure development within the black andminority ethnic sector. Community Strategies (existing) These are plans for promoting and improving economic, social andenvironmental well being, that co-ordinate the actions of public, private,voluntary and community organisations operating locally. In London, thecommunity strategy provides the overarching strategy for each borough,providing the context from which all other major strategies should are prepared by boroughs or Local Strategic Partnerships andinvolve a wide range of quarters (proposed)Cultural quarters are designed to encourage cultural activities in definedgeographical areas and they are supported through partnership specific funds are available, unless partnerships have Action Zones (existing) Areas in which schools, local authorities, businesses, parents and communitiesare brought together to try and find innovative solutions to raise educationalattainment and standards. There are several Education Action Zones inLondon, each of which could receive up to £1 million per property strategies (existing) These are borough strategies for reducing the number of emptyproperties and bringing them into residential Action Areas (proposed)An Energy Action Area is a defined geographical area that acts as ashowcase low-carbon community, successfully demonstrating a range of sustainable energy technologies and techniques across a number of applications throughout the Grants (existing) Launched by the Department of Trade and Industry on 1 January 2000,the scheme provides a direct discretionary grant aimed at high growthsmall and medium sized businesses in 24 of the London boroughs. TheEnterprise Grant may enable investment within London’s town centres ifapplications are made by small firms either already located, or proposingtolocate, within town Impact Assessment (EIA)EIA refers to the whole process by which environmental effects of a project are collected, assessed, publicised and taken into account
A48Mayor of LondonThe London Planin reaching a decision on whether the project should go ahead or not. EIA is a means of drawing together, in a systematic way, an assesment ofa project’s likely significant environmental effects. This helps to ensurethat the importance of the predicted effects, and the scope for reducingthem, are properly understood by the public and the relevant competentauthority before it makes its Structural Funds Objective 2 (existing) Objective 2 of the European Structural Fund aims to support theregeneration of areas affected by industrial decline and urban EU fund prioritises community economic development, businessdevelopment and competitiveness, infrastructure, premises, theenvironment and technical assistance. There are four partnerships inLondon: Outer Thames Gateway, West London, Upper Lea Valley andInner East London. Further bidding rounds in 2002 and 2003 are Facilities Grant (existing)The Freight Facilities Grant (FFG) is a capital grant scheme to helpcompanies offset the costs of providing new rail or water freight facilities, improve existing facilities or re-open dormant facilities. It isdesigned to encourage a shift of freight currently travelling by road towater or rail and also to ensure that freight currently using these modesdoes not transfer to road. The grant is administered by the Department of resource on historic assets (proposed)Touse existing Geographical Information Systems and information toincrease information available to boroughs, developers etc showingcross boundary Action Zones (existing) Health Action Zones are established in areas of deprivation and poorhealth to tackle health inequalities and modernise services through localinnovation. They aim to achieve measurable improvement in public healthand health outcomes. There are four of them in London. There are noexisting proposals for any additional Improvement and Modernisation Programmes (HIMPs) (existing) HIMPs are a partnership approach between the NHS and boroughs,private business, voluntary organisations, patients and the public, tohelp plan for the modernisation of services to tackle ill health, as well as the root causes of ill health.
The London PlanMayor of London A49Healthy Walking Programme (existing) A joint initiative of the Countryside Agency and the British HeartFoundation providing support for a programme of ‘led walks’, of twomiles or less. This scheme assists in providing health benefits andencouraging more people to walk. Heritage funding (existing) Improvements to strategic cultural areas and their settings are funded byEnglish Heritage. Funds for regeneration, renewal and repair work areavailable through Heritage Economic Regeneration Schemes and otherHeritage Lottery Funds. English Heritage also distributes the HeritageLottery Fund to museums and galleries. Environmental improvements mayneed to be met from other Lottery Fund (existing) This is National Lottery funding, available for a number of purposes. HLFgrants are designed to open up the nation's heritage for everyone toenjoy, covering everything from museums and historic buildings to localparks and beauty spots, or recording and celebrating traditions, customsand Zones (existing) Home Zones are a government initiative to strike a balance betweenvehicular traffic and everyone else who uses the street: the pedestrians,cyclists, business people and residents. In areas identified as Home Zones,drivers have to give way to pedestrians and cyclists, and are responsiblefor any injuries they cause to them. Very low speed limits are imposed(top speeds of 10 mph or less). The emphasis is on the change in statusof areas, through signing, traffic calming, seating and other streetfurniture and plants. In some streets, parking is re-arranged to makebetter use of space, including the provision of small pocket parks andother opportunities for children’s play. Two of the nine pilots are inLondon. The 10-year Transport Plan has identified funding for HomeZones in residential areas. Seven new London schemes received fundingin January Impact Assessments (proposed) An assessment of the social, economic, transport and/or environmentalimpact of a proposal on the local Implementation Plans (existing)These are statutory transport plans, produced by London boroughs, toimplement the Mayor’s Transport Strategy at a local level.
A50Mayor of LondonThe London PlanLocation/residential density/car parking matrix (existing)This is a GLA tool for controlling density and estimating residentialcapacity on development London Recycling Fund (existing)The London Recycling Fund is a partnership between the Mayor, theAssociation of London Government and London Waste Action and ismanaged by London Waste Action. It received £ million in 2003/04and DEFRA has announced a further £ million for 2005/06. It isdesigned to significantly boost recycling of household waste acrossLondon and to do this through encouraging partnerships and privatesector investment in the new systems needed if high levels of recyclingare to be achieved by 2005 and Remade (existing) London Remade is a strategic partnership between the business sector,London boroughs and regional government, waste managementcompanies and the not-for-profit sector. Its principal objective is todevelop and promote new markets and secondary industries based on the reprocessing and reuse of London's recycled London Thames Gateway Partnership Board (existing)This is a non-executive working group, jointly chaired by the Mayor ofLondon and the Minister for London. Its role is to oversee and co-ordinatethe manning and accelerated delivery of regeneration projects andprogrammes, including the sustainable communities programme, in theLondon Thames Gateway plans (existing)Master plans are an approach to planning the co-ordinatedredevelopment of an area or major site. The approach sets out the visiontobe achieved together with strategy and detailed mechanisms toimplement it. Master plans are normally initiated by local authorities andrelated landowners, and involve local communities in their clarity of expression as to what an area will look like and how it will work, the extent of public support and subsequent investment by thepublic and private sectors are key aspects for the success of master plans. Minerals levy (existing) This is a new environmental tax on aggregate (usually sand, gravel or rock) extraction. The money raised will go towards promotingenvironmentally beneficial practices that have the potential to increasesecondary recycling.
The London PlanMayor of London A51Neighbourhood Management Pathfinder Programmes (existing)These programmes work with Local Strategic Partnerships to join uppolicy at the local level. They aim to improve quality of life through betterco-ordination and use of resources. They are aimed at areas of about2,000–5,000 households, large enough to co-ordinate service delivery and small enough to respond to the needs and priorities of thecommunity. There are two Round I Neighbourhood ManagementPathfinders in London – Gospel Oak in Camden and Woolwich Common inGreenwich and three Round II – South Bermondsey in Southwark, Leytonin Waltham Forest and Church Street in Westminster. Neighbourhood Renewal Community Chests (existing)Neighbourhood Renewal Community Chest funds are available in the 20most-deprived boroughs, as a way to encourage local community activitieswhich contribute to the regeneration of an area and tackle issues of socialexclusion. They are distributed as small grants of £50 to £5,000. There is atotal of £50 million for the UK in the period 2001- Renewal Fund (existing) Targeted at 20 boroughs which have two or more wards in the 10 per centmost deprived across the country, the Neighbourhood Renewal Fund(NRF) provides additional funding to these areas to help narrow the gapbetween the most deprived areas and the rest of the country. LocalStrategic Partnerships, with boroughs, are responsible for disbursing NRFand it can be spent in any way that will tackle deprivation. This includesimproving the delivery of mainstream public sector services to deprivedareas and improving performance against the government’s floor targetsin health, housing, education, crime and Deal for Communities (existing) This is a Government Programme to set up partnerships in deprived areas,working at a small area level to improve educational attainment andtackle local environmental issues, while reducing crime, the fear of crime,health inequalities and worklessness. Programmes are delivered throughpartnerships of local people, local authorities, other public agencies andthe voluntary and community sector. There are ten New Deal forCommunities areas in London, each of which is funded for ten Opportunities Fund (existing) The fund is a distributor of National Lottery funds, created to awardgrants to health, education and environmental projects. Many of theprogrammes focus on those in disadvantaged areas. Lottery funding isavailable for green space improvements and creation, through the GreenSpaces and Sustainable Communities Fund, under various award partners.
A52Mayor of LondonThe London PlanOpen space strategies (existing)These are borough strategies to protect, create and enhance open space,including approaches for positive management, identification of prioritiesfor investment and an action plan for (existing)Placecheck is a method of assessing the qualities of a place, developed by the Urban Design Alliance, which aims to help understand, evaluateand describe local character in a way that can guide regeneration andimprovement plans. It is based on all aspects of local character, not justbuilt character, and it links into community strategies. It complementsLondon Plan policy and is a tool for areas with scope for major change,although it is applicable to all agreements or Section 106 (existing) Planning agreements or planning obligations as authorised by Section 106of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 are contractual agreementsbetween local planning authorities and applicants for planning are negotiated as part of the process of considering and approvingplanning applications. They have to relate to the proposed developmentand to take account of the commercial viability of each scheme and strikea balance between obtaining a reasonable level of community benefit andnot undermining the commercial rationale for the frameworks (existing) These frameworks provide a sustainable development programme forOpportunity Areas, in line with Policy . The frameworks may beprepared by the GLA Group, boroughs, developers or partners whileplanning frameworks will have a non-statutory status, it will be up toboroughs to decide how to reflect the proposals in planning frameworkswithin their development plans. Public Service Agreements (existing)These are agreements between local authorities and the government,building on the Best Value programme for ensuring public authoritiescontinuously work to achieve the best possible value in their Public Service Agreements provide local authorities with theopportunity to sign up to targets that deliver key national and localpriorities in return for operational flexibility and incentives. Financialrewards will be available for those that achieve the targets. Regional Arts Lottery Programme/Grants for the Arts (existing)The Regional Arts Lottery Programme is one of a number of lotteryfunding schemes for the arts. It makes awards from £2,000 to £100,000
The London PlanMayor of London A53toprojects that improve access to the arts, among other criteria, andprojects can include refurbishing arts buildings, public art and buyingproperty and leases. It is being superseded by a new funding programme,Grants for the Arts, established in April 2003. Register of accessible housing (proposed) A register of accessible housing would provide information on accessiblehousing in London. This would assist disabled people in finding accessibleaccommodation. Research is currently underway to assess the feasibility of a Londonwide register by the valuation model (existing) The GLA and the Housing Corporation have developed a residualvaluation model to assist themselves and the boroughs in assessing the economic viability of affordable housing provision. Site assembly (existing) By amalgamating sites which are under a variety of different ownerships,viable development sites can be obtained. This could be throughCompulsory Purchase Order powers, but other partnership arrangementscould be introduced to facilitate site Action Zones (SAZs) (existing)Funded by the Sport England Lottery Fund, SAZs are an initiative toincrease participation in areas of recreational deprivation. For each SAZ, a recreational needs assessment is produced and an action plan developedfrom it. The latter forms the basis for bids to Sport England for initiative is primarily about people not buildings but investment infacilities can occur where it can be demonstrated that such funding isessential to provide sporting opportunities. SAZs currently exist inSouthwark and England Lottery Fund (existing) Sport England’s lottery funding is divided into community projects and a World Class Fund. The community projects fund includes capital awardsfor increasing participation in sport. Priority is given to areas ofrecreational deprivation through the Priority Areas and Sport ActionZones. The World Class Fund includes assisting the UK Sports Institute(UKSI) and English Institute of Sport and providing capital support forspecialist national facilities other than on UKSI sites.
A54Mayor of LondonThe London PlanStrategic Cultural AreasThese are areas with internationally important cultural institutions, whichare also major tourist attractions, and include Greenwich Riverside,Wembley, the South Kensington museum complex, the Barbican, theSouth Bank and West End/Soho/Covent Rail Authority (existing)The Strategic Rail Authority (SRA) has a duty to promote and secure thedevelopment of an integrated rail network. In January 2003, the SRApublished ‘The Strategic Plan’. The government identified £33 billion ofpublic funding support over the 10-year plan period from 2001, in its 10-year plan for transport. This is to be completed by private for People (existing)A Transport for London initiative, in which TfL works with boroughs toimprove liveability of local areas through better designed streets. It isincluded in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy under Policy . Thisinitiative is being taken forward through TfL’s Borough Spending Plan for funding local borough Communities Fund (existing)The government has allocated additional funding for the Thames Gatewayand other growth areas to assist their sustainable development throughthe Sustainable Communities Fund. Most of this funding was allocated bythe end of February 2003 to cover a three-year suburbs toolkit (proposed)This toolkit of policies aims to promote the social, economic andenvironmental sustainability of suburban areas. It will cover measures toimprove the suburban centres, to promote intensification, to improvethe public realm and to upgrade public transport for different types ofsuburbs. It will also include improvement strategies for different housingtypologies and cover improved energy efficiency for the housing relief measures in the Urban White Paper (proposed)An initiative is proposed in the Urban White Paper whereby a propertyowner can claim tax relief on the cost of converting redundant space overshops and other commercial premises into flats for letting. It would bepart of a range of measures for improving the vitality of town Policy Area appraisals (existing)Detailed appraisals of the Thames Policy Area are required by RPG3b and they are continued in the London Plan (see Chapter 4C: The BlueRibbon Network). Some are already in place, while other areas, especially
The London PlanMayor of London A55East Thames, are not yet funded. The Mayor and others will considermechanisms needed to take the recommendations Action Zones (proposed)The aim of this programme is to manage the impact of tourism throughthe identification of Tourism Action Zones, where there would be a co-ordination of visitor management plans, initiatives and funding to managethe impact of tourism on popular locations. They would be proposed byGLA Group in partnership with boroughs. No specific fund is centre health checks (existing)Town centre health checks are a means of monitoring the health of towncentres where local authorities collect information on key indicators suchas diversity of uses, accessibility and capacity to accommodate newdevelopment. They are a useful tool for assessing the vitality and viabilityof town centres, particularly where threats to town centre vitality emanatefrom out-of-centre centre management (existing) Town Centre Management schemes are a means to ensure the propercoordination and development of services to a town centre. They aredelivered through a partnership of key stakeholders, sharing expertise and resources and aim to:•improve management of the public realm•help centres to develop competitive edge•create a shared vision of purpose for a centre•develop projects that focus on for eg environmental improvement,access, car parking, marketing, inward investment•create a business plan and a programme of achievable actions•promote improved access for disabled people including the provision of Shop Mobility schemes.
A56Mayor of LondonThe London PlanTransport Assessments (existing)Transport Assessments (TAs) replace Traffic Impact Assessments. They willbe submitted alongside a planning application, where a development hassignificant transport implications. The TA should reflect the scale of thedevelopment. For major proposals, the TA should illustrate accessibility byall modes and likely modal split of journeys to and from the site. It shouldalso give details of proposed measures to improve access by publictransport, walking and cycling, reducing the need for associated development area (existing)These define areas which involve an integrated land use/transportplanning approach around public transport interchanges in which a morespecific relationship between development density and public transportservice levels is Plans (existing) These plans present a comprehensive and integrated package of measuresdesigned to reduce journeys by car, especially single occupancy, andencourage greater use of alternatives to a specific site. Travel Plans aredeveloped either on a voluntary basis by employers and otherorganisations or they form an integral part of Transport Assessments withnew Design Statements (existing)These statements, drawn up by developers, are to provide evidence that development proposals have taken account of all relevant designconsiderations. Urban Development Corporation in east London (proposed)The government has announced its intention to establish an UrbanDevelopment Corporation in east London to assist the delivery of itsSustainable Communities action plan in the Thames Gateway area. It is currently considering the boundaries and remit of this body. Urban Regeneration Companies (existing) Urban Regeneration Companies (URC) are a mechanism by which thepublic and private sector are brought together to tackle the regenerationof a defined area of urban decline. Pilot URCs have been operating inlocations across the country, and have included local authorities, RegionalDevelopment Associations, English Partnerships, private sectorrepresentatives and in some cases, community groups. They operatewithin a limited-company structure that enables partners to act at ‘armslength’ to co-ordinate the channelling of resources for the delivery ofarea-based regeneration. The government has indicated that there should
The London PlanMayor of London A57be no more than two URCs in each region, yet there is no constraint on more being strategy (proposed) The Mayor will work the Environment Agency and others to establish a restoration strategy for the Blue Ribbon Network. This will aim toidentify options for re-instating natural features of the network and how these could be achieved. It will also look for opportunities fordevelopments that could complement the policies in this plan and it could include identifying opportunities to re-establish parts of the Blue Ribbon Network.
A58Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A59glossaryAccessThis term refers to the methods by which people with a range ofneeds (such as disabled people, people with children, people whose firstlanguage is not English) find out about and use services and disabled people, access in London means the freedom to participatein the economy, in how London is planned, in the social and cultural lifeof the StatementA statement which accompanies a planningapplication, which demonstrates how the principles of inclusive design,including the specific needs of disabled people, have been integrated into the proposed development and how inclusion will be maintained and term is used in two distinct ways, its definitiondepending on the accompanying text (see Accessibility of London andAccessibility of the Transport System below).Accessibility of LondonThis refers to the extent to which employment,goods and services are made available to people, either through closeproximity, or through providing the required physical links to enablepeople to be transported to locations where they are of the Transport SystemThis refers to the extent ofbarriers to movement for users who may experience problems gettingfrom one place to another, including disabled housingThis is defined in Chapter 3, Part A. AggregatesThis is granular material used in construction. Aggregatesmay be natural, artificial or recycled. Air Quality Management Area (AQMA) An area which a localauthority had designated for action, based upon a prediction that AirQuality Objectives will be noiseThis is ongoing sound in the environment such as fromtransport and industry, as distinct from individual events, such as a noisyall-night party. Unless stated otherwise, noise includes vibration. AmenityAn amenity is an element of a location or neighbourhood thathelps to make it attractive or enjoyable for residents and visitors.
A60Mayor of LondonThe London PlanArea for Intensification Areas that have significant potential forincreases in residential, employment and other uses through developmentof sites at higher densities with more mixed and intensive for RegenerationThese areas are the wards in greatest socio-economic need, defined on the basis of the 20 per cent most deprivedwards in the London AreasThe DTI designates Assisted Areas, on the basis ofunemployment and other economic criteria, for regional aid to Practicable Environmental Option (BPEO) The BPEO procedureestablishes, for a given set of objectives, the option that provides themost benefits or the least damage to the environment as a whole, atacceptable cost, in the long term as well as in the short designThese designs aim to create buildings that takeaccount of local climatic conditions to ensure minimum reliance on non-renewable energy refers to the variety of plants and animals and otherliving things in a particular area or region. It encompasses habitatdiversity, species diversity and genetic diversity. Biodiversity has value in its own right and has social and economic value for human is the total dry organic matter or stored energy of plantmatter. As a fuel it includes energy crops and sewage as well as forestryand agricultural Ribbon NetworkA spatial policy covering London's waterways and water spaces and land alongside them. Detailed strategic policies are contained within Chapter 4, Part land Both land and premises are included in this term, whichrefers to a site that has previously been used or developed and is notcurrently fully in use, although it may be partially occupied or utilised. It may also be vacant, derelict or contaminated. This excludes open spacesand land where the remains of previous use have blended into thelandscape, or have been overtaken by nature conservation value oramenity use and cannot be regarded as requiring development.
The London PlanMayor of London A61Business Improvement Districts (BIDs) This concept was originallydeveloped in the USA for increasing investment within defined areas of acity such as town centres. This is achieved through changes to localtaxation, based on a supplementary rate levied on businesses within thatdefined area. Carbon dioxide (CO)Carbon dioxide is a naturally occurring gas2comprising per cent of the atmosphere. The burning of fossil fuels releases carbon dioxide fixed by plants many millions of years ago,and this has increased its concentration in the atmosphere by some 12 per cent over the past century. It contributes about 60 per cent of the potential global warming effect of man-made emissions ofgreenhouse clubThese are schemes such as city car clubs and car pools, whichfacilitate vehicle Activities Zone (CAZ)The Central Activities Zone is the area incentral and east London where planning policy promotes finance,specialist retail, tourist and cultural uses and activities. Central London PartnershipThis partnership brings together some of the key private and public sector organisations operating in, orresponsible for, central London. Members include local authorities andpublic sector service providers with a range of responsibilities. It workstogether to identify common priorities and resolve them through of ACE ExcellenceThese are concentrations of arts, culture andentertainment (ACE) activities of national or international importance, tobe maintained and enhanced by integrating planning -housingThese are resident-developed projects where mixed tenure homes are clustered around a common space, with a range of shared Heat and PowerThe combined production of electricity andusable heat is known as Combined Heat and Power (CHP). Steam or hotwater, which would otherwise be rejected when electricity alone isproduced, is used for space or process heating.
A62Mayor of LondonThe London PlanCommercial wasteWaste arising from premises which are used wholly ormainly for trade, business, sport, recreation or entertainment as defined inSchedule 4 of the Controlled Waste Regulations 1992, is defined ascommercial heating Community heating is the distribution of steam orhot water through a network of pipes to heat a large area of commercial,industrial or domestic buildings or for industrial processes. The steam orhot water is supplied from a central source such as a heat-only boiler or acombined heat and power StrategiesThese are practical tools for promoting orimproving the economic, social and environmental wellbeing of the areaof jurisdiction of a local authority. Such strategies are to be preparedallowing for local communities (based upon geography and/or interest) toarticulate their aspirations, needs and cityThis concept uses a model for city development akin totraditional high-density European cities such as Paris and Barcelona. Itoffers a sustainable form of development, enabling reduced traveldemand through high density mixed-used development, creating vibrantculturally rich places. Congestion chargingThis refers to applying charges to reduce thenumber of vehicles and level of congestion in congested areas. The Mayorhas introduced a scheme to charge vehicles within a defined area ofcentral and demolition wasteThis is waste arising from theconstruction, repair, maintenance and demolition of buildings andstructures, including roads. It consists mostly of brick, concrete, hardcore,subsoil and topsoil, but it can contain quantities of timber, metal, plasticsand occasionally special (hazardous) waste business parkThis style of business park is generallylarge, car-based and located beyond the urban 1The first line in the Crossrail project, Crossrail 1 is aneast–west, cross-central London rail link between Paddington andWhitechapel serving Heathrow Airport, Canary Wharf and Stratford. It willserve major development and regeneration corridors, and improve accesstolarge areas of central and suburban London.
The London PlanMayor of London A63Crossrail 2 (formerly known as the Hackney–Southwest Line) This line istolink Hackney and south-west London. The precise route, the characterand the role of the link have not yet been QuartersAreas where a critical mass of cultural activities andrelated uses are emerging, usually in historic or interesting environments,are to be designated as Cultural Quarters. They can contribute to brief This brief sets out the vision for a development. It isgrounded firmly in the economic, social, environmental and planningcontext. Apart from its aspirational qualities, the brief must include siteconstraints and opportunities, infrastructure and transport access andplanning policies. It should also set out the proposed uses, densities andother design peopleA disabled person is someone who has an impairment,experiences externally imposed barriers and self-identifies as a CentresThese are defined in Annex differences in the values, attitudes, cultural perspective, beliefs,ethnic background, sexuality, skills, knowledge and life experiences ofeach individual in any group of people constitute the diversity of thatgroup. This term refers to differences between people and is used tohighlight individual footprintThe ecological footprint of a city is an area,scattered throughout the world (and usually vastly greater than thephysical boundary of the city itself) on which a city depends, in terms of its resource demands and disposal of waste and -economy/e-commerceA sector of business which comprisescompanies deriving at least some portion of their revenues from Internet-related products and of England Development AgencyEERAEast of England Regional Assembly Eastern RegionThe Eastern Region covers Bedfordshire, Cambridgeshire,Essex, Hertfordshire, Norfolk and Suffolk.
A64Mayor of LondonThe London PlanEducation Action ZonesIn these zones, schools, local authorities,businesses, parents and community groups are brought together to tryand find innovative solutions to raise educational attainment ZonesIn these areas, local partnerships work withinexisting frameworks of benefits and other funding to develop flexibleways to support individuals aged 25 and over who have been out of workfor one year or efficiency This is about making the best or most efficient use of energy in order to achieve a given output of goods or services, and ofcomfort and convenience. This does not necessitate the use of less energy,in which respect it differs from the concept of energy recoveryTorecover energy is to gain useful energy, in the form of heat and/or electric power, from waste. It can includes combinedheat and power, combustion of landfill gas and gas produced duringanaerobic Management ZonesThese zones are being establishedas geographically defined areas where a forum of agencies works togethertotackle issues associated with the evening and night-time economy. AnEMZ can be designated in areas where there is a concentration ofentertainment activities or in locations where growth of entertainmentuses is Impact AssessmentIn these assessments, informationabout the environmental effects of a project is collected, assessed andtaken into account in reaching a decision on whether the project shouldgo ahead or not (DETR Nov 2000). See also Environmental StatementThis statement will set out a developer’sassessment of a project’s likely environmental effects, submitted with theapplication for consent for the purposes of the Town and CountryPlanning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (England and Wales)Regulations is the vision or aim of creating a society free fromdiscrimination where equality of opportunity is available to individuals and groups, enabling them to live their lives free from discrimination and oppression.
The London PlanMayor of London A65Equal opportunitiesThe development of practices that promote thepossibility of fair and equal chances for all to develop their full potentialin all aspects of life and the removal of barriers of discrimination andoppression experienced by certain Spatial Development PerspectiveA non-statutorydocument produced by the Informal Council of Ministers setting outprinciples for the future spatial development of the EU. Facilities Planning Model (FPM)A Sport England tool to assist inmaking decisions on the need for community sports facilities. The modelrelates supply to demand, uses research-based catchment areas andapplies to a wide range of facilities. It can be used to help determine themost appropriate location for a new sports facility or to estimate howchanges in population structure and distribution will impact on thedemand for sports TargetsSee Neighbourhood Renewal TargetsFuel cellA cell that acts like a constantly recharging battery,electrochemically combining hydrogen and oxygen to generate power. Forhydrogen fuel cells, water and heat are the only by-products and there isno direct air pollution or noise emissions. They are suitable for a range ofapplications, including vehicles and Belt Green Belts are a national policy designation that helps tocontain development, protect the countryside and promote brownfielddevelopment, and assists in the urban renaissance. There is a generalpresumption against inappropriate development in the Green chainsThese are areas of linked but separate open spaces and thefootpaths between them. They are accessible to the public and provideway-marked paths and other pedestrian and cycle corridorsThis refers to relatively continuous areas of open spaceleading through the built environment, which may be linked and may notbe publicly accessible. They may allow animals and plants to be foundfurther into the built-up area than would otherwise be the case andprovide an extension to the habitats of the sites they industriesThe business sector that produces goods or services,which compared to other, generally more commonly used goods andservices, are less harmful to the environment.
A66Mayor of LondonThe London PlanGreeningThe improvement of the appearance, function and wildlifevalue of the urban environment through soft ZonesResidential streets designed and managed to allow peopletoshare former carriageways and pavements. Vehicles should only be abletotravel a little faster than walking pace (less than 10 mph). This meansthat the street can be modified to include children’s play areas, largergardens or planting such as street trees, cycle parking and facilities suchas seats at which residents can meet. Home Zones should therefore makeresidential areas safer for pedestrians and cyclists, and improve the qualityof the street wasteAll waste collected by Waste Collection Authoritiesunder Section 45(1) of the Environmental Protection Act 1990, plus allwaste arising from Civic Amenity sites and waste collected by third partiesfor which collection or disposal credits are paid under Section 52 of theEnvironmental Protection Act 1990. Household waste includes waste fromcollection rounds of domestic properties (including separate rounds forthe collection of recyclables), street cleansing and litter collection, beachcleansing, bulky household waste collections, hazardous household wastecollections, household clinical waste collections, garden waste collections,Civic Amenity wastes, drop-off and bring systems, clearance of fly-tippedwastes, weekend skip services and any other household waste collectedby the waste authorities. Household waste accounts for approximatelyfour-fifths of London’s municipal CorporationA statutory public body, which reports to theOffice of the Deputy Prime Minister, and whose role is to fund andregulate Registered Social Landlords in in multiple occupationHousing occupied by members ofmore than one household, such as student accommodation or Strategy and Investment StatementAn annual statement of a local authority’s housing objectives and financial bid to burning of waste at high temperatures in the presenceof sufficient air to achieve complete combustion, either to reduce itsvolume (in the case of municipal solid waste) or its toxicity (such as fororganic solvents and polychlorinated biphenyls). Municipal solid wasteincinerators recover power and/or heat. The main emissions are carbondioxide (CO), water and ash
The London PlanMayor of London A67Inclusive designInclusive design creates an environment whereeveryone can access and benefit from the full range of opportunitiesavailable to members of society. It aims to remove barriers that createundue effort, separation or special treatment, and enables everyone toparticipate equally in mainstream activities independently, with choice Business Park (IBP)Strategic employment location designedtoaccommodate general industrial, light industrial and research anddevelopment uses that require a higher quality environment and lessheavy goods access than a PIL. They can be accommodated next toenvironmentally sensitive uses. Industrial waste Waste from any factory and any premises occupied byindustry (excluding mines and quarries) as defined in Schedule 3 of theControlled Waste Regulations initiative funded through the European RegionalDevelopment Fund to support transnational co-operation on spatialplanning Valley CorridorEmbraces the strategically important developmentopportunities and existing industry either side of the River Lea, in parts ofEnfield, Hackney, Haringey, Newham, Tower Hamlets and Waltham HomesOrdinary homes designed to provide accessible andconvenient homes for a large segment of the population from youngchildren to frail older people and those with temporary or permanentphysical or sensory impairments. Lifetime Homes have 16 design featuresthat ensure that the home will be flexible enough to meet the existingand changing needs of most households, as set out in the JosephRowntree Foundation report ‘Meeting Part M and Designing LifetimeHomes’.Live–work spaceThe flexible use of buildings and spaces to allow bothfunctions within them. Local CentresThese are defined in Annex 1Local Development FrameworksA government proposal to replaceUDPs, these frameworks will comprise a portfolio of developmentdocuments including a core strategy, proposals and a series of actionplans.
A68Mayor of LondonThe London PlanLocal Implementation Plans (LIPs)Statutory transport plans producedby London boroughs bringing together transport proposals to implementthe Mayor’s Transport Strategy at the local Strategic Partnerships (LSPs)Cross-sectoral, cross-agencyumbrella partnerships, which are focused and committed to improving thequality of life and governance in a particular locality. They seek to enableservices to be aligned in a way that effectively meets the needs andaspirations of those who use Bus Initiative (LBI)A package of measures to improve busservices, including bus priority and service improvements, which seeks toimprove total journey quality, and is delivered by a partnership Bus Priority Network (LBPN)An 860km bus network coveringthe main bus routes, in which bus priority and other traffic managementmeasures are introduced to improve reliability and reduce overall Cycle Network (LCN)An initiative aimed at improving cycleaccess to key destinations and increasing cycle safety, including a networkof designated cycle routes (currently 2,900 km in length).London Development Agency (LDA)One of the GLA grouporganisations, acting on behalf of the Mayor, whose aim is to further theeconomic development and regeneration of Development DatabaseSee London Development MonitoringSystem. London Development Monitoring System (LDMS)This providescurrent and historic information about development progress across allLondon boroughs. It is operated by the GLA. This system will besuperseded by the London Development Hydrogen Partnership A consortium of public, private andvoluntary organisations working to establish the widespread use ofhydrogen as a clean fuel for buildings, transport and other IndexThis is the GLA’s index of deprivation.
The London PlanMayor of London A69London MetroA proposal to develop National Rail services in London toprovide an all-round standard of service more akin to, and betterintegrated with, London Underground services. The Mayor’s TransportStrategy puts forward specific criteria, notably ‘turn up and go’frequencies, that should be met by London Metro. London PanoramasThese are defined in Chapter 4, Part -Stansted-Cambridge CorridorA development corridor to theeast and west of the Lee Valley through north London and Harlow andnorth to Stansted and cost market housingHousing provided by the private sector,without public subsidy or the involvement of a housing association, thatis sold or let at a price less than the average for the housing type on theopen market. Low Emission ZonesA low emission zone (LEZ) is a defined area fromwhich polluting vehicles that do not comply with set emissions standardsare barred from Spatial development All development that is referable to the Mayor(under the Town and Country Planning [Mayor of London] Order 2000, or any development which the local planning authority deems to besignificant due to its scale, location, impact or divergence from existingland use town centresThese are defined in Annex Open LandStrategic open land within the urban area thatcontributes to the structure of London. Metropolitan town centresThese are defined in Annex -use developmentDevelopment for a variety of activities onsingle sites or across wider areas such as town solid waste (MSW)This includes all waste under the controlof local authorities or agents acting on their behalf. It includes allhousehold waste, street litter, waste delivered to council recycling points,municipal parks and gardens wastes, council office waste, Civic Amenitywaste, and some commercial waste from shops and smaller trading estates
A70Mayor of LondonThe London Planwhere local authorities have waste collection agreements in place. It canalso include industrial waste collected by a waste collection authority withauthorisation of the waste disposal Strategy for Neighbourhood RenewalAn action plan settingout a range of governmental initiatives aiming to narrow the gap betweendeprived areas and the rest of the conservationProtection, management and promotion for thebenefit of wild species and habitats, as well as the human communitiesthat use and enjoy them. This also covers the creation and re-creation ofwildlife habitats and the techniques that protect genetic diversity and canbe used to include geological Centres These are defined in Annex Renewal Targets (Floor Targets) The governmenthas set its Departments minimum targets to meet, which means they will be judged on the areas where they are doing worst, and not just onaverages. Floor targets will ensure that a certain standard of servicedelivery is available to all and so no longer will the poorest areas andgroups go unnoticed. Targets have been set for health, private and socialhousing, education, employment, crime, enterprise, transport and theenvironment. These floor targets are listed at Deal for CommunitiesAn initiative that supports the intensiveregeneration schemes that deal with problems such as poor educationalattainment and poor job prospects in a small number of deprived and emerging technologiesTechnologies that are either still at a developmental stage or have only recently started operating at acommercial scale. They may be new applications of existing relation to waste, they include such technologies as anaerobicdigestion, Mechanical Biological Treatment (BMT), pyrolysis is the Office of the Deputy Prime Minister, the governmentdepartment responsible for planning, local government, housing andregional development.
The London PlanMayor of London A71Open spaceAll land in London that is predominantly undeveloped otherthan by buildings or structures that are ancillary to the open space definition covers a the broad range of types of open space withinLondon, whether in public or private ownership and whether public accessis unrestricted, limited or AreasLondon’s few opportunities for accommodating largescale development to provide substantial numbers of new employmentand housing, each typically more than 5,000 jobs and/or 2,500 homes,with a mixed and intensive use of land and assisted by good publictransport Proposedorbital rail services, being developed in conjunctionwith the Strategic Rail Authority, building on the existing core innerLondon orbital links and including more frequent services, improvedstations and interchanges and greater integration with other means oftravel. These services will be developed to meet London Metro standards. People-orientated servicesThese are service-based jobs, particularlythose in leisure, hospitality, retail and catering. They have grown rapidly inLondon in line with rapid population direct conversion of solar radiation into electricity bythe interaction of light with electrons in a semiconductor device or frameworksThese frameworks provide a sustainabledevelopment programme for Opportunity Areas, in line with Policy frameworks may be prepared by the GLA Group, boroughs,developers or partners while planning frameworks will have a non-statutory status, it will be up to boroughs to decide how to reflect theproposals oin planning frameworks witin their development plans. Seealso Policicy Biphenyl (PCB)A derivative of biphenyl that is highlypoisonous and carcinogenic. It can accumulate in the food Principle This principle states that where there arethreats of serious or irreversible damage, lack of full scientific certaintyshall not be used as a reason for postponing cost-effective measures toprevent environmental degradation. Preferred Industrial Location (PIL)Strategic employment site normallysuitable for general industrial, light industrial and warehousing uses.
A72Mayor of LondonThe London PlanProximity PrincipleThis advises dealing with waste as near aspracticable to its place of realmThis is the space between and within buildings that arepublicly accessible, including streets, squares, forecourts, parks and open Transport Accessibility (PTAL)The extent and ease of accessby public transport, or, where it can reasonably be used as a proxy, as thedegree of access to the public transport involves the reprocessing of waste, either into thesame product or a different one. Many non-hazardous wastes such aspaper, glass, cardboard, plastics and metals can be recycled. Hazardouswastes such as solvents can also be recycled by specialist companies, orby in-house energyEnergy derived from a source that is continuallyreplenished, such as wind, wave, solar, hydroelectric and energy fromplant material, but not fossil fuels or nuclear energy. Although not strictlyrenewable, geothermal energy is generally prospectsThese are defined in Chapter 4, Part hierarchyA categorisation of the road network into differentcategories determined by the functions they pricingSee Congestion wharvesThese are sites that have been safeguarded forcargo handling uses such as intraport or transhipment movements andfreight-related purposes. A list of those sites that are currently protectedand those proposed for protection is available in ‘Safeguarded Wharves onthe River Thames’, GLA, parksThis refers to primarily office-based developments,strongly branded and managed in association with academic and researchinstitutions, ranging from incubator units with well-developed collectiveservices, usually in highly urban locations and good public transportaccess, to more extensive developments, possibly in parkland settingscapable of improved public transport access, of a quality comparable andcompetitive with those beyond London.
The London PlanMayor of London A73Section 106 AgreementsThese agreements confer planning obligationson persons with an interest in land in order to achieve the implementationof relevant planning policies as authorised by Section 106 of the Townand Country Planning Act East England Development AgencySEERASouth East England Regional AssemblySelf-sufficiencyIn relation to waste, this means dealing with wasteswithin the administrative region where they are approachThe sequential approach applies to all towncentre-related activities and it states that, if possible, facilities should beaccommodated in the centre, failing that on the edge of the centre and,only in exceptional specified circumstances, out of the centre. Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI)A classification notifiedunder the Wildlife and Countryside Act (1981 as amended). All theLondon sites of biodiversity interest are included within sites ofMetropolitan Importance for Nature exclusionA term for what can happen when people or areassuffer from a combination of linked problems, such as unemployment,poor skills, low incomes, poor housing, high crime environments, badhealth and family inclusionThe position from where someone can access andbenefit from the full range of opportunities available to members ofsociety. It aims to remove barriers for people or for areas that experience acombination of linked problems such as unemployment, poor skills, lowincomes, poor housing, high crime environments, bad health and East Region The South East Region runs in an arc around Londonfrom Kent at the south-east extremity along the coast to Hampshire,Southampton and Portsmouth in the south-west, and then to MiltonKeynes and Buckinghamshire in the North. In total, it encompasses 19counties and unitary authorities, and 55 district Development StrategyThis strategy is prepared by the Mayor,replacing the strategic planning guidance for London (RPG3). The Mayorhas chosen to call the Spatial Development Strategy the London Plan.
A74Mayor of LondonThe London PlanSpatial MasterplanThis plan establishes a three-dimensional frameworkof buildings and public spaces. It is a visual ‘model’ which can show thefollowing: the relationship between buildings and spaces; the connectionsbetween streets, squares and open spaces; the movement patterns; theheight, massing and bulk of buildings; the distribution of uses; thelocation of street furniture and landscaping; and how well the new urbanneighbourhood is integrated with the surrounding urban Vision for North West EuropeA non-statutory documentprepared by a group of research institutions under the INTERREG IICprogramme, which, building on the principles of the ESDP, provides amulti-sectoral vision for the future spatial development for North Cultural Areas These are areas with internationally importantcultural institutions, which are also major tourist attractions, and includeGreenwich Riverside, Wembly, the South Kensington museum complex,the Barbican, the South Bank and the West End/Soho/Covent Employment Locations (SELs)These comprise PreferredIndustrial Locations, Industrial Business Parks and Science Parks and existtoensure that London provides sufficient quality sites, in appropriatelocations, to meet the needs of the general business, industrial andwarehousing Rail Authority (SRA)The key role of the SRA is to promoteand secure the development of an integrated rail network. Itsresponsibilities include providing overall strategic direction for Britain‘srailways, ensuring the expansion and development of rail capacity,administering passenger rail franchising and monitoring the performanceof the franchisees, and awarding grants for freight and passenger Road NetworkSee Transport for London Road Views These are defined in Chapter 4, Part for People This refers to areas where a comprehensive packageof measures are aimed at improving the street environment to enhancethe sense of community, increase priority for public transport, walking andcycling, and improve social inclusion and safety.
The London PlanMayor of London A75Sub-RegionsSub-regions are the primary geographical features forimplementing strategic policy at the sub-regional level. The sub-regions are composed of:Central– Camden, Islington, Kensington & Chelsea, Lambeth, Southwark,Wandsworth, – Barking & Dagenham, Bexley, City, Greenwich, Hackney, Havering,Lewisham, Newham, Redbridge, Tower Hamlets. South– Bromley, Croydon, Kingston, Merton, Richmond, – Brent, Ealing, Hammersmith & Fulham, Hillingdon, Harrow,– Barnet, Enfield, Haringey, Waltham -Regional Development FrameworksPolicy directions and focusfor implementation for each of the five identified sub-regions, to beproduced by the Mayor in partnership with boroughs and otherstakeholders. The frameworks will provide guidance on Opportunity,Intensification and Regeneration Areas, town centres, suburbs andStrategic Employment Locations. The frameworks will be consistent with,and provide further guidance on, the policies in this plan. SRDFs will benon-statutory Planning Guidance (SPG)An SPG does not form apart of the statutory plan. It can take the form of design guides or areadevelopment briefs, or supplement other specific policies in the it must be consistent with national and regional planningguidance, as well as the policies set out in the adopted plan. It should beclearly cross-referenced to the relevant plan policy or proposal that itsupplements. Public consultation should be undertaken and SPGs shouldbe regularly reviewed. While only the policies in the London Plan can havethe status that the GLA Act 1999 provides in considering planningapplications, SPGs may be taken into account as a further materialconsideration. Supported housing This is housing specially designed, managed oradapted to meet the needs of people for whom standard housing isunsuitable or developmentThis covers development that meets theneeds of the present without compromising the ability of futuregenerations to meet their own Residential QualityThe design-led approach and urbandesign principles by which dwellings can be built at higher density, whilemaintaining urban quality and fostering sustainable development.
A76Mayor of LondonThe London PlanThames GatewayThis area comprises a corridor of land on either side ofthe Thames extending from east London through to north Kent and southEssex. The London part of the area extends eastwards from DeptfordCreek and the Royal Docks and includes parts of the lower end of the LeeValley around Stratford. It includes parts of the boroughs of Barking and Dagenham, Bexley, Greenwich, Havering, Lewisham, Newham and TowerHamlets as well as limited parts of Hackney and Waltham Policy Area Aspecial policy area to be defined by boroughs inwhich detailed appraisals of the riverside will be required. Policies inChapter 4, Part C cover this policy 2000A new National Rail cross-London link building on theexisting Farringdon–Blackfriars CentresThese are defined in Annex Views These are defined in Chapter 4, Part calmingThese are self-enforcing measures that are designed toencourage drivers to make their speeds appropriate to local calming schemes can improve the environment and restraintThe discouragement of traffic, especially the car, bytraffic management, fiscal measures and the co-ordinated application oftransport and planning AssessmentThis is prepared and submitted alongsideplanning applications for developments likely to have significant transportimplications. For major proposals, assessments should illustrate thefollowing: accessibility to the site by all modes; the likely modal split ofjourneys to and from the site; and proposed measures to improve accessby public transport, walking and Development Areas (TDA)These are well-designed, higherdensity, mixed-use areas, situated around good public transport accesspoints, in urban areas. Within a TDA, boroughs grant permission forhigher density development, compared with existing development for London (TfL)One of the GLA group organisations,accountable to the Mayor, with responsibility for delivering an integratedand sustainable transport strategy for London.
The London PlanMayor of London A77Transport for London Road Network (TLRN)This is described in theGreater London Authority Act 1999 as the Greater London Authority RoadNetwork. The Mayor has decided to call this the Transport for LondonRoad Network. It comprises 550km of London’s red routes and otherimportant ’ sitesThese are sites either for settled occupation, temporarystopping places, or transit sites for people of nomadic habit of life, suchas travellers and Development Plans (UDPs) Statutory plans produced by eachborough which integrate strategic and local planning responsibilitiesthrough policies and proposals for the development and use of land intheir area. Urban renaissanceUrban renaissance is the rediscovery of theopportunities offered by cities to accommodate a changing population,work and leisure patterns, through the creation of practical, attractive,safe and efficient urban areas which offer a vibrant and desirable qualityof Assessment AreasThese are defined in Chapter 4, Part B. Virgin aggregatesThese are granular material used in aggregates are natural and have not previously been used. Wandle ValleyWandle Valley is a development corridor aligning theWandle Valley from Wandsworth to Croydon. Waste Transfer Station This is a site to which waste is delivered forseparation or bulking up before being removed for recycling, treatment WedgeThe Western Wedge is the area of West Londonbetween Paddington and the Thames Valley. Wheelchair accessible housingThis refers to homes built to meet thestandards set out in the National Wheelchair Housing Group reportWheelchair Housing Design Guide sites These are sites that come forward for development thatcouldn’t be identified previously as they were then in active use.
A78Mayor of LondonThe London PlanWorld City A globally successful business location paralleled only by twoof the world’s other great cities, New York and Tokyo, measured on a widerange of indicators such as financial services, government, business,higher education, culture and tourism.
The London PlanMayor of London A79index of policiesPolicy The Mayor’s objectives6Policy Sustainability criteria38Policy Opportunity Areas39Policy Areas for Intensification41Policy Areas for Regeneration42Policy Town centres44Policy Spatial strategy for suburbs45Policy Strategic Employment Locations47Policy Increasing London’s supply of housing54Policy Borough housing targets55Policy Efficient use of stock58Policy Housing choice58Policy Large residential developments59Policy Definition of affordable housing60Policy Affordable housing targets64Policy Negotiating affordable housing in individual private residential and mixed-use schemes65Policy Partnership approach and sub-regional development frameworks66Policy Special needs and specialist housing67Policy London's travellers and gypsies68Policy Loss of housing and affordable housing68Policy Loss of hostels, staff accommodation and shared accommodation68Policy Addressing the needs of London’s diverse population69Policy Protection and enhancement of social infrastructure and community facilities75Policy The voluntary and community sector75Policy Health objectives75Policy Locations for health care76Policy Medical excellence77Policy Health impacts77Policy Education facilities78Policy Higher and further education79Policy Community strategies80Policy Meeting floor targets81Policy Social and economic impact assessments81Policy Supporting neighbourhood plans84Policy Developing London’s economy87Policy Office demand and supply90Policy Office provision90
A80Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Mixed use development90Policy Strategic Employment Locations92Policy Supporting innovation93Policy Improving London’s ICT infrastructure94Policy Promotion of e-London95Policy Creative industries96Policy Tourism industry97Policy Environmental industries98Policy Improving the skills and employment opportunities for Londoners99Policy Integrating transport and development103Policy Matching development to transport capacity104Policy Sustainable transport in London104Policy Land for transport functions105Policy London’s international, national and regional transport links109Policy Airport development110Policy Heliport development111Policy Improving strategic rail services112Policy Increasing the capacity, quality and integration of publictransport to meet London’s needs112Policy Phasing of transport infrastructure112Policy New cross-London links within an enhanced LondonNational Rail network115Policy Improved Underground and DLR services116Policy Enhanced bus priority, tram and bus transit schemes117Policy New Thames river crossings118Policy Road scheme proposals120Policy Tackling congestion and reducing traffic120Policy Allocation of street space121Policy Local area transport treatments121Policy Improving conditions for buses122Policy Improving conditions for walking123Policy Improving conditions for cycling124Policy Parking strategy125Policy Parking in town centres125Policy Freight strategy127Policy Strategic Rail Intermodal Freight Facilities128Policy Supporting town centres132Policy Town centre development134Policy Maintaining and improving retail facilities136Policy Development and promotion of arts and culture136
The London PlanMayor of London A81Policy Sports facilities138Policy Visitors accommodation and facilities139Policy Realising the value of open space142Policy Green Belt144Policy Metropolitan Open Land144Policy Open space provision in UDPs145Policy Open space strategies147Policy Biodiversity and nature conservation148Policy London’s countryside and the urban fringe151Policy Agriculture in London152Policy Burial space152Policy Waste strategic policy and targets156Policy Spatial policies for waste management157Policy Criteria for the selection of sites for waste management and disposal158Policy Better use of aggregates160Policy Spatial policies to support the better use of aggregates161Policy Improving air quality162Policy Energy efficiency and renewable energy164Policy Energy assessment165Policy Providing for renewable energy165Policy Supporting the provision of renewable energy166Policy Water supplies166Policy Water quality168Policy Water and sewerage infrastructure168Policy Reducing noise169Policy Climate change170Policy Bringing contaminated land into beneficial use171Policy Dealing with hazardous substances171Policy Design principles for a compact city173Policy Promoting world-class architecture and design174Policy Maximising the potential of sites176Policy Enhancing the quality of the public realm178Policy Creating an inclusive environment178Policy Sustainable design and construction179Policy Respect local context and communities180Policy Tall buildings – location181Policy Large-scale buildings – design and impact182Policy London’s built heritage183Policy Heritage conservation183Policy Historic conservation-led regeneration183Policy World Heritage Sites184
A82Mayor of LondonThe London PlanPolicy Archaeology184Policy London View Protection Framework185Policy View management plans187Policy Assessing development impact on designated views188Policy The strategic importance of the Blue Ribbon Network195Policy Context for sustainable growth197Policy The natural value of the Blue Ribbon Network197Policy Natural landscape198Policy Impounding of rivers198Policy Flood plains199Policy Flood defences199Policy Sustainable drainage200Policy Rising groundwater201Policy Historic environment201Policy Conservation areas202Policy Sustainable growth priorities for the Blue Ribbon Network202Policy Passenger and tourism uses on the Blue Ribbon Network204Policy Freight uses on the Blue Ribbon Network204Policy Safeguarded wharves on the Blue Ribbon Network205Policy Increasing sport and leisure use on the Blue Ribbon Network206Policy Increasing access alongside and to the Blue Ribbon Network207Policy Support facilities and activities in the Blue Ribbon Network208Policy Moorings facilities on the Blue Ribbon Network208Policy Design – starting from the water209Policy Design statements210Policy Structures over and into the Blue Ribbon Network211Policy Safety on and near to the Blue Ribbon Network212Policy Importance of the Thames212Policy Thames Policy Area213Policy Appraisals of the Thames Policy Area213Policy Green industries along the Thames214Policy Development adjacent to canals215Policy Open water space215Policy New canals and canal restoration216Policy Rivers, brooks and streams216Policy Docks216Policy Royal Docks217Policy Links outside London218
The London PlanMayor of London A83Policy Sub-Regional Development Frameworks222Policy The strategic priorities for Central London227Policy Development in the Central Activities Zone231Policy Special policy areas231Policy Opportunity Areas in Central London233Policy Areas for Intensification in Central London236Policy The strategic priorities for East London241Policy Opportunity Areas in East London246Policy Areas for Intensification in East London252Policy The strategic priorities for West London257Policy Opportunity Areas in West London260Policy Areas for Intensification in West London262Policy The strategic priorities for North London265Policy Opportunity Areas in North London268Policy Areas for Intensification in North London269Policy The strategic priorities for South London273Policy Opportunity Area in South London276Policy Areas for Intensification in South London277Policy The Mayor’s own powers and resources284Policy Working in partnership284Policy Promoting development285Policy Priorities in planning obligations286Policy Planning obligations287Policy Generation and use of resources288Policy Increasing the capacity of London288Policy Phasing of development and transport provision290Policy Working with stakeholders296Policy Complementary strategies301Policy Monitoring and review307Policy Measuring progress307
A84Mayor of LondonThe London Plan
The London PlanMayor of London A85contributor’s creditsSDS teamGLATfLAdam LeibowitzAlan FreemanBarry BroeAnna HamilosAlex BaxChris HydeChris PoultonAlpa KapasiJanette BowesDavid DashAndrew Barry-PursellRichard CarrDebbie McMullenAudrey YoungRichard HopkinsDuncan BowieBridget RosewellRichard MeadsEsther KurlandCatherine JonesSam RichardsGerard BurgessClare Clark Simon BuxtonGreg Lomax Daniel AlfordSimon Cooper(until July 2003)Dave DawsonJane CarlsenDavid GoodeLDAJoanne Prentice David HutchinsonAnne Crane(until August 2003)David MorrisBarney StringerJohn BurgesDeclan GaffneyGary CoxJohn LettFran EvansLesley HardingJohn O’NeilGiles DolphinLucy DowsettJonathan BrookerHarry BarlowLuke TroyJulie Fleck Helen BeaumontPanikos Christodoulou(on secondment Helen JohnstoneVincent Bartlettfrom the Corporation Helen Scaddingof London)Henry AbrahamKevin ReidJoanna DawesLyndon FothergillJohn HollisMeredith SedgwickJohn RossMike NewittKatherine HigginsPaul BowdageLucy SadlerSarah StylesMark BrearleyMax DixonLondon PlanNeale ColemanProgramme GroupPeteDawDebbie McMullenRichard BrownDrew StevensonRobin BarerEleanor Young Rosy GreenleesGarry LuttmanSarah DysonJeff JacobsSarah ElliottNicky Gavron Stewart MurrayRobin ThompsonTanya BirchTony CumberbirchWayne Hubbard
A86Mayor of LondonThe London Planphotography creditsAdam HintonJulie Fleck, Corporation of LondonARUPKay Buxton, Paddington WatersideBAA PlcPartnershipBallymoreKevin Reid, GLABarnaby Collins, Montague EvansKingston ShopmobilityBedzedKohn Pedersen Fox AssociatesBerkeley HomesInternationalBritish WaterwaysLiane HarrisBritish Wind Energy AssociationLondon Development AgencyCamden Shop MobilityLondon RemadeCanary Wharf Group plcLondon Tourist BoardChimes Housing DevelopmentLondon’s Waterways PartnershipClare Hennessey, GLAMartin Green, GLADavid Barbour, Dixon Jones BDPMeredith Sedgwick, GLADavid Hutchinson, GLAMichael Murray, Derek LovejoyDawson StrangePartnershipDepartment of Transport and IndustryMiller HareDerek Lovejoy Partnership Nicky Aguirre, London Borough of Sutton(Michael Murray)Norman & Dawbarn Architects Dixon Jones BDP (David Barber)Norman Foster PartnershipEaling Community TransportPAPhotosEmily Evans, GLAPaddington Churches Housing AssociationEnvironment AgencyPaddington Regeneration PartnershipErnst and YoungPeabody TrustEsther Kurland, GLAPortof London AuthorityFolio PhotographyRachel Fisher, Free Form Arts TrustFrancis Baskerville, Terry Farrell Railtrackand PartnersRobin MayesFran Evans, GLARoss Moffatt, GLAGeorge Wright, Stockwell PartnershipSarah Styles, GLAGreater London AuthoritySian Astrop, London Borough of KingstonGreen Corridors PartnershipSimon Marsh, A Rocha UKGrosvenor EstateSouthwark CouncilHabinteg Housing AssociationSustainable Energy Action LtdHammersmith and Fulham Primary CareThames 21Trust (John Goodman)Thames Chase Community ForestHealey and BakerThe GEOinformation GroupHenry Jacobs, GLATishman SpeyerHugh Bullock, Gerald EveTransport for LondonIan Yarham, GLATrish SweeneyJarvis plcUrban Initiatives
Other formats and languagesFor a large print, Braille, disc, sign language video or audio-tapeversion of this document or its summary, please contact us at theaddress below:Public Liaison UnitGreater London AuthorityTelephone 020 7983 4100City Hall Queen’s WalkLondon SE1 2AAYou will need to supply your name, your postal address and state theThe London Planformat and title of the publication you Development Strategy for Greater LondonIf you would like a copy of the summary of this document in your language, please phone the number or contact us at the address 2004City Queen’s Walk Enquiries020 7983 4100MoL/Feb 04/CJ D&P/MT/448ALondon SE1 2AAMinicom 020 7983 4458The London Plan Spatial Development Strategy for Greater London
